2021 Kicks

2021 KICKS
OWNER’S MANUAL
and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

OWNER’S MANUAL SUPPLEMENT
The information contained within this supplement revises or adds to the “LATCH (Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren)” section of the “Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint
system” section of the 2021 NISSAN Kicks Owner’s manual.
Read carefully and keep in the vehicle.
Printing: November 2020

Publication No. SU21EA 0P15U0
install the child restraint. Be sure to follow – Inspect the lower anchors by insert-
the child restraint manufacturer's instruc- ing your fingers into the lower an-
tions for installation. chor area. Feel to make sure there
The LATCH anchor points can be used to are no obstructions over the an-
install child restraints in either of the rear chors such as seat belt webbing or
outboard seating positions or in the center seat cushion material. The child re-
rear seating position. Please refer to the straint will not be secured properly if
following section of this Owner’s Manual for the lower anchors are obstructed.
specific information about installing a child Child restraint anchorages are de-
restraint in the center rear seating position signed to withstand only those loads
using LATCH anchors. imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are
LATCH lower anchor they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
LRS3073 WARNING the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
LATCH system lower anchor locations child restraint anchorages. The child
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Failure to follow the warnings and in- restraint will not be properly installed
structions for proper use and installa-
Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM tion of child restraints could result in
using the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
Your vehicle is equipped with special an- serious injury or death of a child or in a collision.
chor points that are used with LATCH sys- other passengers in a sudden stop or
tem compatible child restraints. This sys- collision:
tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX – Only attach LATCH system compat-
or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys- ible child restraints to the Lower An-
tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat chors shown in the illustration. For
belt to secure the child restraint unless the additional information, refer to the
combined weight of the child and child re- following sections of this Owner’s
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- Manual for installation guidance.
bined weight of the child and child restraint
is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the ve-
hicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to
(These are sometimes referred to as
“shared anchors” or “borrowed anchors.”)
CRS with rigid lower attachments cannot
be installed in the center seat. This type of
CRS should only be installed in the out-
board seating positions.
WARNING
Never attach two CRS attachments to
the same LATCH anchor. This may over-
load the anchor in a collision, which
could increase the risk of the occu-
pant’s serious injury or death.
LRS3036 LRS3318 When installing the CRS in the center
LATCH lower anchor location LATCH in the center rear seating rear seating position with the inboard
position LATCH anchors, be careful to ensure any
The LATCH lower anchors are located as
occupant or CRS in the outboard seat-
shown. A label is attached to the seatback There are no LATCH anchors dedicated to ing positions is properly restrained us-
to help you locate the LATCH lower the center rear seating position. However, ing the vehicle seat belt and there is no
anchors. the inboard LATCH anchors belonging to interference with the center CRS instal-
the two outboard seating positions (indi- lation. If the outboard occupants can-
cated by the arrows) can be used together not be properly restrained, consider us-
to secure a CRS in the center rear seating ing the vehicle seat belt to restrain the
position. These anchors are separated by a CRS in the center seating position, or
distance O A of 13 in (335 mm). Before at-
moving the CRS to another position in-
tempting to secure a CRS in this seating stead.
position, ensure that the CRS manufactur-
er’s instructions permit the use of LATCH
anchors with the spacing indicated above.
Top tether anchor
WARNING
• Do not allow cargo to contact the top
tether strap when it is attached to
the top tether anchor. Properly se-
cure the cargo so it does not contact
the top tether strap. Cargo that is not
properly secured or cargo that con-
tacts the top tether strap may dam-
age it during a collision. Your child
could be seriously injured or killed in
a collision if the top tether strap is
damaged.
LRS0661 LRS0662 • The child restraint top tether strap
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment LATCH rigid-mounted attachment may be damaged by contact with the
Installing child restraint LATCH When installing a child restraint, carefully tonneau cover or items in the cargo
lower anchor attachments read and follow the instructions in this area. Remove the tonneau cover (if so
manual and those supplied with the child equipped) from the vehicle or secure
LATCH compatible child restraints include restraint. it in the cargo area. Also secure any
two rigid or webbing-mounted attach- items in the cargo area. Your child
ments that can be connected to two an- could be seriously injured or killed in
chors located at certain seating positions a collision if the top tether strap is
in your vehicle. With this system, you do not damaged.
have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the
child restraint. Check your child restraint for
a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the
instructions provided by the child restraint
manufacturer.
• Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts,
harnesses or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
Doing so could damage the child re-
straint anchorages. The child re-
straint will not be properly installed
child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision.
LRS3329
Top tether anchor point locations
Anchor points are located on the back of
the rear seats.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
WARNING
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger
vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to
chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
This manual was prepared to help you un- cerning proper use of such accessories Before driving your vehicle, please read this
derstand the operation and maintenance prior to operating the vehicle and/or ac- Owner's Manual carefully. This will ensure
of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many cessory. It is recommended that you visit a familiarity with controls and maintenance
miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. NISSAN dealer for details concerning the requirements assisting you in the safe op-
Please read through this manual before particular accessories with which your ve- eration of your vehicle.
operating your vehicle. hicle is equipped.
A separate Warranty Information Book- A NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle WARNING
let explains details about the warranties best. When you require any service or have IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance any questions, they will be glad to assist REMINDERS!
and schedules” section of this manual you with the extensive resources available
explains details about maintaining and to them. Follow these important driving rules to
servicing your vehicle. You will also re- help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
ceive a separate Customer Care/Lemon for you and your passengers!
Law Booklet (U.S. only) that will explain • NEVER drive under the influence of
how to resolve any concerns you may alcohol or drugs.
have with your vehicle, and clarify your • ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
rights under your state's lemon law. Ad- and never drive too fast for conditions.
ditionally, you may receive a separate • ALWAYS give your full attention to
NissanConnect ® Owner’s Manual that driving and avoid using vehicle fea-
will explain the various features and tures or taking other actions that
functions your system may have. could distract you.
In addition to factory-installed options, • ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap-
your vehicle may also be equipped with propriate child restraint systems.
additional accessories installed prior to de- Preteen children should be seated in
livery. It is recommended that you visit a the rear seat.
NISSAN dealer for details concerning the • ALWAYS provide information about
particular accessories with which your ve- the proper use of vehicle safety fea-
hicle is equipped. It is important that you tures to all occupants of the vehicle.
familiarize yourself with all disclosures,
• ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
warnings, cautions and instructions con-
for important safety information.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This manual includes information for all fer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PRO-
features and equipment available on this GRAM page in this Owner’s Manual.
This vehicle should not be modified. model. Features and equipment in your ve-
Modification could affect its perfor- hicle may vary depending on model, trim IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
mance, safety, emissions or durability level, options selected, order, date of pro- THIS MANUAL
and may even violate governmental duction, region or availability. Therefore, You will see various symbols in this manual.
regulations. In addition, damage or per- you may find information about features or They are used in the following ways:
formance problems resulting from equipment that are not included or in-
modifications may not be covered un- stalled on your vehicle. WARNING
der NISSAN warranties. All information, specifications and illustra-
tions in this manual are those in effect at This is used to indicate the presence of
WARNING the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the a hazard that could cause death or se-
right to change specifications, perfor- rious personal injury. To avoid or re-
Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di- mance, design or component suppliers duce the risk, the procedures must be
agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses without notice and without obligation. followed precisely.
the port during normal driving, for ex- From time to time, NISSAN may update or
ample remote insurance company revise this manual to provide Owners with
CAUTION
monitoring, remote vehicle diagnos- the most accurate information currently
tics, telematics or engine reprogram- available. Please carefully read and retain This is used to indicate the presence of
ming, may cause interference or dam- with this manual all revision updates sent a hazard that could cause minor or
age to vehicle systems. We do not to you by NISSAN to ensure you have ac- moderate personal injury or damage to
recommend or endorse the use of any cess to accurate and up-to-date informa- your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,
aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, un- tion regarding your vehicle. Current ver- the procedures must be followed
less specifically approved by NISSAN. sions of vehicle Owner's Manuals and any carefully.
The vehicle warranty may not cover updates can also be found in the Owner
damage caused by any aftermarket section of the NISSAN website at https://
plug-in device. owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/
navigation/manualsGuide. If you have
questions concerning any information in
your Owner's Manual, contact NISSAN Con-
sumer Affairs. For contact information, re-
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-
teries, may contain perchlorate material.
The following advisory is provided: “Per-
chlorate Material – special handling may
apply. For additional information, refer
to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate/”.
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and
APD1005 licensed to
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do Panasonic.
this” or “Do not let this happen.”
If you see a symbol similar to these in an

illustration, it means the arrow points to the
front of the vehicle.
© Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to All rights reserved. No part of this Owner's
these indicate movement or action. Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form, or by any means, electronic, me-
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to chanical, photocopying, recording or oth-
these call attention to an item in the erwise, without the prior written permis-
illustration. sion of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your
NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service
needs.
However, if there is something that your The Consumer Affairs Department will ask You can write to NISSAN with the informa-
NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or for the following information: tion at:
you would like to provide NISSAN directly – Your name, address, and telephone For U.S. customers
with comments or questions, please con- number Nissan North America, Inc.
tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart- – Vehicle identification number (attached Consumer Affairs Department
ment using our toll-free number: to the top of the instrument panel on the P.O. Box 685003
For U.S. customers driver's side) Franklin, TN 37068-5003
1-800-NISSAN-1 – Date of purchase or via e-mail at:
(1-800-647-7261) – Current odometer reading nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com
For Canadian customers – Your NISSAN dealer's name For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122 – Your comments or questions Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
OR Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
information.centre@nissancanada.com
If you prefer, visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)
or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
Table of Illustrated table of contents 0
contents Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1
Instruments and controls 2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4
Starting and driving 5
In case of emergency 6
Appearance and care 7
Do-it-yourself 8
Maintenance and schedules 9
Technical and consumer information 10
Index 11
0 Illustrated table of contents
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-42)
6. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s) and
shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-10, 1-42)
7. Rear outboard seat mounted side-
impact supplemental air bag (P. 1-42)
8. Top tether anchor (located on seat-
back) (P. 1-21)
9. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) (P. 1-21)
10. Rear seats (P. 1-4)
11. Front seat side-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bags (P. 1-42)
12. Front seats (P. 1-3)
13. Driver supplemental knee air bag
(P. 1-42)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LII2660
1. Front passenger supplemental knee air 3. Occupant classification sensor (weight
bag (P. 1-42) sensor) (P. 1-42)
2. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-42) 4. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-5)
0-2 Illustrated table of contents

EXTERIOR FRONT
6. Front view camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-16)
7. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-43)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-24)
8. Fog light switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-43)
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system
(if so equipped) (P. 2-43)
9. Tire pressure (P. 8-27)
Flat tire (P. 6-3)
Tire chains (P. 8-34)
10. Mirrors (P. 3-28)
Side camera (if so equipped) (P. 4-16)
LII2673
1. Door locks (P. 3-4) 3. Windshield (P. 8-16)
NISSAN Intelligent Key® system (P. 3-7) 4. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-40)
Keys (P. 3-2) 5. Engine hood (P. 3-21)
2. Power windows (P. 2-70)
Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR REAR
7. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-24)

8. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-25)
Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-25)
Fuel recommendation (P. 10-4)
9. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-6)
LII2672
1. Antenna (P. 4-63) 5. Liftgate release (P. 3-22)
2. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-42) Rearview camera (P. 4-8, 4-16)
3. High mount stop light (P. 8-24) 6. Parking sensor(s) (if so equipped)
4. Rear wiper and washer switch (P. 2-41) (P. 5-140)

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

LII2455
1. Glove box (P. 2-60) 5. Luggage hooks (P. 2-60)
2. Rearview mirror (P. 3-28) 6. Center console storage (P. 2-60)
3. Map lights (P. 2-74)
4. Sun visors (P. 3-27)

INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)

Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-10)
Trip computer (if so equipped) (P. 2-9)
Vehicle information display (if so
equipped) (P. 2-23)
5. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-40)
6. Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-42)
7. Center display controls (if so equipped)
(P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-43)
Audio controls (P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-43)
8. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)
9. Center display (P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-43)
10. Passenger's supplemental air bag
(P. 1-42)
11. Glove box (P. 2-60)
12. Front passenger supplemental knee air
bag (P. 1-42)
13. Climate controls (P. 4-32, 4-40)
Heated seat switches (if so equipped)
(P. 2-51)
14. Shift lever (P. 5-17)
15. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-11)
16. Electronic parking brake (if so
equipped) (P. 5-23)
Automatic brake hold switch (if so
LII2662 equipped) (P. 5-25)
1. Vents (P. 4-31) 3. Driver's supplemental air bag (P. 1-42) 17. Power outlet (P. 2-58)
2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/ Horn (P. 2-50) USB connection port (P. 4-2, 4-43)
turn signal switch (P. 2-43) AUX jack (if so equipped) (P. 4-2, 4-43)

18. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System Refer to the page number indicated in
(P. 4-2, 4-67) parentheses for operating details.
Cruise control switches (P. 5-56)
(P. 1-42)
20. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel lock
lever (P. 3-26)
21. Hood release (P. 3-21)
Fuel-filler door release (P. 3-25)
22. Steering wheel switches for audio
control (P. 4-2, 2-23)
Control panel and vehicle information
display switches (if so equipped) (P. 4-2)
23. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) switch
Drive Systems OFF switch (if so
equipped) (P. 2-53)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch
Rear Sonar System (RSS) OFF switch
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-55)
Instrument panel pocket (if so
equipped) (P. 2-60)
Enter/select switch for trip computer
* Refer to the separate NissanConnect®
Owner's Manual (if so equipped).

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
5. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-9)

6. Fuse box (P. 8-18)
7. Battery (P. 8-11)
8. Fuse box (P. 8-18)
9. Air cleaner (P. 8-15)
10. Engine drive belt location (P. 8-13)
LDI3471
1.6L 4 cylinder (HR16DE engine model) 2. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4) (P. 8-10)
3. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-5)
4. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-5)
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Warning/ Name Page Warning/ Name Page Warning/ Name Page

Indicator Indicator Indicator
light (red) light (red) light (red)
Brake warning 2-12 Engine oil pres- 2-14 Seat belt warning 2-15
light (if so sure warning light light and chime
or equipped)
High temperature 2-14 Security indicator 2-15

warning light (if so light
equipped)
Charge warning 2-13
light LED Headlight 2-14 Supplemental air 2-15
system warning bag warning light
light (if so
Door open warn- 2-13 equipped)
ing light (if so Warning/ Name Page
equipped) Master warning 2-14
Indicator
light (if so light
equipped) (yellow)
Electronic parking 2-13
brake indicator
Rear seat belt 2-14 Anti-lock Braking 2-15
or light (if so
warning light and System (ABS)
equipped)
chime (if so or warning light
equipped)

light light light
(yellow) (yellow) (yellow)
Automatic Emer- 2-16 Electronic parking 2-16 Low fuel warning 2-17
gency Braking brake warning light (if so
(AEB) system or light (if so equipped)
warning light (if so equipped)
equipped) Low tire pressure 2-17
warning light
Automatic Emer- 2-16
gency Braking Engine start op- 2-16
(AEB) with Pedes- eration indicator Low windshield- 2-19
trian Detection light (if so washer fluid
system warning equipped) warning light (if so
light (if so equipped)
equipped) Front passenger 2-17
air bag status Malfunction Indi- 2-19
Blind Spot Warn- 2-16 light cator Light (MIL)
ing (BSW) indica-
tor light (if so Lane Departure 2-17
equipped) Warning (LDW) Master warning 2-19
indicator light (if light (if so
so equipped) equipped)

light light light
(yellow) (yellow) (other)
NISSAN Intelligent 2-19 Vehicle Dynamic 2-20 High Beam Assist 2-21
Key® warning light Control (VDC) OFF indicator light
(if so equipped) indicator light (green) (if so
equipped)
Power steering 2-19
Warning/ Name Page High beam indi- 2-21
warning light Indicator cator light (blue)
light
(other)
Rear Automatic 2-20
Braking (RAB) Automatic brake 2-21 Lane Departure 2-21
warning light (if so hold indicator Warning (LDW)
equipped) light (white/ indicator light
green) (if so (green) (if so
Shift P (Park) 2-20 equipped) equipped)
warning light (if so
equipped) CRUISE indicator 2-21 NISSAN Intelligent 2-22
light (green) (if so Key® warning light
Slip indicator light 2-20 equipped) (green) (if so
equipped)
Front fog light in- 2-21
SET indicator light 2-22
dicator light
(green) (if so
(green) (if so
equipped)
equipped)

Warning/ Name Page
Indicator
light
(other)
Side light and 2-22

headlight indica-
tor light (green)
SPORT mode indi- 2-22

cator light (green)
(if so equipped)
Turn signal/ 2-22

hazard indicator
lights (green)

1 Safety-Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3 Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Armrest (if so equipped for driver’s side Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Head restraints/headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Adjustable head restraint/headrest Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Non-adjustable head restraint/ CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
headrest components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Rear-facing child restraint installation
Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Removable (without Bose head Rear-facing child restraint installation
restraint/headrest speaker system using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Forward-facing child restraint
Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Forward-facing child restraint
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10 installation using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Seat belt warning light and chime . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Precautions on SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Injured persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . 1-63
Three-point type seat belt with Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . 1-64
retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
SEATS
• Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-
ingly activate switches or controls or
make the vehicle move. Unattended
children could become involved in
serious accidents.
• To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require
the assistance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed ve-
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
ARS1152 come high enough to cause a signifi-
• For the most effective protection cant risk of injury or death to people
WARNING
when the vehicle is in motion, the and pets.
• Do not ride in a moving vehicle when seat should be upright. Always sit • Do not adjust the driver’s seat while
the seatback is reclined. This can be well back and upright in the seat with driving so full attention may be given
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not both feet on the floor and adjust the to vehicle operation. The seat may
be against your body. In an accident, seat properly. For additional infor- move suddenly and could cause loss
you could be thrown into it and re- mation, see “Precautions on seat belt of control of the vehicle.
ceive neck or other serious injuries. usage” (P. 1-10). • The seatback should not be reclined
You could also slide under the lap belt any more than needed for comfort.
• After adjustment, gently rock in the
and receive serious internal injuries. Seat belts are most effective when
seat to make sure it is securely
locked. the passenger sits well back and
straight up in the seat. If the seatback
is reclined, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and being injured is
increased.
1-2 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu-
ally. For additional information about ad-
justing the seats, refer to the steps outlined
in this section.
LRS2795 LRS2814
Forward and backward Reclining

Pull the center of the bar up and hold it To recline the seatback, pull the lever up
while you slide the seat forward or back- and lean back. To bring the seatback for-
ward to the desired position. Release the ward, pull the lever up and lean your body
bar to lock the seat in position. forward. Release the lever to lock the seat-
back in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-
tion, see “Precautions on seat belt usage”
(P. 1-10). Also, the seatback can be reclined
to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle
is stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park).
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

• Properly secure all cargo with ropes
or straps to help prevent it from slid-
ing or shifting. Do not place cargo
higher than the seatbacks. In a sud-
den stop or collision, unsecured
cargo could cause personal injury.
• When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched
position. If they are not completely
secured, passengers may be injured
in an accident or sudden stop.
LRS2202 LRS3072
Seat lifter (driver's seat) FOLDING REAR SEAT

Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to Pull the knob O
A to fold each seatback
adjust the seat height until the desired po- down.
sition is achieved.
WARNING
• Never allow anyone to ride in the
cargo area or on the rear seat when it
is in the fold-down position. Use of
these areas by passengers without
proper restraints could result in seri-
ous injury or death in an accident or
sudden stop.

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS
WARNING
Head restraints/headrests supplement
the other vehicle safety systems. They
may provide additional protection
against injury in certain rear end colli-
sions. Adjustable head restraints/
headrests must be adjusted properly,
as specified in this section. Check the
adjustment after someone else uses
the seat. Do not attach anything to the
head restraint/headrest stalks or re-
move the head restraint/headrest. Do
not use the seat if the head restraint/
LRS2339 headrest has been removed. If the head LRS2695
䊊
A Stowed position restraint/headrest was removed, rein-
stall and properly adjust the head
The illustration shows the seating posi-
tions equipped with head
䊊
B Resting position restraint/headrest before an occupant restraints/headrests.
ARMREST (if so equipped for uses the seating position. Failure to fol-
low these instructions can reduce the 䉱 Indicates the seating position is
driver’s side only) effectiveness of the head restraints/ equipped with a head restraint.
To use the armrest, pull it down to the rest- headrests. This may increase the risk of 쮿 Indicates the seating position is
ing position. serious injury or death in a collision. equipped with a headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not
equipped with a head restraint or headrest
(if applicable).
• Your vehicle is equipped with a head
restraint/headrest that may be inte-
grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

• Adjustable head restraints/headrests
have multiple notches along the stalk(s)
to lock them in a desired adjustment
position.
• The non-adjustable head restraints/
headrests have a single locking notch to
secure them to the seat frame.
• Proper Adjustment:
– For the adjustable type, align the head
restraint/headrest so the center of
your ear is approximately level with the
center of the head restraint/headrest.
– If your ear position is still higher than
the recommended alignment, place
the head restraint/headrest at the LRS2300 LRS2299
highest position. ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/ NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD
• If the head restraint/headrest has been HEADREST COMPONENTS RESTRAINT/HEADREST
removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and
locked in place before riding in that des- 1. Removable head restraint/headrest COMPONENTS
ignated seating position. 2. Multiple notches 1. Removable head restraint/headrest
3. Lock knob 2. Single notch
4. Stalks 3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position.
LRS2302 LRS2302
REMOVE REMOVABLE (without Bose head

Use the following procedure to remove the restraint/headrest speaker
head restraint/headrest: system only)
1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to
the highest position. CAUTION
2. Push and hold the lock knob. Do not remove head restraint/headrest
from vehicles equipped with Bose head
3. Remove the head restraint/headrest restraint/headrest speaker system.
from the seat. Removal may damage the system
4. Store the head restraint/headrest prop- wiring.
erly in a secure place so it is not loose in
the vehicle.

LRS2303 WRS0134 LRS2351
INSTALL ADJUST For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks For adjustable head restraint/headrest Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
with the holes in the seat. Make sure that positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the
the head restraint/headrest is facing the the notch before riding in that designated
center is level with the center of your ears. If
correct direction. The stalk with the seating position.
your ear position is still higher than the
notch (notches) O 1 must be installed in
recommended alignment, place the head
the hole with the lock knob O 2 .
restraint/headrest at the highest position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint/
headrest before an occupant uses the
seating position.

LRS2305 LRS2306
Raise Lower
To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it To lower, push and hold the lock knob and
up. push the head restraint/headrest down.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated the notch before riding in that designated
seating position. seating position.

SEAT BELTS
SSS0136
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces

USAGE or territories specify that seat belts be
worn at all times when a vehicle is being
If you are wearing your seat belt properly driven.
adjusted and you are sitting upright and
well back in your seat with both feet on the
floor, your chances of being injured or killed
in a collision and/or the severity of injury
may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly
encourages you and all of your passengers
to buckle up every time you drive, even if
your seating position includes a supple-
mental air bag.

SSS0134 SSS0016
WARNING WARNING
• Every person who drives or rides in • The seat belt should be properly ad-
this vehicle should use a seat belt at justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so
all times. Children should be in the may reduce the effectiveness of the
rear seats and in an appropriate entire restraint system and increase
restraint. the chance or severity of injury in an
accident. Serious injury or death can
occur if the seat belt is not worn
properly.

• Be sure the seat belt tongue is se- • Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have
curely fastened to the proper buckle. activated, they cannot be reused and
• Do not wear the seat belt inside out must be replaced together with the
or twisted. Doing so may reduce its retractor. It is recommended that you
effectiveness. visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
• Do not allow more than one person • All seat belt assemblies, including re-
to use the same seat belt. tractors and attaching hardware,
• Never carry more people in the ve- should be inspected after any colli-
hicle than there are seat belts. sion. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
• If the seat belt warning light glows NISSAN recommends that all seat
continuously while the ignition is belt assemblies in use during a colli-
turned ON with all doors closed and sion be replaced unless the collision
all seat belts fastened, it may indi- was minor and the belts show no
SSS0014 cate a malfunction in the system. damage and continue to operate
Have the system checked. It is rec- properly. Seat belt assemblies not in
WARNING ommended that you visit a NISSAN use during a collision should also be
dealer for this service. inspected and replaced if either
• Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest. • No changes should be made to the damage or improper operation is
Never put the belt behind your back, seat belt system. For example, do not noted.
under your arm or across your neck. modify the seat belt, add material, or • All child restraints and attaching
The belt should be away from your install devices that may change the hardware should be inspected after
face and neck, but not falling off your seat belt routing or tension. Doing so any collision. Always follow the re-
shoulder. may affect the operation of the seat straint manufacturer's inspection in-
belt system. Modifying or tampering structions and replacement recom-
• Position the lap belt as low and snug
with the seat belt system may result mendations. The child restraints
as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT
in serious personal injury. should be replaced if they are
THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high
could increase the risk of internal in- damaged.
juries in an accident.

• The front passenger’s seat belt is not fas- • An object placed under the front passen-
tened and the seat is occupied by a pas- ger seat.
senger for 7 seconds after the ignition • An object placed between the seat cush-
switch is placed in the ON position. ion and center console or between the
• The front passenger’s seat belt is not fas- seat cushion and the door.
tened and objects or external force on • An object hanging on the seat or placed
the passenger seat change the seat belt in the seatback pocket.
reminder classification to Occupied. • A child restraint or other object pressing
The seat belt warning light will flash under against the rear of the seatback.
the conditions shown above until the nec-
essary seat belt is securely fastened. NOTE:
A warning chime will sound for approxi- The rear seats are equipped with a seat
mately 95 seconds or until one of the fol- belt warning message in the vehicle in-
LRS0786 lowing conditions is met: formation display (if so equipped).
• The unbuckled front occupant’s seat belt For additional information, see “Vehicle In-
SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT AND formation Display” (P. 2-23).
is securely fastened.
CHIME
• The seat belt reminder function in the
The driver and front passenger seat is front passenger seat no longer detects
PREGNANT WOMEN
equipped with an enhanced seat belt re- that the front passenger seat is occupied. NISSAN recommends that pregnant
minder function. If your vehicle is equipped • The ignition is turned off. women use seat belts. The seat belt should
with an enhanced seat belt reminder func- be worn snug and always position the lap
tion, a visual and audible alert will operate if The below situations could result in the belt as low as possible around the hips, not
a driver or front passenger seat belt is un- seat belt reminder light being illuminated the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your
buckled at speeds of approximately 9 mph and the chime sounding, even with no oc- shoulder and across your chest. Never run
(15 km/h) or more under the following con- cupant present in the passenger seat: the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal
ditions: • Heavy objects placed on the seat. area. Contact your doctor for specific
• If the driver seat belt is not fastened. • Someone pushing or pulling on the front recommendations.
passenger seat.

INJURED PERSONS • Do not allow children to play with the
NISSAN recommends that injured persons seat belts. Most seating positions are
use seat belts. Check with your doctor for equipped with Automatic Locking
specific recommendations. Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If
the seat belt becomes wrapped
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT around a child’s neck with the ALR
WITH RETRACTOR mode activated, the child can be se-
riously injured or killed if the seat belt
WARNING retracts and becomes tight. This can
occur even if the vehicle is parked.
• Every person who drives or rides in Unbuckle the seat belt to release the
this vehicle should use a seat belt at child. If the seat belt cannot be un-
all times. buckled or is already unbuckled, re-
• Do not ride in a moving vehicle when lease the child by cutting the seat
the seatback is reclined. This can be belt with a suitable tool (such as a LRS2795
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not knife or scissors) to release the seat
be against your body. In an accident, belt. Fastening the seat belts
you could be thrown into it and re- 1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa-
ceive neck or other serious injuries. tion, see “Seats” (P. 1-2).
You could also slide under the lap belt
and receive serious internal injuries. 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retrac-
tor and insert the tongue into the buckle
• For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the
O A until you hear and feel the latch
engage.
seat should be upright. Always sit
well back and upright in the seat with • The retractor is designed to lock
both feet on the floor and adjust the during a sudden stop or on impact. A
seat belt properly. slow pulling motion permits the
seat belt to move, and allows you
some freedom of movement in the
seat.

in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or
during certain impacts.
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks
the seat belt for child restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat
belt cannot be extended again until the
seat belt tongue is detached from the
buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt re-
turns to the ELR mode after the seat belt
fully retracts. For additional information,
see “Child restraints” (P. 1-21).
The ALR mode should be used only for
LRS3087 LRS2675 child restraint installation. During nor-
• If the seat belt cannot be pulled 3. Position the lap belt portion low and mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR
from its fully retracted position, snug on the hips OB as shown. mode should not be activated. If it is ac-
firmly pull the belt and release it. tivated, it may cause uncomfortable seat
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the belt tension. It can also change the op-
Then smoothly pull the belt out of
retractor to take up extra slack O C . Be eration of the front passenger air bag.
the retractor.
sure the shoulder belt is routed over For additional information, see “Supple-
your shoulder and across your chest. mental air bag warning light” (P. 1-64).
The front passenger seat and the rear
seating positions’ three-point seat belts WARNING
have two modes of operation:
When fastening the seat belts, be cer-
• Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) tain that the seatbacks are completely
• Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) secured in the latched position. If they
The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex- are not completely secured, passen-
tend and retract to allow the driver and gers may be injured in an accident or
passengers some freedom of movement sudden stop.

To increase your confidence in the seat
belts, check the operation as follows:
• Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and re-
strict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this
check, get the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service, or to learn more about seat
belt operation.
WRS0139 LRS0242
Unfastening the seat belts Shoulder belt height adjustment

To unfasten the seat belt, press the button (front seats)
on the buckle O 1 . The seat belt automati- The shoulder belt anchor height should be
cally retracts. adjusted to the position best for you. For
additional information, see “Precautions on
Checking seat belt operation seat belt usage” (P. 1-10). To adjust, pull out
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock the adjustment button O 1 and move the
seat belt movement by two separate shoulder belt anchor to the desired posi-
methods: tion O2 , so the belt passes over the center
of the shoulder. The belt should be away
• When the seat belt is pulled quickly from
from your face and neck, but not falling off
the retractor
your shoulder. Release the adjustment but-
• When the vehicle slows down rapidly ton to lock the shoulder belt anchor into
position.

WARNING dealer for assistance with purchasing an
extender if an extender is required.
• After adjustment, release the adjust-
ment button and try to move the WARNING
shoulder belt anchor up and down to
make sure it is securely fixed in • Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,
position. made by the same company which
made the original equipment seat
• The shoulder belt anchor height belts, should be used with NISSAN
should be adjusted to the position seat belts.
best for you. Failure to do so may re-
duce the effectiveness of the entire • Adults and children who can use the
restraint system and increase the standard seat belt should not use an
chance or severity of injury in an extender. Such unnecessary use
accident. could result in serious personal injury
LRS3082 in the event of an accident.
• Never use seat belt extenders to in-
Seat belt hook stall child restraints. If the child re-
When the seat belt is not in use and when straint is not secured properly, the
folding down the rear seats, hook the rear child could be seriously injured or
seat belts on the seat belt hooks. killed in a collision or a sudden stop.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
If, because of body size or driving position, it • To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
is not possible to properly fit the lap/ mild soap solution or any solution rec-
shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender ommended for cleaning upholstery or
that is compatible with the installed seat carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow
belts is available for purchase. The ex- the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not
tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) allow the seat belts to retract until they
of length and may be used for either the are completely dry.
driver or front passenger seating position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
CHILD SAFETY
• If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt WARNING There are three basic types of child re-
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat straint systems:
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoul- Do not allow children to play with the • Rear-facing child restraints
der belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. seat belts. Most seating positions are • Forward-facing child restraints
• Periodically check to see that the seat equipped with Automatic Locking Re-
• Booster seats
belt and the metal components, such tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat
as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible belt becomes wrapped around a child’s The proper restraint depends on the child's
wires and anchors, work properly. If loose neck with the ALR mode activated, the size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year
parts, deterioration, cuts or other dam- child can be seriously injured or killed if and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed
age on the webbing is found, the entire the seat belt retracts and becomes in rear-facing child restraints. Forward-
seat belt assembly should be replaced. tight. This can occur even if the vehicle facing child restraints are available for chil-
is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re- dren who outgrow rear-facing child re-
lease the child. If the seat belt cannot straints and are at least 1 year old. Booster
be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, seats are used to help position a vehicle
release the child by cutting the seat lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no
belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife longer use a forward-facing child restraint.
or scissors) to release the seat belt.
WARNING
Children need adults to help protect
them. They need to be properly Infants and children need special pro-
restrained. tection. The vehicle's seat belts may
In addition to the general information in not fit them properly. The shoulder belt
this manual, child safety information is may come too close to the face or neck.
available from many other sources, includ- The lap belt may not fit over their small
ing doctors, teachers, government traffic hip bones. In an accident, an improp-
safety offices, and community organiza- erly fitting seat belt could cause serious
tions. Every child is different, so be sure to or fatal injury. Always use appropriate
learn the best way to transport your child. child restraints.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require the use of approved child
restraints for infants and small children. For
additional information, see “Child re- SMALL CHILDREN available booster seat to obtain proper
straints” (P. 1-21). seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh
A child restraint may be secured in the ve- booster seat should raise the child so that
at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a
hicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An- the shoulder belt is properly positioned
rear-facing child restraint as long as pos-
chors and Tethers for CHildren) system or across the chest and the top, middle por-
sible up to the height or weight limit of the
with the vehicle seat belt. For additional tion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt
child restraint. Children who outgrow the
information, see “Child restraints” (P. 1-21). should not cross the neck or face and
height or weight limit of the rear-facing
should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens child restraint and are at least 1 year old
should lie snugly across the lower hips or
and children be restrained in the rear should be secured in a forward-facing child
upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster
seat. Studies show that children are restraint with a harness. Refer to the manu-
seat can only be used in seating positions
safer when properly restrained in the facturer’s instructions for minimum and
that have a three-point type seat belt. The
rear seat than in the front seat. maximum weight and height recommen-
booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and
dations. NISSAN recommends that small
This is especially important because have a label certifying that it complies with
children be placed in child restraints that
your vehicle has a supplemental re- Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
straint system (air bag system) for the Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
front passenger. For additional informa- Safety Standards. You should choose a A booster seat should be used until the
tion, see “Supplemental air bag warning child restraint that fits your vehicle and al- child can pass the seat belt fit test below:
light” (P. 1-64). ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc- • Are the child’s back and hips against the
tions for installation and use. vehicle seatback?
INFANTS
LARGER CHILDREN • Is the child able to sit without slouching?
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be
placed in a rear-facing child restraint. • Do the child’s knees bend easily over the
Children should remain in a forward-facing front edge of the seat with feet flat on the
NISSAN recommends that infants be child restraint with a harness until they
placed in child restraints that comply with floor?
reach the maximum height or weight limit
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or allowed by the child restraint manufacturer. • Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. belt low and snug across the hips and
You should choose a child restraint that fits Once a child outgrows the height or weight shoulder belt across mid-chest and
your vehicle and always follow the manu- limit of the harness-equipped forward- shoulder)?
facturer's instructions for installation and facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends
use. that the child be placed in a commercially

• Is the child able to use the properly ad- WARNING
justed head restraint/headrest?
• Will the child be able to stay in position for Never let a child stand or kneel on any
the entire ride? seat and do not allow a child in the
cargo area. The child could be seriously
injured or killed in a sudden stop or
collision.
LRS2690
If you answered no to any of these ques-
tions, the child should remain in a booster
seat using a three-point type seat belt.
NOTE:
Laws in some communities may follow
different guidelines. Check local and
state regulations to confirm your child is
using the correct restraint system before
traveling.

CHILD RESTRAINTS
facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts” (P. 1-33).
– Even with the NISSAN Advanced
Air Bag System, never install a
rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat. An inflating air bag
could seriously injure or kill a child.
A rear-facing child restraint must
only be used in the rear seat.
– Be sure to purchase a child re-
straint that will fit the child and
vehicle. Some child restraints may
not fit properly in your vehicle.
ARS1098 WRS0256 – Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only loads
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD – Infants and children should never imposed by correctly fitted child
RESTRAINTS be held on anyone's lap. Even the restraints. Under no circum-
strongest adult cannot resist the stances are they to be used to at-
WARNING forces of a collision. tach adult seat belts, or other
– Do not put a seat belt around both items or equipment to the vehicle.
• Failure to follow the warnings and in- Doing so could damage the child
a child and another passenger.
structions for proper use and installation restraint anchorages. The child re-
of child restraints could result in serious – NISSAN recommends that all child
straint will not be properly in-
injury or death of a child or other passen- restraints be installed in the rear
stalled using the damaged an-
gers in a sudden stop or collision: seat. Studies show that children
chorage, and a child could be
are safer when properly re-
– The child restraint must be used seriously injured or killed in a
strained in the rear seat than in
and installed properly. Always fol- collision.
the front seat. If you must install a
low all of the child restraint manu- – Never use the anchor points for
forward-facing child restraint in
facturer's instructions for instal- adult seat belts or other items.
the front seat, see “Forward-
lation and use.

– A child restraint with a top tether If you do not have a LATCH compatible • If the combined weight of the child and
strap should not be used in the child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5
front passenger seat. used. kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the
Several manufacturers offer child re- lower anchors) to install the child
– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-
straints for infants and children of various restraint.
sible after fitting the child restraint.
sizes. When selecting any child restraint, • Be sure to follow the child restraint
– Infants and children should al-
keep the following points in mind: manufacturer's instructions for
ways be placed in an appropriate
• Choose only a restraint with a label certi- installation.
child restraint while in the vehicle.
• When the child restraint is not in use, fying that it complies with Federal Motor All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
keep it secured with the LATCH sys- Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian territories require that infants and small
tem or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. children be restrained in an approved
collision, loose objects can injure oc- • Check the child restraint in your vehicle to child restraint at all times while the ve-
cupants or damage the vehicle. be sure it is compatible with the vehicle's hicle is being operated. Canadian law re-
seat and seat belt system. quires the top tether strap on forward-
• If the child restraint is compatible with facing child restraints be secured to the
CAUTION your vehicle, place your child in the child designated anchor point on the vehicle.
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can restraint and check the various adjust-
become very hot. Check the seating ments to be sure the child restraint is
surface and buckles before placing a compatible with your child. Choose a
child in the child restraint. child restraint that is designed for your
child's height and weight. Always follow
This vehicle is equipped with a universal all recommended procedures.
child restraint anchor system, referred to • If the combined weight of the child and
as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers child restraint is less than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg),
for CHildren) system. Some child restraints you may use the LATCH anchors to install
include rigid or webbing-mounted attach- the child restraint (not both at the same
ments that can be connected to these an- time).
chors. For additional information, see
“LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system” (P. 1-23).

install the child restraint. Be sure to follow – Inspect the lower anchors by insert-
the child restraint manufacturer's instruc- ing your fingers into the lower an-
tions for installation. chor area. Feel to make sure there
The LATCH anchor points are provided to are no obstructions over the an-
install child restraints in the rear outboard chors such as seat belt webbing or
seating positions only. Do not attempt to seat cushion material. The child re-
install a child restraint in the center position straint will not be secured properly if
using the LATCH anchors. the lower anchors are obstructed.
Child restraint anchorages are de-
LATCH lower anchor signed to withstand only those loads
WARNING straints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts, har-
Failure to follow the warnings and in- nesses or for attaching other items or
LRS3073 structions for proper use and installa- equipment to the vehicle. Doing so
LATCH system lower anchor locations tion of child restraints could result in could damage the child restraint an-
LATCH (Lower Anchors and serious injury or death of a child or chorages. The child restraint will not be
other passengers in a sudden stop or properly installed using the damaged
Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM collision: anchorage, and a child could be seri-
Your vehicle is equipped with special an- – Attach LATCH system compatible ously injured or killed in a collision.
chor points that are used with LATCH sys- child restraints only at the locations
tem compatible child restraints. This sys- shown in the illustration.
tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX
– Do not secure a child restraint in the
or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys-
center rear seating position using
tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat
the LATCH system anchors. The child
belt to secure the child restraint unless the
restraint will not be secured properly.
combined weight of the child and child re-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and child restraint
is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the ve-
hicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to
LRS3036 LRS0661 LRS0662
LATCH lower anchor location LATCH webbing-mounted attachment LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
The LATCH lower anchors are located as
Installing child restraint LATCH When installing a child restraint, carefully
lower anchor attachments read and follow the instructions in this
shown. A label is attached to the seatback manual and those supplied with the child
to help you locate the LATCH lower LATCH compatible child restraints include restraint.
anchors. two rigid or webbing-mounted attach-
ments that can be connected to two an-
chors located at certain seating positions
in your vehicle. With this system, you do not
have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the
child restraint. Check your child restraint for
a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the
instructions provided by the child restraint
manufacturer.

Top tether anchor • Child restraint anchorages are de-
WARNING signed to withstand only those loads
• Do not allow cargo to contact the top straints. Under no circumstances are
tether strap when it is attached to they to be used for adult seat belts,
the top tether anchor. Properly se- harnesses or for attaching other
cure the cargo so it does not contact items or equipment to the vehicle.
the top tether strap. Cargo that is not Doing so could damage the child re-
properly secured or cargo that con- straint anchorages. The child re-
tacts the top tether strap may dam- straint will not be properly installed
age it during a collision. Your child using the damaged anchorage, and a
could be seriously injured or killed in child could be seriously injured or
a collision if the top tether strap is killed in a collision.
damaged.
• The child restraint top tether strap LRS3329
may be damaged by contact with the Top tether anchor point locations
tonneau cover or items in the cargo
area. Remove the tonneau cover (if so Anchor points are located on the back of
equipped) from the vehicle or secure the rear seats.
it in the cargo area. Also secure any
items in the cargo area. Your child
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
could be seriously injured or killed in INSTALLATION USING LATCH
a collision if the top tether strap is For additional information, see all Warnings
damaged. and Cautions in the “Child safety” (P. 1-18)
and “Child restraints” (P. 1-21) before install-
ing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
bined weight of the child and the child re-
bined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an-
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manu-
facturer's instructions. LRS2997 LRS2996
Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2 Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-
tachments to the LATCH lower anchors.
Check to make sure the LATCH attach-
ment is properly attached to the lower
anchors.

vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all
child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1
through 4.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Auto-
LRS0673 LRS0674 matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
Rear-facing – step 3 Rear-facing – step 4 used when installing a child restraint.
3. For child restraints that are equipped 4. After attaching the child restraint, test it Failure to use the ALR mode will result
with webbing-mounted attachments, before you place the child in it. Push it in the child restraint not being properly
remove any additional slack from the from side to side while holding the child secured. The restraint could tip over or
anchor attachments. Press downward restraint near the LATCH attachment be loose and cause injury to a child in a
and rearward firmly in the center of the path. The child restraint should not sudden stop or collision. Also, it can
child restraint with your hand to com- move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from change the operation of the front pas-
press the vehicle seat cushion and seat- side to side. Try to tug it forward and senger air bag. For additional informa-
back while tightening the webbing of check to see if the LATCH attachment tion, see “Front passenger air bag and
the anchor attachments. holds the restraint in place. If the re- status light” (P. 1-53).
straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
For additional information, see all Warnings
attachment as necessary, or put the re-
and Cautions in the “Child safety” (P. 1-18)
straint in another seat and test it again.
and “Child restraints” (P. 1-21) before install-
You may need to try a different child
ing a child restraint.
restraint or try installing by using the

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
bined weight of the child and the child re-
bined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an-
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer's
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in
the rear seats:
WRS0256 WRS0761
Rear-facing – step 1 Rear-facing – step 2
1. Child restraints for infants must be 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the
used in the rear-facing direction and child restraint and insert it into the
therefore must not be used in the front buckle until you hear and feel the latch
seat. Position the child restraint on the engage. Be sure to follow the child re-
seat. Always follow the child restraint straint manufacturer’s instructions for
manufacturer’s instructions. belt routing.

LRS0669 LRS0670 WRS0762
Rear-facing – step 3 Rear-facing – step 4 Rear-facing – step 5
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on 5. Remove any additional slack from the
extended. At this time, the seat belt re- the shoulder belt to remove any slack in seat belt; press downward and rearward
tractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint the belt. firmly in the center of the child restraint
mode). It reverts to the ELR mode when to compress the vehicle seat cushion
the seat belt is fully retracted. and seatback while pulling up on the
seat belt.

7. Check to make sure that the child re- Follow these steps to install a forward-
straint is properly secured prior to each facing child restraint using the LATCH
use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat system:
steps 2 through 6. 1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
After the child restraint is removed and the Always follow the child restraint manu-
seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode facturer's instructions.
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
WRS0763 and “Child restraints” (P. 1-21) before install-
Rear-facing – step 6 ing a child restraint.
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
before you place the child in it. Push it bined weight of the child and the child re-
from side to side while holding the child straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
restraint near the seat belt path. The bined weight of the child and the child
child restraint should not move more restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an-
to tug it forward and check to see if the chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
belt holds the restraint in place. If the to follow the child restraint manufacturer's
restraint is not secure, tighten the seat instructions for installation.
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint. Not
all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and
it is interfering with the proper child re-
straint fit, try another seating position or
a different child restraint.
LRS2995 LRS2994
Forward-facing webbing-mounted – Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
step 2 seating positions that do not have a top
2. Secure the child restraint anchor at- tether anchor.
tachments to the LATCH lower anchors.
3. The back of the child restraint should be
Check to make sure the LATCH attach-
secured against the vehicle seatback.
ment is properly attached to the lower
anchors. If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct
If the child restraint is equipped with a
child restraint fit. If the head restraint/
top tether strap, route the top tether
headrest is removed, store it in a secure
strap and secure the tether strap to the
place. Be sure to reinstall the head
tether anchor point. For additional infor-
restraint/headrest when the child re-
mation, see “Installing top tether strap”
straint is removed. For additional infor-
(P. 1-33). Do not install child restraints that
mation, see “Head restraints/headrests”
require the use of a top tether strap in
(P. 1-5) for head restraint/headrest ad-
justment information.
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1
through 6.
LRS0671 WRS0697
Forward-facing – step 4 Forward-facing – step 6
4. For child restraints that are equipped 6. After attaching the child restraint, test it
with webbing-mounted attachments, before you place the child in it. Push it
remove any additional slack from the from side to side while holding the child
anchor attachments. Press downward restraint near the LATCH attachment
and rearward firmly in the center of the path. The child restraint should not
child restraint with your knee to com- move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
press the vehicle seat cushion and seat- side to side. Try to tug it forward and
back while tightening the webbing of check to see if the LATCH attachment
the anchor attachments. holds the restraint in place. If the re-
straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
5. Tighten the tether strap according to
attachment as necessary, or put the re-
the manufacturer's instructions to re-
straint in another seat and test it again.
move any slack.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.
Rear bench seat child restraint anchorages. The child
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS restraint will not be properly installed
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest
and store it in a secure place. Be sure to
in a collision.
reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed. For FORWARD-FACING CHILD
additional information, see “Head
restraints/headrests” (P. 1-5).
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS
2. Position the top tether strap as shown.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether an- WARNING
chor point as shown. The three-point seat belt with Auto-
4. Tighten the tether strap according to matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
LRS3351 the manufacturer’s instructions to reused when installing a child restraint.
Rear seats move any slack. Failure to use the ALR mode will result
in the child restraint not being properly
If you have any questions when install-
secured. The restraint could tip over or
䊊
1 Top tether strap ing a top tether strap, it is recommended
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
䊊
2 Anchor point service.
sudden stop or collision. Also, it can
change the operation of the front pas-
Installing top tether strap senger air bag. For additional informa-
The child restraint top tether strap must be WARNING tion, see “Front passenger air bag and
used when installing the child restraint with Child restraint anchorages are de- status light” (P. 1-53).
the LATCH lower anchor attachments. signed to withstand only those loads
First, secure the child restraint with the imposed by correctly fitted child re-
LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard posi- straints. Under no circumstances are
tions only). they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

Follow these steps to install a forward- If the seating position does not have an
facing child restraint using the vehicle seat adjustable head restraint/headrest and
belt in the rear seats or in the front passen- it is interfering with the proper child re-
ger seat: straint fit, try another seating position or
1. If you must install a child restraint in a different child restraint.
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position.
Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and,
therefore, must not be used in the
front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
WRS0699 Always follow the child restraint manu-
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) – facturer’s instructions.
step 1 The back of the child restraint should be
For additional information, see all Warnings secured against the vehicle seatback.
and Cautions in the “Child safety” (P. 1-18) If necessary, adjust or remove the head
and “Child restraints” (P. 1-21) before install- restraint/headrest to obtain the correct
ing a child restraint. child restraint fit. If the head restraint/
Do not use the lower anchors if the com- headrest is removed, store it in a secure
bined weight of the child and the child replace. Be sure to reinstall the head
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- restraint/headrest when the child re-
bined weight of the child and the child straint is removed. For additional infor-
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use mation, see “Head restraints/headrests”
the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an- (P. 1-5) for head restraint/headrest ad-
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure justment, removal and installation
to follow the child restraint manufacturer's information.

Do not install child restraints that require
the use of a top tether strap in seating
positions that do not have a top tether
anchor.
WRS0680 LRS0667
Forward-facing – step 3 Forward-facing – step 4
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
child restraint and insert it into the extended. At this time, the seat belt re-
buckle until you hear and feel the latch tractor is in the Automatic Locking Re-
engage. Be sure to follow the child retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint
straint manufacturer’s instructions for mode). It reverts to Emergency Locking
belt routing. Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt
If the child restraint is equipped with a is fully retracted.
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to the
tether anchor point (rear seat installa-
tion only). For additional information, see
“Installing top tether strap” (P. 1-37).

LRS0668 WRS0681 WRS0698
Forward-facing – step 5 Forward-facing – step 6 Forward-facing – step 8
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on 6. Remove any additional slack from the 8. After attaching the child restraint, test it
the shoulder belt to remove any slack in seat belt; press downward and rear- before you place the child in it. Push it
the belt. ward firmly in the center of the child re- from side to side while holding the child
straint with your knee to compress the restraint near the seat belt path. The
vehicle seat cushion and seatback while child restraint should not move more
pulling up on the seat belt. than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try
to tug it forward and check to see if the
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the
belt holds the restraint in place. If the
manufacturer's instructions to remove
restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
any slack.
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint. Not
all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2
through 8.
LRS0865 LRS3331
Forward-facing – step 10 Rear seats
10. If the child restraint is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. The front 䊊
1 Top tether strap
passenger air bag status light 䊊
2 Anchor point
should illuminate. If this light is not illu- Installing top tether strap
minated, see “Front passenger air bag
and status light” (P. 1-53). Move the child The child restraint top tether strap must be
restraint to another seating position. used when installing the child restraint with
Have the system checked. It is recom- seat belts.
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer First, secure the child restraint with the seat
for this service. belt.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.

Rear bench seat WARNING Precautions on booster seats
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are de-
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest signed to withstand only those loads If a booster seat and seat belt are not
and store it in a secure place. Be sure to imposed by correctly fitted child reused properly, the risk of a child being
reinstall the head restraint/headrest straints. Under no circumstances are injured or killed in a sudden stop or col-
when the child restraint is removed. For they to be used to attach adult seat lision greatly increases:
additional information, see “Head belts, or other items or equipment to
restraints/headrests” (P. 1-5). – Make sure the shoulder portion of
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the the belt is away from the child's face
2. Position the top tether strap as shown. child restraint anchorages. The child and neck and the lap portion of the
restraint will not be properly installed belt does not cross the stomach.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether an- using the damaged anchorage, and a
chor point as shown. – Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the child's
4. Tighten the tether strap according to in a collision.
arm.
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack. BOOSTER SEATS – A booster seat must only be installed
For additional information on installing a in a seating position that has a lap/
CENTER SEATING POSITION shoulder belt.
booster seat in your vehicle, follow the in-
1. Position the top tether strap as shown. structions outlined in this section.
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether an-
chor point as shown.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack.
If you have any questions when install-
ing a top tether strap, it is recommended
service.

LRS2479 LRS0453 LRS0464
A. Low back booster seat • Make sure the child’s head will be properly All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
supported by the booster seat or vehicle territories require that infants and small
B. High back booster seat
seat. The seatback must be at or above children be restrained in an approved
Booster seats of various sizes are offered the center of the child’s ears. For example, child restraint at all times while the ve-
by several manufacturers. When selecting if a low back booster seat is chosen, the hicle is being operated.
any booster seat, keep the following points vehicle seatback must be at or above the
in mind: The instructions in this section apply to
center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is booster seat installation in the rear seats
• Choose only a booster seat with a label lower than the center of the child’s ears, a or the front passenger seat.
certifying that it complies with Federal high back booster seat should be used.
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Ca- • If the booster seat is compatible with
nadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. your vehicle, place the child in the booster
• Check the booster seat in your vehicle to seat and check the various adjustments
be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s to be sure the booster seat is compatible
seat and seat belt system. with the child. Always follow all recom-
mended procedures.

Booster seat installation
WARNING
To avoid injury to child, do not use the
lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when us-
ing a booster seat with the seat belts.
and “Child restraints” (P. 1-21) and “Booster
seats” (P. 1-38) before installing a child
restraint.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat
in the rear seat or in the front passenger WRS0699 LRS0454
seat: 1. If you must install a booster seat in the Front passenger position
front seat, move the seat to the rear-
most position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat.
Only place it in a front-facing direction.
Always follow the booster seat manu-
facturer’s instructions.

If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and
it is interfering with the proper booster
seat fit, try another seating position or a
different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt
low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure
to follow the booster seat manufactur-
er’s instructions for adjusting the seat
belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat
belt toward the retractor to take up ex-
tra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is
LRS0451 LRS0452 positioned across the top, middle por-
Rear center position Rear outboard position tion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to
3. The booster seat should be positioned follow the booster seat manufacturer’s
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. instructions for adjusting the seat belt
routing.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-
booster seat fit. If the head restraint/ structions for properly fastening a seat
headrest is removed, store it in a secure belt shown in “Three-point type seat belt
place. Be sure to reinstall the head with retractor” (P. 1-14).
restraint/headrest when the booster
seat is removed. For additional infor-
mation, see “Head restraints/headrests”
(P. 1-5).

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(SRS)
PRECAUTIONS ON SRS lisions. The side air bags are designed to

This SRS section contains important infor- inflate on the side where the vehicle is
mation concerning the following systems: impacted.
• Driver and front passenger supplemental Rear outboard seat-mounted side-
front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced impact supplemental air bag system
Air Bag System) This system can help cushion the impact
• Front seat-mounted side-impact supple- force to the chest area of the rear outboard
mental air bag seat passengers in certain side-impact
• Rear outboard seat-mounted side- collisions. The side air bags are designed to
impact supplemental air bag inflate on the side where the vehicle is
• Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and impacted.
rollover supplemental air bag Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
• Driver and passenger supplemental knee rollover supplemental air bag system
LRS0865 air bag This system can help cushion the impact
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front • Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front force to the head of occupants in front and
passenger seat, place the ignition switch seats) rear outboard seating positions in certain
in the ON position. The front passenger side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags
Supplemental front-impact air bag
air bag status light may or may not are designed to inflate on the side where
system
illuminate, depending on the size of the the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the
child and the type of booster seat being The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can curtain air bags are designed to inflate and
used. For additional information, see help cushion the impact force to the head remain inflated for a short time.
“Front passenger air bag and status and chest of the driver and front passenger
in certain frontal collisions. Driver and passenger supplemental
light” (P. 1-53).
knee air bags
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact
force to the driver’s and front passenger’s
This system can help cushion the impact knees in certain collisions.
force to the chest area of the driver and
front passenger in certain side-impact col-

The SRS is designed to supplement the
crash protection provided by the driver and
front passenger and rear seat belts and is
not a substitute for them. Seat belts
should always be correctly worn and the
occupant seated a suitable distance away
from the steering wheel, instrument panel
and door finishers. For additional informa-
tion, see “Seat belts” (P. 1-10).
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag WRS0031
warning light illuminates. The supple-
mental air bag warning light will turn off WARNING • The front passenger air bag and front
after about 7 seconds if the system is passenger supplemental knee air
operational. • The front air bags ordinarily will not bag will not inflate if the passenger
inflate in the event of a side impact, air bag status light is lit. For addi-
rear impact, rollover, or lower sever- tional information, see “Front pas-
ity frontal collision. Always wear your senger air bag and status light”
seat belts to help reduce the risk or (P. 1-53).
severity of injury in various kinds of
accidents

• The seat belts and the front air bags • The front passenger seat is equipped
are most effective when you are sit- with an occupant classification sen-
ting well back and upright in the seat. sor (weight sensor) that turns the
The front air bags inflate with great front passenger air bag and front
force. Even with the NISSAN Ad- passenger supplemental knee air
vanced Air Bag System, if you are un- bag OFF under some conditions. This
restrained, leaning forward, sitting sensor is only used in this seat. Fail-
sideways or out of position in any ure to be properly seated and wear-
way, you are at greater risk of injury ing the seat belt can increase the risk
or death in a crash. You may also re- or severity of injury in an accident.
ceive serious or fatal injuries from For additional information, see
the front air bag if you are up against “Front passenger air bag and status
it when it inflates. Always sit back light” (P. 1-53).
against the seatback and as far away • Keep hands on the outside of the
as practical from the steering wheel steering wheel. Placing them inside
or instrument panel. Always properly the steering wheel rim could increase
use the seat belts. the risk that they are injured when
• The driver and front passenger seat the front air bag inflates.
belt buckles are equipped with sen-
sors that detect if the seat belts are
fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System monitors the severity of
a collision and seat belt usage, then
inflates the air bags as needed. Fail-
ure to properly wear seat belts can
increase the risk or severity of injury
in an accident.

ARS1133 ARS1041
WARNING
• Never let children ride unrestrained
or extend their hands or face out of
the window. Do not attempt to hold
them in your lap or arms. Some ex-
amples of dangerous riding posi-
tions are shown in the illustrations.

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044
WARNING
• Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-
teens and children should be prop-
erly restrained in the rear seat, if
possible.

ARS1045 ARS1046 WRS0431
WARNING WARNING
• Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Front and rear outboard seat-mounted
Bag System, never install a rear- side-impact supplemental air bags and
facing child restraint in the front seat. roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
An inflating front air bag could seri- rollover supplemental air bags:
ously injure or kill your child. For ad- • The side air bags and curtain air bags
ditional information, see “Child re- ordinarily will not inflate in the event
straints” (P. 1-21). of a frontal impact, rear impact, or
lower severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce
the risk or severity of injury in various
kinds of accidents.

WARNING
• The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective
when you are sitting well back and
upright in the seat with both feet on
the floor. The side air bag and curtain
air bag inflate with great force. Do not
allow anyone to place their hand, leg
or face near the side air bag on the
side of the seatback of the front and
rear seat or near the side roof rails.
Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats to
LRS3119 extend their hand out of the window WRS0032
or lean against the door. Some ex-
amples of dangerous riding posi- WARNING
tions are shown in the previous
illustrations. • When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you
may be seriously injured. Be espe-
cially careful with children, who
should always be properly re-
strained. Some examples of danger-
ous riding positions are shown in the
illustrations.
• Do not use seat covers on the front or
rear seatbacks. They may interfere
with side air bag inflation.

SSS0162 SSS0159

3. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bags
4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bags
5. Rear outboard seat-mounted side-
impact supplemental air bags (driver’s
side shown; front passenger side
similar)
6. Side satellite sensors (driver’s side
shown; front passenger side similar)
7. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats) (driver’s side shown; front passen-
ger side similar)
8. Front door satellite sensor (driver’s side
shown; front passenger side similar)
9. Occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor — located in front passenger
cushion frame)
10. Driver and front passenger supple-
mental knee air bag
11. Crash zone sensor
LRS3234
1. Supplemental front-impact air bag
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System modules
(front seats)
2. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

WARNING • If a forward-facing child restraint is • Do not position the front passenger
installed in the front passenger seat, seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the
To ensure proper operation of the pas- do not position the front passenger front seat does contact the rear seat,
senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys- seat so the child restraint contacts the air bag system may determine a
tem, please observe the following the instrument panel. If the child re- sensor malfunction has occurred
items. straint does contact the instrument and the front passenger air bag sta-
• Do not allow a passenger in the rear panel, the system may determine the tus light may illuminate and the
seat to push or pull on the seatback seat is occupied and the passenger supplemental air bag warning light
pocket. air bag may deploy in a collision. Also may flash.
• Do not place heavy loads heavier the front passenger air bag status
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN
than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, light may not illuminate. For addi-
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and
head restraint/headrest or in the tional information, see “Child re-
front passenger seats. This system is de-
seatback pocket. straints” (P. 1-21).
signed to meet certification requirements
• Make sure that there is nothing • Confirm the operating condition with under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in
pressing against the rear of the seat- the front passenger air bag status Canada. All of the information, cautions
back, such as a child restraint in- light. and warnings in this manual still apply
stalled in the rear seat or an object • If you notice that the front passenger and must be followed.
stored on the floor. air bag status light is not operating
The driver supplemental front-impact air
• Make sure that there is no object as described later in this section, get
bag is located in the center of the steering
placed under the front passenger the occupant classification system
wheel. The front passenger supplemental
seat. checked. It is recommended that you
front-impact air bag is mounted in the
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
• Make sure that there is no object dashboard above the glove box. The front
placed between the seat cushion and • Until you have confirmed with a air bags are designed to inflate in higher
center console or between the seat dealer that your front passenger seat severity frontal collisions, although they
cushion and the door. occupant classification system is may inflate if the forces in another type of
working properly, position the occu- collision are similar to those of a higher
pants in the rear seating positions. severity frontal impact. They may not in-
flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle

damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi- If you have any questions about your air the front occupants. Because of this, the
cation of proper front air bag system bag system, it is recommended that you force of the front air bag inflating can in-
operation. visit a NISSAN dealer. If you are considering crease the risk of injury if the occupant is
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System modification of your vehicle due to a dis- too close to, or is against, the front air bag
monitors information from the crash zone ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con- module during inflation.
sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat tact information is contained in the front of The front air bags deflate quickly after a
belt buckle sensors and occupant classifi- this Owner's Manual. collision.
cation sensor (weight sensor). Inflator op- When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud The front air bags operate only when the
eration is based on the severity of a colli- noise may be heard, followed by the re- ignition switch is placed in the ON
sion and seat belt usage for the driver. For lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful position.
the front passenger, the occupant classifi- and does not indicate a fire. Care should be
cation sensors are also monitored. Based taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita- After placing the ignition switch in the
on information from the sensors, only one tion and choking. Those with a history of a ON position, the supplemental air bag
front air bag may inflate in a crash, depend- breathing condition should get fresh air warning light illuminates. The supple-
ing on the crash severity and whether the promptly. mental air bag warning light will turn off
front occupants are belted or unbelted. Ad- after about 7 seconds if the system is
Front air bags, along with the use of seat operational.
ditionally, the front passenger air bag and belts, help to cushion the impact force on
front passenger supplemental knee air the face and chest of the front occupants.
bag may be automatically turned OFF un- They can help save lives and reduce seri-
der some conditions, depending on the ous injuries. However, an inflating front air
weight detected on the front passenger bag may cause facial abrasions or other
seat and how the seat belt is used. If the injuries. Front air bags, other than the driv-
front passenger air bag and front passen- er’s and passenger’s knee air bag, do not
ger supplemental knee air bag are OFF, the provide restraint to the lower body.
front passenger air bag status light will be
illuminated. For additional information, see Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat
“Front passenger air bag and status light” belts should be correctly worn and the
(P. 1-53). One front air bag inflating does not driver and front passenger seated upright
indicate improper performance of the as far as practical away from the steering
system. wheel or instrument panel. The front air
bags inflate quickly in order to help protect
WARNING Status light
The front passenger seat is equipped with
The front passenger air bag and front an occupant classification sensor (weight
passenger supplemental knee air bag sensor) that turns the front passenger air
are designed to automatically turn OFF bag and front passenger supplemental
under some conditions. Read this sec- knee air bag on or off depending on the
tion carefully to learn how it operates. weight applied to the front passenger seat.
Proper use of the seat, seat belt, and The status of the front passenger air bag
child restraints is necessary for most and front passenger supplemental knee
effective protection. Failure to follow all air bag (ON or OFF) are indicated by the
instructions in this manual concerning front passenger air bag status light
the use of seats, seat belts, and child which is located on the instrument panel.
restraints can increase the risk or se-
After the ignition switch is placed in the
verity of injury in an accident.
"ON" position, the front passenger air bag
LRS0865
status light on the instrument panel illumi-
Front passenger air bag and status nates for about 7 seconds and then turns
light off or remains illuminated depending on
the front passenger seat occupied status.
The light operates as follows:
PASSENGER AIR BAG FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG AND FRONT PASSENGER
CONDITION DESCRIPTION
STATUS LIGHT ( ) SUPPLEMENTAL KNEE AIR BAG STATUS
Empty Empty front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED
Bag or Child or Child Restraint or
Nobody/Somebody ON (illuminated) INHIBITED
Small Adult in front passenger seat
Adult Adult in the front passenger seat OFF (dark) ACTIVATED
In addition to the above, certain objects For additional information related to the please see “Normal operation” (P. 1-55) and
placed on the front passenger seat may normal operation and troubleshooting of “Troubleshooting” (P. 1-56).
also cause the light to operate as de- this occupant classification sensor system,
scribed above depending on their weight.

Front passenger air bag the child’s weight can be detected and ing to properly secure child restraints and
The front passenger air bag and front pas- cause the air bags to turn OFF. to use the ALR mode may allow the re-
senger supplemental knee air bag are de- Front passenger seat adult occupants who straint to tip or move in a collision or sud-
signed to automatically turn OFF when the are properly seated and using the seat belt den stop. This can also result in the front
vehicle is operated under some conditions as outlined in this manual should not passenger air bag and front passenger
as described below in accordance with U.S. cause the front passenger air bag and supplemental knee air bag inflating in a
regulations. If the front passenger air bag front passenger supplemental knee air crash instead of being OFF. For additional
and front passenger supplemental knee bag to be automatically turned OFF. For information, see “Child restraints” (P. 1-21).
air bag are OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. small adults it may be turned OFF, however If the front passenger seat is not occupied,
The driver air bag and other air bags in your if the occupant takes his/her weight off the the front passenger air bag and front pas-
vehicle are not part of this system. seat cushion (for example, by not sitting senger supplemental knee air bag are de-
The purpose of the regulation is to help upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or signed not to inflate in a crash. However,
reduce the risk of injury or death from an by otherwise being out of position), this heavy objects placed on the seat could re-
inflating air bag to certain front passenger could cause the sensor to turn the front sult in air bag inflation, because of the ob-
seat occupants, such as children, by requir- passenger air bag and front passenger ject’s weight detected by the occupant
ing the air bag to be automatically turned supplemental knee air bag OFF. Always be classification sensor. Other conditions
OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt could also result in air bag inflation, such as
requirements. properly for the most effective protection if a child is standing on the seat, or if two
by the seat belt and supplemental air bag. children are on the seat, contrary to the
The occupant classification sensor in this instructions in this manual. Always be sure
vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and
children be properly restrained in a rear that you and all vehicle occupants are
detect an occupant and objects on the seated and restrained properly.
seat by weight. For example, if a child is in seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap-
the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad- propriate child restraints and booster Using the front passenger air bag status
vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If light, you can monitor when the front pas-
the front passenger air bag and front pas- this is not possible, the occupant classifica- senger air bag and front passenger
senger supplemental knee air bag OFF in tion sensor is designed to operate as de- supplemental knee air bag are automati-
accordance with the regulations. Also, if a scribed above to turn the front passenger cally turned OFF.
child restraint of the type specified in the air bag and front passenger supplemental
regulations is on the seat, its weight and knee air bag OFF for specified child re-
straints as required by the regulations. Fail-

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the check system status by using a special • Make sure that a child restraint or other
front passenger air bag status light is illu- tool. However, until you have confirmed object is not pressing against the rear of
minated (indicating that the front passen- with a dealer that your air bag is working the seatback.
ger air bag and front passenger supple- properly, reposition the occupant or child • Make sure that a rear passenger is not
mental knee air bag are OFF), it could be restraint in a rear seat. pushing or pulling on the back of the front
that the person is a small adult, or is not The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and passenger seat.
sitting on the seat properly or not using the front passenger air bag status light will • Make sure that the front passenger seat
seat belt properly. take a few seconds to register a change in or seatback is not forced back against an
If a child restraint must be used in the front the front passenger seat status. This is nor- object on the seat or floor behind it.
seat, the front passenger air bag status mal system operation and does not indi- • Make sure that there is no object placed
light may or may not be illuminated, de- cate a malfunction. under the front passenger seat.
pending on the size of the child and the If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-
type of child restraint being used. If the air Steps
ger air bag system, the supplemental air
bag status light is not illuminated (indicat- bag warning light , located in the me- 1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”
ing that the front passenger air bag and ter and gauges area of the instrument (P. 1-2) section of this manual. Sit upright,
front passenger supplemental knee air panel, will be illuminated (blinking or leaning against the seatback, and cen-
bag might inflate in a crash), it could be that steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is tered on the seat cushion with your feet
the child restraint or seat belt is not being recommended that you visit a NISSAN comfortably extended to the floor.
used properly. Make sure that the child re- dealer for this service.
straint is installed properly, the seat belt is 2. Make sure there are no objects on your
used properly and the occupant is posi- Normal operation lap.
tioned properly. If the air bag status light is In order for the occupant classification 3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the
still not illuminated, reposition the occu- sensor system to classify the front passen- “Seat belts” (P. 1-10) section of this
pant or child restraint in a rear seat. ger based on weight, please follow the pre- manual. Front passenger seat belt
If the front passenger air bag status light cautions and steps outlined below: buckle status is monitored by the occu-
will not illuminate even though you believe Precautions pant classification system, and is used
that the child restraint, the seat belts and as an input to determine occupancy
• Make sure that there are no objects status. So, it is highly recommended that
the occupant are properly positioned, it is weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on
recommended that you take your vehicle the front passenger fasten their seat
the seat or placed in the seatback pocket. belt.
to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds However, if the occupant is not a small NOTE:
allowing the system to classify the front adult, then this may be due to the following
passenger before the vehicle is put into conditions that may be interfering with the A system check will be performed during
motion. weight sensors: which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
5. Ensure proper classification by checking • Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning initially.
the front passenger air bag status light. against the seatback, and centered on
the seat cushion with his/her feet com- If the light is still ON after this, the person
NOTE: fortably extended to the floor. should be advised not to ride in the front
• A child restraint or other object pressing passenger seat and the vehicle should be
This vehicle’s occupant classification checked as soon as possible. It is recom-
sensor system generally keeps the clas- against the rear of the seatback.
sification locked during driving, so it is • A rear passenger pushing or pulling on this service.
important that you confirm that the the back of the front passenger seat.
front passenger is properly classified • Forcing the front seat or seatback 2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child
prior to driving. However, the occupant against an object on the seat or floor be- or child restraint occupying the front
classification sensor may recalculate the hind it. passenger seat.
weight of the occupant under some con- • An object placed under the front passen- This may be due to the following condi-
ditions (both while driving and when ger seat. tions that may be interfering with the
stopped), so front passenger seat occu- weight sensors:
• An object placed between the seat cush-
pants should continue to remain seated • Small adult or child is not sitting upright,
ion and center console or between the
as outlined above. leaning against the seatback, and cen-
seat cushion and the door.
Troubleshooting tered on the seat cushion with his/her
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a feet comfortably extended to the floor.
If you think the front passenger air bag stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
status light is incorrect: correct any of the above conditions. Re- • The child restraint is not properly in-
start the vehicle and wait 1 minute. stalled, as outlined in “Child restraints”
1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying (P. 1-21).
the front passenger seat:
• An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)
• Occupant is a small adult — the air bag light hanging on the seat or placed in the seat-
is functioning as intended. The front pas- back pocket.
senger air bag and front passenger supple-
mental knee air bag are suppressed.
• A child restraint or other object pressing 3. If the light is OFF with no front passenger • Do not use water or acidic cleaners
against the rear of the seatback. and no objects on the front passenger (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This
• A rear passenger pushing or pulling on seat, the vehicle should be checked. It is can damage the seat or occupant
the back of the front passenger seat. recommended that you visit a NISSAN classification sensor. This can also
• Forcing the front seat or seatback dealer as soon as possible. affect the operation of the air bag
against an object on the seat or floor be- Other supplemental front-impact air system and result in serious personal
hind it. bag precautions injury.
• An object placed under the front passen- • Immediately after inflation, several
ger seat. WARNING front air bag system components will
• An object placed between the seat cush- be hot. Do not touch them; you may
• Do not place any objects on the severely burn yourself.
ion and center console. steering wheel pad or on the instru-
ment panel. Also, do not place any • No unauthorized changes should be
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
objects between any occupant and made to any components or wiring
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
the steering wheel or instrument of the supplemental air bag system.
correct any of the above conditions. Re-
panel. Such objects may become This is to prevent accidental inflation
start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
dangerous projectiles and cause in- of the supplemental air bag or dam-
NOTE: jury if the front air bags inflate. age to the supplemental air bag
system.
A system check will be performed during • Do not place objects with sharp
edges on the seat. Also, do not place • Do not make unauthorized changes
which the front passenger air bag status
heavy objects on the seat that will to your vehicle's electrical system,
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
leave permanent impressions in the suspension system or front end
initially.
seat. Such objects can damage the structure. This could affect proper
If the light is still OFF after this, the small operation of the front air bag system.
seat or occupant classification sen-
adult, child or child restraint should be re-
sor (weight sensor). This can affect
positioned in the rear seat and the vehicle
the operation of the air bag system
should be checked as soon as possible. It is
and result in serious personal injury.
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

• Tampering with the front air bag sys- • No unauthorized changes should be When selling your vehicle, we request that
tem may result in serious personal made to any components or wiring you inform the buyer about the front air
injury. Tampering includes changes of the seat belt system. This may af- bag system and guide the buyer to the
to the steering wheel and the instru- fect the front air bag system. Tam- appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.
ment panel assembly by placing ma- pering with the seat belt system may
terial over the steering wheel pad result in serious personal injury.
and above the instrument panel or • It is recommended that you visit a
by installing additional trim material NISSAN dealer for work on and
around the air bag system. around the front air bag. It is also rec-
• Removing or modifying the front ommended that you visit a NISSAN
passenger seat may affect the func- dealer for installation of electrical
tion of the air bag system and result equipment. The Supplemental Re-
in serious personal injury. straint System (SRS) wiring har-
• Modifying or tampering with the nesses* should not be modified or
front passenger seat may result in disconnected. Unauthorized electri-
serious personal injury. For example, cal test equipment and probing de-
do not change the front seats by vices should not be used on the air
placing material on the seat cushion bag system.
or by installing additional trim mate- • A cracked windshield should be re-
rial, such as seat covers, on the seat placed immediately by a qualified re-
that are not specifically designed to pair facility. A cracked windshield
assure proper air bag operation. Ad- could affect the function of the
ditionally, do not stow any objects supplemental air bag system.
under the front passenger seat or the
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
seat cushion and seatback. Such ob-
yellow and orange for easy identification.
jects may interfere with the proper
operation of the occupant classifica-
tion sensor (weight sensor).

though they may inflate if the forces in an- outboard seating positions. They can help
other type of collision are similar to those of save lives and reduce serious injuries. How-
a higher severity impact. They are de- ever, an inflating side air bag and curtain air
signed to inflate on the side where the ve- bag may cause abrasions or other injuries.
hicle is impacted. They may not inflate in Side air bags and curtain air bags do not
certain side collisions. provide restraint to the lower body.
Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate The seat belts should be correctly worn
in certain types of rollover collisions or near and the driver, front passenger and rear
rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move- outboard occupants seated upright as far
ments (for example, during severe off- as practical away from the side air bag.
roading) may cause the curtain air bags to Rear seat passengers should be seated as
inflate. far away as practical from the door finish-
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always ers and side roof rails. The side air bags and
an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to
LRS3142 help protect the occupants. Because of
curtain air bag operation.
Front and rear outboard this, the force of the side air bag and curtain
When the side air bags and curtain air bags air bag inflating can increase the risk of
seat-mounted side-impact inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, injury if the occupant is too close to, or is
supplemental air bag and followed by the release of smoke. This against, these air bag modules during in-
roof-mounted curtain smoke is not harmful and does not indi- flation. The side air bag will deflate quickly
side-impact and rollover cate a fire. Care should be taken not to after the collision is over.
inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
supplemental air bag systems choking. Those with a history of a breath- The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a
The side air bags are located in the outside ing condition should get fresh air promptly. short time.
of the seatback of the front and rear out- The side air bags and curtain air bags
Side air bags, along with the use of seat
board seats. The curtain air bags are lo- operate only when the ignition switch is
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
cated in the side roof rails. All of the infor- placed in the ON position.
the chest and pelvic area of the front and
mation, cautions and warnings in this
rear outboard occupants. Curtain air bags
manual must be followed. The side air
help to cushion the impact force to the
bags and curtain air bags are designed to
head of occupants in the front and rear
inflate in higher severity side collisions, al-

After placing the ignition switch in the • Do not make unauthorized changes When selling your vehicle, we request that
ON position, the supplemental air bag to your vehicle's electrical system, you inform the buyer about the side air bag
warning light illuminates. The supple- suspension system or side panel. and curtain air bag systems and guide the
mental air bag warning light will turn off This could affect proper operation of buyer to the appropriate sections in this
after about 7 seconds if the system is the side air bag and curtain air bag Owner's Manual.
operational. systems.
• Tampering with the side air bag sys-
WARNING
tem may result in serious personal
• Do not place any objects near the injury. For example, do not change
seatback of the front and rear seats. the front and rear seats by placing
Also, do not place any objects (an material near the seatbacks or by in-
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front stalling additional trim material,
and rear door finisher and the front such as seat covers, around the side
and rear seat. Such objects may be- air bag.
come dangerous projectiles and • It is recommended that you visit a
cause injury if a side air bag inflate. NISSAN dealer for work on and
• Right after inflation, several side air around the side air bag and curtain
bag and curtain air bag system com- air bag. It is also recommended that
ponents will be hot. Do not touch you visit a NISSAN dealer for installa-
them; you may severely burn tion of electrical equipment. The SRS
yourself. wiring harnesses* should not be
• No unauthorized changes should be modified or disconnected. Unauthor-
made to any components or wiring ized electrical test equipment and
of the side air bag and curtain air bag probing devices should not be used
systems. This is to prevent damage on the side air bag or curtain air bag
to or accidental inflation of the side system.
air bag and curtain air bag or dam- * The SRS wiring harness connectors are
age to the side air bag and curtain air yellow and orange for easy identification.
bag systems.

The knee air bag helps to cushion the im-
pact force on the knees of the driver and
passenger. It can help reduce serious inju-
ries. However, an inflating knee air bag may
cause abrasions or other injuries. The knee
air bag provides restraint to the lower body.
The knee air bag inflates quickly in order to
help protect the occupants. Because of
this, the force of the knee air bag inflating
can increase the risk of injury if the occu-
pant is too close to, or is against, this air bag
module during inflation. The knee air bag
will deflate quickly after the collision is over
OR the knee air bag will remain inflated for
LRS3326 LRS3325 a short time.
Driver’s side Passenger’s side
The knee air bag operates only when the
Driver and passenger Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always ignition switch is placed in the ON
supplemental knee air bag an indication of proper knee air bag position.
operation.
The knee air bag is located in the knee After placing the ignition switch in the
bolster, on the driver’s and passenger’s When the knee air bag inflates, a fairly loud ON position, the supplemental air bag
side. All of the information, cautions and noise may be heard, followed by release of warning light illuminates. The supple-
warnings in this manual apply and must smoke. This smoke is not harmful and mental air bag warning light will turn off
be followed. The knee air bag is designed does not indicate a fire. Care should be after about 7 seconds if the system is
to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irrita- operational.
although it may inflate if the forces in an- tion and choking. Those with a history of a
other type of collision are similar to those of breathing condition should get fresh air
a higher severity frontal impact. It may not promptly.
inflate in certain collisions.

WARNING • It is recommended that you visit a • If the vehicle becomes involved in a
NISSAN dealer for work on and collision but pretensioner(s) are not
• Do not place any objects between the around the knee air bag. It is also rec- activated, be sure to have the preten-
knee bolster and the driver’s or pas- ommended that you visit a NISSAN sioner system checked and, if neces-
senger’s seat. Such objects may be- dealer for installation of electrical sary, replaced. It is recommended
come dangerous projectiles and equipment. The SRS wiring har- that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
cause injury if a knee air bag inflates. nesses* should not be modified or service.
• Right after inflation, the knee air bag disconnected. Unauthorized electri- • No unauthorized changes should be
system components will be hot. Do cal test equipment and probing de- made to any components or wiring
not touch them; you may severely vices should not be used on the knee of the pretensioner system. This is to
burn yourself. air bag system. prevent damage to or accidental ac-
• No unauthorized changes should be *The SRS wiring harness or connectors are tivation of the pretensioner(s). Tam-
made to any components or wiring yellow or orange for easy identification. pering with the pretensioner system
of the knee air bag system. This is to may result in serious personal injury.
prevent damage to or accidental in- When selling your vehicle, we request that
• It is recommended that you visit a
flation of the knee air bag system. you inform the buyer about the knee air
NISSAN dealer for work around and
bag system and guide the buyer to the
• Do not make unauthorized changes on the pretensioner system. It is also
appropriate sections in this manual.
to your vehicle's electrical system or recommended that you visit a
suspension system. This could affect NISSAN dealer for installation of elec-
proper operation of the knee air bag Seat belt with pretensioner(s) trical equipment. Unauthorized elec-
system. (front seats) trical test equipment and probing
• Tampering with the knee air bag sys- devices should not be used on the
tem may result in serious personal WARNING pretensioner system.
injury. For example, do not change • The pretensioner(s) cannot be re- • If you need to dispose of the preten-
the driver or passenger knee bolster used after activation. They must be sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-
or install additional trim material replaced together with the retractor ommended that you visit a NISSAN
around the knee air bag. and buckle as a unit. dealer for this service. Incorrect dis-
posal procedures could cause per-
sonal injury.

The pretensioner system may activate The supplemental air bag warning light
with the supplemental air bag system in is used to indicate malfunctions in the
certain types of collisions. Working with the pretensioner(s) system. For additional in-
seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help formation, see “Supplemental air bag
tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be- warning light” (P. 1-64). If the operation of the
comes involved in certain types of colli- supplemental air bag warning light indi-
sions, helping to restrain front seat cates there is a malfunction, have the sys-
occupants. tem checked. It is recommended that you
The pretensioner(s) are encased with the visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
seat belt retractor. These seat belts are When selling your vehicle, we request that
used the same way as conventional seat you inform the buyer about the preten-
belts. sioner system and guide the buyer to the
When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re- appropriate sections in this Owner's
leased and a loud noise may be heard. This Manual.
LRS3235
smoke is not harmful and does not indi-
cate a fire. Care should be taken not to 1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (located on
inhale it, as it may cause irritation and the sun visors)
choking. Those with a history of a breath- SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
ing condition should get fresh air promptly. LABELS
After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load Warning labels about the supplemental
limiters allow the seat belt to release web- front-impact air bag system are placed in
bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
the chest.
WARNING
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may
cause serious injury or death.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON WARNING
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates for about 7 seconds and If the supplemental air bag warning
then turns off. This means the system is light is on, it could mean that the front
operational. air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,
If any of the following conditions occur, the knee air bag and/or pretensioner sys-
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, tems will not operate in an accident. To
knee air bag and pretensioner systems help avoid injury to yourself or others,
need servicing: have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you
• The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds. visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
• The supplemental air bag warning light Repair and replacement
flashes intermittently.
procedure
LRS0100 • The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all. The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING bags, knee air bag and pretensioner(s) are
Under these conditions, the front air bag,
LIGHT side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag or
designed to inflate on a one-time-only ba-
The supplemental air bag warning light, sis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the
pretensioner systems may not operate
displaying in the instrument panel, supplemental air bag warning light re-
properly. They must be checked and re-
monitors the circuits for the Air bag Control mains illuminated after inflation has oc-
paired. It is recommended that you visit a
Unit (ACU), satellite sensors, crash zone curred. These systems should be repaired
NISSAN dealer for this service.
sensor, occupant classification sensor, the and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is
supplemental front-impact air bag, seat- recommended that you visit a NISSAN
mounted side-impact supplemental air dealer for this service.
bag, knee air bag, roof-mounted curtain
side-impact supplemental air bag and
seat belt pretensioner systems. The moni-
tored circuits include air bag systems, pre-
tensioner(s) and all related wiring.

When maintenance work is required on the • If you need to dispose of a supple-
vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, mental air bag or pretensioner sys-
curtain air bags, knee air bag, pretension- tems or scrap the vehicle, it is recom-
er(s) and related parts should be pointed mended that you visit a NISSAN
out to the person performing the mainte- dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
nance. The ignition switch should always could cause personal injury.
be in the LOCK position when working un-
• If there is an impact to your vehicle
der the hood or inside the vehicle.
from any direction, your Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) should be
WARNING
checked to verify it is still functioning
• Once a front air bag, side air bag, cur- correctly. It is recommended that you
tain air bag, or knee air bag has in- visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
flated, the air bag module will not The OCS should be checked even if no
function again and must be replaced. air bags deploy as a result of the im-
Additionally, the activated preten- pact. Failure to verify proper OCS
sioner(s) must also be replaced. The function may result in an improper
air bag module and pretensioner(s) air bag deployment resulting in in-
should be replaced. It is recom- jury or death.
mended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. However, the
air bag module and pretensioner(s)
cannot be repaired.
• The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
air bag, knee air bag systems and the
pretensioner system should be in-
spected if there is any damage to the
front end or side portion of the ve-
hicle. It is recommended that you

2 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Rear switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Rear window and outside mirror
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 (if so equipped) defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Trip computer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
Warning/Indicator lights (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 system (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Warning/Indicator lights (yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Warning/Indicator lights (other) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Vehicle information display (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-23 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
How to use the vehicle information Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . . 2-52
Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) switch
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Vehicle information display warnings Drive Systems OFF switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . 2-53
and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Security systems (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Vehicle security system (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-37
NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Emergency call (SOS) button (if so equipped) . . . 2-56 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Rear Door Alert (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56 Luggage hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
12v outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Cargo cover (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 Roof rack (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Front-door pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Rear-door pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Seatback pockets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61 Personal Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 Luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Console box (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)

Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-10)
Trip computer (if so equipped) (P. 2-9)
Vehicle information display (if so
equipped) (P. 2-23)
5. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-40)
6. Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-42)
7. Center display controls (if so equipped)
(P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-43)
Audio controls (P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-43)
8. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)
9. Center display (P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-43)
10. Passenger's supplemental air bag
(P. 1-42)
11. Glove box (P. 2-60)
12. Front passenger supplemental knee air
bag (P. 1-42)
13. Climate controls (P. 4-32, 4-40)
Heated seat switches (if so equipped)
(P. 2-51)
14. Shift lever (P. 5-17)
15. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-11)
16. Electronic parking brake (if so
equipped) (P. 5-23)
Automatic brake hold switch (if so
LII2662 equipped) (P. 5-25)
1. Vents (P. 4-31) 3. Driver's supplemental air bag (P. 1-42) 17. Power outlet (P. 2-58)
2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/ Horn (P. 2-50) USB connection port (P. 4-2, 4-43)
turn signal switch (P. 2-43) AUX jack (if so equipped) (P. 4-2, 4-43)
2-2 Instruments and controls

18. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System Refer to the page number indicated in
(P. 4-2, 4-67) parentheses for operating details.
Cruise control switches (P. 5-56)
(P. 1-42)
20. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel lock
lever (P. 3-26)
21. Hood release (P. 3-21)
Fuel-filler door release (P. 3-25)
22. Steering wheel switches for audio
control (P. 4-2, 2-23)
Control panel and vehicle information
display switches (if so equipped) (P. 4-2)
23. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) switch
Drive Systems OFF switch (if so
equipped) (P. 2-53)
switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-55)
Instrument panel pocket (if so
equipped) (P. 2-60)
Enter/select switch for trip computer
* Refer to the separate NissanConnect®
Owner's Manual (if so equipped).
Instruments and controls 2-3

METERS AND GAUGES
LIC4649
Type A (if so equipped)
1. Tachometer 2. Warning and indicator lights
Vehicle information display 3. Speedometer
Odometer 4. Trip reset switch
Twin trip odometer Instrument brightness control knob
Fuel gauge

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
This vehicle is equipped with a speedom-
eter and odometer. The speedometer is
located on the right side the meter cluster.
The odometer is located within the vehicle
information display (Type A — if so
equipped) or the trip computer (Type B —
if so equipped) to the left of the
speedometer.
LIC4284
Type B (if so equipped)
1. Tachometer 4. Trip reset switch
2. Trip computer Instrument brightness control knob
Odometer 5. Warning and indicator lights
Twin trip odometer
3. Speedometer

LIC2255 LIC4671 LIC3595
Speedometer Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped)

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.
Odometer/Twin trip odometer Changing the display
The odometer and the twin trip odometer Push the TRIP RESET switch O 2 on the right
O1 are displayed in the vehicle information side of the instrument panel to change the
display (Type A) (if so equipped) or the trip display as follows:
computer (Type B) (if so equipped) when Trip → Trip → Odometer Mile-
the ignition switch is placed in the ON age → Trip
position.
Resetting the trip odometer
The odometer records the total distance
Pushing the TRIP RESET switch O
2 for more
the vehicle has been driven.
than 1 second resets the currently dis-
The twin trip odometer records the displayed trip odometer to zero.
tance of individual trips.
Average fuel economy information is also
available. For additional information, see
“Trip computer” (P. 2-9).
LIC3562 LIC3536 LIC3564
Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) Type A (if so equipped)
TACHOMETER Type B (if so equipped): The tachometer is FUEL GAUGE
located on the left side of the meter cluster. The gauge indicates the approximate fuel
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev level in the tank.
CAUTION
engine into the red zone O
1 .
The gauge may move slightly during brak-
Type A (if so equipped): To access the ta- When engine speed approaches the ing, turning, acceleration, or going up or
chometer, use the and on the red zone, shift to a higher gear or re- down hills.
steering wheel to navigate to the “Gauges” duce engine speed. Operating the en-
Type A (if so equipped): The low fuel warn-
display. For additional information, see gine in the red zone may cause serious
ing message shows in the vehicle informa-
“How to use the vehicle information dis- engine damage.
tion display when the amount of fuel in the
play” (P. 2-23). tank is getting low.
Type B (if so equipped): The low fuel warn-
ing light illuminates when the amount of
fuel in the tank is getting low.
CAUTION NOTE:
• The DTE value after refill is estimated
• If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the based on recent fuel economy and
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may amount of fuel added.
come on. Refuel as soon as possible. • If a small amount of fuel is added, or
After a few driving trips, the light the ignition is on during refueling, the
should turn off. If the light remains on display may not be updated.
after a few driving trips, have the ve-
hicle inspected. It is recommended • Conditions that affect the fuel
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this economy will also affect the estimated
service DTE value (city/highway driving, idle
time, remote start time, terrain, sea-
• For additional information, see “Mal- sonal weather, added vehicle weight,
function Indicator Light (MIL)” added deflectors, roof racks, etc.).
(P. 2-19).
LIC3593
Type B (if so equipped) DISTANCE TO EMPTY (DTE)
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg- Displays the estimated distance the ve-
isters 0 (Empty). hicle can be driven before refueling. The
value is calculated based on recent fuel
The indicates that the fuel-filler door economy, the amount of fuel remaining in
is located on the driver's side of the vehicle. the fuel tank, and the actual fuel
consumption.
Changes in driving patterns or conditions
can cause the DTE value to vary. As a result,
the value displayed may differ from the ac-
tual distance that can be driven.
DTE display will change to “---” when the
fuel level in the tank is getting low, prior to
the fuel gauge reaching 0 (Empty).

Average fuel economy → Average speed → Trip distance
Trip time → Trip Distance
The trip distance mode shows the distance
traveled since the last reset. The trip dis-
Average fuel economy (mpg or tance can be reset by pressing the
km/l) change/trip switch for more than approxi-
The average fuel economy mode shows mately 1 second.
the average fuel economy since the last
reset. Resetting is done by pressing the Shipping mode
change/reset switch for more than ap- This message may appear if the extended
proximately 1 second. The display is up- storage switch is not pushed in. When this
dated every 30 seconds. At about the first message appears, push in the extended
1/3 mi (500 m) after a reset, the display storage switch to turn off the warning. For
shows (----). additional information, see “Extended stor-
LIC3594 age switch” (P. 2-59).
Average speed (mph or km/h)
TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped) The average speed mode shows the aver-
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON age vehicle speed since last reset. Reset-
position, modes of the trip computer can ting is done by pressing the change/reset
be selected by pushing the TRIP RESET switch for more than approximately 1 sec-
switch OA . ond. The display is updated every 30 sec-
Each time the TRIP RESET switch is pushed, onds. The first 30 seconds after a reset, the
the display changes as follows: display shows (----).
Trip A → Trip B → Odometer Trip time

The switch for the trip computer is The trip time mode shows the time since
located on the lower left side of the instru- the last reset. The displayed time can be
ment panel. reset by pressing the change/trip switch
Each time the switch is pushed, the for more than approximately 1 second.
display will change as follows:

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS
AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Warning/Indicator light (red) Warning/Indicator light (yellow) Warning/Indicator light (other)
or Brake warning light or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) Automatic brake hold indicator light
(if so equipped) warning light (white/green) (if so equipped)
Charge warning light Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) CRUISE indicator light (green)
system warning light (if so equipped) (if so equipped)
Door open warning light (if so equipped) Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Front fog light indicator light (green)
Pedestrian Detection system warning light (if so equipped)
(if so equipped)
or Electronic parking brake Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator light High Beam Assist indicator light (green)
indicator light (if so equipped) (if so equipped) (if so equipped)
Engine oil pressure warning light or Electronic parking brake High beam indicator light (blue)
warning light (if so equipped)
High temperature warning light Engine start operation indicator light Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator
(if so equipped) (if so equipped) light (green) (if so equipped)
LED Headlight system warning light Front passenger air bag status light NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light
(if so equipped) (green) (if so equipped)
Master warning light (if so equipped) Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator SET indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
light (if so equipped)

Rear seat belt warning light and chime Low fuel warning light (if so equipped) Side light and headlight indicator light
(if so equipped) (green)
Seat belt warning light and chime Low tire pressure warning light SPORT mode indicator light (green)
(if so equipped)
Security indicator light (if so equipped) Low windshield-washer fluid warning light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights (green)
(if so equipped)
Supplemental air bag warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Master warning light (if so equipped)
NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light

(if so equipped)
Power steering warning light
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) warning light

(if so equipped)
Shift P (Park) warning light (if so equipped)

Slip indicator light

indicator light
CHECKING LIGHTS WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (red) Low brake fluid warning light
With all doors closed, apply the parking For additional information on warnings When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
brake, fasten the seat belts and place the and indicators, see “Vehicle information position, the light warns of a low brake fluid
ignition switch in the ON position without display” (P. 2-23). level. If the light comes on while the engine
starting the engine. The following lights (if is running with the parking brake not ap-
so equipped) will come on: or Brake warning plied, stop the vehicle and perform the
light (if so following:
, or , , , , ,
, , equipped) 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake
This light functions for both the parking fluid as necessary. For additional infor-
The following lights (if so equipped) will mation, see “Brake fluid” (P. 8-9).
come on briefly and then go off: brake and the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
or , , , , ,
warning system checked. It is recom-
If any light does not come on or operate in When the ignition switch is placed in the ON mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
a way other than described, it may indicate position, this light comes on when the for this service.
a burned-out bulb and/or a system mal- parking brake is applied.
function. Have the system checked. It is

WARNING Charge warning light or Electronic parking
brake indicator
• Your brake system may not be work-
ing properly if the warning light is on.
If this light comes on while the engine is light (if so
running, it may indicate the charging sys- equipped)
Driving could be dangerous. If you tem is not functioning properly. Turn the
judge it to be safe, drive carefully to engine off and check the generator belt. If This light illuminates when the electronic
the nearest service station for re- the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the parking brake system is operating.
pairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle light remains on, have the system checked. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
towed because driving it could be It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN position, the electronic parking brake indi-
dangerous. dealer for this service. cator light illuminates. When the engine is
• Pressing the brake pedal with the en- started and the parking brake is released,
gine stopped and/or a low brake CAUTION the indicator light turns off.
fluid level may increase your stop-
ping distance and braking will re- • Do not ground electrical accessories If the parking brake is not released, the
quire greater pedal effort as well as directly to the battery terminal. Do- electronic parking brake indicator light re-
pedal travel. ing so will bypass the variable volt- mains illuminated. Ensure the electronic
age control system and the vehicle parking brake indicator light has turned off
• If the brake fluid level is below the before driving.
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake battery may not charge completely.
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the For additional information, see “Vari- If the electronic parking brake indicator
brake system has been checked. It is able voltage control system” (P. 8-13). light illuminates or flashes while the elec-
recommended that you visit a • Do not continue driving if the genera- tronic parking brake system warning light
NISSAN dealer for this service. tor belt is loose, broken or missing. or (yellow) illuminates, it may in-
dicate that the electronic parking brake
Door open warning light (if system is not functioning properly. Have
so equipped) the system checked. It is recommended
This light comes on when any of the doors service.
are not closed securely while the ignition
switch is in the ON position. For additional information, see “Parking
brake” (P. 5-22).

Engine oil pressure dicates that the high temperature sensor Master warning light (if so
warning light in the engine coolant system is equipped)
operational.
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If This light illuminates red when various ve-
the light flickers or comes on during nor- When driving, the high temperature warn- hicle information display warnings appear.
mal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, ing light may turn off. This indicates that the
engine coolant temperature is within the For additional information, see “Vehicle in-
stop the engine immediately and call a formation display” (P. 2-23).
NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair normal range.
shop.
CAUTION Rear seat belt warning light
The engine oil pressure warning light is and chime (if so equipped)
not designed to indicate a low oil level. If the high temperature warning light
Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For This warning light appears for 65 seconds
illuminates while the engine is running, after the ignition is placed in the ON posi-
additional information, see “Engine oil” it may indicate the engine temperature
(P. 8-5). tion and the engine is started.
is extremely high. Stop the vehicle
safely as soon as possible. If the vehicle This warning light shows the status of the
CAUTION is overheated, continuing vehicle op- three rear seat belts. When one of the rear
eration may seriously damage the en- seat belts are buckled, the corresponding
Running the engine with the engine oil gine. For additional information, see “If rear seat belt indicator will appear white or
pressure warning light on could cause your vehicle overheats” (P. 6-12). not illuminate for models with a trip com-
serious damage to the engine almost puter. When one of the rear seat belts are
immediately. Such damage is not cov- LED Headlight system unbuckled, the corresponding rear seat
ered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited belt indicator will appear red.
Warranty. Turn off the engine as soon warning light (if so
as it is safe to do so. equipped) After a change in buckle status, a chime will
sound and the warning will appear for an-
This light illuminates when there is an error
other 65 seconds.
High temperature warning with the system.
light (if so equipped) For additional information, see “Headlight
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON and turn signal switch” (P. 2-43).
position, the high temperature warning
light illuminates and then turns off. This in-

Seat belt warning light and • The supplemental air bag warning light WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS
chime remains on after approximately 7 (yellow)
seconds.
The light and chime remind you to fasten For additional information on warnings
the driver and front passenger seat belts. • The supplemental air bag warning light
and indicators, see “Vehicle information
flashes intermittently.
For additional information, see “Seat belts” display” (P. 2-23).
• The supplemental air bag warning light
(P. 1-10). does not come on at all. or Anti-lock Braking
Security indicator light It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN System (ABS)
dealer for these services. warning light
This light blinks when the ignition switch is Unless checked and repaired, the supple- When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
placed in the OFF or LOCK position. mental restraint system (air bag system) position, the ABS warning light illuminates
and/or the pretensioner(s) may not func- and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is
The blinking security indicator light indi- tion properly. For additional information,
cates that the security systems equipped operational.
see “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)”
on the vehicle are operational. (P. 1-42). If the ABS warning light illuminates while
For additional information, see “Security the engine is running or while driving, it
systems” (P. 2-37). WARNING may indicate the ABS is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked. It is
Supplemental air bag If the supplemental air bag warning recommended that you visit a NISSAN
light is on, it could mean that the front dealer for this service.
warning light air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON and/or pretensioner systems will not function is turned off. The brake system
position, the supplemental air bag warning operate in an accident. To help avoid then operates normally but without anti-
light illuminates for about 7 seconds and injury to yourself or others, have your lock assistance. For additional information,
then turns off. This means the system is vehicle checked as soon as possible. It see “Brake system” (P. 5-132).
operational. is recommended that you visit a
If any of the following conditions occur, the NISSAN dealer for this service.
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,
and pretensioner seat belt systems need
servicing:
Automatic Emergency This light illuminates when the AEB with or Electronic
Braking (AEB) system Pedestrian Detection system is set to off in parking brake
the vehicle information display (if so
warning light (if so equipped), set to off using the Drive Sys-
warning light (if
equipped) tems OFF switch (if so equipped), or the so equipped)
This light comes on when the ignition Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is The electronic parking brake system warn-
switch is placed in the ON position. It turns turned off. ing light functions for the electronic park-
off after the engine is started. If the light illuminates when the AEB with ing brake system. If the warning light illumi-
This light illuminates when the AEB system Pedestrian Detection system is on, it may nates, it may indicate the electronic
is set to off in the vehicle information dis- indicate that the system is unavailable. For parking brake system is not functioning
play (if so equipped), set to off using the additional information, see “Automatic properly. Have the system checked. It is
Drive Systems OFF switch (if so equipped), Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian recommended that you visit a NISSAN
or the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys- Detection” (P. 5-98) and “Intelligent Forward dealer for this service.
tem is turned off. Collision Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-109). For additional information, see “Parking
If the light illuminates when the AEB sys- brake” (P. 5-22).
tem is on, it may indicate that the system is Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
unavailable. For additional information, see indicator light (if so Engine start operation
“Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)” equipped) indicator light (if so
(P. 5-88) and “Intelligent Forward Collision This indicator light will illuminate when the equipped)
Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-109). BSW system is operating. If the light illumi- For vehicles equipped with push-button ig-
nates yellow while the system is on, it may nition this indicator illuminates when the
Automatic Emergency indicate a malfunction. Have the system ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ON
Braking (AEB) with checked. It is recommended that you visit a position with the shift lever in the P (Park)
Pedestrian Detection NISSAN dealer for this service. position.
system warning light (if so For additional information, see “Blind Spot This indicator means that the engine will
equipped) Warning (BSW)” (P. 5-35) and “Rear Cross start by pushing the push-button ignition
Traffic Alert (RCTA)” (P. 5-46). switch with the brake pedal depressed.
This light comes on when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. It turns
off after the engine is started.
Front passenger air bag Low tire pressure warning not automatically turn off when the tire
status light light pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in-
flated to the recommended pressure,
The front passenger air bag status light will Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres- the vehicle must be driven at speeds
be lit and the passenger front air bag will be sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni- above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the
off depending on how the front passenger tors the tire pressure of all tires except the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure
seat is being used. spare. warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge
For additional information, see “Front pas- The low tire pressure warning light warns to check the tire pressure.
senger air bag and status light” (P. 1-53). of low tire pressure or indicates that the For vehicles without a vehicle information
TPMS is not functioning properly. display, the low tire pressure warning light
Lane Departure Warning After the ignition switch is placed in the ON remains illuminated until the tires are in-
(LDW) indicator light (if so position, this light illuminates for about 1 flated to the recommended COLD tire
equipped) second and turns off. pressure. The “CHECK TIRE PRES” warning
If this indicator light illuminates yellow message is displayed each time the igni-
Low tire pressure warning
while the system is on, it may indicate a tion switch is placed in the ON position as
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire long as the low tire pressure warning light
malfunction. Have the system checked. It is pressure, the warning light will illumi-
recommended that you visit a NISSAN remains illuminated.
nate. The “CHECK TIRE PRES” (vehicles
dealer for this service. without a vehicle information display) For vehicles with a vehicle information dis-
For additional information, see “Lane De- also appears in the trip computer or the play, the “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn-
parture Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-28). “Tire Pressure Low – Add Air” (vehicles ing appears each time the ignition switch is
with a vehicle information display) ap- placed in the ON position as long as the low
tire pressure warning light remains
Low fuel warning light (if so pears in the vehicle information display.
illuminated.
equipped) When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust For additional information, see “Vehicle in-
This light comes on when the fuel level in formation display” (P. 2-23), “Tire Pressure
the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon the tire pressure of all four tires to the
recommended COLD tire pressure shown Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P. 5-5) and
as it is convenient, preferably before the (P. 6-3).
fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be on the Tire and Loading Information la-
a small reserve of fuel in the tank when bel located in the driver’s door opening.
the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). The low tire pressure warning light does

TPMS malfunction • If the light does not illuminate with flat and all tires are properly inflated,
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the the ignition switch placed in the ON have the vehicle checked. It is recom-
low tire pressure warning light will flash for position, have the vehicle checked as mended that you visit a NISSAN
approximately 1 minute when the ignition soon as possible. It is recommended dealer for this service.
switch is placed in the ON position. The that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this • When using a wheel without the
light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the service. TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
system checked. It is recommended that • If the light illuminates while driving, will not function and the low tire
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. avoid sudden steering maneuvers or pressure warning light will flash for
The "CHECK TIRE PRES" warning message abrupt braking, reduce vehicle approximately 1 minute. The light will
/”Tire Pressure Low— Add Air” warning does speed, pull off the road to a safe loca- remain on after 1 minute. Have your
not appear if the low tire pressure warning tion and stop the vehicle as soon as tires replaced and/or TPMS system
light illuminates to indicate a TPMS possible. Driving with under-inflated reset as soon as possible. It is recom-
malfunction. tires may permanently damage the mended that you visit a NISSAN
For additional information, see “Tire Pres- tires and increase the likelihood of dealer for these services.
sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P. 5-5) and tire failure. Serious vehicle damage • Replacing tires with those not origi-
“Tire pressure” (P. 8-27). could occur and may lead to an acci- nally specified by NISSAN could af-
dent and could result in serious per- fect the proper operation of the
WARNING sonal injury or death. Check the tire TPMS.
pressure for all four tires. Adjust the
• Radio waves could adversely affect tire pressure to the recommended
electric medical equipment. Those COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire CAUTION
who use a pacemaker should contact and Loading Information label lo- • The TPMS is not a substitute for the
the electric medical equipment cated in the driver’s door opening to regular tire pressure check. Be sure
manufacturer for the possible influ- turn the low tire pressure warning to check the tire pressure regularly.
ences before use. light off. If the light still illuminates
while driving after adjusting the tire • If the vehicle is being driven at
pressure, a tire may be flat or the speeds of less than 16 mph (25 km/h),
TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you the TPMS may not operate correctly.
have a flat tire, replace it with a spare • Be sure to install the specified size of
tire as soon as possible. If no tire is tires to the four wheels correctly.

Low windshield-washer control system inspection/maintenance If the warning light illuminates in yellow
fluid warning light (if so test. For additional information, see “Readi- while the engine is stopped, it may be im-
ness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test” possible to free the steering lock or to start
equipped) (P. 10-22). the engine. If the light comes on while the
This light comes on when the windshield- engine is running, you can drive the vehicle.
washer fluid is at a low level. Add Master warning light (if so However, in these cases, have the vehicle
windshield-washer fluid as necessary. For equipped) checked and repaired as soon as possible.
additional information, see “Windshield- It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
washer fluid” (P. 8-10). This light illuminates yellow when various dealer for this service.
vehicle information display warnings
appear. For additional information, see “NISSAN In-
Malfunction Indicator Light telligent Key® System” (P. 3-7).
(MIL) For additional information, see “Vehicle in-
formation display” (P. 2-23).
If this indicator light comes on steady or Power steering warning
blinks while the engine is running, it may light
indicate a potential emission control NISSAN Intelligent Key®
malfunction. warning light (if so WARNING
The MIL may also come on steady if the equipped)
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON • If the engine is not running or is
fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the
position, this light comes on for about 2 turned off while driving, the power
vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure
seconds and then turns off. This light illumi- assist for the steering will not work.
the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
nates or blinks as follows: Steering will be harder to operate.
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3
gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. • The light blinks in yellow when the door is • When the power steering warning
closed with the Intelligent Key left outside light illuminates with the engine run-
After a few driving trips, the light ning, there will be no power assist for
should turn off if no other potential emis- the vehicle and the ignition switch in the
ON position. Make sure that the Intelligent the steering. You will still have control
sion control system malfunction exists. of the vehicle, but the steering will be
Key is inside the vehicle.
If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 harder to operate. Have the power
• The light illuminates in yellow when it steering system checked. It is recom-
seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds
warns of a malfunction with the electrical mended that you visit a NISSAN
when the engine is not running, it indicates
steering lock system or the Intelligent Key dealer for this service.
that the vehicle is not ready for an emission
system.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON This light illuminates when the RAB system You may feel or hear the system working;
position, the power steering warning light is turned off in the vehicle information dis- this is normal.
illuminates. After starting the engine, the play or set to off using the Drive Systems The light will blink for a few seconds after
power steering warning light turns off. This OFF switch. the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.
indicates the power steering is operational. If the light illuminates when the RAB sys- The indicator light also comes on
If the power steering warning light illumi- tem is on, it may indicate that the system is when you place the ignition switch in the
nates while the engine is running, it may unavailable. For additional information, see ON position. The light will turn off after ap-
indicate the power steering is not function- “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-81). proximately 2 seconds if the system is op-
ing properly and may need servicing. Have erational. If the light does not come on
the power steering checked. It is recom- Shift P (Park) warning light have the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for (if so equipped) mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service. this service.
This light blinks red and the key reminder
When the power steering warning light illu- chime sounds if the shift lever is in any
minates with the engine running, there will position other than P (Park) and the ignition Vehicle Dynamic Control
be no power assist for the steering, but you switch is in the OFF position. Return the (VDC) OFF indicator light
will still have control of the vehicle. At this shift lever to P (Park) with the ignition
time, greater steering effort is required to This indicator light comes on when the
switch in the OFF position and the light will VDC is turned off in the vehicle information
operate the steering wheel, especially in turn off. Place the ignition switch in the
sharp turns and at low speeds. display (if so equipped) or by pushing the
LOCK position and the chime will turn off. VDC OFF switch (if so equipped). This indi-
For additional information, see “Power For additional information, see “NISSAN In- cates the VDC has been turned off.
steering” (P. 5-131). telligent Key® System” (P. 3-7).
Turn the VDC on using the vehicle informa-
Slip indicator light tion display (if so equipped) or by restarting
Rear Automatic Braking the engine. For additional information, see
(RAB) warning light (if so “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”
equipped) This indicator light will blink when the Ve- (P. 5-134).
hicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is op-
This light comes on when the ignition erating, thus alerting the driver to the fact
switch is placed in the ON position. It turns that the road surface is slippery and the
off after the engine is started. vehicle is nearing its traction limits.

The VDC light also comes on when the ig- The automatic brake hold indicator light High Beam Assist indicator
nition switch is placed in the ON position. (green) illuminates when the automatic light (green) (if so equipped)
The light will turn off after a period of time if brake hold system is operating.
the system is operational. If the light stays This indicator light illuminates when the
For additional information, see “Automatic headlights come on while the headlight
on or comes on along with the indica- brake hold” (P. 5-25).
tor light while you are driving, have the VDC switch is in the AUTO position with the high
system checked. It is recommended that beams selected. This indicates that the
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CRUISE indicator light high beam assist is operational.
(green) (if so equipped) For additional information, see “Headlight
WARNING The light comes on when the cruise control and turn signal switch” (P. 2-43).
switch is pushed. The light goes out when
VDC should remain on unless freeing a the switch is pushed again. When the High beam indicator light
vehicle from mud or snow. cruise indicator light comes on, the cruise (blue)
While the VDC system is operating, you control system is operational. For addi-
tional information, see “Cruise control” This blue light comes on when the head-
might feel a slight vibration or hear the sys- light high beams are on and goes out when
tem working when starting the vehicle or (P. 5-56).
the low beams are selected.
accelerating, but this is normal.
Front fog light indicator The high beam indicator light also comes
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS light (green) (if so on when the passing signal is activated.
(other) equipped)
For additional information on warnings
Lane Departure Warning
The front fog light indicator light illumi-
and indicators, see “Vehicle information nates when the front fog lights are on. For
(LDW) indicator light (green)
display” (P. 2-23). additional information, see “Fog light (if so equipped)
switch” (P. 2-50). This indicator light will blink when the LDW
Automatic brake hold system is operating.
indicator light (white/green) For additional information, see “Lane De-
(if so equipped) parture Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-28).
The automatic brake hold indicator light
(white) illuminates when the automatic
brake hold system is on standby.
NISSAN Intelligent Key® checked. It is recommended that you visit a Turn signal/hazard
warning light (green) (if so NISSAN dealer for this service. indicator lights (green)
equipped) For additional information, see “Cruise con- The appropriate light flashes when the turn
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON trol” (P. 5-56). signal switch is activated.
position, this light comes on for about 2 NOTE:
seconds and then turns off. This light illumi- Side light and headlight
nates or blinks as follows: indicator light (green) In case of a turn signal light bulb mal-
• The light blinks in green when the Intelli- The side light and headlight indicator light function, the turn signal will flash at a
gent Key battery is running out of power. illuminates when the side light or head- higher frequency when the turn signal
Replace the battery with a new one. For lights are on. If the headlight switch is in the switch is activated.
additional information, see “Battery re- AUTO position, the side light and headlight Both lights flash when the hazard switch is
placement” (P. 8-22). indicator light will illuminate when the turned on.
headlights turn on. For additional informa-
If the light comes on while the engine is For additional information, see “Lights”
tion, see “Headlight and turn signal switch”
running, you can drive the vehicle. However, (P. 8-24).
(P. 2-43).
in these cases, have the vehicle checked
and repaired as soon as possible. It is rec- AUDIBLE REMINDERS
ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer SPORT mode indicator
for this service. light (green) (if so Brake pad wear warning
For additional information, see “NISSAN In- equipped) The disc brake pads have audible wear
telligent Key® System” (P. 3-7). This light illuminates and then turns off warnings. When a disc brake pad requires
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON replacement, it makes a high pitched
SET indicator light (green) position, and when the SPORT mode is scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-
(if so equipped) selected. tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de-
For additional information, see “Drive Sport pressed. Have the brakes checked as soon
This light comes on while the vehicle speed
mode switch” (P. 5-21). as possible if the warning sound is heard. It
is controlled by the cruise control system. If
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
the light blinks while the engine is running,
it may indicate the cruise control system is
not functioning properly. Have the system

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
(if so equipped)
Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch placed in the OFF
position, a chime sounds when the driver's
door is opened if the headlights or parking
lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off or to
AUTO before leaving the vehicle.
NISSAN Intelligent Key® door

chime
The Intelligent Key door chime sounds if
any one of the following improper opera-
tions is found.
LIC4650 LIC3566
• The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle
when locking the doors. The vehicle information display is located HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE
to the left of the speedometer. It displays INFORMATION DISPLAY
• The Intelligent Key is taken outside the
such items as:
vehicle when operating the vehicle. The vehicle information display can be
• Audio Information
When the chime sounds, be sure to check changed using the ,
• Drive Computer Information , and OK buttons located on the steer-
both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key Sys-
tem. For additional information, see • Fuel Economy Information ing wheel.
“NISSAN Intelligent Key® System” (P. 3-7). • Indicators and Warnings
䊊
1 - Use these buttons
• Vehicle and Meter Display Settings to navigate the vehicle information
Parking brake reminder chime • Odometer/twin trip odometer display.
A chime sounds if the parking brake is set
and the vehicle is driven. The chime will
• Gear Position Indicator (P, R, N, D, L) 䊊
2 OK - Change or select an item in the
• Distance To Empty and Fuel Indicator vehicle information display.
stop if the parking brake is released or the
vehicle speed returns to zero. 䊊
3 (if so equipped) — Returns to the
previous menu.

The OK, and buttons also STARTUP DISPLAY SETTINGS
control audio and control panel functions When the vehicle in placed in the ON posi- The setting mode allows you to change the
in some conditions. Most screens and tion the screens that display in the vehicle information displayed in the vehicle infor-
menus offer instruction prompts of the information display include: mation display as well as the model for
steering switch buttons to indicate how to
• Gauges several vehicle functions:
control the vehicle information display.
Dots on the left side of the vehicle informa- • Audio • VDC Setting
tion display will appear if there is more than • Fuel Economy • Driver Assistance
one page of menu items. The OK button • Drive Computer • Customize Display
changes the audio source and the • Vehicle Settings
• Warning Review
buttons also control voice recognition
manual mode. For additional information, • Settings • TPMS Settings
refer to the separate NissanConnect® For additional information on warnings • Maintenance
Owner’s Manual. and indicators, see “Vehicle information • Clock
display warnings and indicators” (P. 2-31). • Unit/Language
To control what items display in the vehicle • Factory Reset
information display, see to “Customize dis-
play” (P. 2-26).
VDC Setting
The VDC Setting menu allows the user to enable or disable the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.
Menu item Explanation

System Allows the user turn the VDC system on or off. For additional information, see “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
system” (P. 5-134).

Driver Assistance
The driver assistance menu allows the user to change the various driving aids and assistance options.
Lane Displays the available lane options.
Lane Depar- Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system on or off. For additional information, see “Lane Departure Warning
ture Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-28).
Blind Spot Displays the available blind spot options.
Blind Spot Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system on or off. For additional information, see “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)”
Warning (P. 5-35).
Side Indicator Allows user to change the brightness of the side indicator.
Brightness
Emergency Brake Displays the available emergency brake options.
Front Allows user to turn the emergency brake on or off. For additional information, see “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)” (P. 5-88) or
“Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection” (P. 5-98).
Rear Allows user to turn the emergency brake on or off. For additional information, see “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-81).
Parking Aids Displays the available parking aids options.
Sonar Displays the available sonar options For additional information, see “Rear Sonar System (RSS)” (P. 5-140).
Rear Sensor Allows user to turn the rear sensor on or off.
Display Allows user to turn the display on or off.
Volume Allows user to adjust the volume to High/Med/Low.
Range Allows user to adjust the range to Far/Mid/Near.
Moving Object Allows user to turn moving object detection on or off. For additional information, see “Moving Object Detection (MOD)” (P. 4-27).
Cross Traffic Allows user to turn Rear Cross Traffic Alert on or off. For additional information, see “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” (P. 5-46).
Driver Attention Alert Allows user to turn the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system on or off. For additional information, see Intelligent Driver Alertness
(I-DA) (P. 5-124).
Timer Alert Allows user to set or reset an alert at a specific time interval.
Low Temperature Alert Allows user to turn the low temperature alert on or off.
Chassis Control Displays the available chassis control options.
Active Trace Control Allows the user to turn the Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) feature on or off. For additional information, see “Chassis Control” (P. 5-137).
Active Engine Brake Allows the user to turn the Intelligent Engine Brake (I-EB) feature on or off. For additional information, see “Chassis Control” (P. 5-137).

Customize Display
The customize display menu allows the user to customize the information that appears in the vehicle information display.

Main Menu Selection Displays available screens that can be shown in the vehicle information display.
Status Allows user to turn the status screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Drive Computer Allows user to turn the drive computer screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Driving Aids Allows user to turn the driving aids screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Tire Pressures Allows user to turn the tire pressures screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Coolant Temp. Allows user to turn the coolant temp. screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Chassis Control Allows user to turn the chassis control screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
ECO Info Settings Displays the available ECO info settings.
ECO Drive Report Select to display this report when the ignition in switch is placed in the ON position.
View History Select to view the vehicle’s history.
Welcome Effect Displays the available welcome effect settings.
Gauges Allows user to turn the gauges effect on or off.
Animation Allows user to turn the animation effect on or off.

Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings allow the user to change the settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, and other vehicle settings.

Rear Door Alert Displays the available Rear Door Alert options. For additional information, see “Rear Door Alert” (P. 2-56).
Horn & Alert When selected, the alert is displayed and the horn sounds.
Alert Only When selected, only the alert is displayed.
OFF When selected, no alert or horn will be active.
Lighting Displays the available lighting settings.
Welcome Headlight Displays the available welcome headlight options.
Welcome & Farewell Allows user to set the headlights to turn on when they approach and leave the vehicle.
Welcome Allows user to set the headlights to turn on when they approach the vehicle.
Farewell Allows user to set the headlights to turn on when they leave the vehicle.
OFF Allows user to set the headlights to turn off when not driving.
Auto Room Lamp Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off.
Light Sensitivity Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle.
Auto Light Allows user to turn the auto light feature on or off.
Light Off Delay Allows user to change the duration of time, from 0 to 180 seconds, that the automatic headlights stay on af-
ter the vehicle is shut off.
Turn Indicator Displays the available turn indicator settings.
3 Flash Pass Allows user to turn the 3 flash pass feature on or off. For additional information, see “Headlight and turn sig-
nal switch” (P. 2-43).
Locking Displays the available locking settings.
Ext. Door Switch Allows user to turn the exterior door switch on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is acti-
vated.

Selective Unlock Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked after the
door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is
pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the
door unlock operation is performed again within 5 seconds. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be
unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once.
Auto Door Unlock Displays the available auto door unlock options.
Shift to P Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
IGN OFF Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off.
OFF Doors will have to be manually unlocked.
Answer Back Horn Allows user to turn the answer back horn feature on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the haz-
ard indicators will flash twice when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key.
Wipers Displays the available wipers settings.
Speed Dependent Allows user to turn the speed dependent feature on or off.
Reverse Link Allows user to turn the reverse link feature on or off.
Wiper with Speed Allows user to turn the wiper with speed feature on or off.
Remote Engine Start Allows user to turn the Remote Engine Start feature on or off. When turned off, the vehicle cannot be started
remotely.
TPMS Settings
The TPMS settings menu allows the user to change the tire pressure units displayed in the vehicle information display.

TPMS Settings Displays available TPMS Settings.
Tire Pressure Unit Allows user to select the tire pressure units that will display in the vehicle information display.

Maintenance
The maintenance menu allows the user to set reminders for various vehicle maintenance items.
WARNING
The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional informa-
tion, see “Changing wheels and tires” (P. 8-35). Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions
affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not
mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks.
Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could
occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.

Oil and Filter Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Tire Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Other Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Clock

Clock Allows user to adjust the clock settings and time within the vehicle information display. Adjustments that can
be made include manually setting the time and 12H/24H format.
If these options do not appear, the clock must be set within the center display. For additional information, re-
fer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).

Unit/Language
The unit/language menu allows the user to change the units shown in the vehicle information display.

Mileage/Fuel Displays the available mileage/fuel display units and allows user to select preferred unit for display.
Tire Pressures Allows user to select the tire pressure display units.
Temperature Allows user to select the temperature display units.
Language Displays the available language options and allows user to select preferred language for display.
Factory Reset
The factory reset menu allows the user to restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status.

Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected,
Factory Reset
the user can confirm or cancel the reset.

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY If the warning appears while the engine is Chassis Control System Error See
WARNINGS AND INDICATORS running, you can drive the vehicle. However, Owner’s Manual
in these cases, have the system checked. It This warning appears if the chassis control
The following messages may appear in is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
your vehicle information display. is not functioning properly. Have the sys-
dealer for this service. tem checked by a NISSAN dealer. For addi-
Engine start operation for tional information, see “Chassis Control”
Key Battery Low (P. 5-137).
Intelligent Key system (if
I-Key battery level is low) This indicator appears when the Intelligent
Key battery is running out of power. Caution Steep slope
This indicator appears when the battery of
the Intelligent Key is low and when the In- If this indicator appears, replace the bat- This warning appears when the automatic
telligent Key system and the vehicle are not tery with a new one. For additional infor- brake hold function is activated while the
communicating normally. mation, see “Battery replacement” (P. 8-22). vehicle is on a steep hill.. For additional in-
If this appears, touch the ignition switch formation, see “Automatic brake hold”
with the Intelligent Key while depressing No Key Detected (P. 5-25).
the brake pedal. For additional information, This warning appears when the Intelligent Rear Door Alert is activated
see “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery dis- Key is left outside the vehicle with the igni- When the system is enabled, this message
charge” (P. 5-13). tion switch in the ON position. Make sure appears when the Rear Door Alert system
I-Key System Error: See the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. is active and can remind the driver to check
Owner’s Manual For additional information, see “NISSAN In- the back seat.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON telligent Key® System” (P. 3-7). • Using the steering wheel switch, a driver
position, this warning appears for a period can select “Dismiss Message” to clear the
of time and then turns off. Alarm - Time for a break? display for a period of time. If no selection
is made, this message automatically
The I-Key System Error message warns of This indicator appears when the driver en- turns off after a period of time.
a malfunction with the Intelligent Key sys- ables the Timer Alert function within the
Driving Assistance settings and the se- • Using the steering wheel switch, a driver
tem. If the warning appears while the en-
lected set time is expired. The time is based can select “Disable Alert” to disable the
gine is stopped, it may be impossible to
on ignition on time and can be set up to six horn alert for the remainder of the cur-
start the engine.
hours. rent trip.

WARNING NOTE: If the warning appears again soon after it
turns off, have the vehicle checked. It is rec-
This system is disabled until a driver en- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
Selecting “Dismiss Message” during a ables it using the vehicle information
stop within a trip temporarily dis- for this service.
display. For additional information, see
misses the message for that stop with- “How to use the vehicle information dis-
out turning the system off. Alerts can Illumination indicator
play” (P. 2-23).
be provided for other stops during the This indicator shows the illumination ad-
trip. Selecting “Disable Alert” turns off For additional information, see “Rear Door justment of the instrument panel. For addi-
the Rear Door Alert system for the re- Alert” (P. 2-56). tional information, see “Instrument bright-
mainder of a trip and no audible alert ness control” (P. 2-49).
will be provided. Door/liftgate Open
NOTE: This warning appears when a door or the Low Fuel
liftgate has been opened.
This system is disabled until a driver en- This warning appears when the fuel level in
ables it using the vehicle information Headlight System Error: See Owner’s the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon
display. For additional information, see Manual as it is convenient, preferably before the
“How to use the vehicle information dis- This warning appears when there is an er- fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be
play” (P. 2-23). ror with the system. For additional informa- a small reserve of fuel in the tank when
tion, see “Headlight and turn signal switch” the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).
For additional information, see “Rear Door
(P. 2-43).
Alert” (P. 2-56).
High Coolant Temp: See Low Outside Temperature
Check Back Seat For All Articles This warning appears if the outside tem-
Owner’s Manual
When the system is enabled, this message perature is below 37°F (3°C). The tempera-
appears when the vehicle comes to a com- This warning appears when the tempera-
ture can be changed to display in Celsius or
plete stop, the vehicle is transitioned from ture of the engine coolant is too high. Stop
Fahrenheit. For additional information, see
the D (Drive) position to P (Park) position, the vehicle in a safe location as soon as
“Settings” (P. 2-24).
and the driver exits the vehicle. This mes- possible. Avoid quick starting or abrupt ac-
sage alerts the driver, after a period of time, celeration. When the warning turns off, the
to check for items in the rear seat after the vehicle can be driven.
audible alert has been provided.

Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s • The vehicle is stopped on a steep hill and
Oil and Filter Manual there is a possibility of moving backward,
This indicator appears when the customer This warning appears when there is an er- even if the electronic parking brake is
set distance comes for changing the en- ror with the system. For additional informa- applied.
gine oil and filter. You can set or reset the tion, see “Rear Sonar System (RSS)” (P. 5-140). • This warning appears if the vehicle
distance for checking or replacing these moves while the automatic brake hold is
items. For scheduled maintenance items Parking Sensor activated.
and intervals, see “Maintenance and This indicator appears when the sensor is
schedules” (P. 9-7). activated. For additional information, see Press brake to operate
“Rear Sonar System (RSS)” (P. 5-140). switch
Other
Power will turn off to save the battery This warning appears if the automatic
This indicator appears when the customer This message appears in the vehicle infor- brake hold switch is pushed without de-
set distance is reached for checking or re- mation display after a period of time if the pressing the brake pedal while the auto-
placing maintenance items other than the ignition switch is in the ON position and if matic brake hold function is activated. De-
engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other mainte- the vehicle is in P (Park). For additional infor- press the brake pedal and push the switch
nance items can include such things as air mation, see “Push-button ignition switch to deactivate the automatic brake hold
filter or tire rotation. The distance for positions” (P. 5-12). function.
checking or replacing the items can be set For additional information, see “Automatic
or reset. Power turned off to save the battery
brake hold” (P. 5-25).
This message appears after the ignition
Outside Temperature switch is automatically turned off. For addi- Push brake and start
Display tional information, see “Push-button igni- switch to drive
The outside temperature display appears tion switch positions” (P. 5-12). This indicator appears when the shift lever
in the center region of the vehicle informa- Press Brake Pedal is in the P (Park) position.
tion display. This warning appears in the following situ- This indicator also appears when the ve-
ations: hicle has been started using the Remote
• The driver tires to release the electronic Engine Start (if so equipped) function.
parking brake manually without depress-
ing the brake pedal.

This indicator means that the engine will
start by pushing the ignition switch with Reminder: Turn OFF Steep slope Apply foot
the brake pedal depressed. You can start Headlights brake
the engine from any position of the ignition This warning appears when the headlights This warning appears if the “Caution Steep
switch. are left in the ON position when exiting the slope” warning has appeared over about 3
vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the minutes. Then the parking brake will auto-
Rear seat belt reminder OFF (if so equipped) or AUTO position. For matically be applied and the brake force of
This warning appears for 65 seconds after additional information, see “Headlight and the automatic brake hold will be released,
the ignition is placed in the ON position and turn signal switch” (P. 2-43). and the vehicle may move or roll away un-
the engine is started. expectedly. Apply the foot brake to stop the
Shift to Park vehicle from moving.
This warning message shows the status of
the three rear seat belts. When one of the This warning appears when the ignition For additional information, see “Automatic
rear seat belts are buckled, the corre- switch is in the OFF position and the shift brake hold” (P. 5-25).
sponding rear seat belt indicator will ap- lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also, a Steering lock release
pear white. When one of the rear seat belts chime sounds when the ignition switch is malfunction indicator
are unbuckled, the corresponding rear seat in the OFF position.
This indicator appears when the steering
belt indicator will appear red. If this warning appears, move the shift lever lock cannot be released.
After a change in buckle status, a chime will to the P (Park) position and start the engine.
If this indicator appears, push the ignition
sound and the warning will appear for an- Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse switch while lightly turning the steering
other 65 seconds.
This warning may appear if the extended wheel right and left.
Release Parking Brake storage switch is not pushed in. When this
This warning appears in the message area warning appears, push in the extended Tire
of the vehicle information display when the storage switch to turn off the warning. For
This indicator appears when the customer
parking brake is set and the vehicle is additional information, see “Extended stor-
set distance is reached for replacing tires.
driven. age switch” (P. 2-59).
You can set or reset the distance for replac-
ing tires.

WARNING stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pres- Automatic Emergency
sures of all four tires to the recommended Braking (AEB) emergency
The tire replacement indicator is not a COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and warning indicator
substitute for regular tire checks, in- Loading Information label. For additional
This indicator appears along, with an au-
cluding tire pressure checks. For addi- information, see “Low tire pressure warning
dible warning, when the system detects
tional information, see “Changing light” (P. 2-17) and “Tire Pressure Monitoring
the possibility of a forward collision.
wheels and tires” (P. 8-35). Many factors System (TPMS)” (P. 5-5).
including tire inflation, alignment, driv- For additional information, see “Automatic
TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual Emergency Braking (AEB)” (P. 5-88), “Auto-
ing habits and road conditions affect
tire wear and when tires should be re- This warning appears when there is an er- matic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pe-
placed. Setting the tire replacement in- ror with your TPMS. If this warning comes destrian Detection” (P. 5-98) and “Intelligent
dicator for a certain driving distance on, have the system checked. It is recom- Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-109).
does not mean your tires will last that mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
long. Use the tire replacement indicator indicator
as a guide only and always perform Transmission Shift Position
This indicator appears when the BSW sys-
regular tire checks. Failure to perform indicator tem is engaged.
regular tire checks, including tire pres- This indicator shows the transmission shift
sure checks could result in tire failure. For additional information, see “Blind Spot
position.
Serious vehicle damage could occur Warning (BSW)” (P. 5-35).
and may lead to a collision, which could CVT Error: See Owner's
result in serious personal injury or Manual Cruise control indicator
death. This warning appears when there is a This indicator shows the cruise control sys-
Tire Pressure Low - Add Air problem with the CVT system. If this warn- tem status.
ing appears, have the system checked. It is
This warning appears when the low tire For additional information, see “Cruise con-
pressure warning light in the meter illumi- trol” (P. 5-56).
nates and low tire pressure is detected. The
warning appears each time the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position as long
as the low tire pressure warning light re-
mains illuminated. If this warning appears,

Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Lane Departure Warning
Drive Sport mode indicator Disabled Front Sensor Blocked See (LDW) indicator
A small “S” appears to the right of the Trans- Owner’s Manual This indicator appears when the LDW sys-
mission Shift Position indicator in the ve- This message appears when the front ra- tem is engaged.
hicle information display when the Drive dar sensor may be obstructed due to: For additional information, see “Lane De-
Sport mode is engaged. • mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc. parture Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-28).
Activate the Drive Sport mode by pressing • inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
the switch on the shift lever while the shift
Malfunction
lever is in the D (Drive) position. All forward driving aids are temporarily dis- This warning appears when one or more of
abled until the system detects that the the following systems (if so equipped) is
For additional information, see “Drive sport front radar sensor is no longer obstructed. not functioning properly:
mode switch” (P. 5-21).
For additional information, see the follow- • Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
Driver Attention Alert — ing (if so equipped): • Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
System Fault • Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) • Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
This warning appears when the Intelligent (P. 5-88)
Driver Alertness (I-DA) system is not func- If one or more of these warning appears,
• Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
tioning properly. For additional information, have the system checked. It is recom-
Pedestrian Detection (P. 5-98)
see Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
• Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (P. 5-58) this service.
(P. 5-124).
• Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-
Driver Attention Alert - FCW) (P. 5-109)
Rear Automatic Braking
Take a Break? (RAB) indicator
Intelligent Cruise Control
This alert appears when the system has This indicator appears to indicate the sta-
(ICC) indicators tus of the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)
detected that the driver may be displaying
fatigue or a lack of attention. These indicators show the Intelligent system. For additional information, see
Cruise Control (ICC) system status. The sta- “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-81).
tus is shown by color. For additional infor-
mation, see “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)”
(P. 5-58).

SECURITY SYSTEMS (if so equipped)
Side Radar Obstruction tion detection type system that activates

This message appears when the Blind when a vehicle is moved or when a vibra-
Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic tion occurs.
Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable The system helps deter vehicle theft but
because a radar blockage is detected. For cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the
additional information, see “Blind Spot theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-
Warning (BSW)” (P. 5-35) or “Rear Cross Traf- nents in all situations. Always secure your
fic Alert (RCTA)” (P. 5-46). vehicle even if parking for a brief period.
System Fault Never leave your keys in the vehicle, and
always lock the vehicle when unattended.
This warning appears if there is a malfunc- Be aware of your surroundings, and park in
tion in the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.
system. For additional information, see
“Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-81). Many devices offering additional protec-
LIC3633 tion, such as component locks, identifica-
Vehicle ahead detection tion markers, and tracking systems, are
indicator Your vehicle may have three types of secu- available at auto supply stores and spe-
This indicator appears when the Auto- rity systems: cialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer
matic Emergency Braking (AEB) system is • Vehicle security system such equipment. Check with your insur-
engaged and has detected a vehicle. • NISSAN Anti-Theft System ance company to see if you may be eligible
• NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System for discounts for various theft protection
For additional information, see “Automatic features.
Emergency Braking (AEB)” (P. 5-88) or “Auto-
matic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pe- VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if so
destrian Detection” (P. 5-98). equipped) How to arm the vehicle security
The vehicle security system provides visual
system
Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature
and audible alarm signals if someone 1. Close all windows. (The system can be
This message appears when the camera opens the doors, hood or liftgate when the armed even if the windows are open.)
detects an interior temperature of more system is armed. It is not, however, a mo-
than approximately 104°F (40°C). For addi- 2. Remove the keys from the vehicle.
tional information, see “Lane Departure
Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-28).
3. Close all doors, hood and liftgate. Lock Vehicle security system activation If the engine does not start using the reg-
all doors. The doors can be locked with istered NATS key, it may be due to interfer-
The vehicle security system will give the
the Intelligent Key, mechanical key, or ence caused by:
following alarm:
door handle request switch (if so • Another NATS key
equipped). • The headlights or turn lamps blink and
the horn sounds intermittently but • Automated toll road device
4. Confirm that the security indicator synchronously. • Automated payment device
light stays on for about 30 seconds. The • The alarm automatically turns off after a • Other devices that transmit similar
vehicle security system is now pre- period of time. However, the alarm reacti- signals
armed. The vehicle security system will vates if the vehicle is tampered with
automatically shift into the armed Start the engine using the following
again. procedure:
phase. The security light begins to
flash once every three seconds. If during The alarm is activated by: 1. Remove any items that may be causing
the pre-armed phase one of the follow- • opening any door, hood or the liftgate the interference away from the NATS key.
ing occurs, the system will not arm: without using the key or Intelligent Key
(even if the door is unlocked by releasing 2. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi-
• Any door is unlocked with the Intelligent
the door inside lock knob). tion for approximately 5 seconds.
Key, mechanical key, or door request
switch (if so equipped). 3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
• Ignition switch is placed in the ON How to stop an activated alarm LOCK position and wait approximately
position. The alarm stops only by unlocking a door 10 seconds.
• Even when the driver and/or passen- or the liftgate with the key fob, pressing the 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 again.
gers are in the vehicle, the system will button on the Intelligent Key, or push-
activate with all the doors, hood and ing the request switch (if so equipped) on 5. Start the engine.
liftgate locked with the ignition switch the driver's or passenger's door with the 6. Repeat the steps above until all possible
placed in the LOCK position. When plac- Intelligent Key in range of the door handle. interferences are eliminated.
ing the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion, the system will be released. NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM If this procedure allows the engine to start,
(NATS) (if so equipped) NISSAN recommends placing the regis-
tered NATS key separate from other de-
The NISSAN Anti-Theft System will not al- vices to avoid interference.
low the engine to start without the use of a
registered NATS key.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER FCC Notice:
SYSTEM (if so equipped) For USA:
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System This device complies with Part 15 of the
will not allow the engine to start without FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
the use of a registered key. lowing two conditions; (1) This device
If the engine fails to start using a registered may not cause harmful interference, and
key (for example, when interference is (2) this device must accept any interfer-
caused by another registered key, an auto- ence received, including interference
mated toll road device or automatic pay- that may cause undesired operation of
ment device on the key ring), restart the the device.
engine using the following procedures: NOTE:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi-
Changes or modifications not expressly
tion for approximately 5 seconds.
approved by the party responsible for LIC0474
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or compliance could void the user's author-
LOCK position, and wait approximately ity to operate the equipment. Security indicator light (if so
10 seconds. For Canada:
equipped)
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. The security indicator light blinks whenever
This device contains licence-exempt the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or
4. Restart the engine while holding the de- transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply LOCK position.
vice (which may have caused the inter- with Innovation, Science and Economic
ference) separate from the registered Development Canada’s licence-exempt This function indicates the NISSAN Anti-
key. RSS(s). Operation is subject to the fol- Theft System (NATS) is operational.
lowing two conditions: (1) This device If the NATS is malfunctioning, the light will
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN may not cause interference. (2) This de-
recommends placing the registered key on remain on while the ignition switch is
vice must accept any interference, in- placed in the ON position.
a separate key ring to avoid interference cluding interference that may cause un-
from other devices. desired operation of the device.

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
If the light still remains on and/or the • Do not operate the washer if the
engine will not start, seek service for the windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
NATS as soon as possible. Please bring all empty.
registered keys that you have. It is rec-
• Do not fill the windshield-washer
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
fluid reservoir with windshield-
washer fluid concentrates at full
strength. Some methyl alcohol
based windshield-washer fluid con-
centrates may permanently stain the
grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
• Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid
concentrates with water to the
manufacturer’s recommended levels
LIC2661
before pouring the fluid into the
SWITCH OPERATION windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
WARNING Do not use the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir to mix the windshield-
In freezing temperatures the washer washer fluid concentrate and water.
solution may freeze on the windshield NOTE:
and obscure your vision which may
lead to an accident. Warm the wind- If the windshield wiper operation is in-
shield with the defroster before you terrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may
wash the windshield. stop moving to protect its motor. If this
occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF
position and remove the snow or ice that
CAUTION is on and around the wiper arms. In ap-
• Do not operate the washer continu- proximately 1 minute, turn the switch on
ously for more than 30 seconds. again to operate the wiper.

The windshield wiper and washer operates • Do not operate the washer if the
when the ignition switch is in the ON windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
position. empty.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper • Do not fill the windshield-washer
at the following speed: fluid reservoir with windshield-
䊊
1 Intermittent — intermittent operation washer fluid concentrates at full
strength. Some methyl alcohol
can be adjusted by turning the knob
toward O A (faster) or O
B (slower). Also, based windshield-washer fluid con-
the intermittent operation speed varies centrates may permanently stain the
in accordance with the vehicle speed (if grille if spilled while filling the
so equipped). (For example, when the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
vehicle speed is high, the intermittent • Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid
operation speed will be faster.) concentrates with water to the
manufacturer’s recommended levels
䊊
2 Low — continuous low speed operation LIC2662
before pouring the fluid into the
䊊
3 High — continuous high speed operation REAR SWITCH OPERATION windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
Do not use the windshield-washer
Push the lever up O to have one sweep
4 WARNING
fluid reservoir to mix the windshield-
operation (MIST) of the wiper.
In freezing temperatures the washer washer fluid concentrate and water.
Pull the lever toward you O5 to operate the
solution may freeze on the rear window
washer. The wiper will also operate several NOTE:
and obscure your vision which may
times. lead to an accident. Warm the rear win- If the rear window wiper operation is in-
NOTE: dow with the defroster before you terrupted by snow, etc., the wiper may
wash the rear window. stop moving to protect its motor. If this
The Wiper with Speed feature may be occurs, turn the wiper switch to OFF and
disabled. For additional information, see remove the snow, etc. on and around the
“Vehicle information display” (P. 2-23). CAUTION wiper arms. After about 1 minute, turn
• Do not operate the washer continu- the switch on again to operate the wiper.
ously for more than 30 seconds.

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
The rear window wiper and washer oper-
ate when the ignition switch is in the ON
position. Turn the switch clockwise from
the OFF position to operate the wiper.
䊊
1 Intermittent — intermittent operation
(not adjustable)
䊊
2 Low — continuous low speed operation
Push the switch forward O 3 to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several
times.
If the windshield wipers are on and the ve-
hicle is placed in R (Reverse) the rear wiper
will automatically turn on while the vehicle LIC3600 LIC3570
remains in R (Reverse).
Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped)
NOTE: To defrost the rear window glass, start the NOTE:
engine and push the rear window defroster
The Reverse Link feature may be dis- Use defroster and/or outside mirror de-
switch on. The rear window defroster indi-
abled. For additional information, see froster when engine is running to avoid
cator light on the switch comes on. Push
“Vehicle information display” (P. 2-23). discharging the battery.
the switch again to turn the defroster off.
To defrost the outside mirrors (if so CAUTION
equipped), start the engine and push the
outside mirror defroster switch on. The When cleaning the inner side of the rear
outside mirror defroster indicator light on window, be careful not to scratch or
the switch comes on. Push the switch damage the rear window defroster.
again to turn the defroster off.
The rear window/outside mirror defroster
(if so equipped) automatically turns off af-
ter approximately 15 minutes.
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
LIC2634 LIC4008 LIC4237

Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) Type C (if so equipped)
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH CAUTION
Lighting
Use the headlights with the engine run-
䊊
1 Rotate the switch to the position, ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
and the side, tail, license plate, and in- battery.
strument panel lights will come on.
䊊
2 Rotate the switch to the position,
and the headlights will come on and all
the other lights remain on.

LIC4498 LIC2636 LIC4237
Type D (if so equipped) Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped)
NOTE:
Autolight system Autolight activation sensitivity and
The autolight system allows the headlights the time delay for autolight shutoff
to turn on and off automatically. The auto- can be adjusted. For additional infor-
light system can: mation, see “Vehicle information dis-
• Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail, play” (P. 2-23).
license plate and instrument panel lights
To turn on the autolight system:
automatically when it is dark.
• Turn off all the lights when it is light. 1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO
position O
1 .
• Keep all the lights on for a period of time
after you place the ignition switch in the 2. Place the ignition switch in the ON
OFF position and all doors are closed. position.

3. The autolight system automatically
turns the headlights on and off.
Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position and a door is opened and left
open, the headlights remain on for a period
of time. If another door is opened while the
headlights are on, then the timer is reset.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the
switch to the OFF (if so equipped), , or
position.
The headlights will turn on automatically at
twilight or in rainy weather (when the wind-
shield wiper is operated continuously).
LIC4006 LIC2637
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position and one of the doors is opened Be sure you do not put anything on top Headlight beam select
of the autolight sensor located in the top
and this condition is continued, the head-
lights remain on for 5 minutes. side O 1 of the instrument panel. The au- 䊊
1 To select the high beam function, push
the lever forward while the low beams
tolight sensor controls the autolight; if it
are on. The high beam lights come on
is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as
and the indicator light illuminates.
if it is dark out and the headlights will
illuminate. If this occurs while parked 䊊
2 Pull the lever back to return to the low
with the engine off and the ignition beam.
switch placed in the ON position, your
vehicle's battery could become 䊊
3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes
discharged. the headlight high beams on and off.
The low beams do not need to be on
for this to function.

High Beam Assist (if so equipped) – When the headlights of the on- • The timing of switching the low
The High Beam Assist system will operate coming vehicle or the leading ve- beam and high beam may change
when the vehicle is driven at speeds of ap- hicle are turned off, when the color under the following situations.
proximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and above. If of the light is affected due to for- – The brightness of the headlights
an oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle ap- eign materials on the lights, or of the oncoming vehicle or leading
pears in front of your vehicle when the when the light beam is out of vehicle.
headlight high beam is on, the headlight position. – The movement and direction of
will be switched to the low beam – When there is a sudden, continu- the oncoming vehicle and the
automatically. ous change in brightness. leading vehicle.
– When driving on a road that – When only one light on the on-
WARNING passes over rolling hills, or a road coming vehicle or the leading ve-
that has level differences. hicle is illuminated.
• The High Beam Assist system is a
convenience but it is not a substitute – When driving on a road with many – When the oncoming vehicle or the
for safe driving operation. The driver curves. leading vehicle is a two-wheeled
should remain alert at all times, en- – When a sign or mirror-like surface vehicle.
sure safe driving practices and is reflecting intense light towards – Road conditions (incline, curve,
switch the high beams and low beam the front of the vehicle. the road surface, etc.).
manually when necessary. – When the container, etc. being – The number of passengers and
• The high beam or low beam may not towed by a leading vehicle is re- the amount of luggage.
switch automatically under the fol- flecting intense light.
lowing conditions. Switch the high – When a headlight on your vehicle
beam and low beam manually. is damaged or dirty.
– During bad weather (rain, fog, – When the vehicle is leaning at an
snow, wind, etc.). angle due to a punctured tire, be-
– When a light source similar to a ing towed, etc.
headlight or tail light is in the vi-
cinity of the vehicle.

When the vehicle speed lowers to less than
approximately 16 mph (25 km/h), the head-
light uses the low beam.
To turn off the High Beam Assist system,
turn the headlight switch to the posi-
tion or select the low beam position by
placing the lever in the neutral position.
LIC3696 LSD3502
High Beam Assist operation Ambient image sensor maintenance

The ambient image sensor O A for the High
To activate the High Beam Assist system,
Beam Assist system is located in front of
turn the headlight switch to the AUTO po-
the inside mirror. To maintain the proper
sition O1 and push the lever forward O 2
operation of the high beam assist system
(high beam position). The High Beam
and prevent a system malfunction, be sure
Assist indicator light in the meter will illumi-
to observe the following:
nate while the headlights are turned on.
• Always keep the windshield clean.
If the High Beam Assist indicator light does
• Do not attach a sticker (including trans-
not illuminate in the above condition, it may
parent material) or install an accessory
indicate that the system is not functioning
near the ambient image sensor.
properly. Have the system checked, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN • Do not strike or damage the areas
dealer for this service. around the ambient image sensor. Do
not touch the sensor lens that is located
on the ambient image sensor.
If the ambient image sensor is damaged DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
due to an accident, it is recommended that SYSTEM (Type A) (if so equipped) (DRL) SYSTEM (Type B) (if so
you visit a NISSAN dealer.
The DRL portion of the fog light assembly equipped)
Battery saver system automatically illuminates when the engine The LED DRL portion of the fog light assem-
is started with the parking brake released. bly automatically illuminates when the en-
The battery saver system automatically The DRL operate with the headlight switch gine is started with the parking brake re-
turns off the ignition after a period of time in the OFF or AUTO position. Turn the head- leased. The LED DRL operate with the
when the ignition switch is left in the ON light switch to the position for full headlight switch in the OFF or AUTO posi-
position. illumination when driving at night. (The DRL tion. Turn the headlight switch to the
The battery saver system automatically will turn off.) position for full illumination when driving at
turns off the following lights after a period If the parking brake is applied before the night. (The LED DRL will turn off.)
of time when the ignition switch is placed in engine is started, the DRL do not illuminate. If the parking brake is applied before the
the OFF position: The DRL illuminate once the parking brake engine is started, the LED DRL do not illumi-
• Headlights, when the headlight switch is is released. The DRL will remain on until the nate. The LED DRL illuminate once the
in the or position ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. parking brake is released. The LED DRL will
• Interior lights, when left in the ON position It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight remain on until the ignition switch is placed
switch on for interior controls and switches in the OFF position.
CAUTION to illuminate, as those remain off while the It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight
switch is in the OFF or AUTO position. switch on for interior controls and switches
Even though the battery saver feature
automatically turns off the headlights to illuminate, as those remain off while the
WARNING switch is in the OFF or AUTO position.
after a period of time, you should turn
the headlight switch to the OFF posi- When the DRL system is active, tail
tion (if so equipped) when the engine is WARNING
lights on your vehicle are not on. It is
not running to avoid discharging the necessary at dusk to turn on your When the LED DRL system is active, tail
vehicle battery. headlights. Failure to do so could cause lights on your vehicle are not on. It is
an accident injuring yourself and necessary at dusk to turn on your head-
others. lights. Failure to do so could cause an
accident injuring yourself and others.

LIC4150 LIC4151 LIC2638
Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
Turn signal
CONTROL
Turn the control knob O A to adjust the 䊊
1 Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is com-
brightness of instrument panel lights.
pleted, the turn signal cancels
automatically.
Lane change signal

䊊
2 Move the lever up or down until the turn
signal begins to flash, but the lever
does not latch, to signal a lane change.
Hold the lever until the lane change is
completed.

HORN
Move the lever up or down until the turn

signal begins to flash, but the lever does
not latch, and release the lever. The turn
signal will automatically flash three times.
Choose the appropriate method to signal
a lane change based on road and traffic
conditions.
NOTE:
The 3 flash pass feature may be disabled.
For additional information, see “Vehicle
information display” (P. 2-23).
LIC2639 LIC3568
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so To sound the horn, push near the horn icon
equipped) on the steering wheel.
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight WARNING
switch to the or position, then
turn the fog light switch to the Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
position. could affect proper operation of the
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight supplemental front air bag system.
switch in the AUTO position, the headlights Tampering with the supplemental
must be on, then turn the fog light switch to front air bag system may result in seri-
the position. ous personal injury.
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light
switch to the OFF position.

HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so
equipped)
CAUTION The front seats are warmed by built-in

heaters.
• The battery could run down if the 1. Place the ignition switch in the ON
seat heater is operated while the en- position.
gine is not running.
• Do not use the seat heater for ex- 2. Push the switch once for the high (2 in-
tended periods or when no one is us- dicators illuminated) setting. Push the
ing the seat. switch again for the low (1 indicator illu-
minated) setting.
• Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates heat, such as a blan- The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
ket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Other- automatically turning the heater on and
wise, the seat may become off. The indicator light(s) will remain on
overheated. as long as the switch is on.
• Do not place anything hard or heavy 3. Push the switch again to turn it off (no
LIC3973
on the seat or pierce it with a pin or indicators illuminated).
WARNING similar object. This may result in
damage to the heater. 4. When the seat is warmed or before you
Do not use or allow occupants to use leave the vehicle, be sure to push the
• Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
the seat heater if you or the occupants switch to turn it off.
should be removed immediately with
cannot monitor elevated seat tem- a dry cloth.
peratures or have an inability to feel • When cleaning the seat, never use
pain in body parts that contact the gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any
seat. Use of the seat heater by such similar materials.
people could result in serious injury.
• If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn
the switch off and have the system
checked. It is recommended that you

HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) SWITCH
(if so equipped) (if so equipped)
Push the switch again to turn the heated

steering wheel system off manually. The
indicator light will go off.
LIC4645 LIC4304
The heated steering wheel system is de- The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) switch is
signed to operate only when the surface used to turn on and off the BSW system.
temperature of the steering wheel is below When the BSW switch is pushed, the BSW
68°F (20°C). system will turn on and the BSW indicator
Push the heated steering wheel switch to light in the meter will illuminate. When the
warm the steering wheel after the engine BSW switch is pushed again, the BSW sys-
starts. The indicator light will come on. tem will turn off and the BSW indicator light
will turn off.
If the surface temperature of the steering
wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system
heat the steering wheel and cycle off and may be linked with the BSW system. For
on to maintain a temperature above 68°F additional information, see “Blind Spot
(20°C). The indicator light will remain on as Warning (BSW)” (P. 5-35) and “Rear Cross
long as the system is on. Traffic Alert (RCTA)” (P. 5-46).

DRIVE SYSTEMS OFF SWITCH LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)
(if so equipped) SWITCH (if so equipped)
For additional information, see “Automatic

Emergency Braking (AEB)” (P. 5-88), “Auto-
matic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pe-
destrian Detection” (P. 5-98) and “Rear Auto-
matic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-81).
LIC4314 LIC4224
The following systems (if so equipped) are The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch
automatically enabled when the vehicle is is used to turn on and off the LDW system.
started: When the LDW switch is pushed, the LDW
• Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system will turn on and the LDW indicator
• Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with light will illuminate. When the LDW switch is
Pedestrian Detection pushed again, the LDW system will turn off
and the LDW indicator light will turn off.
• Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)
The LDW system warns the driver with a
To turn the systems off, push the Drive Sys- warning light and chime that the vehicle is
tems OFF switch. The Automatic Emer- beginning to leave the driving lane. For ad-
gency Braking (AEB)/ Automatic Emer- ditional information, see “Lane Departure
gency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-28).
Detection system warning light and the
RAB system warning light will illuminate in
the meter.

REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS) OFF
SWITCH (if so equipped)
The Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) The RSS can be disabled by pushing the
system, Automatic Emergency Braking OFF switch. When the system is disabled,
(AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system, or the indicator light on the switch will turn off.
Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I- The system will automatically reset the
FCW) system may be linked with the LDW next time the ignition switch is placed in
system. For additional information, see “Au- the ON position.
tomatic Emergency Braking (AEB)” (P. 5-88),
“Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with For additional information, see “Rear Sonar
Pedestrian Detection” (P. 5-98) and “Intelli- System (RSS)” (P. 5-140).
gent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)”
(P. 5-109).
LIC4227
WARNING
The Rear Sonar System is a conve-
nience but it is not a substitute for
proper backing. Always turn and check
that it is safe to do so before backing
up. Always back up slowly.
The RSS (if so equipped) is active when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position
and the shift lever is in R (Reverse). The
indicator light on the switch will turn on.
When sensors detect obstacles within 6 ft
(1.8 m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone is
emitted.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart

the engine to turn on the system. For addi-
tional information, see “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system” (P. 5-134).
LIC4315
The vehicle should be driven with the VDC
system on for most driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the
VDC system reduces the engine output to
reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will
be reduced even if the accelerator is de-
pressed to the floor. If maximum engine
power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,
turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC
OFF switch. The indicator light will
come on. The Automatic Emergency Brak-
ing (AEB) system warning light also may
come on.

EMERGENCY CALL (SOS) BUTTON REAR DOOR ALERT (if so equipped)
(if so equipped)
The Rear Door Alert system functions un-

der certain conditions to indicate there
may be an object or passenger in the rear
seat(s). Check the seat(s) before exiting the
vehicle.
The Rear Door Alert system is initially dis-
abled. The driver can enable the system
using the vehicle information display. For
additional information, see “Vehicle infor-
mation display warnings and indicators”
(P. 2-31).
When the system is enabled:
• The system is activated when a rear door
LIC4646 is opened and closed within 10 minutes of
the vehicle being driven. When the driver
The Emergency call (SOS) button is used in Pressing the button O 2 will (with a paid
door is closed and the system is acti-
combination with a NissanConnect® Ser- subscription) reach a response specialist
vated, a visual message appears in the
vices subscription to call for assistance in that will provide assistance based on the
vehicle information display. For additional
case of an emergency. situation described by the vehicle’s occu-
information, see “Rear Door Alert is acti-
The Emergency call button is under a pant. For additional information, or to enroll
vated” (P. 2-31).
cover. Press the cover once O
1 . The cover
your vehicle, refer to www.NissanUSA.com/
connect or call 855–426–6628. • If a rear door is opened and closed but
will drop down, exposing the Emergency the vehicle is not driven within approxi-
call button. mately 10 minutes, the system will not be
activated. A rear door must be opened
and closed and the car driven within 10
minutes for the system to activate.

When the Rear Door Alert system is acti- NOTE: NOTE:
vated:
If “Alert Only” setting is selected, the There may be times when the horn
• When the driver puts the vehicle in the P message alert will still be shown in the sounds but there are no objects or pas-
(Park) position, a notification message vehicle information display but the horn sengers in the rear seat(s).
appears in the vehicle information dis- will not sound.
play with the options to “Dismiss Mes- For additional information, see “Rear Door
sage” or “Disable Alert” if desired. Alert is activated” (P. 2-31).
WARNING
– Select “Disable Alert” to temporarily
disable for that stop. • If the driver selects “Disable Alert”, no
– No selection or ‘Dismiss Message” will audible alert will be provided regard-
keep the alert enabled for that stop. less of rear door open/close status.
• If the alert is enabled when a driver exits • There may be times when there is an
the vehicle, a message will appear in the object or passenger in the rear
vehicle information display that states seat(s) but the audible alert does not
“Check Back Seat For All Articles.” sound. For example, if rear seat pas-
If “Horn & Alert” setting is selected: sengers enter or exit the vehicle dur-
–– An audible horn sound will occur after ing a trip.
a short time unless a rear door is • The system does not directly detect
opened and closed within a short time objects or passengers in the rear
to deactivate the alert. seat(s). Instead, it can detect when a
–– If the doors are locked before the alert rear door is opened and closed, indi-
is deactivated by opening a rear door, cating that there may be something
the horn will sound. in the rear seat(s).
–– If the trunk is opened before a rear door
is opened, the horn will be delayed until
after the trunk is closed.

POWER OUTLETS
NOTE: • Avoid using power outlets when the

• When the ignition is in the OFF position, air conditioner, headlights or rear
the front console power outlet stops window defroster is on.
delivering power one minute after the • Before inserting or disconnecting a
door is opened and stays open. plug, be sure the electrical accessory
• If the door remains closed after the ig- being used is turned off.
nition is placed in the OFF position, the • Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
front console power outlet continues good contact is not made, the plug
to deliver power until the accessory may overheat or the internal tem-
power timer has elapsed. perature fuse may open.
• When not in use, be sure to close the
CAUTION cap. Do not allow water or any other
• The outlet and plug may be hot dur- liquid to contact the outlet.
LIC4003 ing or immediately after use.
Instrument Panel • Only certain power outlets are de-
12V OUTLET signed for use with a cigarette lighter
unit. Do not use any other power out-
The power outlet is for powering electrical let for an accessory lighter. It is rec-
accessories such as cellular telephones. It ommended that you visit a NISSAN
is rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum. dealer for additional information.
The front console power outlet is powered • Do not use with accessories that ex-
only when the ignition switch is in the ON ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
position, or while the accessory power is • Do not use double adapters or more
active. than one electrical accessory.
• Use power outlets with the engine
running to avoid discharging the ve-
hicle battery.

EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH
LIC3581 LIC3266 LIC3268

The extended storage switch is used when Pulled position Pushed position
the vehicle is in transit from the factory. It is
located in the fuse panel O A which is on the
driver’s side left kick panel, near the floor, on
the inside of the panel. If any electrical
equipment does not operate, ensure the
extended storage switch is pushed fully in
place, as shown.

STORAGE
LIC4303 LIC3213 LIC0016
FRONT-DOOR POCKETS REAR-DOOR POCKETS SEATBACK POCKETS (if so

equipped)
The seatback pockets are located on the
back of the driver's and passenger's seats.
The pockets can be used to store maps.

WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the driv-
er’s and/or front passenger’s NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System (if so
equipped), please observe the follow-
ing items:
• Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket or head restraint/headrest.
• Do not place heavy loads heavier
than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback,
head restraint/headrest or in the
seatback pocket.
LIC4004 LIC4301
Storage compartment (if so equipped) Instrument panel pocket
STORAGE TRAYS (if so equipped)
WARNING
Do not place sharp objects in the trays
to help prevent injury in an accident or
sudden stop.

LIC3986 LIC3580 LIC4648
Center console (if so equipped) GLOVE BOX CONSOLE BOX (if so equipped)
Open the glove box by pulling the handle. To open the console box, pull on the lever
O1 and raise the lid O
2 .
WARNING To close, push the lid down until the lock
Keep glove box lid closed while driving latches.
to help prevent injury in an accident or
a sudden stop.

LIC4647 LIC3574 LIC3575
Front console Bottle holder — front Bottle holder — rear
CUP HOLDERS
CAUTION
CAUTION
• Do not use bottle holder for any other
• Avoid abrupt starting and braking objects that could be thrown about in
when the cup holder is being used to the vehicle and possibly injure
prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid people during sudden braking or an
is hot, it can scald you or your accident.
passenger. • Do not use bottle holder for open liq-
• Use only soft cups in the cup holder. uid containers.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.

LIC4651 LIC4652 LIC4653
To Close To Open To Remove
To Close: Insert finger through flap notches To remove mechanism: Make sure the CAUTION
and pull them up O 1 .
flaps are open. Insert finger through the
To Open: Pull down flaps from notch O 2 . handle and pull it up O 3 to remove the Do not use excessive force to operate
entire mechanism. flaps. It can result in mechanism failure.
NOTE:
• Close flaps for larger cup holder space
such as for 32 oz. paper cups.
• Open flaps for smaller cup holder
space such as for 12 oz. cans.

• Use suitable ropes and hooks to se-
cure cargo.
• Never allow anyone to ride in the lug-
gage area. It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area inside of a ve-
hicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be se-
riously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seat belts.
• The child restraint top tether strap
may be damaged by contact with
LIC4300 items in the cargo area. Secure any LIC3569
items in the cargo area. Your child Left side shown (right similar)
LUGGAGE HOOKS could be seriously injured or killed in
The luggage hooks that are located on the a collision if the top tether strap is GROCERY HOOKS
floor should have loads less than 110 lbs. damaged. The grocery hooks are located in the cargo
(490 N) to a single hook. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in area and allow for standard size plastic
a seat and using a seat belt properly. grocery bags to hang side by side.
The luggage hooks can be used to secure
cargo with ropes or other types of straps.
CAUTION
WARNING Do not apply a total load of more than
• Properly secure all cargo with ropes 6.6 lbs. (3 kg) to a single grocery hook.
cargo could cause personal injury.
CARGO COVER (if so equipped) • Properly secure cargo and do not al-
WARNING low it to contact the top tether strap
when it is attached to the top tether
• Never put anything on the cargo anchor. Cargo that is not properly se-
cover, no matter how small. Any ob- cured or cargo that contacts the top
ject on it could cause an injury in an tether strap may damage the top
accident or sudden stop. tether strap during a collision. If the
• Do not put objects heavier than 44 cargo cover contacts the top tether
lbs. (20 kg) on the cargo cover for strap when it is attached to the top
long periods of time. tether anchor, remove the cargo
• Do not leave the cargo cover in the cover from the vehicle or secure it on
vehicle with it disengaged from the the cargo floor below its attachment
holder. location. If the cargo cover is not re-
moved, it may damage the top tether
• Properly secure all cargo with ropes LIC3349
strap during a collision. Your child
could be seriously injured or killed in To remove the cargo cover:
a collision if the child restraint top
tether strap is damaged. 䊊
1 Remove the straps from the rear hatch.
cargo could cause personal injury. The cargo cover keeps the luggage com- 䊊
2 Remove the cargo cover from the hold-
partment contents hidden from the ers on the rear pillar.
outside.

• Heavy loading of the crossbars has Do not apply any load directly to the roof
the potential to affect the vehicle side rails O
A . Crossbars O B must be in-
stability and handling during sudden stalled before applying load/cargo/

or unusual handling maneuvers. luggage to the roof of the vehicle.
• Properly secure all cargo with ropes Genuine NISSAN accessory crossbars may
or straps to help prevent it from slid- be available through a NISSAN dealer. It is
ing or shifting. In a sudden stop or recommended that you visit a NISSAN
collision, unsecured cargo could dealer for additional information.
cause personal injury. The service load capacity for the roof side
• Drive extra carefully when the vehicle rails is 110 lbs. (50 kg.), however do not ex-
is loaded at or near the cargo carry- ceed the crossbars load capacity.
ing capacity, especially if the signifi-
Be careful that your vehicle does not ex-
cant portion of that load is carried on
ceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
the crossbars.
LIC4202 (GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR front and rear).
ROOF RACK (if so equipped)
CAUTION For additional information regarding GVWR
WARNING
• Use care when placing or removing and GAWR, refer to:
• Always install the crossbars onto the items from the roof rack. If you can- • F.M.V.S.S. or C.M.V.S.S. certification label (lo-
roof side rails before loading cargo of not comfortably lift the items onto cated on the driver’s door pillar).
any kind. Loading cargo directly onto the roof rack from the ground, use a
the roof side rails or the vehicle’s roof ladder or a stool.
may cause vehicle damage.
• Roof rack cross bars should be evenly
distributed.
• Do not exceed maximum roof rack
crossbars load capacity and always
distribute the load uniformly.

Installing Crossbars (if so
equipped)
WARNING
• It is recommended that you have the
roof rack crossbars installed by a
NISSAN dealer.
• Protect the painted area on the ve-
hicle roof under the crossbars by
placing a piece of cloth under the
cross bars to prevent scratch
damage.
• Make sure the moonroof (if so
equipped) is in the closed position LIC4010 LIC4011
during the installation process. 1. Manually remove all 8 protective caps 2. Identify the FRONT (A) & REAR (B) cross-
from the roof rack rails. See Fig. 1. bar assembly in the kit.
NOTE: NOTE:
Please stow these protective covers in REAR Crossbar is shorter in length com-
the glove box. pared to the FRONT Crossbar
CAUTION
Covers should be re-installed if cross-
bar is removed.

LIC4012 LIC4013 LIC4014
3. Identify markings on bottom side of 4. Position FRONT crossbar onto left and 5. Make sure that the FRONT crossbar is in
crossbar end supports. right roof rack rail; and adjust right support proper position with respect to the roof
in and out until it fits securely into position. rack rail attachment positions, and loosely
NOTE: install all 4 bolts on FRONT crossbar using
See Fig. 4.
• FL is FRONT Crossbar Driver Side. the T–30 TORX® screwdriver provided.
• FR is FRONT Crossbar Passenger Side See Fig. 5.
• RL is REAR Crossbar Driver Side.
• RR is REAR Crossbar Passenger Side.
NOTE:
When assembled, the Arrow on the bot- Start with driver side front bolt. Bolts
tom side of the crossbar end support al- should not be fully tightened, only par-
ways points towards the front of the tially tightened.
vehicle.

WINDOWS
WARNING POWER WINDOWS

WARNING
• Please locate max load label on
crossbar end support. • Make sure that all passengers have
• Do not load more than 100 lbs. (45kg). their hands, etc., inside the vehicle
• Be careful that your vehicle does not while it is in motion and before clos-
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- ing the windows. Use the window
ing (GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight lock switch to prevent unexpected
Rating (GAWR Front and Rear). The use of the power windows.
GVWR and GAWR are located on the • To help avoid risk of injury or death
Safety Compliance Certification La- through unintended operation of the
bel. For more information regarding vehicle and/or its systems, including
GVWR and GAWR, see “Technical and entrapment in windows or inadver-
consumer information” (P. 10-10). tent door lock activation, do not
LIC4015 leave children, people who require
• Always evenly distribute the luggage
6. Tighten all 4 bolts to 8–9 N-m torque and appropriate crossbar attach- the assistance of others or pets unat-
using a T–30 TORX® torque wrench. ment on the crossbar. tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
NOTE: hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
a. Start with driver side front bolt. come high enough to cause a signifi-
cant risk of injury or death to people
b. T–30 TORX® torque wrench is not pro- and pets.
vided with kit.
The power windows operate when the ig-
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for the REAR nition switch is placed in the ON position or
crossbar installation. for a period of time after the ignition switch
8. After installation, gently wiggle the cross- is placed in the OFF position. If the driver's
bars to check for any loose fit. If loose fit is or passenger's door is opened during this
noticed, please uninstall and repeat the period of time, the power to the windows is
steps 4 through 7. canceled.

To open a window, push the switch to the
detent and continue to hold down until the
desired window position is reached. To
close a window, pull the switch to the de-
tent and continue to hold up until the de-
sired window position is reached.
LIC3238 LIC2309
1. Window lock button Front passenger's power window
2. Power door lock switch switch
3. Front passenger side automatic switch The passenger's window switch operates
only the corresponding passenger's win-
4. Right rear passenger side switch dow. To open the window partially, push the
5. Left rear passenger side switch switch down O 1 lightly until the desired
window position is reached. To close the
6. Driver’s side automatic switch window partially, pull the switch up O2 until
Driver's side power window the desired window position is reached.

switch
The driver's side control panel is equipped
with switches to open or close all of the
windows.

Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be acti-
vated when a window is closed by auto-
matic operation.
Depending on the environment or driv-
ing conditions, the auto-reverse func-
tion may be activated if an impact or
load similar to something being caught
in the window occurs.
WARNING
There are some small distances imme-
LIC2663 LIC0410
diately before the closed position
which cannot be detected. Make sure
Rear power window switch Automatic operation that all passengers have their hands,
The rear power window switches open or To fully open a window equipped with au- etc., inside the vehicle before closing
close only the corresponding windows. To tomatic operation, push the window the window.
open the window, push the switch and hold switch down to the second detent and re- If the vehicle's battery is disconnected, re-
it down O1 . To close the window, pull the lease it; it need not be held. The window placed, or jump started, the power window
switch up O2 . automatically opens all the way. To stop auto-reverse function may not operate
the window, lift the switch up while the win- properly. Have the power window auto-
Locking passengers' windows dow is opening. reverse system re-initialized. It is recom-
When the window lock switch is depressed, If so equipped, it may be possible to fully mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
only the driver's side window can be close a window equipped with automatic this service.
opened or closed. Push it again to cancel operation, pull the switch up to the second If the control unit detects something
the window lock function. detent and release it; it need not be held. To caught in a window equipped with auto-
stop the window, push the switch down matic operation as it is closing, the window
while the window is closing. will be immediately lowered.

INTERIOR LIGHTS
When power window switch does If the power window function does not op-
not operate erate properly after performing the above
procedure have the system checked and
If the power window automatic function repaired. It is recommended that you visit a
(closing only) does not operate properly, NISSAN dealer for this service.
perform the following procedure to initial-
ize the power window system:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON
position.
2. Open the window more than halfway by
operating the power window switch.
3. Pull the power window switch and hold it
to close the window, and then hold the
switch more than 3 seconds after the LIC3985
window is closed. The interior light has a three-position
4. Release the power window switch. Op- switch and operates regardless of ignition
erate the window by the automatic switch position.
function to confirm the initialization is When the switch is in the ON position O 3 ,
complete. The power window automati- the interior lights illuminate, regardless of
cally opens or closes depending on if the door position. The lights will go off after a
automatic down or up function is period of time unless the ignition switch is
selected. placed in the ON position.
5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for
other windows.

When the switch is in the O 2 position, the
CAUTION
interior lights will stay on for a period of
time when: Do not use for extended periods of time
• The doors are unlocked by the key or the with the engine stopped. This could re-
power door lock switch while all doors are sult in a discharged battery.
closed and the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position.
• The driver’s door is opened and then
closed while the ignition switch is placed
in the OFF position.
• The ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position while all doors are closed.
The light will turn off while the timer is acti-
vated when: LIC3988
• The driver’s door is locked by the key, or
the power door lock switch.
MAP LIGHTS
• The ignition switch is placed in the ON To turn the map lights on, push the switch
position. to the O1 position. To turn them off, push
the switch to the O
2 position.
When the switch is in the OFF position O 1 ,
the interior lights do not illuminate, regard- CAUTION
less of door position.
The lights will turn off automatically after a Do not use for extended periods of time
period of time while doors are open to pre- with the engine stopped. This could re-
vent the battery from becoming discharged. sult in a discharged battery.

The personal light will stay on for about 15 NOTE:
seconds when:
If the interior lights are turned off auto-
• The doors are unlocked while the ignition matically by the battery saver feature,
switch is placed in the OFF position and the ignition switch must be placed in the
all doors are closed. ON position before the interior lights will
• The driver's door is opened and then illuminate again.
closed while the ignition switch is placed
in the OFF position. For information regarding the interior light
bulb replacement, see “Exterior and interior
• The ignition switch is placed in the OFF lights” (P. 8-25).
position while all doors are closed.
The personal light will turn off while the 15 CAUTION
second timer is activated when:
Do not use for extended periods of time
• The driver's door is locked by the key fob,
with the engine stopped. This could re-
SIC2063A a key or the lock-unlock switch.
sult in a discharged battery.
Center personal light • The ignition switch is placed in the ON
PERSONAL LIGHT position. LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT
The personal light has a three-position When the switch is in the OFF position O 3 , The light illuminates when the rear hatch is
switch and operates regardless of ignition the light does not illuminate, regardless of opened. When the rear hatch is closed, the
switch position. door position. light goes off. For additional information,
see “Exterior and interior lights” (P. 8-25).
When the switch is in the ON position O1 , Some vehicles are equipped with a battery
the light illuminates, regardless of door saver feature that will automatically turn
position. off the interior lights after approximately 10
minutes if:
When the switch is in the DOOR position O2 ,
the light illuminates by opening a door. • doors are open, or
• the interior light switch is in the ON
position.

MEMO

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Conditions the Remote Engine Start will

NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 not work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Opening the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Locking with key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Closing the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Secondary liftgate unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Opening the fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
NISSAN Intelligent Key® system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Tilt and telescopic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
How to use the remote keyless entry Card holder (driver's side only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Manual anti-glare rearview mirror
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
Remote Engine Start operating range . . . . . . . 3-18 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Remote starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Extending engine run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Canceling a Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
KEYS
NISSAN does not record key numbers so it

is very important to keep track of your key
number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you
have lost all keys and do not have one to
duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can
be duplicated without knowing the key
number.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the Intelli-
gent Key:
LPD2487 LPD2797 • Do not allow the Intelligent Key,
Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) which contains electrical compo-
1. Intelligent Keys (two sets) dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key nents, to come into contact with wa-
System of your vehicle. Since the registra- ter or salt water. This could affect the
2. Mechanical key system function.
tion process requires erasing all memory in
3. Key number plate (one plate) the Intelligent Key components when reg- • Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® istering new keys, be sure to take all Intelli- • Do not strike the Intelligent Key
gent Keys that you have to the NISSAN sharply against another object.
Your vehicle can only be driven with the dealer.
Intelligent Keys which are registered to • Do not change or modify the Intelli-
your vehicle’s Intelligent Key System A key number plate is supplied with your gent Key.
components. keys. Record the key number and keep it in • Wetting may damage the Intelligent
a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,
Never leave the keys in the vehicle. vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom- immediately wipe until it is com-
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for pletely dry.
registered and used with one vehicle. The duplicates by using the key number.
new keys must be registered by a NISSAN
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
• Do not place the Intelligent Key for an CAUTION
extended period in a place where
temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C). Always carry the mechanical key in-
• Do not attach the Intelligent Key with stalled in the Intelligent Key slot.
a key holder that contains a magnet. NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
• Do not place the Intelligent Key near SYSTEM KEYS
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment Additional or replacement keys:
and personal computers. If you still have a key, the key number is not
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN necessary when you need extra NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your ex-
Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may isting key can be duplicated without know-
prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli- ing the key number. As many as four
gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor- SPA1951 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys
mation regarding the erasing procedure, it can be used with one vehicle. You should
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
Mechanical key bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
dealer. The Intelligent Key contains the mechani- tem keys that you have to the NISSAN
cal key. dealer for registration. This is because the
registration process will erase the memory
To remove the mechanical key, release the of all key codes previously registered into
lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key. the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. Af-
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it ter the registration process, these compo-
into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob nents will only recognize keys coded into
returns to the lock position. the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock during registration. Any key that is not
the driver’s door. given to the dealer at the time of registra-
tion will no longer be able to start your
For additional information, see “Doors” vehicle.
(P. 3-4).
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

DOORS
CAUTION When the doors are locked using one of the • To help avoid risk of injury or death
following methods, the doors cannot be through unintended operation of the
Do not allow the immobilizer system opened using the inside or outside door vehicle and/or its systems, including
key, which contains an electrical tran- handles. The doors must be unlocked to entrapment in windows or inadver-
sponder, to come into contact with wa- open the doors. tent door lock activation, do not
ter or salt water. This could affect sys- leave children, people who require
tem function. WARNING the assistance of others or pets unat-
• Always have the doors locked while tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
driving. Along with the use of seat the temperature inside a closed ve-
belts, this provides greater safety in hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
the event of an accident by helping to come high enough to cause a signifi-
prevent persons from being thrown cant risk of injury or death to people
from the vehicle. This also helps keep and pets.
children and others from uninten-
tionally opening the doors, and will
help keep out intruders.
• Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.

LPD2777 LPD2942 LPD3141
Driver’s side Power (if so equipped) Inside lock
LOCKING WITH KEY The power door lock system allows you to
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as lock or unlock all doors at the same time. To lock the door without the key, move the
shown. inside lock knob to the lock position O 1 ,
Turning the key toward the front O
1 of the
then close the door.
vehicle locks all doors.
Manual To unlock the door without the key, move
Turning the key one time toward the rear
To lock the driver’s door, turn the key to- the inside lock knob to the unlock position
ward the front of the vehicle O1 . To unlock,
O2 of the vehicle unlocks that door. From
O2 .
that position, returning the key to neutral
turn it toward the rear O
2 .
O3 (where the key can only be removed
and inserted) and turning it toward the rear
again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors
O4 .

Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver's
or front passenger's side) is moved to the
lock position with the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle while any door is open, a warning
chime will sound and all doors unlock
automatically.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
• All doors lock automatically when the ve-
hicle speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
• All doors unlock automatically when the
transmission is placed in the P (Park) po-
sition or when the ignition switch is
LPD2309 SPA2037
placed in the OFF position depending on
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR the option selected in the “Vehicle Set- CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
LOCK SWITCH tings” menu (if so equipped). Child safety locks help prevent the rear
To lock all the doors without a key, push the NOTE: doors from being opened accidentally, es-
door lock switch (driver's or front passen- pecially when small children are in the
ger's side) to the lock position O 1 . When
The Auto Door Unlock function can be vehicle.
locking the door this way, be certain not to changed using “Vehicle Settings” of the
vehicle information display (if so The child safety lock levers are located on
leave the key inside the vehicle. the edge of the rear doors.
equipped). For additional information,
To unlock all the doors without a key, push see “Vehicle information display (if so When the lever is in the unlock position O
2 ,
the door lock switch (driver's or front pas- equipped)” (P. 2-23). the door can be opened from the outside
senger's side) to the unlock position O2 . or the inside.
When the lever is in the LOCK position O
1 ,
the door can be opened only from the
outside.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® SYSTEM
WARNING CAUTION In such cases, correct the operating condi-

tions before using the Intelligent Key func-
• Radio waves could adversely affect • Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key tion or use the mechanical key.
electric medical equipment. Those with you when operating the vehicle. Although the life of the battery varies de-
who use a pacemaker should contact • Never leave the Intelligent Key in the pending on the operating conditions, the
the electric medical equipment vehicle when you leave the vehicle. battery’s life is approximately two years. If
manufacturer for the possible influ- the battery is discharged, replace it with a
ences before use. The Intelligent Key is always communicat-
ing with the vehicle as it receives radio new one.
• The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves. The Intelligent Key transmits weak When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the
waves when the buttons are pressed.
radio waves. Environmental conditions NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light (if so
The FAA advises the radio waves may
may interfere with the operation of the In- equipped) will blink green for about 30 sec-
affect aircraft navigation and com-
telligent Key under the following operating onds after the ignition switch is placed in
munication systems. Do not operate
conditions: the ON position.
the Intelligent Key while on an air-
plane. Make sure the buttons are not • When operating near a location where Since the Intelligent Key is continuously re-
operated unintentionally when the strong radio waves are transmitted, such ceiving radio waves, if the key is left near
unit is stored for a flight. as a TV tower, power station and broad- equipment which transmits strong radio
casting station. waves, such as signals from a TV and per-
The Intelligent Key can operate all the door • When in possession of wireless equip- sonal computer, the battery life may be-
locks using the remote control function or ment, such as a cellular telephone, trans- come shorter.
pushing the request switch (if so equipped) ceiver, or a CB radio.
on the vehicle without taking the key out When the battery is discharged, firmly ap-
from a pocket or purse. The operating en- • When the Intelligent Key is in contact with ply the foot brake and touch the ignition
vironment and/or conditions may affect or covered by metallic materials. switch with the Intelligent Key. Then push
the Intelligent Key operation. • When any type of radio wave remote con- the ignition switch while depressing the
trol is used nearby. brake pedal within 10 seconds after the
Be sure to read the following before using
• When the Intelligent Key is placed near an chime sound. For additional information,
the Intelligent Key.
electric appliance such as a personal see “Push-button ignition switch” (P. 5-11).
computer. For additional information, see “Battery re-
• When the vehicle is parked near a parking placement” (P. 8-22).
meter.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
registered and used with one vehicle. For charged or strong radio waves are present
information about the purchase and use of near the operating location, the Intelligent
additional Intelligent Keys, it is recom- Key operating range becomes narrower,
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. and the Intelligent Key may not function
properly.
The operating range is within 31.5 in (80 cm)
from each request switch (if so equipped)
O1 .
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door

glass, handle or rear bumper, the request
switches (if so equipped) may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the oper-
ating range, it is possible for anyone, even
someone who does not carry the Intelli-
gent Key, to push the request switch (if so
equipped) to lock/unlock the doors.
LPD2073
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be
used when the Intelligent Key is within the
specified operating range from the request
switch (if so equipped) O
1 .

• To prevent the Intelligent Key from being
left inside the vehicle, make sure you
carry the Intelligent Key with you and then
lock the doors.
• Do not pull the door handle before push-
ing the door handle request switch (if so
equipped). The door will be unlocked but
will not open. Release the door handle
once and pull it again to open the door.
LPD2554 LPD2445
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

PRECAUTION OPERATION
• Do not push the door handle request You can lock or unlock the doors without
switch (if so equipped) with the Intelligent taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket
Key held in your hand as illustrated. The or bag.
close distance to the door handle will
cause the Intelligent Key system to have When you carry the Intelligent Key with you,
difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing
Key is outside the vehicle. the door handle request switch (if so
equipped) within the range of operation.
• After locking with the door handle re-
quest switch (if so equipped), verify the
doors are securely locked by testing
them.

LPD2798 LPD2816 LPD2446
Locking doors NOTE: • Doors do not lock by pushing the door

• Request switches (if so equipped) for handle request switch (if so equipped)
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-
all doors and liftgate can be deacti- while any door is open. However, doors
tion, place the ignition switch in the LOCK
vated when the “Ext. Door Switch” set- lock with the mechanical key even if
position and make sure you carry the
ting is switched to OFF in the “Vehicle any door is open.
Intelligent Key with you.
Settings” of the vehicle information • Doors do not lock with the door handle
2. Close all doors. display (if so equipped). For additional request switch (if so equipped) with
3. Push the door handle request switch (if information, see “Vehicle information the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle
so equipped) O 1 or the liftgate request display (if so equipped)” (P. 2-23). and a beep sounds to warn you. How-
switch (if so equipped) O
2 . • Doors lock with the door handle re- ever, when an Intelligent Key is inside
quest switch (if so equipped) while the the vehicle, doors can be locked with
4. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock. ignition switch is not in the LOCK another Intelligent Key.
5. The hazard indicator lights flash twice position.
and the buzzer sounds twice.

WARNING When any door is open, the doors are
locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put
After locking the doors using the re- inside the vehicle and all the doors are
quest switch (if so equipped), make closed, a chime will sound and the lock will
sure that the doors have been securely automatically unlock.
locked by operating the door handles.
NOTE:
Failure to follow these instructions may
result in inadvertently unlocking the The doors may not lock when the Intelli-
doors, which may decrease the safety gent Key is in the same hand that is op-
and security of your vehicle. erating the request switch (if so
equipped) to lock the door. Put the Intel-
ligent Key in a purse, pocket or your
CAUTION other hand.
• When locking the doors using the re-
quest switch (if so equipped), make CAUTION LPD2798
sure to have the Intelligent Key in Unlocking doors
The lockout protection may not func-
your possession before operating
tion under the following conditions: 1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
the request switch to prevent the In-
telligent Key from being left in the • When the Intelligent Key is placed on 2. Push the door handle request switch (if
vehicle. top of the instrument panel. so equipped) O 1 or the liftgate request
• The request switch (if so equipped) is • When the Intelligent Key is placed in- switch (if so equipped) O
2 .
operational only when the Intelligent side the glove box or a storage bin.
3. The hazard indicator lights flash once
Key has been detected by the Intelli- • When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
and the outside chime sounds once.
gent Key system. side the door pockets.
• When the Intelligent Key is placed in- 4. Push the door handle request switch (if
Lockout protection side or near metallic materials. so equipped) O 1 again within 30 sec-
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being onds to unlock all doors and the liftgate.
accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout
protection is equipped with the Intelligent
Key system.

All doors and the liftgate will be locked au-
tomatically unless one of the following op-
erations is performed within 30 seconds
after pushing the request switch (if so
equipped).
• Opening any doors or the liftgate.
• Pushing the ignition switch.
Using the interior lights

The interior lights illuminate for a period of
time when a door is unlocked and the inte-
rior light switch is in the DOOR position.
The lights can be turned off without waiting
LPD2816 LPD2446 by performing one of the following
NOTE: • Request switches (if so equipped) for operations:
• If Selective Unlock is turned off in “Ve- all doors can be deactivated when the • Placing the ignition switch in the ON
hicle Settings” of the vehicle informa- Intelligent Key Door Lock setting is position.
tion display (if so equipped), all doors switched to OFF in “Vehicle Settings” of • Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.
will unlock upon the first push of the the vehicle information display (if so • Switching the interior lights switch to the
door handle request switch (if so equipped). For additional information, OFF position.
equipped). For additional information, see “Vehicle information display (if so
equipped)” (P. 2-23). For additional information, see “Interior
see “Vehicle information display (if so
lights” (P. 2-73).
equipped)” (P. 2-23). If a door handle is pulled while unlocking
the doors, that door may not be unlocked.
Returning the door handle to its original
position will unlock the door. If the door
does not unlock after returning the door
handle, push the door handle request
switch (if so equipped) to unlock the door.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can op-
erate all door locks using the remote key-
less function of the Intelligent Key. The re-
mote keyless function can operate at a
distance of 10 m (33 ft) away from the ve-
hicle. The operating distance depends
upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not
function under the following conditions:
• When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
LPD3600 LPD3602
• When the doors or the rear liftgate are
open or not closed securely.
• When the Intelligent Key battery is 1. (remote engine start) button
discharged. 1. (lock) button
2. (lock) button
2. (unlock) button
CAUTION 3. (unlock) button
3. (panic) button
When locking the doors using the Intel- 4. (panic) button
ligent Key, be sure not to leave the key
in the vehicle. Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.
2. Close all doors.
3. Press the button on the Intelli-
gent Key.
4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice All doors and the liftgate will be locked au- button on the Intelligent Key for lon-
and the horn beeps once. tomatically unless one of the following op- ger than 1 second.
erations is performed within 30 seconds The headlights will flash and the panic
5. All doors will be locked.
after pressing the button. alarm will stay on for a period of time.
WARNING • Opening any doors or the liftgate.
The panic alarm stops when:
• Engaging the ignition switch from the
After locking the doors using the Intelli- lock position. • It has run for a period of time.
gent Key, be sure that the doors have been • Any button is pressed on the Intelligent
securely locked by operating the door Using the interior lights Key.
handles. Failure to follow these instruc- • The request switch on the driver or pas-
The interior lights illuminate for a period of
tions may result in inadvertently unlock- senger door is pushed and the Intelligent
time when a door is unlocked and the inte-
ing the doors, which may decrease the Key is in range of the door handle.
rior light switch is in the DOOR position.
safety and security of your vehicle. • The liftgate request switch is pushed with
The lights can be turned off without waiting the Intelligent Key in range of the liftgate
Unlocking doors by performing one of the following area.
1. Press the button on the Intelligent operations:
Key. • Placing the ignition switch in the ON Answer back horn feature
2. The hazard indicator lights flash once. position.
If desired, the answer back horn feature
• Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key. can be deactivated using the Intelligent
3. Press the button again within 30
• Switching the interior lights switch to the Key. When it is deactivated and the
seconds to unlock all doors and the
OFF position. button is pressed, the hazard indicator
liftgate.
For additional information, see “Interior lights flash twice. When the button is
NOTE: lights” (P. 2-73). pressed, neither the hazard indicator lights
If Selective Unlock is turned off in “Ve- nor the horn operates.
hicle Settings” of the vehicle informa- Using the panic alarm
tion display (if so equipped), all doors
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
will unlock upon the first press
ened, you may activate the panic alarm to
of the key fob. For additional infor-
call attention by pressing and holding the
mation, see “Vehicle information dis-
play (if so equipped)” (P. 2-23).
NOTE: be replaced. For additional information re-
If you change the Answer Back Horn garding the replacement of a battery, see
and light flash feature with the Intelli- “Battery replacement” (P. 8-22).
gent Key, the vehicle information dis-
play (if so equipped) will show the cur- WARNING SIGNALS
rent mode after the ignition switch To help prevent the vehicle from moving
has been cycled from the OFF to the unexpectedly by erroneous operation of
ON position. The vehicle information the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the
display screen can also be used to vehicle from being stolen, a chime or
change the answer back horn mode. buzzer sounds from inside and outside the
For additional information, see “Ve- vehicle and a warning is displayed in the
hicle information display (if so instrument panel.
equipped)” (P. 2-23). When a chime or beep sounds or a warning
is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle
To deactivate: LPD2836
and the Intelligent Key.
Press and hold the and but-
tons for at least 2 seconds. The hazard Intelligent Key button operation For additional information, see “Trouble-
indicator lights will flash three times to con- light shooting guide” (P. 3-16) and “Vehicle infor-
firm that the answer back horn feature has The light blinks only when you press any mation display (if so equipped)” (P. 2-23).
been deactivated. button on the Intelligent Key. The light illu-
To activate: mination only signifies that the key fob has
Press and hold the and but- transmitted a signal. You may look and/or
tons for at least 2 seconds once more. listen to verify that the vehicle has per-
The hazard indicator lights will flash once formed the intended operation. The num-
and the horn will sound once to confirm ber of blinks identifies each registered key
that the horn beep feature has been (i.e. 1 blink = 1st key,...,4 blinks = 4th key) for
reactivated. your own identification purposes.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does If the light does not blink, your battery may
not silence the horn if the alarm is be too weak to communicate to the ve-
triggered. hicle. If this occurs, the battery may need to

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that
are programmed for the vehicle. If another
Intelligent Key is in range or inside the ve-
hicle, the vehicle system may respond dif-
ferently than expected.
Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
When pushing the ignition switch to The Shift to Park warning appears on The shift lever is not in the P (Park) po- Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-
stop the engine the display and the inside warning sition with the parking brake fully ap- sition.
chime sounds continuously. plied.
When pushing the button on The outside chime sounds for approxi- The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
the Intelligent Key or the door handle mately a few seconds. you.
request switch (if so equipped) to lock A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.
the door
When opening the driver's door to get The Door/liftgate Open warning ap- The ignition switch is in the ON posi- Place the ignition switch in the OFF
out of the vehicle pears on the display and the inside tion. position.
warning chime sounds continuously.
When closing the doors after getting The No Key Detected warning appears The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF
out of the vehicle on the display, the outside chime position. position.
sounds three times and the inside
warning chime sounds for approxi-
mately 3 seconds.
The Rear Door Alert (if so equipped) The Rear Door Alert is activated. Check the back seat for all articles,
warning message appears on the dis- press the OK button to clear the Rear
play, the horn sounds three times Door Alert warning message.
twice, or a Check Back Seat For All Ar-
ticles (if so equipped) warning appears
in the display.
The Shift to Park warning appears on The ignition switch is in the ACC posi- Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-
the display and the outside chime tion and the shift lever is not in the P sition and place the ignition switch in
sounds continuously. (Park) position. the OFF position.

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
When closing the door with the inside The outside chime sounds for approxi- The Intelligent Key is in the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
lock knob turned to LOCK mately 3 seconds and all doors unlock. you.
When pushing the ignition switch to The Key Battery Low warning appears The battery charge is low. Replace the battery with a new one.
start the engine on the display. For additional information, see “Battery
replacement” (P. 8-22).
The No Key Detected warning appears The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
on the display, the outside chime
sounds three times and the inside
warning chime sounds for approxi-
mately 3 seconds.
The I-Key System Error: See Owner’s It warns of a malfunction with the Intel- It is recommended that you visit a
Manual warning appears in the vehicle ligent Key system. NISSAN dealer.
information display (if so equipped).

REMOTE ENGINE START
(if so equipped)
Laws in some local communities may re- REMOTE ENGINE START

strict or prohibit the use of Remote Engine OPERATING RANGE
Start, or the amount of time a parked ve-
hicle engine may idle. For example, some WARNING
laws require a person using Remote Engine
Start to have the vehicle in view or may • To help avoid risk of injury or death
restrict idling time except in freezing tem- through unintended operation of the
peratures. Check local regulations for any vehicle and/or its systems, including
requirements. entrapment in windows or inadver-
Other conditions may affect the function of tent door lock activation, do not
the Remote Engine Start feature. For addi- leave children, people who require
tional information, see “Conditions the Re- the assistance of others or pets unat-
mote Engine Start will not work” (P. 3-20). tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
LPD2995 Other conditions can affect the perfor- hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
mance of the Intelligent Key transmitter. come high enough to cause a signifi-
The button will be on the NISSAN For additional information, see “NISSAN In- cant risk of injury or death to people
Intelligent Key® if the vehicle has Remote telligent Key® system (if so equipped)” and pets.
Engine Start. This feature allows the engine (P. 3-7).
to start from outside the vehicle. • Do not use Remote Engine Start in
closed spaces such as a garage. Do
Vehicles with an automatic climate control not breathe exhaust gases; they con-
system (if so equipped) will default to either tain colorless and odorless carbon
heating or cooling mode. For additional in- monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-
formation, see “Remote Engine Start with gerous. It can cause unconscious-
Intelligent Climate Control (if so equipped)” ness or death.
(P. 4-41).

CAUTION The following events will occur when the • The second 10 minutes will start immedi-
engine starts: ately when the Remote Engine Start
When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- • The parking lights will turn on and remain function is performed again. For example,
charged or other strong radio wave on as long as the engine is running. if the engine has been running for 5 min-
sources are present near the operating • The doors will be locked and the climate utes, and 10 minutes are added, the en-
location, the Intelligent Key operating control system may come on. gine will run for a total of 15 minutes.
range becomes narrower, and the Intel- • The engine will continue to run for 10 min- • Extending engine run time will bring you
ligent Key may not function properly. utes. Repeat the steps to extend the time to the two Remote Engine Start limit.
The Remote Engine Start function can only for an additional 10 minutes. For addi- A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts,
be used when the Intelligent Key is within tional information, see “Extending engine or a single start with an extension, are al-
the specified operating range from the run time” (P. 3-19). lowed between ignition cycles.
vehicle. Press and hold the brake pedal while The ignition switch must be cycled to the
The Remote Engine Start operating range switching the ignition to the ON position ON position and then back to the OFF po-
is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the before driving. For additional information, sition before the Remote Engine Start pro-
vehicle. see “Driving the vehicle” (P. 5-17). cedure can be used again.
REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE
To use the Remote Engine Start feature The Remote Engine Start feature can be START
perform the following: extended one time by performing the To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform
steps listed in “Remote starting the vehicle” one of the following:
1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.
(P. 3-19). Run time will be calculated as • Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and
2. Press the button to lock all doors. follows: press until the parking lights turn off.
3. Within 5 seconds press and hold the • The first 10–minute run time will start • Turn on the hazard indicator flashers.
button until the turn signal lights when the Remote Engine Start function is
performed. • Cycle the ignition switch on and then off.
flash and the tail lamps turn on. If the
• The extended engine run time has
vehicle is not within view press and hold
expired.
the button for at least 2 seconds.
• The first 10–minute timer has expired.
• The engine hood has been opened.

• The vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). • The doors are not closed and locked.
• The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into • The liftgate is open.
the vehicle. • The Key System Error warning message
• The ignition switch is pushed without an appears in the vehicle information dis-
Intelligent Key in the vehicle. play (if so equipped).
• The ignition switch is pushed with an In- • The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into
telligent Key in the vehicle but the brake the vehicle.
pedal is not depressed. • Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single
Remote Engine Start with an extension,
CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE have already been used.
START WILL NOT WORK • The vehicle is not in P (Park).
The Remote Engine Start will not operate if • There is a detected registered key already
any of the following conditions are present: inside of the vehicle.
• The ignition switch is placed in the ON • The Remote Engine Start feature has
position. been switched to the OFF position using
• The hood is not securely closed. the “Vehicle Settings” menu on the vehicle
• The hazard indicator lights are on. information display (if so equipped). For
• The engine is still running. The engine additional information, see “Vehicle infor-
must be completely stopped. Wait at mation display (if so equipped)” (P. 2-23).
least 6 seconds if the engine goes from The Remote Engine Start may display a
running to off. This is not applicable when warning or indicator in the vehicle informa-
extending engine run time. tion display (if so equipped). For additional
• The button is not pressed and held information, see “Vehicle information dis-
for at least 2 seconds. play (if so equipped)” (P. 2-23).
• The button is not pressed and held
within 5 seconds of pressing the lock
button.
• The brake is pressed.

HOOD
WARNING
• Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving.
Failure to do so could cause the hood
to fly open and result in an accident.
• If you see steam or smoke coming
from the engine compartment, to
avoid injury do not open the hood.
LPD2494
1. Pull the hood lock release handle O A lo- 5. When closing the hood, return the sup-
cated below the driver side instrument port rod to its original position, lower the
panel. The hood will spring up slightly. hood slowly and drop the hood from the
height of 8 to 12 in (20 to 30 cm). This
2. Push the lever O B at the front of the
allows proper engagement of the hood
hood to the side as illustrated with your
latch.
fingertips and raise the hood O C .
3. Remove the support rod and insert it

into the slot O
D .
4. When closing the hood, reset the sup-

port rod to its original position.

LIFTGATE
WARNING CAUTION
• Always be sure the liftgate has been • Before opening the liftgate, be sure
closed securely to prevent it from to clear away snow, ice or dust that
opening while driving. may be stuck to the liftgate. If the
• Do not drive with the liftgate open. liftgate is opened while materials are
This could allow dangerous exhaust still stuck to it, it may suddenly close
gases to be drawn into the vehicle. again due to the weight of these
For additional information, see “Ex- materials.
haust gas (carbon monoxide)” • Always be sure to fully open the lift-
(P. 5-4). gate. If it is not fully opened, it may
• Do not leave children or adults who suddenly shut.
would normally require the assis- • Be especially careful when opening
tance of others alone in your vehicle. the liftgate in strong wind. The door
Pets should also not be left alone. could be caught by a gust of wind LPD2475
They could accidently injure them- and may close suddenly. • The liftgate gas stays O A are installed in
selves or others through inadvertent order to support the weight of the lift-
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, gate. In order to prevent the gas stays
sunny days, temperatures in a closed being damaged or not operating prop-
vehicle could quickly become high erly, be sure to observe the following
enough to cause severe or possibly points.
fatal injuries to people or animals. • Do not insert hands or cords into the gas
• Always be sure that hands and feet stays O A or apply any force to them
are clear of the door frame to avoid laterally.
injury while closing the liftgate. • Do not attach any adhesive foreign ma-
terials such as pieces of plastic or stickers
to the rod OB portion.

• Do not close the liftgate while holding the CLOSING THE LIFTGATE
gas stays or hang anything on them. Do-
WARNING
ing so may lead to hands or arms be-
coming trapped in the liftgate and could • Do not shut the liftgate with one
result in an injury. hand and the other hand remaining
on the liftgate or vehicle body. Doing
so may lead to your hand becoming
trapped and could result in an injury.
• When closing the liftgate, do not
place your hands near the edge of
the liftgate. Always be sure to close
the liftgate from the outside.
• After closing the liftgate, be sure to
check that it has been closed se-
LPD2476
curely. If the liftgate opens while the
OPENING THE LIFTGATE vehicle is being driven this could re-
To open the liftgate use the following op- sult in a serious accident.
erations: To close the liftgate, pull down until it se-
• Push the liftgate opener switch and pull curely locks.
up on the liftgate.
• Push the button on the Intelligent
Key. Then push the liftgate opener switch
and pull up on the liftgate.
• With the Intelligent Key in range, push the
liftgate request switch (if so equipped)
and pull up on the liftgate.

LPD2604 LPD2478 LPD2479
SECONDARY LIFTGATE UNLOCK 1. Move the cover O A by using a screw- 2. Then move the inside lever O B by using a
driver or a similar tool available on hand. screwdriver or similar tool available on
Follow the following steps to unlock the
hand. The liftgate will open.
liftgate when the battery is discharged.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for
inspection.
Unlocking the liftgate:

FUEL-FILLER DOOR
FUEL-FILLER CAP • Do not fill a portable fuel container in

WARNING the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
• Gasoline is extremely flammable and liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
highly explosive under certain condi- trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
tions. You could be burned or seri- injury or death when filling portable
ously injured if it is misused or mis- fuel containers:
handled. Always stop the engine and – Always place the container on the
do not smoke or allow open flames or ground when filling.
sparks near the vehicle when
refueling. – Do not use electronic devices
when filling.
• Do not attempt to top off the fuel
tank after the fuel pump nozzle – Keep the pump nozzle in contact
shuts off automatically. Continued with the container while you are
LPD2022 refueling may cause fuel overflow, filling it.
resulting in fuel spray and possibly a – Use only approved portable fuel
OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR containers for flammable liquid.
fire.
The fuel-filler door release is located below
• Use only an original equipment type
the instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has CAUTION
door, pull the release. To lock, close the fuel-
a built-in safety valve needed for
filler door securely. • Do not use a fuel containing more
proper operation of the fuel system
and emission control system. An in- than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For
correct cap can result in a serious additional information, see “Fuel rec-
malfunction and possible injury. It ommendation” (P. 10-4).
could also cause the Malfunction In-
dicator Light (MIL) to come on.
• Never pour fuel into the throttle body
to attempt to start your vehicle.

STEERING WHEEL
• The Loose Fuel Cap warning mes- WARNING

sage will appear if the fuel-filler cap
is not properly tightened. It may take • Do not adjust the steering wheel
a few driving trips for the message to while driving. You could lose control
be displayed. Failure to tighten the of your vehicle and cause an
fuel-filler cap properly after the accident.
Loose Fuel Cap warning message ap- • Do not adjust the steering wheel any
pears may cause the Malfunc- closer to you than is necessary for
tion Indicator Light (MIL) to proper steering operation and com-
illuminate. fort. The driver's air bag inflates with
• Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap great force. If you are unrestrained,
properly may cause the Mal- leaning forward, sitting sideways or
function Indicator Light (MIL) to illu- out of position in any way, you are at
minate. If the light illuminates greater risk of injury or death in a
because the fuel-filler cap is loose or LCE2260 crash. You may also receive serious
missing, tighten or install the cap and To remove the fuel-filler cap: or fatal injuries from the air bag if you
continue to drive the vehicle. The are up against it when it inflates. Al-
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise ways sit back against the seatback
light should turn off after a few
to remove. and as far away as practical from the
driving trips. If the light does not
turn off after a few driving trips, have 2. Loop the tether strap around the hook steering wheel. Always use the seat
the vehicle inspected. It is recom- O1 while refueling. belts.
mended that you visit a NISSAN To install the fuel-filler cap:
• For additional information, see “Mal- 1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the
function Indicator Light (MIL)” fuel-filler tube.
(P. 2-19). 2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a
• If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, single click is heard.
flush it away with water to avoid
paint damage.

SUN VISORS
3. Slide the sun visor extension O

3 in or out
as needed.
CAUTION
• Do not store the sun visor before re-
turning the extension to its original
position.
• Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcedly downward.
LPD2448
TILT AND TELESCOPIC OPERATION

Push the lock lever O
1 down:
• Adjust the steering wheel up or down in

direction O
2 to the desired position.
• Adjust the steering wheel forward or

backward in direction O 3 to the desired
WPD0435
position.
Pull the lock lever O
1 up firmly to lock the
1. To block glare from the front, swing
steering wheel in place. down the sun visor O
1 .
2. To block glare from the side, remove the

sun visor from the center mount and
swing the visor to the side O
2 .

MIRRORS
LPD2820 LPD2471 WPD0126
VANITY MIRRORS CARD HOLDER (driver's side only) MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun To access the card holder, pull the sun visor MIRROR (if so equipped)
visor down and flip open the mirror cover. down and slide card in the card holder O A . Use the night position O1 to reduce glare
Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and Do not view information while operating from the headlights of vehicles behind you
turn on when the mirror cover is open. the vehicle. at night.
Use the day position O
2 when driving in
daylight hours.
WARNING
Use the night position only when nec-
essary, because it reduces rear view
clarity.

NOTE:
Do not hang any objects over the sen-
sors O1 or apply glass cleaner to the sen-
sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity
of the sensors, resulting in improper
operation.
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
press the button as described:
• To turn off the anti-glare feature, press
the button. The indicator light will
turn off.
• To turn on the anti-glare feature, press
the button again. The indicator light
WPD0446 will turn on. LPD2452
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE OUTSIDE MIRRORS

REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) To operate the outside mirror remote con-
The inside mirror is designed so that it au- trol move the small switch O 1 to select the
tomatically dims during night time condi- right or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the
tions and according to the intensity of the desired position using the large switch O 2 .
headlights of the vehicle following you. The Move the small switch to the center (neu-
automatic anti-glare feature is activated tral) position to prevent accidentally mov-
when the ignition switch is in the ON ing the mirror.
position.
The indicator light O
2 will illuminate when
the automatic anti-glare feature is
operating.

WARNING
• Do not adjust the mirrors while driv-
ing. You could lose control of your ve-
hicle and cause an accident.
• Objects viewed in the outside mirror
on the passenger side are closer than
they appear. Be careful when moving
to the right. Using only this mirror
could cause an accident. Use the in-
side mirror or glance over your
shoulder to properly judge distances
to other objects.
LPD0259
Foldable outside mirrors

Pull the outside mirror toward the door to
fold it.
Heated mirrors (if so equipped)

Some outside mirrors can be heated to
defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved vis-
ibility. For additional information, see “Rear
window and/or outside mirror (if so
equipped) defroster switch” (P. 2-42).

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems
NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual How to park with predicted course
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 How to switch the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
How to use the touch-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
How to use the MENU button . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Intelligent Around View Monitor system
(brightness control) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
How to use the VOL (volume) knob / System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
PUSH (power) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Moving Object Detection (MOD)
Selecting menu from launch bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
RearView Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 MOD system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Turning MOD on and off (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-29
How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 MOD system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Difference between predicted and System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
actual distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
How to park with predicted course Heater and air conditioner (manual)
lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
How to turn on and off predicted Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
course lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . 4-13 Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
Intelligent Around View Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Intelligent Around View Monitor system Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Difference between predicted and Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
actual distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48 Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53 Phone display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
iPod®* player operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56 Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Bluetooth® streaming audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . 4-62 During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
USB/iPod® charging ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 Bluetooth® connections screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 Phone and text message settings . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Operating Siri® Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 iPod®/iPhone® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-84
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
NISSANCONNECT® OWNER’S
MANUAL (if so equipped)
Refer to the NissanConnect® Owner’s WARNING

Manual that includes the following infor-
mation. • Positioning of the heating or air con-
• Audio system ditioning controls and display con-
• Apple CarPlay® trols should not be done while driv-
ing in order that full attention may be
• Android Auto TM
given to the driving operation.
• Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system
• Do not disassemble or modify this
• Viewing information system. If you do, it may result in ac-
• Other settings cidents, fire, or electrical shock.
• Voice Recognition (if so equipped) • Do not use this system if you notice
• General system information any abnormality, such as a frozen
screen or lack of sound. Continued
use of the system may result in acci-
dent, fire or electric shock.
• In case you notice any foreign object
in the system hardware, spill liquid
on it, or notice smoke or smell com-
ing from it, stop using the system im-
mediately. Ignoring such conditions
may lead to accidents, fire or electri-
cal shock. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for
servicing.
4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS
* For additional information, see

“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System”
(P. 4-67) regarding the Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System control button.
When you use this system, make sure the
engine is running.
If you use the system with the engine not
running for a long time, it will discharge
the battery, and the engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer
to a key shown only on the display. These
keys can be selected by touching the
screen.
HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN
CAUTION
• The glass display screen may break if
it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If
LHA4703 the glass screen breaks, do not touch
1. MENU button 5. TUNE•SCROLL knob / PUSH SOUND it. Doing so could result in an injury.
button • To clean the display, never use a
2. Display screen rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner
6. VOL (volume) knob / PUSH (power) or any kind of solvent or paper towel
3. DISP button
button with a chemical cleaning agent. They
4. BACK button will scratch or deteriorate the panel.
7. (brightness control) button
8. button*
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

• Do not splash any liquid such as wa-
ter or car fragrance on the display.
Contact with liquid will cause the sys-
tem to malfunction.
To help ensure safe driving, some functions
cannot be operated while driving.
The on-screen functions that are not avail-
able while driving will be “grayed out” or
muted.
WARNING
• ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving. LHA5318
• Avoid using vehicle features that
could distract you. If distracted, you Touch-screen operation
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident.
Menu Item Result

Selecting the item Touch an item to select. To select the “Phone” key, touch the “Phone” key on the screen. Touch the “ ” key to
return to the previous screen.
Adjusting the item Touch the “+” key or the “−” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one
item at a time. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time.
Inputting characters Touch the number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.
123 Touch to manually enter numbers.
OK Completes the character input.

Touch-screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry,
soft cloth. If additional cleaning is neces-
sary, use a small amount of neutral deter-
gent with a soft cloth. Never spray the
screen with water or detergent. Dampen
the cloth first and then wipe the screen.
LHA5319 LHA5318
HOW TO USE THE MENU

BUTTON
To select and/or adjust several functions,
features and modes that are available for
your vehicle:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the desired item.

Menu item Result
Settings Touch to change the following settings.
Connections Touch this key to select either Bluetooth® phone, Bluetooth® audio or USB audio options. For additional in-
formation, see “USB connections screen” (P. 4-54) and “Bluetooth® connections screen” (P. 4-81).
Phone For additional information, see “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System” (P. 4-67).
Sound For additional information, see “Audio system” (P. 4-43).
Volume & Beeps For additional information, see “Volume & beeps” (P. 4-84).
Clock Touch this key to adjust clock settings.
On-screen Clock Touch to toggle ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.
Clock Format Touch to set the clock to 12–hour or 24–hour format.
Daylight Savings Time Touch to adjust the daylight savings time to on or off.
Set Clock Manually Touch to adjust the clock manually; then touch to change between AM and PM, the hour and the minutes.
System Voice For additional information, see “Settings” (P. 4-75).
Camera Touch this key to change the camera settings.
Others Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will
appear.
Display Touch this key to toggle the display off or to adjust the appearance of the display. For additional informa-
tion, see “Adjusting the screen” (P. 4-13).
Language Touch this key to change the language on the display.
OSS Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information.
Return All Settings To Default Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.

(brightness control) BUTTON The following menu items are available on
To change the display brightness, press the the Launch Bar:
button. Pressing the button again will • AM
change the display to the day or the night • FM
display. • USB/iPod
Press and hold the button for more • Bluetooth
than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press • AUX
and hold the button again to turn the dis- • Settings
play on.
HOW TO USE THE VOL (volume)
KNOB / PUSH (power)
BUTTON
Press the PUSH (power) button to turn LHA4707
audio function on and off. Turn the VOL SELECTING MENU FROM LAUNCH
(volume) knob to adjust audio volume.
BAR
Various system functions can be accessed
by touching the items on the Launch Bar
O1 which is displayed on most of the main
menu screens (the Launch Bar does not
appear on some screens such as keyboard
screens, camera screens, etc.)
Touch the keys on the Launch Bar to dis-
play the corresponding menu screens.

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)
LHA5390
1. CAMERA button WARNING • RearView Monitor is a convenience
2. DISP button feature and is not a substitute for
• Failure to follow the warnings and in- proper backing. Always turn and look
structions for proper use of the Rear- out the windows and check mirrors
View Monitor system could result in to be sure that it is safe to move be-
serious injury or death. fore operating the vehicle. Always
back up slowly.

• The system is designed as an aid to
the driver in showing large station-
ary objects directly behind the ve-
hicle, to help avoid damaging the
vehicle.
• The distance guide lines and the ve-
hicle width lines should be used as a
reference only when the vehicle is on
a level paved surface. The distance
viewed on the monitor is for refer-
ence only and may be different than
the actual distance between the ve-
hicle and displayed objects.
LHA4109 LHA4805
CAUTION To display the rear view, the RearView Moni- HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
Do not scratch the camera lens when tor system uses a camera located just LINES
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of above the vehicle’s license plate O 1 .
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle
the camera. REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM width and distances to objects with refer-
The RearView Monitor system automati- OPERATION ence to the vehicle body line OA are dis-
cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when played on the monitor.
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) Distance guide lines
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-
position. The radio can still be heard while
sition to operate the RearView Monitor. Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
the RearView Monitor is active.
• Red line O1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
• Yellow line O2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)
• Green line O 3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)

Vehicle width guide lines O
4 DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED
Indicate the vehicle width when backing AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
up. The displayed guidelines and their loca-
Predicted course lines O
5 tions on the ground are for approximate
reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill
Indicate the predicted course when back-
surfaces or projecting objects will be actu-
ing up. The predicted course lines will be
ally located at distances different from
displayed on the monitor when the shift
those displayed in the monitor relative to
lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the
the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When
steering wheel is turned. The predicted
in doubt, turn around and view the objects
course lines will move depending on how
as you are backing up, or park and exit the
much the steering wheel is turned and will
vehicle to view the positioning of objects
not be displayed while the steering wheel is
behind the vehicle.
in the straight-ahead position.
The vehicle width guide lines and the width
of the predicted course lines are wider than
the actual width and course.
LHA5050
Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the ac-
tual distance. Note that any object on the
hill is further than it appears on the
monitor.

LHA5051 LHA4995 LHA5052
Backing up on a steep downhill Backing up near a projecting Backing up behind a projecting

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, object object
the distance guide lines and the vehicle The predicted course lines O A do not touch The position O C is shown farther than the
width guide lines are shown farther than the object in the display. However, the ve- position OB in the display. However, the po-
the actual distance. Note that any object hicle may hit the object if it projects over sition O
C is actually at the same distance as
on the hill is closer than it appears on the the actual backing up course. the position O A . The vehicle may hit the
monitor.

object when backing up to the position O A
if the object projects over the actual back-
ing up course.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED
COURSE LINES
WARNING
• If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines
may be displayed incorrectly.
• On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between
the predicted course line and the ac-
tual course line.
• If the battery is disconnected or be-
comes discharged, the predicted
course lines may be displayed incor-
rectly. If this occurs, please perform
the following procedures:
– Turn the steering wheel from lock
to lock while the engine is LHA5043 LHA4770
running. 1. Visually check that the parking space is 3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the
– Drive the vehicle on a straight road safe before parking your vehicle. steering wheel so that the predicted
for more than 5 minutes. course lines O
B enter the parking space
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed
• When the steering wheel is turned on the screen OA when the shift lever is
OC .
with the ignition switch in the ACC moved to the R (Reverse) position.
position, the predicted course lines

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF
the vehicle width guide lines OD parallel
PREDICTED COURSE LINES
to the parking space OC while referring
to the predicted course lines. To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course
lines while in the P (Park) position:
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space
completely, move the shift lever to the P 1. Press the CAMERA button.
(Park) position and apply the parking 2. Touch the “Predicted Course Lines” key
brake. to turn the feature ON or OFF.
To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course
lines while in the R (Reverse) position, press
the CAMERA button.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
LHA3522 LIMITATIONS
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN WARNING
1. While on the main menu screen, touch
the “Settings” key. Listed below are the system limitations
for RearView Monitor. Failure to oper-
2. Touch the “Camera” key. ate the vehicle in accordance with
3. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”, these system limitations could result in
“Color”, or “Black Level” key. serious injury or death.
• The system cannot completely elimi-
4. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “–” nate blind spots and may not show
key on the touch-screen display. every object.
NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings
of the RearView Monitor while the ve-
hicle is moving.

• Underneath the bumper and the cor- • When washing the vehicle with high • There may be a delay when switching
ner areas of the bumper cannot be pressure water, be sure not to spray it between views.
viewed on the RearView Monitor be- around the camera. Otherwise, water • If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the
cause of its monitoring range limita- may enter the camera unit causing camera, the RearView Monitor may not
tion. The system will not show small water condensation on the lens, a display objects clearly. Clean the camera.
objects below the bumper, and may malfunction, fire or an electric shock. • Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe
not show objects close to the bum- • Do not strike the camera. It is a preci- off any wax with a clean cloth dampened
per or on the ground. sion instrument. Otherwise, it may with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then
• Objects viewed in the RearView malfunction or cause damage result- wipe with a dry cloth.
Monitor differ from actual distance ing in a fire or an electric shock.
because a wide-angle lens is used.
The following are operating limitations and
• Objects in the RearView Monitor will do not represent a system malfunction:
appear visually opposite compared
• When the temperature is extremely high
to when viewed in the rearview and
or low, the screen may not clearly display
outside mirrors.
objects.
• Use the displayed lines as a refer-
• When strong light directly shines on the
ence. The lines are highly affected by
camera, objects may not be displayed
the number of occupants, fuel level,
clearly.
vehicle position, road conditions and
road grade. • Vertical lines may be seen in objects on
the screen. This is due to strong reflected
• Make sure that the liftgate is securely
light from the bumper.
closed when backing up.
• The screen may flicker under fluorescent
• Do not put anything on the rearview
light.
camera. The rearview camera is in-
stalled above the license plate. • The colors of objects on the RearView
Monitor may differ somewhat from the
actual color of objects.
• Objects on the monitor may not be clear
in a dark environment.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
camera O 1 , the RearView Monitor may not
display objects clearly. Clean the camera
by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a
diluted mild cleaning agent and then wip-
ing it with a dry cloth.
LHA4109
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thin-
ner to clean the camera. This will
cause discoloration.
• Do not damage the camera as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW
MONITOR (if so equipped)
LHA5391
1. CAMERA button

WARNING The Intelligent Around View Monitor sys-
tem is designed as an aid to the driver in
• Failure to follow the warnings and in- situations such as slot parking or parallel
structions for the proper use of the parking.
Intelligent Around View Monitor sys- The monitor displays various views of the
tem could result in serious injury or position of the vehicle in a split screen for-
death. mat. Not all views are available at all times.
• The Intelligent Around View Monitor
Available views:
is a convenience feature and is not a
substitute for proper vehicle opera- • Front View
tion because it has areas where ob- An approximately 150–degree view of the
jects cannot be viewed. The four cor- front of the vehicle.
ners of the vehicle in particular, are • Rear View
areas where objects do not always An approximately 150–degree view of the
appear in the bird’s-eye, front, or rear rear of the vehicle. LHA4113
views. Always check your surround- • Bird's-Eye View To display the multiple views, the Intelligent
ings to be sure that it is safe to move The surrounding views of the vehicle Around View Monitor system uses cam-
before operating the vehicle. Always from above. eras located in the front grille, on the vehi-
operate the vehicle slowly. • Front-Side View cle’s outside mirrors and one just above
• The driver is always responsible for The view around and ahead of the front the vehicle’s license plate O
1 .
safety during parking and other passenger's side wheel.
maneuvers. INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW
MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
CAUTION With the ignition switch in the ON position,
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-
Do not scratch the camera lens when sition or press the CAMERA button to oper-
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of ate the Intelligent Around View Monitor.
the camera.

The screen displayed on the Intelligent • When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob-
Around View Monitor will automatically re- jects viewed in the monitor are fur-
turn to the previous screen 3 minutes after ther than they appear. When driving
the CAMERA button has been pressed with the vehicle down a hill, objects
the shift lever in a position other than R viewed in the monitor are closer than
(Reverse) position. they appear.
• Objects in the rear view will appear
Available views visually opposite compared to when
viewed in the monitor and outside
WARNING mirrors.
• The distance guide lines and the ve- • Use the mirrors or actually look to
hicle width lines should be used as a properly judge distances to other
reference only when the vehicle is on objects.
a paved, level surface. The apparent • On a snow-covered or slippery road, SAA1840
distance viewed on the monitor may there may be a difference between
be different than the actual distance Front view
the predicted course lines and the
between the vehicle and displayed actual course line. Front and rear view
objects. • The vehicle width and predicted Guiding lines that indicate the approximate
• Use the displayed lines and the course lines are wider than the actual vehicle width and distance to objects with
bird’s-eye view as a reference. The width and course. reference to the vehicle body line O A are
lines and the bird’s-eye view are • The displayed lines will appear displayed on the monitor.
greatly affected by the number of oc- slightly off to the right, because the
cupants, cargo, fuel level, vehicle po- Distance guide lines:
rearview camera is not installed in
sition, road condition and road the rear center of the vehicle. Indicate distances from the vehicle body:
grade. • Red line O1 : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
• If the tires are replaced with different • Yellow line O2 : approximately 3 ft (1 m)
and the bird's-eye view may be dis- • Green line O 3 : approximately 7 ft (2 m)
played incorrectly. • Green line O 4 : approximately 10 ft (3 m) (if

so equipped)

The front view will not be displayed when
the vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).
NOTE:
When the monitor displays the front
view and the steering wheel turns about
90 degrees or less from the straight-
ahead position, both the right and left
predicted course lines O6 are displayed.
When the steering wheel turns about 90
degrees or more, a line is displayed only
on the opposite side of the turn.
LHA4992 LHA4264
Rear view Bird’s-eye view
Vehicle width guide lines O
5 :
The bird's-eye view shows the overhead
Indicate the approximate vehicle width view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the
when backing up. vehicle position and the predicted course
Predicted course lines O
6 :
to a parking space.
Indicate the predicted course when oper- The vehicle icon O1 shows the position of
ating the vehicle. The predicted course the vehicle. Note that the apparent dis-
lines will be displayed on the monitor when tance between objects viewed in the
the steering wheel is turned. The predicted bird's-eye view may differ somewhat from
course lines will move depending on how the actual distance to the vehicle.
much the steering wheel is turned and will The areas that the cameras cannot cover
not be displayed while the steering wheel is O2 are indicated in black.
in the straight-ahead position.

After the ignition switched is placed in the DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED
ON position, the non-viewable area O 2 is
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
highlighted in yellow for 3 seconds after the
birds-eye view is displayed. The displayed guidelines and their loca-
tions on the ground are for approximate
In addition, the non-viewable corners O 3
reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill
are displayed in red and blink for the first 3 surfaces or projecting objects will be actu-
seconds to remind the driver to be ally located at distances different from
cautious. those displayed in the monitor relative to
the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When
WARNING in doubt, turn around and view the objects
• Objects in the bird's-eye view will ap- as you are backing up, or park and exit the
pear further than the actual distance. vehicle to view the positioning of objects
behind the vehicle.
• Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,
may be misaligned or not displayed LHA2652
at the seam of the views. Front-side view
• Objects that are above the camera Guiding lines
cannot be displayed.
• The view of the bird's-eye view may Guiding lines that indicate the approximate
be misaligned when the camera po- width and the front end of the vehicle are
sition alters. displayed on the monitor.
• A line on the ground may be mis- The front-of-vehicle line O
1 shows the front
aligned and is not seen as being part of the vehicle.

straight at the seam of the views. The The side-of-vehicle line O
2 shows the ap-
misalignment will increase as the proximate vehicle width including the out-
line proceeds away from the vehicle. side mirrors.
The extensions O 3 of both the front O
1 and
side O2 lines are shown with a green dotted
line.

LHA5050 LHA5051 LHA4995
Backing up on a steep uphill Backing up on a steep downhill Backing up near a projecting

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the When backing up the vehicle down a hill, object
distance guide lines and the vehicle width the distance guide lines and the vehicle The predicted course lines O A do not touch
guide lines are shown closer than the ac- width guide lines are shown farther than the object in the display. However, the ve-
tual distance. Note that any object on the the actual distance. Note that any object hicle may hit the object if it projects over
hill is further than it appears on the on the hill is closer than it appears on the the actual backing up course.
monitor. monitor.

object when backing up to the position O A
if the object projects over the actual back-
ing up course.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED
COURSE LINES
WARNING
• If the tires are replaced with different
• On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between
the predicted course line and the ac-
tual course line.
• If the battery is disconnected or be-
comes discharged, the predicted
course lines may be displayed incor-
rectly. If this occurs, please perform
the following procedures:
– Turn the steering wheel from lock
LHA5052 to lock while the engine is LHA5043
Backing up behind a projecting running. 1. Visually check that the parking space is
object – Drive the vehicle on a straight road safe before parking your vehicle.
for more than 5 minutes.
The position O C is shown farther than the 2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed
• When the steering wheel is turned on the screen OA when the shift lever is
position OB in the display. However, the po-
with the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition O
C is actually at the same distance as moved to the R (Reverse) position.
sition, the predicted course lines may
the position O A . The vehicle may hit the
be displayed incorrectly.

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make If the shift lever is in the P (Park) or D (Drive)
the vehicle width guide lines OD parallel position, the available views are:
to the parking space OC while referring • Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen
to the predicted course lines. • Front view/front-side view split screen
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space The display will switch from the Intelligent
completely, move the shift lever to the P Around View Monitor screen when:
(Park) position and apply the parking
• The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position
brake.
and the vehicle speed increases above
HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
With the ignition switch in the ON position, • A different screen is selected.
press the CAMERA button or move the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate
the Intelligent Around View Monitor.
The Intelligent Around View Monitor dis-
plays different split screen views depend-
ing on the position of the shift lever. Press
the CAMERA button to switch between the
available views.
If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position,
the available views are:
LHA4770
• Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the • Rear view/front-side view split screen
steering wheel so that the predicted
course lines O
B enter the parking space
OC .

NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings
of the RearView Monitor while the ve-
hicle is moving. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly applied.
LHA3522
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

1. While on the main menu screen, touch
the “Settings” key.
2. Use the arrow to tab to the next screen
and touch the “Camera” key.
3. Touch the “Display Settings” key. LHA4117
4. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”, INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW

“Color”, or “Black Level” key. MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
5. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “–”
key on the touch-screen display.

WARNING • Do not strike the cameras. They are • Objects on the Intelligent Around View
precision instruments. Doing so Monitor may not be clear and the color of
Listed below are the system limitations could cause a malfunction or cause the object may differ in a dark
for Intelligent Around View Monitor. damage resulting in a fire or an elec- environment.
Failure to operate the vehicle in accor- tric shock. • There may be differences in sharpness
dance with these system limitations between each camera view of the bird's-
could result in serious injury or death. There are some areas where the system eye view.
will not show objects and the system does
• Do not use the Intelligent Around • Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe
not warn of moving objects. When in the
View Monitor with the outside mir- off any wax with a clean cloth that has
front or rear view display, an object below
rors in the stored position, and make been dampened with a diluted mild
the bumper or on the ground may not be
sure that the liftgate is securely cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry
viewed O 1 . When in the bird’s-eye view, a tall
closed when operating the vehicle object near the seam O 2 of the camera
cloth.
using the Intelligent Around View viewing areas will not appear in the
Monitor. monitor.
• The apparent distance between ob-
jects viewed on the Intelligent The following are operating limitations and
Around View Monitor differs from the do not represent a system malfunction:
actual distance. • There may be a delay when switching
• The cameras are installed on the between views.
front grille, the outside mirrors and • When the temperature is extremely high
above the rear license plate. Do not or low, the screen may not display objects
put anything on the vehicle that cov- clearly.
ers the cameras. • When strong light directly shines on the
• When washing the vehicle with high camera, objects may not be displayed
pressure water, be sure not to spray it clearly.
around the cameras. Otherwise, wa- • The screen may flicker under fluorescent
ter may enter the camera unit caus- light.
ing water condensation on the lens, a • The colors of objects on the Intelligent
malfunction, fire or an electric shock. Around View Monitor may differ some-
what from the actual color of objects.
LHA3591 LHA3592 LHA4113
System temporarily unavailable When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
screen, the camera image may be receiv-
When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen,
ing temporary electronic disturbances CAUTION
there are abnormal conditions in the Intel-
from surrounding devices. This will not hin-
ligent Around View Monitor. This will not • Do not use alcohol, benzine or thin-
der normal driving operation but the sys-
hinder normal driving operation but the ner to clean the camera. This will
tem should be inspected if it occurs fre-
system should be inspected. It is recom- cause discoloration.
quently. It is recommended that you visit a
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for • Do not damage the cameras as the
this service. monitor screen may be adversely
affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of
the cameras O 1 , the Intelligent Around
View Monitor may not display objects
clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with a
cloth dampened with a diluted mild clean-
ing agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.
MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)
(if so equipped)
LHA5391
1. CAMERA button

WARNING MOD SYSTEM OPERATION
The MOD system will turn on automatically
• Failure to follow the warnings and in-
under the following conditions:
structions for proper use of the Mov-
ing Object Detection (MOD) system • When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
could result in serious injury or death. position.
• The MOD system is not a substitute • When the CAMERA button is pressed to
for proper vehicle operation and is activate the camera view on the display.
not designed to prevent contact with • When vehicle speed decreases below ap-
objects surrounding the vehicle. proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and the
When maneuvering, always use the camera screen is displayed.
outside mirrors and rearview mirror
and turn and check the surroundings
to ensure it is safe to maneuver.
• The system is deactivated at speeds LHA4190
above 5 mph (8 km/h) . It is reacti- Front and bird’s-eye views
vated at lower speeds. The MOD system operates in the following
• The MOD system is not designed to conditions when the camera view is
detect surrounding stationary displayed:
objects. • When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position and the vehicle is
The MOD system can inform the driver of
stopped, the MOD system detects mov-
moving objects near the vehicle when
ing objects in the bird’s-eye view. The
backing out of garages, maneuvering in
MOD system will not operate if the out-
parking lots and in other such instances.
side mirrors are moving in or out, in the
The MOD system detects moving objects stowed position, or if either front door is
by using image processing technology on opened.
the image shown in the display.

In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame O
1 is
displayed on each camera image (front,
rear, right, left) depending on where mov-
ing objects are detected.
The yellow frame O 2 is displayed on each
view in the front view and rear view modes.
A blue MOD icon O 3 is displayed in the view
where the MOD system is operative. A gray
MOD icon is displayed in the view where the
MOD system is not operative.
If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD
icon O3 is not displayed.
LHA5171 LHA4997 TURNING MOD ON AND OFF (if so

Rear and bird’s-eye views Rear and front-side views equipped)
• When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) The MOD system does not detect moving Some vehicles include the option to allow
position and the vehicle speed is below objects in the front-side view. The MOD the MOD system to be turned on or off in
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the MOD icon is not displayed on the screen when in the vehicle information display.
system detects moving objects in the this view.
To turn the MOD system on or off:
front view. When the MOD system detects moving ob-
• When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) 1. Using buttons on the steering
jects near the vehicle, a chime will be heard
position and the vehicle speed is below wheel to select “Settings”.
when in front or rear view and a yellow
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the MOD frame will be displayed on the view where 2. Select “Driver Assistance” and press the
system detects moving objects in the the objects are detected. While the MOD OK button.
rear view. The MOD system will not oper- system continues to detect moving ob-
ate if the liftgate is open. jects, the yellow frame continues to be 3. Select “Parking Aids”.
displayed. 4. Toggle ON or OFF “Moving Object” using
the OK button.

MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS – When camera orientation is not in NOTE:
WARNING its usual position, such as when a The blue MOD icon will change to or-
mirror is folded. ange if one of the following has oc-
Listed below are the system limitations – When there is dirt, water drops or curred
for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle snow on the camera lens. • When the system is malfunctioning.
in accordance with these system limi- • When the component temperature
– When the position of the moving
tations could result in serious injury or reaches a high level (icon will blink).
objects in the display is not
death.
changed. • When the RearView camera has detected
• Do not use the MOD system when a blockage (icon will blink).
• The MOD system might detect flow-
towing a trailer. The system may not
ing water droplets on the camera If the icon light continues to illuminate
function properly.
lens, white smoke from the muffler, orange, have the MOD system checked. It
• Excessive noise (for example, audio moving shadows, etc. is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
system volume or open vehicle win-
• The MOD system may not function dealer for this service.
dow) will interfere with the chime
properly depending on the speed, di-
sound, and it may not be heard.
rection, distance or shape of the
• The MOD system performance will be moving objects.
limited according to environmental
• If your vehicle sustains damage to
conditions and surrounding objects
the parts where the camera is in-
such as:
stalled, leaving it misaligned or bent,
– When there is low contrast be- the sensing zone may be altered and
tween background and the mov- the MOD system may not detect ob-
ing objects. jects properly.
– When there is a blinking source of • When the temperature is extremely
light. high or low, the screen may not dis-
– When strong light such as another play objects clearly. This is not a
vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is malfunction.
present.

VENTS
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of

the cameras O 1 , the MOD system may not
operate properly. Clean the camera by wip-
ing with a cloth dampened with a diluted
mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a
dry cloth.
LHA4113 LHA4123
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Side vents

Adjust air flow direction of side vents by
CAUTION opening, closing, or rotating.
Adjust air flow direction of center vent by
• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thin- moving the vent slides.
ner to clean the camera. This will
cause discoloration.
• Do not damage the camera as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual) (if so equipped)
• Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assis-
tance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure them-
selves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
• Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the inte-
rior air to become stale and the win-
LHA4124 dows to fog up.
Center vents
NOTE:
WARNING • Odors from inside and outside the ve-
• The air conditioner cooling function hicle can build up in the air conditioner
operates only when the engine is unit. Odor can enter the passenger
running. compartment through the vents.
• When parking, set the heater and air
conditioner controls to turn off air re-
circulation to allow fresh air into the
passenger compartment. This should
help reduce odors inside the vehicle.

Fan speed control dial
The fan speed control dial turns the
fan on and off and controls fan speed.
Air flow control dial

The air flow control dial allows you to select
the air flow outlets.
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from the foot out-
lets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets
and the foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to
LHA4202 adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To
lower the temperature, turn the dial to the
CONTROLS 5. Temperature control dial left. To increase the temperature, turn the
6. Fresh air intake button dial to the right.
1. Air flow control dial 7. Rear window and outside mirror (if
2. A/C (air conditioner) button so quipped) defroster switch
3. Fan speed control dial
4. Air recirculation button

Fresh air intake HEATER OPERATION 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
Press the fresh air intake button to Heating
draw outside air into the passenger
compartment.
This mode is used to direct heated air to Defrosting or defogging
the foot outlets. Some air also flows from This mode directs the air to the defrost
the defrost outlets.
Air recirculation outlets to defrost/defog the windows.
1. Press the button for normal heat- 1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
Press the air recirculation button to
ing. The indicator light on the but- position.
recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.
ton will go off.
The air recirculation cannot be activated 2. Turn the fan speed control dial to
when the air conditioner is in the front 2. Turn the airflow control dial to the the desired position.
defrosting mode. position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the
3. Turn the fan speed control dial to desired position between the middle
A/C (air conditioner) button the desired position. and the hot position.
Start the engine, turn the fan speed 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the • To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-
control dial to the desired position and desired position between the middle dows, turn the fan speed control dial
press the button to turn on the air and the hot position. to the right and the temperature control
conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner, to the full HOT position.
press the button again. Ventilation
The air conditioner cooling function op- This mode directs outside air to the side Bi-level heating
erates only when the engine is running. and center vents. The bi-level mode directs warmed air to
1. Press the button. The indicator light the side and center vents and to the foot
Rear window and outside mirror outlets.
on the button will go off.
(if so equipped) defroster switch 1. Press the button. The indicator light
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
For additional information, see “Rear win- on the button will go off.
position.
dow and outside mirror (if so equipped)
defroster switch” (P. 2-42). 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to 2. Turn the airflow control dial to the
the desired position. position.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to Operating tips • For quick cooling when the outside tem-
the desired position. perature is high, press the button.
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
The indicator light on the button will
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the and air inlet in front of the windshield.
come on. Press the button for nor-
desired position. This improves heater operation.
mal cooling. The indicator light on the
AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION button will go off.
Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs Start the engine, turn the fan speed Dehumidified heating
the windshield. control dial to the desired position, and
press the button to activate the air This mode is used to heat and dehumidify
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, the air.
position. cooling and dehumidifying functions are 1. Press the button. The indicator light
2. Turn the fan speed control dial to added to the heater operation. on the button will go off.
the desired position. The air conditioner cooling function op- 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the erates only when the engine is running. position.
desired position between the middle
Cooling 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to
and the hot position.
the desired position.
• If in the mode for more than 1 This mode is used to cool and dehumidify
minute, the air conditioning system will the air. 4. Press the button on.
continue to operate until the vehicle is 1. Press the button. 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the
shut off. This dehumidifies the air which desired position.
helps defog the windshield. The 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
mode automatically turns off, allowing position.
Dehumidified defogging
outside air to be drawn into the passen- 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to
ger compartment to further improve the This mode is used to defog the windows
the desired position. and dehumidify the air.
defogging performance.
4. Press the button. 1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the position.
desired position. 2. Turn the fan speed control dial to
the desired position.
3. Press the button. The indicator • The air conditioning system should be
light comes on. operated for approximately ten min-
When the , or positions in be- utes at least once a month. This helps
tween are selected, the air conditioner au- prevent damage to the system due to
tomatically turns on. The air conditioning lack of lubrication.
system will continue to operate until the • A visible mist may be seen coming from
fan speed control dial is turned to OFF or the ventilators in hot, humid conditions
the vehicle is shut off, even if the air flow as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not
control dial is turned to a position other indicate a malfunction.
than the position. This dehumidifies • If the high temperature warning light
the air which helps defog the windshield. illuminates in red indicating en-
The mode automatically turns off, al- gine coolant temperature is over the
lowing outside air to be drawn into the pas- normal range, turn the air conditioner
senger compartment to further improve off. For additional information, see “If
the defogging performance. your vehicle overheats” (P. 6-12).
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the AIR FLOW CHARTS
desired position.
The following charts show the button and
Operating tips dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK
heating, cooling or defrosting. The air
• Keep the windows closed while the air recirculation button should always be in
conditioner is in operation. the OFF position for heating and
• After parking in the sun, drive for two or defrosting.
three minutes with the windows open to
vent hot air from the passenger com-
partment. Then, close the windows. This
allows the air conditioner to cool the inte-
rior more quickly.

LHA4674 LHA4675

LHA4676 LHA4677

LHA4678

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (if so equipped)
WARNING
• The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.
• Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assis-
tance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure them-
selves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
• Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the inte-
rior air to become stale and the win-
dows to fog up.
NOTE:
LHA5218 • Odors from inside and outside the ve-
1. Temperature control dial /AUTO button 6. Rear window and outside mirror hicle can build up in the air conditioner
2. Heated seat switches (if so (if so equipped) defroster switch unit. Odor can enter the passenger
equipped) 7. MODE (manual air flow control) button compartment through the vents.
3. Display Screen 8. Front defroster button • When parking, set the heater and air
4. Fan speed control dial/A/C (air 9. ON-OFF button conditioner controls to turn off air re-
conditioner) button circulation to allow fresh air into the
5. Air recirculation button passenger compartment. This should
help reduce odors inside the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION • The temperature of the passenger com- Remote Engine Start with
partment will be maintained automati- Intelligent Climate Control (if so
Heating (A/C OFF) cally. Air flow distribution and fan speed
The air conditioner does not activate. When are also controlled automatically.
equipped)
you need to heat only, use this mode. • A visible mist may be seen coming from Vehicles equipped with automatic climate
the vents in hot, humid conditions as the controls and Remote Engine Start function
1. Press the AUTO button.
air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate may go into automatic heating or cooling
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set a malfunction. mode when Remote Engine Start is acti-
the desired temperature. vated depending on outside and cabin
• The temperature of the passenger com- Dehumidified defrosting or temperatures. During this period, the cli-
partment will be maintained automati- mate control display and buttons will be
defogging inoperable until the ignition switch is
cally. Air flow distribution and fan speed
are also controlled automatically. 1. Press the front defroster button on. turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrost-
ing mode, the rear window defroster,
• Do not set the temperature lower than 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set
heated seats (if so equipped) and heated
the outside air temperature. Otherwise, the maximum temperature to aid in
steering wheel (if so equipped) may be ac-
the system may not work properly. defogging.
tivated automatically.
• Not recommended if windows fog up. • To quickly remove ice from the outside of
the windows, use the fan speed con- MANUAL OPERATION
Cooling and/or dehumidified trol dial to set the fan speed to maximum.
heating (AUTO) • As soon as possible after the windshield Fan speed control
is clean, press the AUTO button to return Turn the fan speed control dial to
This mode may be used all year round as
to the automatic mode. manually control the fan speed.
the system automatically works to keep a
constant temperature. Air flow distribution • When the front defroster button is
Press the AUTO button to return to auto-
and fan speed are also controlled pressed, the air conditioner will automati-
matic control of the fan speed.
automatically. cally be turned on.
1. Press the AUTO button on.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to the
left or right to set the desired
temperature.
Temperature control dial — Air flows mainly from foot out-
lets.
The temperature control dial allows you to — Air flows from defroster and foot
adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To
outlets.
lower the temperature, turn the dial to the
left. To increase the temperature, turn the To turn system off
dial to the right.
To turn off the heater and air conditioner,
press the ON-OFF button. Press the ON-
Air recirculation OFF button again, the system will turn on in
Press the air recirculation button to the mode which was used immediately
recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. before the system was turned off.
A/C (air conditioner) button Rear window and outside mirror

Start the engine, turn the fan speed (if so equipped) defroster switch
control dial to the desired position and LHA4125
For additional information, see “Rear win-
press the button to turn on the air dow and outside mirror (if so equipped) OPERATING TIPS
conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner, defroster switch” (P. 2-42).
press the button again. The sunload sensor, located on the driver’s
side of the instrument panel, as shown,
The air conditioner cooling function op- Heated seat switches (if so helps the system maintain a constant
erates only when the engine is running. equipped) temperature. Do not put anything on or
For additional information, see “Heated around this sensor.
Air flow control seat switches” (P. 2-51). • When the engine coolant temperature
Press the MODE button to manually control and outside air temperature are low, the
air flow and select the air outlet. Heated steering wheel switch (if air flow from the foot outlets may not
so equipped) operate for a maximum of 150 seconds.
— Air flows from center and side However, this is not a malfunction. After
vents. For additional information, see “Heated the coolant temperature warms up, air
— Air flows from center and side steering wheel switch” (P. 2-52). flow from the foot outlets will operate
vents and foot outlets. normally.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM
• If you feel that the air flow mode you have The air conditioner system in your NISSAN RADIO
selected and the outlets the air is coming vehicle is charged with a refrigerant de- When the ignition is placed in the ACC or
out do not match, select the mode. signed with the environment in mind. ON position, press the PUSH (power)
• When you change the air flow mode, you This refrigerant does not harm the button to turn the radio on. If you listen to
may feel air flow from the foot outlets for earth's ozone layer. the radio with the engine not running, the
just a moment. This is not a malfunction. ignition should be placed in the ACC
Special charging equipment and lubricant
is required when servicing your NISSAN air position.
conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or Radio reception is affected by station sig-
lubricants will cause severe damage to nal strength, distance from radio transmit-
your air conditioner system. For additional ter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other
information, see “Air conditioner system re- external influences. Intermittent changes
frigerant and oil recommendations” in reception quality normally are caused by
(P. 10-8). these external influences.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-
dealer to service your “environmentally hicle may influence radio reception
friendly” air conditioner system. quality.
WARNING Radio reception

The air conditioner system contains re- Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid state-of-the-art electronic circuits to en-
personal injury, any air conditioner ser- hance radio reception. These circuits are
vice should be done only by an experi- designed to extend reception range, and to
enced technician with proper enhance the quality of that reception.
equipment. However, there are some general charac-
teristics of both FM and AM radio signals
that can affect radio reception quality in a
moving vehicle, even when the finest
equipment is used. These characteristics
are completely normal in a given reception

area and do not indicate any malfunction Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away for several seconds during ionospheric tur-
in your NISSAN radio system. from a station transmitter, the signals will bulence even in areas where no obstacles
Reception conditions will constantly tend to fade and/or drift. exist.
change because of vehicle movement. Static and flutter: During signal interfer- Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
Buildings, terrain, signal distance and inter- ence from buildings, large hills or due to power lines, electric signs and even traffic
ference from other vehicles can work antenna position (usually in conjunction lights.
against ideal reception. Described below with increased distance from the station
are some of the factors that can affect your transmitter), static or flutter can be heard. AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
radio reception. This can be reduced by adjusting the treble
control to reduce treble response. MP3 or WMA terms
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to Multipath reception: Because of the reflec- • MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
come from the audio system speakers. tive characteristics of FM signals, direct and Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
Storing the device in a different location reflected signals reach the receiver at the most well-known compressed digital au-
may reduce or eliminate the noise. same time. The signals may cancel each dio file format. This format allows for near
other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction of the
FM RADIO RECEPTION of sound. size of normal audio files. MP3 conversion
of an audio track from CD-ROM can re-
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – duce the file size by approximately a 10:1
30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single AM RADIO RECEPTION
ratio with virtually no perceptible loss in
channel) FM having slightly more range AM signals, because of their low frequency, quality. MP3 compression removes the
than stereo FM. External influences may can bend around objects and skip along redundant and irrelevant parts of a
sometimes interfere with FM station re- the ground. In addition, the signals can be sound signal that the human ear doesn’t
ception even if the FM station is within 25 bounced off the ionosphere and bent back hear.
mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is to earth. Because of these characteristics,
directly related to the distance between AM signals are also subject to interference
the transmitter and receiver. FM signals fol- as they travel from transmitter to receiver.
low a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
the same characteristics as light. For ex- through freeway underpasses or in areas
ample, they will reflect off objects. with many tall buildings. It can also occur

• WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a * Windows® and Windows Media® are reg- • Do not leave the USB cable in a place
compressed audio format created by Mi- istered trademarks and trademarks in the where it can be pulled unintention-
crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA United States of America and other coun- ally. Pulling the cable may damage
codec offers greater file compression tries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA. the port.
than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of
more digital audio tracks in the same USB (Universal Serial Bus) The vehicle is not equipped with a USB de-
amount of space when compared to connection port vice. USB devices should be purchased
MP3s at the same level of quality. separately as necessary.
• Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of WARNING This system cannot be used to format USB
bits per second used by a digital music devices. To format a USB device, use a per-
file. The size and quality of a compressed Do not connect, disconnect or operate sonal computer.
digital audio file is determined by the bit the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the
rate used when encoding the file.
could lose control of your vehicle and front seats plays only sound without im-
• Sampling frequency — Sampling fre- ages for regulatory reasons, even when the
quency is the rate at which the samples cause an accident or serious injury.
vehicle is parked.
of a signal are converted from analog to
digital (A/D conversion) per second. This system supports various USB
CAUTION memory devices, USB hard drives and
• Multisession — Multisession is one of the
• Do not force the USB device into the iPod® players. Some USB devices may not
methods for writing data to media. Writ-
USB port. Inserting the USB device be supported by this system.
ing data once to the media is called a
single session, and writing more than tilted or up-side-down into the port • Partitioned USB devices may not play
once is called a multisession. may damage the port. Make sure correctly.
• ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the that the USB device is connected cor- • Some characters used in other lan-
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that rectly into the USB port. guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not
contains information about the digital • Do not grab the USB port cover (if so appear properly in the display. Using Eng-
music file such as song title, artist, encod- equipped) when pulling the USB de- lish language characters with a USB de-
ing bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 vice out of the port. This could dam- vice is recommended.
tag information is displayed on the Artist/ age the port and the cover.
song title line on the display.

General notes for USB use • If an iPod® automatically selects large • An incorrect song title may appear when
• For additional information, refer to your video files while in the shuffle mode, the the Play Mode is changed while using the
device manufacturer's owner informa- vehicle center display may momentarily iPod® nano (2nd Generation).
tion regarding the proper use and care of black out, but will soon recover. • Audiobooks may not play in the same
the device. order as they appear on the iPod®.
iPod®* player • The iPod® nano (1st Generation) may re-
Notes for iPod® use
• Some characters used in other lan- main in fast forward or rewind mode if it is
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis- guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not connected during a seek operation. In
tered in the U.S. and other countries. displayed properly on the vehicle center this case, please manually reset the
• Improperly plugging in the iPod® may screen. We recommend using English or iPod®.
cause a checkmark to be displayed on Spanish language characters with an • If you are using an iPod® (3rd Generation
and off (flickering). Always make sure that iPod®. with Dock connector), do not use very
the iPod® is connected properly. • Large video podcast files cause slow re- long names for the song title, album
• An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may responses in the iPod®. The vehicle center name or artist name to prevent the iPod®
main in fast forward or rewind mode if it is display may momentarily black out, but it from resetting itself.
connected during a seek operation. In will soon recover. • Be careful not to do the following, or the
this case, please manually reset the • If the iPod® automatically selects large cable could be damaged and a loss of
iPod®. video podcast files while in the shuffle function may occur:
• An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will con- mode, the vehicle center display may – Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in (40
tinue to fast-forward or rewind if it is dis- momentarily black out, but it will soon mm) radius maximum).
connected during a seek operation. recover. – Twist the cable excessively (more than
• An incorrect song title may appear when • Improperly plugging in the iPod® may 180 degrees).
the Play Mode is changed while using an cause a checkmark to be displayed on – Pull or drop the cable.
iPod® nano (2nd Generation). and off (flickering). Always make sure that – Do not force the iPod® cable connector
• Audiobooks may not play in the same the iPod® is connected properly. into the device port.
order as they appear on an iPod®. • The iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will con- – Close the center console lid on the
tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is dis- cable or connectors.
• Large video files cause slow responses in
connected during a seek operation. – Store objects with sharp edges in the
an iPod®. The vehicle center display may
storage where the cable is stored.
momentarily black out, but will soon
recover.
– Spill liquids on the cable and *iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis- • While an audio device is connected
connectors. tered in the U.S. and other countries. through the Bluetooth® wireless connec-
• Do not connect the cable to the iPod® if tion, the battery power of the device may
the cable and/or connectors are wet. It Bluetooth® streaming audio discharge quicker than usual.
may damage the iPod®. • Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not • This system supports the Bluetooth® Au-
• If the cable and connectors are exposed be recognized by the in-vehicle audio dio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).
to water, allow the cable and/or connec- system.
tors to dry completely before connecting • It is necessary to set up the wireless con- BLUETOOTH® is a
the cable to the iPod® (wait 24 hours for it nection between a compatible trademark owned by
to dry). Bluetooth® audio device and the in- Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and
• If the connector is exposed to fluids other vehicle Bluetooth® module before using
the Bluetooth® audio. licensed to
than water, evaporative residue may
cause a short between the connector • Operating procedure of the Bluetooth® Panasonic.
pins. In this case, replace the cable, other- audio will vary depending on the devices.
wise damage to the iPod® and a loss of Make sure how to operate your audio de-
function may occur. vice before using it with this system.
• If the cable is damaged (insulation cut, • The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped
connectors cracked, contamination such under the following conditions:
as liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the connec- – Receiving a call on the Bluetooth®
tors), do not use the cable. It is recom- Hands-Free Phone System.
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to – Checking the connection to the
replace the cable with a new one. hands-free phone.
• When not in use for extended periods of • Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device
time, store the cable in a clean, dust free in an area surrounded by metal or far
environment at room temperature and away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth®
without direct sun exposure. module to prevent tone quality degrada-
• Do not use the cable for any other pur- tion and wireless connection disruption.
poses other than its intended use in the
vehicle.

7. VOL (volume) knob/PUSH (power)
button
8. AUDIO button
Audio main operation

VOL (volume) knob / PUSH
(power) button
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the PUSH (power)
button while the system is off to call up the
mode (radio, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or
iPod®) that was playing immediately before
the system was turned off.
To turn the system off, press the PUSH
(power) button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to ad-
just the volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed
Sensitive Volume. When this feature is ac-
tive, the audio volume changes as the driv-
LHA4704
ing speed changes.
FM/AM RADIO 3. SEEK button
MENU button
For additional information, see “Audio op- 4. TRACK button Press the MENU button to show the
eration precautions” (P. 4-44). Menu screen. Touch the “Settings” key on
5. BACK button
1. MENU button the display, then touch the “Sound” key.
6. PUSH SOUND button / TUNE• SCROLL
2. Display screen knob

Sound
Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right
speakers.
Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear
speakers.
Speed Sensitive Volume Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as
the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the
more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.
Bass, treble, balance, fade and Speed Sensitive Volume can be adjusted by touching ”-”/”+”, “L”/”R”, or “R”/”F” keys.
BACK button
Press the BACK button to return to the previous menu screen.

AUDIO button
Press to display the audio screen. When 5. Preset list
this button is pressed while the audio To listen to a preset station, touch the
screen is not displayed, the last audio corresponding station from the preset
source played will play. list. If displayed, touch the “ <” or “ >” keys
to scroll the preset list.
AM radio operation
Press the MENU button and touch the
“AM” key or press the AUDIO button and
select AM on the bottom of the Launch Bar
to bring up the AM display screen.
If another audio source is playing when the
“AM” key is pressed, the audio source play-
LHA4708 ing will automatically be turned off and the
last radio station played will begin playing.
AM/FM radio screen
AM Menu
1. “AM Menu” / “FM Menu” key
Touch to display the radio menu screen. Touch the “AM Menu” key to display the AM
Menu screen options:
2. “Direct Tune” (if so equipped) • SCAN: To scan the stations, touch the “AM
Touch to manually enter a station. Menu” key on the radio screen and then
3. Audio source indicator touch the “SCAN” key. The stations will be
Indicates the currently selected audio turned from low to high frequencies and
source. stop at each broadcasting station for
several seconds. Touching the “SCAN” key
4. Reception information display again during this period of several sec-
Reception information currently avail- onds will stop tuning and the radio will
able such as frequency, station name, remain tuned to that station.
etc. is displayed.

• Refresh: Touch the “Refresh” key to up- FM radio operation • Refresh: Touch the “Refresh” key to up-
date the station list displayed on the right date the station list displayed on the right
Press the MENU button and touch the
side of the AM Menu screen. side of the FM Menu screen.
“FM” key or press the AUDIO button and
(SEEK/TRACK) buttons select FM on the bottom of the Launch Bar • RDS Info: Radio station and song informa-
to bring up the FM display screen. tion can be displayed on the FM display
Press the or buttons to tune screen.
from low to high or high to low frequencies If another audio source is playing when the
and to stop at the next broadcasting “FM” key is pressed, the audio source play- (SEEK/TRACK) buttons
station. ing will automatically be turned off and the Press the or buttons to tune
Direct Tune last radio station played will begin playing. from low to high or high to low frequencies
The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown and to stop at the next broadcasting
Touch the “Direct Tune” key to display the station.
Direct Tune menu and manually enter a on the screen during FM stereo reception.
station. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, 1 to 12 station memory operations
the radio automatically changes from ste-
1 to 6 station memory operations Up to 12 stations can be registered in the
reo to monaural reception.
preset list.
Up to six stations can be registered in the FM Menu
preset list. 1. Select the FM radio band.
Touch the “FM Menu” key to display the FM
1. Select the AM radio band. Menu screen options: 2. Tune to the station you wish to store.
2. Tune to the station you wish to store. • SCAN: To scan the stations, touch the “FM 3. Touch and hold one of the preset num-
Menu” key on the radio screen and then bers in the preset list.
3. Touch and hold one of the preset num- touch the “SCAN” key. The stations will be
bers in the preset list. The information such as frequency will be
tuned from low to high frequencies and displayed on the preset list.
The information such as frequency will be stop at each broadcasting stations for
displayed on the preset list. several seconds. Touching the “SCAN” key To select and listen to the preset stations,
again during this period of several sec- press or on the steering wheel
To select and listen to the preset stations, briefly or touch a preferred station on the
press or on the steering wheel onds will stop tuning and the radio will
remain tuned to that station. preset list on the radio screen.
briefly or touch a preferred station on the
preset list on the radio screen.

Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation Additional features
Connecting auxiliary devices For additional information, see “iPod®
Connect an AUX device into the AUX input player operation” (P. 4-56) regarding the
jack located on the center console below iPod® player available with this system.
the heater and air conditioner controls. For additional information, see “USB (Uni-
The AUX input jack accepts any standard versal Serial Bus) connection port” (P. 4-53)
analog audio input such as from a portable regarding the USB connection port avail-
cassette player, CD player, MP3 player or able with this system.
phone. For additional information, see “Bluetooth®
Insert a 1/8 in (3.5 mm) stereo mini plug in streaming audio” (P. 4-59) about the
the audio input jack. If a cable with a mono Bluetooth® audio interface available with
plug is used, the audio output may not this system.
function normally. LHA4709 Microsoft (WMA) Obligation of
Activation and playing AUX screen Labeling
Turn on the AUX device. Connect an AUX • Audio source indicator Additional Obligation of Labeling
cable to the AUX device and the AUX input Indicates that the AUX source is currently
jack. Select AUX mode from the audio playing. This product is protected by certain intel-
source menu screen or by pressing the lectual property rights of Microsoft
• “Volume Setting” keys
Source button on the steering wheel. Corporation and third parties. Use or distri-
Touch one of the keys to select the sound
bution of such technology outside of this
output gain from Low, Medium and High.
product is prohibited without a license
• AUX from Launch Bar from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft
Touch to change from another source to subsidiary and third parties.
AUX.

CAUTION When a compatible storage device is
plugged into the connection port, compat-
• To avoid damage and loss of function ible audio files on the storage device can be
when using a USB device, note the played through the vehicle's audio system.
following precautions.
• Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure
that the USB device is connected cor-
rectly into the USB port.
• Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB de-
vice out of the port. This could dam-
LHA4701 age the port and the cover.
USB (Universal Serial Bus) • Do not leave the USB cable in a place
CONNECTION PORT where it can be pulled unintention-
ally. Pulling the cable may damage
Connecting a device to the USB the port.
connection port For additional information, refer to your de-
vice manufacturer's owner information re-
WARNING garding the proper use and care of the
device.
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so The USB port is located on the center con-
can be a distraction. If distracted you sole beneath the heater and air condi-
could lose control of your vehicle and tioner controls. Insert the USB device into
cause an accident or serious injury. the connection port.

5. Play time and progress bar
The play time of the track is displayed.
The bar indicates the progress in playing
a track.
USB operation keys
Touch to control USB playback functions.
Keys Description
Each time “ ” key is
touched, the repeat mode
changes.
Touch to return to the begin-
ning of the current track.
Touch again to select the
LHA4711 LHA4710 previous track. Touch and
hold to rewind the current
USB connections screen USB screen track.
Press the MENU button and touch the 1. “USB Menu” key Touch to play the track.
“Connections” key or touch the “Settings” Touch to switch to the USB Menu screen. Touch to pause the track.
key and touch the “Connections” key to Touch to select the next
2. Track information
change USB settings. track. Touch and hold to
Track information such as the song fast-forward the track.
• Auto Change Source name, artist name and album name are
Touch “ON” or “OFF” to change the audio Each time “ ” key is
displayed. touched, the random mode
source settings for USB memory devices
changes.
or an iPod® connected through a USB 3. Audio source indicator
cable. Indicates the currently selected audio
source.
4. USB operation keys
Touch to control USB playback
functions

USB memory device player Fast-forwarding/rewinding USB menu
operation To rewind or fast-forward the track, press Touch the “USB Menu” key on the USB
and hold the or buttons on the screen to display the USB Menu screen.
Activation and playing
control panel or touch and hold the “ ”
Connecting the USB memory device into or “ ” keys on the screen. “Now Playing” key Touch to display the USB
the port will start playing the USB memory. screen.
Changing play mode
USB memory device can also be played by Repeat mode
“Folder List” key Touch to display the folder list.
touching the “USB” key on the Menu screen Touch an item on the list to
Touch the “ ” key on the USB screen to select the folder. The sub-
or by touching USB on the Launch Bar. folder or track list will be dis-
change the repeat mode.
To pause playing the USB memory device played. Select a sub-folder or
The following modes are available: track from the list.
touch the “ ” key. To resume playing,
touch the “ ” key. All: Repeat all “Album Artwork” Touch to run on/off the album
artwork display on the USB
Skipping tracks 1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder screen.
To skip the tracks, press the or 1 Track: Repeat track
buttons on the control panel or touch the “ Random mode
” or “ ” keys on the screen repeat-
edly until the preferred track is selected. Touch the “ ” key on the screen to
change the random mode as follows:
NOTE:
No text displayed: Random off
Depending on the condition, skipping to
All: Repeat all
the previous track may require pressing
the button or touching the key twice. 1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder
Pressing the button or touching the key
once may only restart the current track
from the beginning.

CAUTION battery will be charged while connected to
the vehicle with the ignition switch in the
• Do not force the USB device into the ON position.
USB port. Inserting the USB device While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®
tilted or up-side-down into the port can only be operated by the vehicle audio
may damage the port. Make sure controls.
that the USB device is connected cor-
rectly into the USB port. To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,
• Do not grab the USB port cover (if so remove the USB end of the cable from the
equipped) when pulling the USB de- USB connection port on the vehicle, then
vice out of the port. This could dam- remove the cable from the iPod®.
age the port and the cover. * iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
• Do not leave the USB cable in a place tered in the U.S. and other countries.
where it can be pulled unintention-
LHA4701 ally. Pulling the cable may damage Compatibility
iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION the port. The following models are compatible:
Connecting iPod® For additional information, refer to your de- • iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware
vice manufacturer’s owner information re- version 1.3.0 or later)
WARNING garding the proper use and care of the • iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware
device. version 2.0.1 or later)
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that • iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware
the USB device while driving. Doing so the iPod® can be controlled with the audio version 2.0.4 or later)
can be a distraction. If distracted you system controls and display screen, use • iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware
could lose control of your vehicle and the USB connection port located on the version 4.2.1 or later)*
cause an accident or serious injury. center console below the heater and air • iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware
conditioner controls. Connect the iPod®- version 5.1 or later)
specific end of the cable to the iPod® and
• iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware
the USB end of the cable to the USB con-
version 5.1 or later)
nection port on the vehicle. If your iPod®
supports charging via a USB connection, its
• iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware 4. Album artwork
version 1.3.1 or later) An image of the album artwork is dis-
• iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware played when available if the setting is
version 1.1.3 or later) turned on.
• iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware 5. iPod® operation keys
version 1.1.3 or later) Touch to control iPod® playback
• iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware functions
version 1.0.4 or later) 6. Play time and progress bar
• iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware The play time of the track is displayed.
version 1.0.2 or later) The bar indicates the progress in playing
• iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware a track.
version 1.1 or later) iPod® operation keys
• iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)
LHA4724 Touch to control iPod® playback functions.
• iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later)
• iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later) iPod screen Keys Description
• iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later) 1. “iPod Menu” key Each time “ ” key is touched, the
Touch to switch to the iPod Menu screen. repeat mode changes.
* Some features of this iPod® may not be
Touch to return to the beginning of the
fully functional. 2. Track information current track. Touch again to select the
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is up- Track information such as the song previous track. Touch and hold to re-
dated to the version indicated above. name, artist name and album name are wind the current track.
displayed. Touch to play the track.
Touch to pause the track.
3. Audio source indicator
Indicates the currently selected audio Touch to select the next track. Touch
and hold to fast-forward the track.
source.
Each time “ ” key is touched, the
random mode changes.

iPod® memory device player Changing play mode “Now Playing” key Touch to display the USB
operation Repeat mode screen.
“Folder List” key (if Touch to display the folder list.
Activation and playing Touch the “ ” key on the iPod® screen
so equipped) Touch an item on the list to
Connecting the iPod® to the vehicle via USB to change the repeat mode. The following select the folder. The sub-
cable will activate the iPod® mode. modes are available. folder or track list will be dis-
played. Select a sub-folder or
The iPod® can also be played by touching No text displayed: Repeat off track from the list.
the “iPod” key on the Menu screen or by All: Repeat all “Album Artwork” Touch to run on/off the album
touching iPod on the Launch Bar. One: Repeat track
key artwork display on the USB
screen.
Skipping tracks Random mode “Playlists” key Touch to display the list ac-
To skip the tracks, press the or “Artists” key cording to the selected item.
Touch the “ ” key on the screen to
buttons on the control panel or touch the “
change the random mode as follows. “Albums” key
” or “ ” keys on the screen repeat-
“ ” is not highlighted: Random off “Songs” key
edly until the preferred track is selected.
“Podcasts” key
NOTE: “ ” highlighted: Random on
“Genres” key
Depending on the condition, skipping to “Composers” key
iPod® Menu
the previous track may require pressing “Audiobooks” key
the button or touching the key twice. Touch the “iPod Menu” key on the iPod® “iTunes Radio”
Pressing the button or touching the key screen to display the iPod® Menu screen. key
once may only restart the current track
from the beginning.
Fast-forwarding/rewinding
To rewind or fast-forward the track, press
and hold the or buttons on the
control panel or touch and hold the “ ”
or “ ” keys on the screen,

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio Hands-Free Phone System:
device that is capable of playing audio files, Manual Connecting Procedure
the device can be connected to the vehi- 1. Press the MENU button on the con-
cle's audio system so that the audio files on trol panel.
the device play through the vehicle's
speakers. For additional information, see 2. Touch the “Connections” key on the
“FM/AM radio” (P. 4-48). screen.
NOTE: 3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the “Add New”
key to connect a phone.
For additional information regarding
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio, refer to the 4. When a compatible phone is found a
cellular phone owner’s manual. message with a PIN appears on the
screen.
LHA4726
5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept the
Connecting procedure connection.
NOTE: 6. To access the Bluetooth® settings menu
The connecting procedure must be per- touch the “ ” key on the Connections
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If screen. The following options are
the vehicle starts moving during the pro- available:
cedure, the procedure will be canceled.
Menu Item Result
Bluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device.
ON Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the “ON” key again. The indicator light will go off.
Favorite (Connection first) Allows user to toggle “Phone” and “Audio” favorite settings on and off.
PIN Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.

Automatic Connecting Procedure 4. Bluetooth® audio operation keys
If no phone is connected to the system, Touch to control Bluetooth® audio play-
press and hold the button on the back functions
steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. 5. Play time and progress bar
After the prompt, speak “Add Phone”, the The play time of the track is displayed.
system will announce “transferring to the The bar indicates the progress in playing
add phone settings menu”. The system will a track.
start the pairing procedure. When a com-
patible phone is found, a message with a
Bluetooth® operation keys
PIN appears on the screen. Operate the Touch to control Bluetooth® playback
Bluetooth® phone to complete the con- functions.
nection process. For additional informa-
tion, see “Bluetooth® connections screen” Keys Description
(P. 4-81). Each time “ ” key is
LHA4727 touched, the repeat mode
changes.
Bluetooth® screen Touch to return to the begin-
1. “BT Menu” key ning of the current track.
Depending on the Bluetooth® version Touch again to select the
previous track. Touch and
supported by the connected device, ei-
hold to rewind the current
ther the “BT Menu” key or “Connections” track.
key is displayed. Touch to play the track.
2. Track information Touch to pause the track.
Track information such as the song Touch to select the next
name, artist name and album name are track. Touch and hold to
displayed. fast-forward the track.
Each time “ ” key is
3. Audio source indicator touched, the random mode
Indicates the currently selected audio changes.
source.

Bluetooth® audio operation Fast-forwarding/rewinding The following items are available.
The ability to pause, change tracks, fast To fast-forward or rewind the track, press
“Now Playing” key Touch to display the
forward, rewind, randomize and repeat and hold the or buttons on the Bluetooth® audio screen.
music may be different between devices. control panel or touch the “ ” or “ ”
“Current List” key (if so A list of track in the cur-
Some or all of these functions may not be keys on the screen. equipped)* rently selected folder is
supported on each device. Changing play mode displayed.
Repeat mode “Connections” key Touch to display the con-
NOTE: nections screen.
Depending on the Bluetooth® audio de- Touch the “ ” key on the screen to “Folder List” key* Touch to display the
vice that is connected, it may not be pos- change the repeat mode. folder list. Touch an item
sible to perform audio operations or a on the list to select the
Random mode folder.
delay may occur before music is played
back. Touch the “ ” key on the screen to *: displayed only when available.
change the random mode.
Activation and playing NOTE:
NOTE:
A Bluetooth® audio device can be played by Depending on the connected device, the
touching the “Bluetooth” key on the Menu Available repeat/random modes change “BT Menu” key may not be displayed.
screen or by touching Bluetooth on the depending on the connected device.
Launch Bar.
To pause playing the Bluetooth® audio, BT Menu
touch the “ ” key. Touch the “ ” key Touch the “BT Menu” key on the Bluetooth®
to resume playing. audio screen to display the Bluetooth® au-
Changing folders dio menu screen.
To change folders, touch the “BT Menu” key.

* These modes are only available when USB
compatible media storage is inserted into • Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to
the device or connected to the system. increase or decrease the track number.
• Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to
Volume control switch reverse or fast forward the track being
Push the volume control switch to increase played.
or decrease the volume.
SEEK/TRACK buttons
AM and FM
• Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station
LHA4227 and show a list of the preset stations.
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR • Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to
seek up or down to the next station.
AUDIO CONTROL
iPod®
1. SEEK/TRACK buttons
• Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to
2. SOURCE switch increase or decrease the track number.
3. Volume control switch • Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to
reverse or fast forward the track being
SOURCE switch played.
Push the SOURCE switch to change the Bluetooth® Streaming Audio
mode in the following sequence: • Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to
skip ahead or back to the next song.
AM → FM→ USB/iPod®*→ Bluetooth® Au-
dio* → AUX* → AM.

CAUTION
• Do not place metalized film near the
rear window glass or attach any
metal parts to it. This may cause poor
reception or noise.
• When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window antenna.
Lightly wipe along the antenna with a
dampened soft cloth.
LHA4725 LHA5423
USB/iPod® CHARGING PORTS ANTENNA
There are USB/iPod® charging ports lo- The vehicle is equipped with a shark fin
cated on top of the center console or on antenna and an antenna pattern is printed
the back of the center console. These ports inside the rear window.
will charge compatible devices.
NOTE:
The USB/iPod® charging ports will not
operate with the display screen. Only the
USB connection port located on the in-
strument panel, below the temperature
controls, will operate USB/iPod® devices
through the audio system.

SIRI® EYES FREE (if so equipped)
Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant REQUIREMENTS

can be accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes Siri® is only available on the iPhone® 4S or
Free can be accessed in Siri Eyes Free later. Devices released before iPhone® 4S
mode to reduce user distraction. In this are not supported by the Siri® Eyes Free
mode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interac- system. Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri for
tion by voice control. After connecting a details about device compatibility.
compatible Apple device by using
Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please
from the button on the steering check phone settings.
wheel. If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be
Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered accessible from the lock screen. Please
in the U.S. and other countries. check phone settings.
• Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as For best results, always update your device
displaying pictures or opening apps, may to the latest software version.
LHA4733
not be available while driving.
• For getting best results, always update OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE
your device to the latest software version. 1. Press button for less than 1.5
• Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as seconds.
possible. Close the windows to eliminate
the surrounding noises (traffic noises, vi- 2. Speak your command and then listen to
bration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the Siri® Eyes Free reply.
the system from recognizing the voice After starting Siri Eyes Free, press the
commands correctly. button again within 5 seconds of the end of
• For functions that can be used in Siri Eyes the Siri Eyes Free announcement to extend
Free, please refer to the Apple website. the session.

Example 1 – Playing music Example 2 – Replying to text messages
1. Press button for less than 1.5 1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected
seconds. and “Show Notifications” of the iPhone®
settings is enabled, the vehicle will dis-
2. Say “Play (artist name, song name, etc.)”.
play a notification for new incoming text
3. Your vehicle will automatically change to messages.
Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode* when
2. After reading the message, press or
the music starts playing. Mode selection
press and hold the button to reply
is determined by the phone.
using Siri Eyes Free.
* If the iPhone® is also connected with the
USB cable. 3. After a beep sounds, say “Text message”
or a similar command to reply using Siri
If the audio track does not start playing Eyes Free.
automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try
changing the track or audio source to re-
sume playback.
NOTE:
For best results, use the native music
app. Performance of music control func-
tion while using Podcasts, Audiobook or
other 3rd party music apps may vary and
is controlled by the iPhone®.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom Cause and Countermeasure
Cannot access Siri Eyes Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system.
Free from switch on the Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting.
steering wheel Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone.
For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party
Audio Source does not music apps may vary.
change automatically to For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade perfor-
iPod® or Bluetooth® Au- mance.
dio mode Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select switch on the
steering wheel.
Play, pause, next track,
For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party
previous track or play
music apps may vary and is controlled by the device.
timer does not work
Cannot hear any music/
audio being played back
Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.
from a connected
iPhone®
Cannot receive text mes-
Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name, like “My Car”.
sage notifications on the
Press the INFO button. Turn on “Show Notifications”.
vehicle audio system
Cannot reply to text mes-
After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Press the button for 1.5 seconds on the steering wheel for
sage notifications by Siri
Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”.
Eyes Free

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM
When installing a CB, ham radio or car CAUTION WARNING

phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe
the following precautions; otherwise, the • Keep the antenna as far away as pos- • Use a phone after stopping your ve-
new equipment may adversely affect the sible from the electronic control hicle in a safe location. If you have to
engine control system and other electronic modules. use a phone while driving, exercise
parts. • Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in extreme caution at all times so full
(20 cm) away from the electronic attention may be given to vehicle
WARNING control system harnesses. Do not operation.
• A cellular phone should not be used route the antenna wire next to any • If you are unable to devote full atten-
for any purpose while driving so full harness. tion to vehicle operation while talk-
attention may be given to vehicle op- • Adjust the antenna standing-wave ing on the phone, pull off the road to
eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit ratio as recommended by the a safe location and stop your vehicle.
the use of cellular phones while manufacturer.
driving. • Connect the ground wire from the CB CAUTION
• If you must make a call while your radio chassis to the body.
vehicle is in motion, the hands free • For additional information, it is rec- To avoid discharging the vehicle bat-
cellular phone operational mode (if ommended that you visit a NISSAN tery, use a phone after starting the
so equipped) is highly recom- dealer. engine.
mended. Exercise extreme caution at
all times so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation.
• If you are unable to devote full atten-
tion to vehicle operation while talk-
ing on the phone, pull off the road to
a safe location and stop your vehicle.

the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
ON position with the previously connected
cellular phone turned on and carried in the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept
connections to other Bluetooth® de-
vices. If your phone does not connect au-
tomatically to the system, consult the
phone's owner's manual for details on
device operation.
You can connect up to six different
Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-
vehicle phone module. However, you can
talk on only one cellular phone at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System, refer to the following notes.
• Set up the wireless connection between
a compatible cellular phone and the in-
vehicle phone module before using the
LHA5315 hands-free phone system.
Your NISSAN is equipped with the make or receive a hands-free telephone • Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If call with your cellular phone in the vehicle. phones may not be recognized or work
you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled properly. Please visit
Once your cellular phone is connected to
cellular phone, you can set up the wireless www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
the in-vehicle phone module, no other
connection between your cellular phone www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-
phone connecting procedure is required.
and the in-vehicle phone module. With mended phone list and connecting
Your phone is automatically connected
Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can instructions.
with the in-vehicle phone module when

• You will not be able to use a hands-free • Some cellular phones or other devices IC Regulatory information
phone under the following conditions: may cause interference or a buzzing – Operation is subject to the following two
Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser- noise to come from the audio system conditions: (1) this device may not cause
vice area. speakers. Storing the device in a different interference, and (2) this device must ac-
Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult location may reduce or eliminate the cept any interference, including interfer-
to receive a cellular signal; such as in a noise. ence that may cause undesired opera-
tunnel, in an underground parking garage, • For additional information, refer to the tion of the device.
near a tall building or in a mountainous cellular phone owner's manual regarding – This Class B digital apparatus meets all
area. the telephone charges, cellular phone requirements of the Canadian
Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it antenna and body, etc. Interference-Causing Equipment
from being dialed. Regulations.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
• When the radio wave condition is not
ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may
FCC Regulatory information BLUETOOTH® is a
be difficult to hear the other person's – CAUTION: To maintain compliance with trademark owned by
voice during a call. FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized an-
• Do not place the cellular phone in an area licensed to
tenna, modification, or attachments
surrounded by metal or far away from
could damage the transmitter and may Panasonic.
the in-vehicle phone module to prevent
violate FCC regulations.
tone quality degradation and wireless USING THE SYSTEM
connection disruption. – Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: The system allows hands-free operation of
• While a cellular phone is connected the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
1) This device may not cause interfer-
1.
through the Bluetooth® wireless connec-
ence and If the vehicle is in motion, some commands
tion, the battery power of the cellular
2) this device must accept any interfer-
2. may not be available so full attention may
phone may discharge quicker than usual.
ence, including interference that may be given to vehicle operation.
The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-
cause undesired operation of the
tem cannot charge cellular phones.
device.

Initialization • For calling contacts by name, please say • You can cancel a command when the
both the first and last name of the con- system is waiting for a response by say-
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
tact for better recognition. ing, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system an-
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initial-
nounces “Exit” and ends the Voice Recog-
ized, which takes a few seconds. If the
button is pressed before the initialization Giving voice commands nition session. You can also press and
hold the button on the steering
completes, the system will announce To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,
wheel for 1.5 seconds at any time to end
“There is no phone connected” and will not press the button located on the steer-
the Voice Recognition session. Whenever
react to voice commands. ing wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. After
the Voice Recognition session is can-
the tone sounds, speak a command.
celed, a double beep is played to indicate
Operating tips The command given is picked up by the you have exited the system.
To get the best performance out of the microphone, and voice feedback is given • If you want to adjust the volume of the
NISSAN Voice Recognition System, observe when the command is accepted. voice feedback, push the (+ or -) volume
the following: • If a command is not recognized, the sys- control switches on the steering wheel
• Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as tem announces, “Please say or select a while being provided with feedback. You
possible. Keep all vents pointed away command from the displayed list.” Make can also use the radio volume control
from the microphone and close the win- sure the command is said exactly as knob.
dows to eliminate surrounding noises prompted by the system and repeat the
command in a clear voice.
Voice Prompt Interrupt
(traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.),
which may prevent the system from rec- • If you want to go back to the previous In most cases you can interrupt the voice
ognizing voice commands correctly. command, you can say “Go back” or “Cor- feedback to speak the next command by
rection” any time the system is waiting for pressing the button on the steering
• Wait until the tone sounds before speak-
a response. wheel. After interrupting the system, wait
ing a command. Otherwise, the com-
for a beep before speaking your command.
mand will not be received properly.
• Start speaking a command within 5 sec- One Shot Call (if so equipped)
onds after the tone sounds. To use the system faster, you may speak
• Speak in a natural voice without pausing the second level commands with the main
between words. menu command on the main menu. For
example, press the button and after
the tone say, “Call Redial”.

Indicator Description
Indicates there are un-
read received mes-
sages.
Indicates the
Bluetooth® device that
is currently connected.
Indicates the strength
of the signal the
Bluetooth® device is
receiving.
Indicates the amount
of remaining
Bluetooth® device
battery.
LHA4723 LHA4684
INDICATORS CONTROL BUTTONS

When a cellular phone is connected The control buttons for the Bluetooth®
through the Bluetooth® wireless connec- Hands-Free Phone System are located on
tion, indicators O
1 for the phone and text the steering wheel.
messaging are displayed on the top of the
screen. VOICE COMMAND BUTTON
Press and hold the button
for less than 1.5 seconds to initi-
ate the Voice Recognition session.
To exit the Voice Recognition ses-
sion press and hold the for
less than 1.5 seconds. For addi-
tional information, see “Voice
prompt interrupt” (P. 4-70).

You can use the button to To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®
interrupt the system feedback Hands-Free Phone System:
and give a command at once. Manual Connecting Procedure
If an iPhone® is connected, Siri® 1. Press the MENU button on the con-
can be accessed by pressing the trol panel.
button for more than two 2. Touch the “Connections” key on the
seconds. For additional informa- screen.
tion, see “Siri® Eyes Free (if so
equipped)” (P. 4-64). 3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the “Add New”
key to connect a phone.
PHONE BUTTON 4. When a compatible phone is found a
To answer an incoming call or to message with a PIN appears on the
end a call press the button. screen.
LHA4726
To reject a call press and hold the 5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept the
button.
CONNECTING PROCEDURE connection.
NOTE: 6. To access the Bluetooth® settings menu
The connecting procedure must be per- touch the “ ” key on the Connections
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If screen. The following options are
the vehicle starts moving during the pro- available:
cedure, the procedure will be canceled.
Menu Item Result
Bluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device.
ON Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the “ON” key again. The indicator light will go off.
Favorite (Connection first) Allows user to toggle “Phone” and “Audio” favorite settings on and off.
PIN Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.

NOTE: VOICE COMMANDS “Call <name>”
Some cellular phones may require you to Voice commands can be used to operate Speak this command to make a call to a
accept certain permissions in order to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. contact that is stored in the phonebook.
enable features on your Bluetooth® sys- Press and hold the button for less Say “Call” followed by a phonebook name to
tem. During the Bluetooth® pairing pro- than 1.5 seconds to bring up the phone initiate a call. If the system does not recog-
cess, please check your cellular phone’s command menu. The commands avail- nize the name it will display a list of similar
display for a pop-up with the request to able are: names. After the prompt, speak or touch
grant phonebook access. • Call <name> an item number from the displayed list to
Granting phonebook access permission • Dial <number> place the call.
will allow your contacts to be down-
• Recent Calls
loaded to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® sys- “Dial <number>”
tem. A pop-up may display on your cellu- • Read/Send Text (if so equipped)
Speak this command to make a call with a
lar phone stating that the Bluetooth® • Siri® (if so equipped)
spoken phone number. After the prompt,
system would like to access your con- • Voice Assistant (if so equipped) say “Dial” followed by a 7 to 10 digit phone
tacts and call history. Please select “Al- • Phonebook number. The system will repeat the num-
low” or Yes” to grant this permission. ber back. Say “Dial” to initiate the call or
• Quick Dial
Automatic Connecting Procedure • Redial “Correction” to re-enter the phone number.
If no phone is connected to the system, • Select Phone
press and hold the button on the • Add Phone
steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.
• Call <name> Mobile
After the prompt, speak “Add Phone”, the
system will announce “transferring to the • Call <name> Home
add phone settings menu”. The system will • Call <name> Office
start the pairing procedure. When a com- • Call <name> Main
patible phone is found, a message with a • Call <name> Other
PIN appears on the screen. Operate the
Bluetooth® phone to complete the con- • Settings
nection process. For additional informa-
tion, see “Bluetooth® connections screen”
(P. 4-81).
“Recent Calls” • Missed Calls The following commands are available:
Speak this command to list the last 20 • <Say a Contact Name>
The following commands are available un-
missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is • <Say a Contact Name> Main
der “Recent Calls”:
from an entry in the phonebook, the
• Incoming Calls name will be displayed. Otherwise, the • <Say a Contact Name> Home
Speak this command to list the last 20 phone number of the missed call will be • <Say a Contact Name> Mobile
incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is displayed. • <Say a Contact Name> Office
from an entry in the phonebook, the When prompted, speak or touch the item • <Say a Contact Name> Other
name will be displayed. Otherwise, the number on the screen to place the call.
phone number of the incoming call will Touch the “Next” key to move through the For additional information on manually se-
be displayed. list of missed calls. lecting phonebook entries, see “Making a
When prompted, speak or touch the item call” (P. 4-76).
number on the screen to place the call. “Read Text/Send Text” (if so
Touch the “Next” key to move through the
equipped) “Quick dial”
list of incoming calls. Speak this command to access the Quick
• Outgoing Calls Speak this command to access text mes-
dial menu. After the prompt, speak or se-
Speak this command to list the last 20 saging functions. For additional informa-
lect an item number on the displayed list to
outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the call tion, see “Text messaging” (P. 4-77).
place the call. For additional information,
was to an entry in the phonebook, the see “Making a call” (P. 4-76).
name will be displayed. Otherwise, the “Phonebook through voice
phone number of the outgoing call will be command” “Redial”
displayed. Speak “Phonebook” to view a list of quick
When prompted, speak or touch the item Speak this command to call the last num-
steps to access entries stored in the ber dialed. After the prompt, say “Redial” to
number on the screen to place the call. phonebook. Commands are organized by
Touch the “Next” key to move through the dial the number of the last outgoing call.
the phone number type selected in the cel- The system will display “Redialing <name/
list of outgoing calls. lular device. For additional information, re- number>”. The name of the phonebook en-
fer to the cellular phone’s owner’s manual. try will be displayed if it is available, other-
wise the number being redialed will be
displayed.

“Select Phone” • Best Match List
When the system doesn't recognize a
Speak this command to access the Con-
phonebook name or dial number, it will
nections menu. For additional information,
provide a list of similar sounding results.
see “Bluetooth® connections screen”
To turn this off, touch the “ON” key, the
(P. 4-81).
indicator light will turn off. To turn on,
touch the “ON” key again, the indicator
“Add Phone” light will turn on.
Speak this command to access the Con-
nections menu. For additional information,
see “Bluetooth® connections screen”
(P. 4-81).
“Settings”
Speak this command to access the Sys- LHA4705
tem Voice settings menu. The system will PHONE DISPLAY SCREEN
exit Voice Recognition mode. Touch one of
the following options on the screen to The Phone screen can be displayed by
change the settings. pressing the button on the control
panel.
• Beep Only for Opening Prompt
By touching the “ON” key, the indicator The following options are displayed:
light will illuminate, the system voice will • Quick Dial
turn off and only a tone will sound when Displays the Quick Dial screen. For addi-
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys- tional information, see “Quick dial” (P. 4-74).
tem is activated. To turn the system voice • Phonebook
back on, touch the “ON” key again, the Displays the Phonebook screen. For addi-
indicator light will turn off. tional information, see “Making a call”
(P. 4-76).

• Call History MAKING A CALL RECEIVING A CALL
Displays the Call History screen. For addi- To make a call press the button on the When a call is received by the phone con-
tional information, see “Making a call” control panel. Touch an option from menu nected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-
(P. 4-76). screen: Free Phone System, the call information is
• Dial Number • Phonebook displayed on the control panel display.
Displays the Dial Number screen. For ad- Select a person and the phone number
ditional information, see “Making a call” Press the button on the steering
you wish to call from the phonebook. wheel or touch the “ Answer” key on
(P. 4-76). Depending on the device, the phonebook the screen to accept the call. To reject the
• Text Message will be downloaded from the cellular call touch the “ Decline” key on the
Displays the received message screen. phone automatically when it is con- screen.
For additional information, see “Text mes- nected. If the automatic download does
saging” (P. 4-77). not take place, the phone number must If the user is not able to answer the call
• Connections be transferred to the hands-free phone right away, touch the “Hold Call” key dis-
Displays the Connections screen. For ad- system from the cellular phone prior to played on the screen. A message will be
ditional information, see “Bluetooth® con- using this method. For additional infor- played for the caller: “I’m not able to take a
nections screen” (P. 4-81). mation, see “Phone and text message call right now.” The user may then accept
settings” (P. 4-82). the call when available or reject the call.
• Volume
Displays the volume adjustment screen. • Call History To reject a call, press and hold the
For additional information, see “Volume & Select a phonebook name or phone button on the steering wheel.
beeps” (P. 4-84). number from the recent incoming, out-
going or missed calls tabs. Touch a DURING A CALL
phonebook name or phone number While a call is active the following options
listed to initiate the call. will appear on the control panel display:
• Dial Number • Mute
Enter the phone number manually using Touch this key to mute or unmute the
the keypad displayed on the screen. system.
Touch the “OK” key on the screen to initi- • Dial Number
ate the call. Touch this key to dial digits during the
For additional options to make a call, see phone call.
“Voice commands” (P. 4-73).
• Use Handset ENDING A CALL NOTE:
Touch this key to transfer the call to the To end an active call, press the button
handset. To transfer the call back from This feature is automatically disabled if
on the steering wheel or touch the “ the connected device does not support
the handset to the Bluetooth® Hands- Hang up” key on the screen.
Free Phone System, press the but- the Message Access Profile (MAP). For
ton on the control panel then select the additional information, refer to the
TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped) phone’s owner’s manual for details and
“Transfer Hands-free” key on the screen.
instructions.
• Switch Call WARNING
This option will only be available when a NOTE:
second call is active. • Laws in some jurisdictions may re-
strict the use of “Text-to-Speech”. Many phones may require special per-
If supported by the phone, the Check local regulations before using mission to enable text messaging. Check
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System this feature. the phone’s screen during Bluetooth®
allows for call waiting functionality. If a pairing. For some phones, you may need
call is received while another call is al- • Laws in some jurisdictions may re-
strict the use of some of the applica- to enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s
ready active, a message will be displayed Bluetooth® menu for text messages to
on the screen. Press the button on tions and features, such as social
networking and texting. Check local appear on the headunit. For additional
the steering wheel or touch the “ information, refer to your phone’s own-
Answer” key on screen to accept the in- regulations for any requirements.
er’s manual. Text message integration
coming call. Touch the “ Decline” key • Use the text messaging feature after
requires that the phone support MAP
on the screen to reject the second call. stopping your vehicle in a safe loca-
(Message Access Profile) for both receiv-
tion. If you have to use the feature
While a call is active, press the button ing and sending text messages. Some
while driving, exercise extreme cau-
on the steering wheel to access additional phones may not support all text mes-
tion at all times so full attention may
options. Speak one of the following saging features. Please refer to
be given to vehicle operation.
commands: www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
• If you are unable to devote full atten- www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compat-
• “Send Digits”
tion to vehicle operation while using ibility information, as well as your de-
Speak this command followed by the dig-
the text messaging feature, pull off vice’s owner’s manual.
its to enter digits during the phone call.
the road to a safe location and stop
• “Switch call” your vehicle. The system allows for the sending and re-
Speak this command to hold the second ceiving of text messages through the ve-
call and switch back to the original call. hicle interface.

The availability of the text message func- • Outgoing Calls button on the steering wheel and
tion may vary depending on the cellular • Missed Calls speak the number item list on the screen.
phone. • Dial The following options will be available:
When the cellular phone connected to the • Play
4. Once a recipient is chosen, the system Speak this command to have the system
vehicle receives a text message, a notifica-
prompts for which message to send. say the message.
tion will appear on the control panel dis-
Nine predefined messages are avail-
play. To check the message, touch the • Reply
able. To choose one of the predefined
“Read” key. Touch the “Ignore” key to save Speak this command to send a text mes-
messages, speak one of the following
the message to be checked later. sage response to the sender of the text
after the tone:
Access text messaging through the ve- message.
• “Driving, can't text”
hicles Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone or • Call
• “Call me” Speak this command to call the sender.
through the vehicles control panel.
• “On my way” • Previous
Text messaging using Bluetooth® • “Running late” Speak this command to move to the pre-
Hands-Free Phone System (if so • “Okay” vious text message (if available).
equipped) • “Yes” • Next
• “No” Speak this command to move to the next
Sending a text message (if so equipped) text message (if available).
• “Where are you?”
1. Press and hold the button on the Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped)
steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. • “When?”
Reading a received text message If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®,
2. Say “Send Text” after the tone. it can also be used to create custom mes-
1. Press and hold the button on the sages that are sent through the phone. For
3. The system will provide a list of available
steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. additional information, see “Siri® Eyes Free
commands in order to determine the
recipient of the text message. Choose 2. Say “Read Text” after the tone. (if so equipped)” (P. 4-64).
from the following: The display will show a list of 20 messages NOTE:
• Phonebook with the sender and delivery time. Touch
Text messages are only displayed if the
• Quick Dial the “Next” key on the screen to view all mes-
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Incoming Calls sages. To view a text message press the

NOTE: message from the message list will show • Reply
the details of the received message on the A reply message can be selected from
For Apple iPhones®, text messages can display. the predefined list.
only be sent through Siri.
Available actions: Sending a text message (if so equipped)
Text messaging using the control • Prev. This function may not be supported de-
panel Touch this key to read the previous pending on the cellular phone.
message.
Display received message list 1. Press the button on the control
• Next panel.
1. Press the button on the control Touch this key to read the next message.
panel. • Play/Stop 2. Touch the “Text Message” key on the
2. Touch the “Text Message” key on the Touch the “Play” key to have the hands- screen.
screen free phone system read out the received 3. Touch the “Create Message” key on the
message. Touch the “Stop” key to stop screen.
3. Touch an item on the list to read or reply reading.
to the message.
• Call
Up to 100 messages can be stored in the If the sender of the message is registered
message list. in the phonebook, touch the “Call” key to
Received message screen make a call to the sender.
Touching the “Read” key on the incoming
message notification screen or selecting a

The following items are available:
Available item Action
To Enter Number by Keypad Enter the phone number of the recipient using the keypad. Touch the “OK” key to confirm.
Quick Dial Select a recipient from the quick dial list.
Phonebook Select a recipient from the phonebook.
Call History Select a recipient/phone number from call history.
Select Text Touch to display a list of predefined text messages.
Send Touch to send the message.

Touch the “Connections” key on the screen Bluetooth tab
then select the Bluetooth tab.
This tab will display up to six Bluetooth®
The paired phone will be added to the list devices. If six devices are already con-
on the Bluetooth® connections screen. nected, one of the devices must be deleted
Touching the name of another device on before another device can be connected.
the list will switch the connected device.
“Add New” key
“ ” (back) key Touch the “Add New” key on the screen to
connect a new Bluetooth® device. For ad-
Touch the “ ” key to go back to the ditional information, see “Connecting pro-
previous screen. cedure” (P. 4-72).
Connecting Bluetooth® “ ” (Bluetooth® settings) key

LHA4716
For additional information on connecting a
BLUETOOTH® CONNECTIONS cellular phone or device to the Bluetooth® Touch the “ ” key on the screen to
Hands-Free Phone System, see “Connect- display a list of options.
SCREEN
ing procedure” (P. 4-72). • Bluetooth
1. “ ” (back) key Touch this key to turn the Bluetooth®
2. Bluetooth tab NOTE: connection on or off
3. Connections screen • Favorite (Connection first)
Some cellular phones or other devices
4. “Add New” key
may cause interference or a buzzing Touch this key to change which device
5. “ ” (settings) key
noise to come from the audio system will be connected first when multiple de-
6. “ ” (info) key
speakers. Storing the device in a differ- vices are connected to the vehicle.
7. “ ” (Bluetooth® Audio connection) key
ent location may reduce or eliminate the Turn the “ ” key on or off to make the
8. “ ” (Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
noise. device a favorite connection.
System connection) key
Access the Connections screen to change Turn the “ ” key on or off to make the
settings and view Bluetooth® information. device a favorite connection.
To access the Connections screen press
the MENU button on the control panel.
• Pin “ ” (Bluetooth® Audio
Touch this key to customize the PIN code. connection) key
Input a four digit number then touch the
“OK” key. The new PIN will be set. A list of connected devices will be displayed
on the screen. Touch the “ ” key next to
“ ” (info) key the name to connect a device to
Bluetooth® Audio. If the device is listed as a
favorite, a star will appear on the icon.
Touch the “ ” key on the screen to Touch the key again to disconnect the de-
display the information of the cellular vice. The device will not be removed from
phone or to delete the device. the list. For additional information on re-
Touch the “Delete” key to remove a paired moving a device, see “ ” (info) key
device then select “Yes” when a message (P. 4-82).
appears.
LHA4721
“ ” (Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System connection) key PHONE AND TEXT MESSAGE
A list of connected devices will be displayed
SETTINGS
on the screen. Touch the “ ” key next to Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System set-
the name to connect a device to the tings can be changed according to the us-
Hands-Free Phone System. If the phone is er’s preference. To access the “Phone” set-
listed as a favorite, a star will appear on the tings menu press the MENU button on
icon. Touch the key again to disconnect the the control panel. Touch the “Settings” key
device. The device will not be removed then touch the “Phone” key.
from the list. For additional information on
removing a device, see “ ” (info) key
(P. 4-82).

The following options are available:
Menu Item Result
Quick Dial Edit Entries in the Quick Dial can be edited. For additional information, see “Quick dial” (P. 4-74).
Delete All Deletes all of the stored phone numbers in quick dial.
Phonebook Download Entire Phone- All the phone numbers that are stored in a phonebook in the cellular phone that is connected to the vehicle are
book downloaded at once. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone’s owner’s manual.
Auto Downloaded Turns on/off automatic downloading of the phonebook when a new phone is connected.
Text Message Text Message Turns the text messaging function on/off.
Text Message Ringtone Turn the incoming message sound on/off.
Signature Turns the signature setting for the outgoing text message on/off.
Auto Reply Turns the automatic text message reply function on/off.
Auto Reply Text Message Select the text message to be used for the automatic reply. Choose from a list of predefined messages.
Notifications Driver Only When this item is turned on, incoming call notification is displayed only on the handset.
Vehicle Ringtone Turns the vehicle ringtone on/off.
Automatic Hold When this item turns on, an incoming call will be put on hold automatically.

iPod®/IPHONE®
Volume & beeps Volume Settings “Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone” and
The Volume settings screen can be found “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic
There are several methods to customize
by pressing the button on the control accessory has been designed to connect
the volume settings.
panel then touching the “Volume” key on specifically to iPod, iPhone or iPad, respec-
Volume & Beeps the screen. To adjust the volume of the tively, and has been certified by the devel-
The Volume & Beeps screen can be found following options, touch the “-” and “+” keys oper to meet Apple performance stan-
by pressing the MENU button on the on the screen. dards. Apple is not responsible for the
control panel, touching the “Settings” key operation of this device or its compliance
The available settings are:
on the screen and selecting “Volume & with safety and regulatory standards.
Beeps”. To adjust the volume of the follow- • Ringtone Please note that the use of this accessory
ing options, touch the “-” and “+” keys on the Adjust the volume level of the ringtone of with iPod, iPhone or iPad may affect wire-
screen. incoming calls. less performance.
• Outgoing Call
The available settings are: iPad, iPhone, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod
Adjust the volume level of the outgoing
• Ringtone calls. shuffle and iPod touch are trademarks of
Adjust the volume level of the ringtone of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
incoming calls. countries. Lightning is a trademark of
• Outgoing Call Apple Inc.
Adjust the volume level of the outgoing
calls.
• Voice Prompt Vol.
Adjust the volume level of the system
voice.
• Text-to-speech Vol.
Adjust the volume of the replay voice for
text messaging.
• Button Beeps
Turns on/off the button beep sounds and
alarm for prohibited operations.

5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Hand type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Electronic parking brake (switch type) . . . . . . . 5-23
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Automatic brake hold (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 How to activate/deactivate the
On-pavement and off-road driving automatic brake hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 How to use the automatic brake hold
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 LDW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11 How to enable/disable the LDW system . . . . . 5-30
Operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 LDW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . 5-12 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 5-35
NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) BSW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . . . 5-38
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 5-14 BSW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 BSW driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-16 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . . 5-46
Continuously Variable Transmission RCTA system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
How to enable/disable the RCTA RAB system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
RCTA system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-88
Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56 AEB system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-89
Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56 Turning the AEB system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
Cruise control operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56 AEB system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped) . . 5-58 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
How to select the cruise control mode . . . . . . 5-60 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control Pedestrian Detection (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . .5-98
mode operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61 AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
mode switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63 Turning the AEB with Pedestrian
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control Detection system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
mode limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69 AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73 limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) (if so equipped) . . 5-81 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) . . 5-109
RAB system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82 I-FCW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
Turning the RAB system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-84 Turning the I-FCW system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
I-FCW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115 Chassis Control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120 Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-122 Intelligent Engine Brake (I-EB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123 Active Ride Control (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-124 Rear Sonar System (RSS) (if so equipped) . . . . . . 5-140
Intelligent Driver Alertness system System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-141
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125 How to enable/disable the sonar
How to enable/disable the Intelligent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-142
Driver Alertness (I-DA) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126 Sonar limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144
system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145
Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128 Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145
Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129 Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131 Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132 Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132 Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132 Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-134 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146
Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-146
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . 5-134
Brake force distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) • If electrical wiring or other cable con-
WARNING nections must pass to a trailer
• Do not leave children or adults who through the seal on the trunk lid or
would normally require the assis- • Do not breathe exhaust gases; they the body, follow the manufacturer's
tance of others alone in your vehicle. contain colorless and odorless car- recommendation to prevent carbon
Pets should also not be left alone. bon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is monoxide entry into the vehicle.
They could accidentally injure them- dangerous. It can cause uncon- • The exhaust system and body should
selves or others through inadvertent sciousness or death. be inspected by a qualified mechanic
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, • If you suspect that exhaust fumes whenever:
sunny days, temperatures in a closed are entering the vehicle, drive with all
vehicle could quickly become high a. The vehicle is raised for service.
windows fully open, and have the ve-
enough to cause severe or possibly hicle inspected immediately. b. You suspect that exhaust fumes
fatal injuries to people or animals. are entering into the passenger
• Do not run the engine in closed compartment.
• Properly secure all cargo with ropes spaces such as a garage.
or straps to help prevent it from slid- c. You notice a change in the sound
• Do not park the vehicle with the en- of the exhaust system.
gine running for any extended length
higher than the seatbacks. In a sud- d. You have had an accident involv-
of time.
den stop or collision, unsecured ing damage to the exhaust sys-
cargo could cause personal injury. • Keep the rear vent windows, lift- tem, underbody, or rear of the
gates, doors and trunk lids (if so vehicle.
• To avoid raising the center of gravity
equipped) closed while driving, oth-
excessively, do not exceed the rated
capacity of the roof rack (if so
erwise exhaust gases could be THREE-WAY CATALYST
drawn into the passenger compart- The three-way catalyst is an emission con-
equipped) and evenly distribute the
ment. If you must drive with one of trol device installed in the exhaust system.
load.
these open, follow these precau- Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst
tions: are burned at high temperatures to help
1. Open all the windows. reduce pollutants.
2. Set the air recirculation but-
ton to off and the fan control dial
to high to circulate the air.
5-4 Starting and driving

WARNING • Avoid driving with an extremely low pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
fuel level. Running out of fuel could inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
• The exhaust gas and the exhaust cause the engine to misfire, damag- can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
system are very hot. Keep people, ing the three-way catalyst. reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
animals or flammable materials and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
• Do not race the engine while warm-
away from the exhaust system stopping ability.
ing it up.
components. Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-
• Do not push or tow your vehicle to
• Do not stop or park the vehicle over tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is
start the engine.
flammable materials such as dry the driver’s responsibility to maintain cor-
grass, waste paper or rags. They may TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation
ignite and cause a fire. SYSTEM (TPMS) has not reached the level to trigger illumi-
nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
CAUTION should be checked monthly when cold and Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
inflated to the inflation pressure recom- TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
• Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits mended by the vehicle manufacturer on when the system is not operating properly.
from leaded gasoline will seriously the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
reduce the three-way catalyst's abil- label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
ity to help reduce exhaust pollutants. size than the size indicated on the vehicle When the system detects a malfunction,
• Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- placard or tire inflation pressure label, you the telltale will flash for approximately one
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or should determine the proper tire inflation minute and then remain continuously illu-
electrical systems can cause overrich pressure for those tires.) minated. This sequence will continue upon
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
causing it to overheat. Do not keep As an added safety feature, your vehicle the malfunction exists. When the malfunc-
driving if the engine misfires, or if no- has been equipped with a Tire Pressure tion indicator is illuminated, the system
ticeable loss of performance or other Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates may not be able to detect or signal low tire
unusual operating conditions are de- a low tire pressure telltale when one or pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
tected. Have the vehicle inspected more of your tires is significantly under- may occur for a variety of reasons, includ-
promptly. It is recommended that inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire ing the installation of replacement or alter-
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this pressure telltale illuminates, you should nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
service. stop and check all your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper
Starting and driving 5-5
prevent the TPMS from functioning prop- • The “Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” warning • You can also check the pressure of all
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction appears in the vehicle information dis- tires (except the spare tire) on the vehicle
telltale after replacing one or more tires or play, or the “CHECK TIRE PRES” warning information display screen (if so
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the appears in the trip computer when the equipped). The order of the tire pressure
replacement or alternate tires and wheels low tire pressure warning light is illumi- figures displayed on the screen corre-
allow the TPMS to continue to function nated and low tire pressure is detected. sponds with the actual order of the tire
properly. The “Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” or position.
Additional information: “CHECK TIRE PRES” warning turns off For additional information, see “Low tire
when the low tire pressure warning light pressure warning light” (P. 2-17) and “Tire
• When using a wheel without the TPMS turns off.
such as a spare tire, the TPMS does not Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P. 6-3).
monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire. • The “Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” or
“CHECK TIRE PRES” warning does not ap- WARNING
• The TPMS will activate only when the ve- pear if the low tire pressure warning light
hicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 illuminates to indicate a TPMS • Radio waves could adversely affect
km/h). Also, this system may not detect a malfunction. electric medical equipment. Those
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, who use a pacemaker should contact
a flat tire while driving). • Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
the heat caused by the vehicle’s opera- the electric medical equipment
• The low tire pressure warning light does tion and the outside temperature. Do not manufacturer for the possible influ-
not automatically turn off when the tire reduce the tire pressure after driving be- ences before use.
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in- cause the tire pressure rises after driving.
flated to the recommended pressure, the Low outside temperature can lower the
vehicle must be driven at speeds above temperature of the air inside the tire
16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS which can cause a lower tire inflation
and turn off the low tire pressure warning pressure. This may cause the low tire
light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check pressure warning light to illuminate. If the
the tire pressure. warning light illuminates, check the tire
• The “Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” or pressure for all four tires.
“CHECK TIRE PRES” warning appears each • The Tire and Loading Information label is
time the ignition switch is placed in the located in the driver's door opening.
ON position as long as the low tire pres-
sure warning light remains illuminated.
• If the low tire pressure warning light • When using a wheel without the • Do not place metalized film or any
illuminates while driving, avoid sud- TPMS such as the spare tire, when a metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the
den steering maneuvers or abrupt spare tire is mounted or a wheel is windows. This may cause poor re-
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull replaced, the TPMS will not function ception of the signals from the tire
off the road to a safe location and and the low tire pressure warning pressure sensors, and the TPMS will
stop the vehicle as soon as possible. light will flash for approximately 1 not function properly.
Driving with under-inflated tires may minute. The light will remain on after
Some devices and transmitters may tem-
permanently damage the tires and 1 minute. Have your tires replaced
porarily interfere with the operation of the
increase the likelihood of tire failure. and/or TPMS system reset as soon as
TPMS and cause the low tire pressure
Serious vehicle damage could occur possible. It is recommended that you
warning light to illuminate.
and may lead to an accident and visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
could result in serious personal in- • Replacing tires with those not origi- Some examples are:
jury. Check the tire pressure for all nally specified by NISSAN could af- • Facilities or electric devices using similar
four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to fect the proper operation of the radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
the recommended COLD tire pres- TPMS. • If a transmitter set to similar frequencies
sure shown on the Tire and Loading • Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol is being used in or near the vehicle.
Information label to turn the low tire tire sealant into the tires, as this may
pressure warning light off. If you have • If a computer (or similar equipment) or a
cause a malfunction of the tire pres- DC/AC converter is being used in or near
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire sure sensors.
as soon as possible. (For additional the vehicle.
information, see “Flat tire” (P. 6-3) for The low tire pressure warning light may
changing a flat tire.) CAUTION illuminate in the following cases:
• If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and
• The TPMS may not function properly
tire without TPMS.
when the wheels are equipped with
tire chains or the wheels are buried in • If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID
snow. has not been registered.
• If the wheel is not originally specified by
NISSAN.

FCC Notice: TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert the pressure reaches the designated
For USA: pressure, the horn beeps once.
When adding air to an under-inflated tire,
the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides • If the hazard indicator does not flash
This device complies with Part 15 of the within approximately 15 seconds after
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- visual and audible signals outside the ve-
hicle to help you inflate the tires to the rec- starting to inflate the tire, it indicates
lowing two conditions: (1) This device that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not
may not cause harmful interference, and ommended COLD tire pressure.
operating.
(2) this device must accept any interfer- Vehicle set-up
ence received, including interference • The TPMS will not activate the Easy-Fill
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place. Tire Alert under the following
that may cause undesired operation.
conditions:
2. Apply the parking brake and place the
NOTE: – If there is interference from an exter-
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
Changes or modifications not ex- nal device or transmitter.
pressly approved by the party re- 3. Place the ignition switch in the ON posi- – The air pressure from the inflation
sponsible for compliance could void tion. Do not start the engine. device is not sufficient to inflate the
the user's authority to operate the Operation tire.
equipment. – There is a malfunction in the TPMS.
1. Add air to the tire. – There is a malfunction in the horn or
For Canada: hazard indicators.
2. After a few seconds, the hazard indica-
This device contains licence-exempt tors will start flashing. – The identification code of the tire
transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply pressure sensor is not registered to
with Innovation, Science and Economic 3. When the designated pressure is the system.
development Canada’s licence-exempt reached, the horn beeps once and the – The battery of the tire pressure sen-
RSS(s). Operation is subject to the fol- hazard indicators stop flashing. sor is low.
lowing two conditions: (1) This device 4. Perform the above steps for each tire. • If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not oper-
may not cause interference, and (2) This • If the tire is over-inflated more than ate due to TPMS interference, move
device must accept any interference, in- approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward
cluding interference that may cause un- beeps and the hazard indicators flash or forward and try again.
desired operation of the device. three times. To correct the pressure, If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a
push the core of the valve stem on the tire pressure gauge.
tire briefly to release pressure. When

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD AVOIDING COLLISION AND Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS ROLLOVER collisions and rollovers.
Utility vehicles have a significantly In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
higher rollover rate than other types of WARNING significantly more likely to die than a
vehicles. person wearing a seat belt.
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
They have higher ground clearance than and prudent manner may result in loss OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
passenger cars to make them capable of of control or an accident. While driving, the right side or left side
performing in a variety of on-pavement wheels may unintentionally leave the road
Be alert and drive defensively at all times.
and off-road applications. This gives them surface. If this occurs, maintain control of
Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive
a higher center of gravity than ordinary ve- the vehicle by following the procedure be-
speed, high speed cornering, or sudden
hicles. An advantage of higher ground low. Please note that this procedure is only
steering maneuvers, because these driving
clearance is a better view of the road, allow- a general guide. The vehicle must be driven
practices could cause you to lose control of
ing you to anticipate problems. However, as appropriate based on the conditions of
your vehicle.
they are not designed for cornering at the the vehicle, road and traffic.
same speeds as conventional 2-wheel As with any vehicle, loss of control could
drive vehicles any more than low-slung result in a collision with other vehicles or 1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
sports cars are designed to perform satis- objects or cause the vehicle to roll over, 2. Do not apply the brakes.
factorily under off-road conditions. If at all particularly if the loss of control causes
possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. the vehicle to slide sideways. 3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to wheel with both hands and try to hold a
Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving
operate this vehicle correctly may result in straight course.
when tired. Never drive when under the in-
loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a roll- fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre- 4. When appropriate, slowly release the ac-
over crash, an unbelted person is signifi- scription or over-the-counter drugs which celerator pedal to gradually slow the
cantly more likely to die than a person may cause drowsiness). Always wear your vehicle.
wearing a seat belt. seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats,
seat belts and supplemental restraint sys- 5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the
tem” section of this manual, and also in- vehicle to follow the road while vehicle
struct your passengers to do so. speed is reduced. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle back onto the road sur-
face until vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn The vehicle must be driven as appropriate 5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu-
the steering wheel until both tires return based on the conditions of the vehicle, road ally stop the vehicle.
to the road surface. When all tires are on and traffic.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
the road surface, steer the vehicle to
contact a roadside emergency service
stay in the appropriate driving lane. WARNING
to change the tire. For additional infor-
• If you decide that it is not safe to return mation, see “Changing a flat tire” (P. 6-4).
the vehicle to the road surface based If there is a sudden loss of tire air pres-
sure, the vehicle will generally move or
on vehicle, road or traffic conditions,
pull in the direction of the flat tire. In
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in DRIVING
a safe place off the road. this situation, losing control of the ve-
hicle may cause a collision and result in
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS personal injury. WARNING
To help avoid loss of control:
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can Never drive under the influence of alco-
occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged • Do not rapidly apply the brakes. hol or drugs. Alcohol in the blood-
due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air • Do not rapidly release the accelerator stream reduces coordination, delays
pressure loss can also be caused by driving pedal. reaction time and impairs judgement.
on under-inflated tires. • Do not rapidly turn the steering Driving after drinking alcohol increases
wheel. the likelihood of being involved in an
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han-
accident injuring yourself and others.
dling and stability of the vehicle, especially 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. Additionally, if you are injured in an ac-
at highway speeds.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering cident, alcohol can increase the sever-
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by wheel with both hands and try to hold a ity of the injury.
maintaining the correct air pressure and straight course.
visually inspecting the tires for wear and
damage. For additional information, see 3. When appropriate, slowly release the ac-
“Wheels and tires” (P. 8-27). If a tire rapidly celerator pedal to gradually slow the
loses air pressure or “blows-out” while driv- vehicle.
ing, maintain control of the vehicle by fol- 4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe lo-
lowing the procedure below. Please note cation off the road and away from traffic
that this procedure is only a general guide. if possible.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How- WARNING

ever, you must choose not to drive under
the influence of alcohol. Every year thou- Do not operate the push-button igni-
sands of people are injured or killed in tion switch while driving the vehicle ex-
alcohol-related collisions. Although the lo- cept in an emergency. (The engine will
cal laws vary on what is considered to be stop when the ignition switch is pushed
legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol three consecutive times in less than 1.5
affects all people differently and most seconds or the ignition switch is
people underestimate the effects of pushed and held for more than 2 sec-
alcohol. onds.) If the engine stops while the ve-
Remember, drinking and driving don't mix! hicle is being driven, this could lead to a
That is true for drugs (over-the-counter, crash and serious injury.
prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don't
drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is
impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other LSD2645
physical condition. When the ignition switch is pushed without
depressing the brake pedal, the ignition
switch will illuminate.
If the ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF
position, push the ignition switch center:
• Once to change to ON.
• Two times to change to OFF.
The shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,
the ignition switch cannot be moved
from the LOCK position.
Some indicators and warnings for opera- The operating range of the engine start
tion are displayed on the vehicle informa- function is inside of the vehicle O1 .
tion display (if so equipped). For additional • The luggage area is not included in the
information, see “Vehicle information dis- operating range, but the Intelligent Key
play” (P. 2-23). may function.
• If the Intelligent Key is placed on the in-
strument panel, inside the glove box,
storage bin or door pocket, the Intelligent
Key may not function.
• If the Intelligent Key is placed near the
door or window outside the vehicle, the
Intelligent Key may function.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
LSD2020
POSITIONS
OPERATING RANGE LOCK (Normal parking position)
The Intelligent Key functions can only be The ignition switch can only be locked in
used when the Intelligent Key is within the this position.
specified operating range.
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost is pushed to the ON position while carrying
discharged or strong radio waves are pres- the Intelligent Key.
ent near the operating location, the Intelli-
gent Key system’s operating range becomes The ignition switch will lock when any door
narrower and may not function properly. is opened or closed with the ignition
switched off.
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even some-
one who does not carry the Intelligent Key,
to push the ignition switch to start the
engine.

ON (Normal operating position) OFF
This position turns on the ignition system The ignition switch is in the OFF position
and electrical accessories. when the engine is turned off using the
ON has a battery saver feature that will ignition switch.
place the ignition switch in the OFF posi- AUTO ACC:
tion, if the vehicle is not running, after some With the vehicle in the P (Park) position, the
time under the following conditions: Intelligent Key with you, and the ignition
• The shift lever is in P (Park). switch placed from the ON to the OFF po-
• The hazard lamps are off. sition, the radio can still be used for a period
• The turn signals are off. of time, or until the driver’s door is opened.
The battery saver feature will be canceled if After a period of time, functions such as
any of the following occur: radio, navigation, and Bluetooth® Hands-
• The shift lever is moved out of the P (Park) Free Phone System may be restarted by
SSD0860
position. pressing the “POWER button/VOLUME con-
trol knob” or the key fob unlock button. For NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
• The ignition switch changes position. additional information, refer to “Monitor, cli- BATTERY DISCHARGE
• The hazard lamps are turned on. mate, audio, phone and voice recognition
• The turn signals are turned on. systems” in this manual. If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key®
is discharged or environmental conditions
CAUTION EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF interfere with the Intelligent Key operation,
start the engine according to the following
To shut off the engine in an emergency
Do not leave the vehicle with the igni- procedure:
situation while driving, perform the follow-
tion switch in the ON or AUTO ACC posi- ing procedure: 1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park)
tion when the engine is not running for position.
• Rapidly push the ignition switch three
an extended period. This can discharge
consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec- 2. Firmly apply the foot brake.
the battery.
onds, or
3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intel-
• Push and hold the ignition switch for
ligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will
more than 2 seconds.
sound.)

(After step 3 is performed, when the ig- NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM If this procedure allows the engine to start,
nition switch is pushed without de- (NATS) (if so equipped) NISSAN recommends placing the regis-
pressing the brake pedal, the ignition tered NATS key separate from other de-
switch position will change to ON.) The NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) will vices to avoid interference.
not allow the engine to start without the
4. Push the ignition switch while depress- use of the registered NATS key. NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
ing the brake pedal within 10 seconds SYSTEM
after the chime sounds. The engine will If the engine does not start by using the
start. registered NATS key, it may be due to inter- The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
ference caused by: will not allow the engine to start without
NOTE: • Another NATS key. the use of the registered key.
• When the ignition switch is pushed to • An automated toll road device. If the engine fails to start using a registered
the ON position or the engine is started • An automated payment device. key (for example, when interference is
by the above procedure, the Intelligent caused by another registered key, an auto-
Key battery discharge indicator ap- • Other devices that transmit similar
signals. mated toll road device or automatic pay-
pears in the vehicle information dis- ment device on the key ring), restart the
play (if so equipped) even when the In- Start the engine using the following proce- engine using the following procedures:
telligent Key is inside the vehicle. This dure:
is not a malfunction. To turn off the In- 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi-
1. Remove any items that may be causing tion for approximately 5 seconds.
telligent Key battery discharge indica- the interference away from the NATS key.
tor, touch the ignition switch with the 2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
Intelligent Key again. 2. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi- LOCK position, and wait approximately
• If the Intelligent Key battery discharge tion for approximately 5 seconds. 10 seconds.
indicator appears, replace the battery 3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
as soon as possible. For additional in- 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
LOCK position, and wait approximately
formation, see “Battery replacement” 10 seconds. 4. Restart the engine while holding the de-
(P. 8-22). vice (which may have caused the inter-
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3. ference) separate from the registered
5. Start the engine. key.
6. Repeat the steps above until all possible
interferences are eliminated.
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN • Make sure the area around the vehicle is 1. Apply the parking brake.
recommends placing the registered key on clear.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neu-
a separate key ring to avoid interference • Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool- tral). P (Park) is recommended.
from other devices. ant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer
fluid as frequently as possible, or at least The shift lever cannot be moved out of
whenever you refuel. P (Park) and into any of the other gear
positions if the ignition switch is
• Check that all windows and lights are
placed in the OFF position.
clean.
• Visually inspect tires for their appearance The starter is designed not to operate
and condition. Also check tires for proper if the shift lever is in any of the driving
inflation. positions.
• Lock all doors. 3. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-
• Position seat and adjust headrests/head tion. Depress the brake pedal and push
restraints. the ignition switch to start the engine.
• Adjust inside and outside mirrors. To start the engine immediately, push
• Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers and release the ignition switch while de-
to do likewise. pressing the brake pedal with the igni-
• Check the operation of warning lights tion switch in any position.
when the ignition switch is pushed to the • If the engine is very hard to start in
ON position. For additional information, extremely cold weather or when re-
see “Warning lights, indicator lights and starting, depress the accelerator
audible reminders” (P. 2-10). pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the
floor) and while holding, crank the en-
gine. Release the accelerator pedal
when the engine starts.

• If the engine is very hard to start be- 4. Warm-up: REMOTE ENGINE START (if so
cause it is flooded, depress the accel- Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 equipped)
erator pedal all the way to the floor seconds after starting. Do not race the
and hold it. Push the ignition switch to Vehicles started with the Remote Engine
engine while warming it up. Drive at a Start require the ignition switch to be
the ON position to start cranking the moderate speed for a short distance
engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop placed in the ON position before the shift
first, especially in cold weather. In cold lever can be moved from the P (Park) posi-
cranking by pushing the ignition weather, keep the engine running for a
switch to LOCK. After cranking the en- tion. To place the ignition switch in the ON
minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before shut- position, follow these steps:
gine, release the accelerator pedal. ting it off. Starting and stopping the en-
Crank the engine with your foot off the gine over a short period of time may 1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on
accelerator pedal by depressing the make the vehicle more difficult to start. you.
brake pedal and pushing the ignition
switch to start the engine. If the engine 5. To stop the engine, move the shift lever 2. Apply the brake.
starts, but fails to run, repeat the to the P (Park) position and push the 3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON
above procedure. ignition switch to the OFF position. position.
CAUTION
NOTE: For additional information, see “NISSAN In-
Care should be taken to avoid situa- telligent Key® system” (P. 3-7).
Do not operate the starter for more tions that can lead to potential bat-
than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine tery discharge and potential no-start
does not start, push the ignition switch conditions such as:
to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds 1. Installation or extended use of elec-
before cranking again, otherwise the tronic accessories that consume bat-
starter could be damaged. tery power when the engine is not
running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly
and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE CAUTION Starting the vehicle

TRANSMISSION (CVT) 1. After starting the engine, fully depress
• Except in an emergency, do not shift
the foot brake pedal before moving the
WARNING to the N (Neutral) position while driv-
shift lever out of the P (Park) position.
ing. Coasting with the transmission
This Continuously Variable Transmis-
• Do not depress the accelerator pedal in the N (Neutral) position may cause
sion is designed so that the foot brake
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- serious damage to the transmission.
pedal must be depressed before shift-
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low). • To avoid possible damage to your ve- ing from P (Park) to any driving posi-
Always depress the brake pedal until hicle, when stopping the vehicle on tion while the ignition switch is in the
shifting is completed. Failure to do so an uphill grade, do not hold the ve- ON position.
could cause you to lose control and hicle by depressing the accelerator The shift lever cannot be moved out of
have an accident. pedal. The foot brake should be used the P (Park) position and into any of
• Cold engine idle speed is high, so use for this purpose. the other positions if the ignition
caution when shifting into a forward switch is placed in the LOCK or OFF
or reverse gear before the engine has The CVT in your vehicle is electronically
controlled to produce maximum power position.
warmed up.
and smooth operation. 2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed
• Do not downshift abruptly on slip-
pery roads. This may cause a loss of The recommended operating procedures and move the shift lever to a driving
control. for this transmission are shown on the fol- position.
• Never shift to either the P (Park) or R lowing pages. Follow these procedures for 3. Release the parking brake and foot
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is maximum vehicle performance and driv- brake pedal, and then gradually start the
moving forward and P (Park) or D ing enjoyment. vehicle in motion.
(Drive) position while the vehicle is NOTE:
reversing. This could cause an acci-
dent or damage the transmission. Engine power may be automatically re-
duced to protect the CVT if the engine
speed increases quickly when driving on
slippery roads or while being tested on
some dynamometers.

WARNING CAUTION
• Do not depress the accelerator pedal • To avoid possible damage to your ve-
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- hicle, when stopping the vehicle on
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low) an uphill grade, do not hold the ve-
position. Always depress the brake hicle by depressing the accelerator
pedal until shifting is completed. pedal. The foot brake should be used
Failure to do so could cause you to for this purpose.
lose control and have an accident. • Except in an emergency, do not shift
• Cold engine idle speed is high, so use to the N (Neutral) position while driv-
caution when shifting into a forward ing. Coasting with the transmission
or reverse gear before the engine has in the N (Neutral) position may cause
warmed up. serious damage to the transmission.
• Do not downshift abruptly on slip-
pery roads. This may cause a loss of LSD2643
control. Shifting
• Never shift to either the P (Park) or R To move the shift lever:
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D Press the button O
A while depress-
(Drive) position while the vehicle is ing the brake pedal
reversing. This could cause an acci-
dent or damage the transmission. Press the button O
A to shift
Shift without pressing the button

O
A

After starting the engine, fully depress the Apply the parking brake. When parking on a D (Drive)
brake pedal and move the shift lever from P hill, apply the parking brake first, then move Use this position for all normal forward
(Park) to any of the desired shift positions. the shift lever into the P (Park) position. driving.
R (Reverse) L (Low)
WARNING
CAUTION Use this position for engine braking on
Apply the parking brake if the shift le- steep downhill gradients/climbing steep
ver is in any position while the engine is To prevent transmission damage, use slopes and whenever approaching sharp
not running. Failure to do so could the R (Reverse) position only when the bends. Do not use the L (Low) position in
cause the vehicle to move unexpect- vehicle is completely stopped. any other circumstances.
edly or roll away and result in serious
personal injury or property damage. Use the R (Reverse) position to back up.
Make sure the vehicle is completely
P (Park) stopped before selecting the R (Reverse)
position. The brake pedal must be de-
CAUTION pressed in to move the shift lever from P
(Park) or the shift lever button pressed in
To prevent transmission damage, use from N (Neutral) or any drive position to R
the P (Park) position only when the ve- (Reverse).
hicle is completely stopped.
N (Neutral)
Use the P (Park) shift lever position when
Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-
the vehicle is parked or when starting the
gaged. The engine can be started in this
engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely
position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and
stopped.
restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is
The brake pedal should be depressed to moving.
move the shift lever from N (Neutral) or
any drive position to P (Park).
The P (Park) position is automatically en-
gaged if you switch off the ignition.

To move the shift lever, complete the fol- If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P
lowing procedure: (Park), have the transmission checked as
1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK soon as possible. It is recommended that
position. you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2. Apply the parking brake. CAUTION

3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a Make sure to take extra care during the
small (1/8 inch or 3 mm) flat-head removal of the shift lock cap as this
screwdriver, remove the shift lock re- part is easily damaged.
lease cover.
• If available, a plastic trim tool can also
be used. WARNING
4. Insert the rod from the spare tire tool kit If the shift lever cannot be moved from
LSD2644 into the shift lock release slot and push the P (Park) position while the engine is
in at an angle (about 45°). A small screw- running and the brake pedal is de-
Shift lock release driver or small trim tool may also be pressed, the stop lights may not work.
If the battery charge is low or discharged, used. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause
the shift lever may not be moved from the • For additional information, see an accident injuring yourself and
P (Park) position even with the brake pedal “NISSAN Intelligent Key® system” others.
depressed and the shift lever button (P. 3-7).
pressed.
5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
It will be necessary to jump start or have position while holding down the shift
your battery charged. For additional infor- lock release.
mation, see “Jump starting” (P. 6-10). It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN 6. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-
dealer or a professional towing service. tion. Now the vehicle may be moved to
the desired location.

tion other than D (Drive), the drive sport High fluid temperature protection
mode will be automatically turned off. mode
OFF position: This transmission has a high fluid tem-
For normal driving and fuel economy, use perature protection mode. If the fluid tem-
the OFF position. perature becomes too high (for example,
when climbing steep grades in high tem-
ON position:
peratures with heavy loads, such as when
For driving up or down long slopes where towing a trailer), engine power and, under
engine braking is necessary, or for powerful some conditions, vehicle speed will be de-
acceleration, use the ON position. The creased automatically to reduce the
transmission will automatically select a dif- chance of transmission damage. Vehicle
ferent gear ratio, allowing the engine to speed can be controlled with the accelera-
provide high output. tor pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed
Remember not to drive at high speeds for may be limited.
LSD2647
extended periods of time with the drive
Drive sport mode switch (if so sport mode in the ON position. This re- Fail-safe
equipped) duces fuel economy. If the vehicle is driven under extreme
To select the drive sport mode, push the conditions, such as excessive wheel
drive sport mode switch with the shift lever Accelerator downshift spinning and subsequent hard braking,
in the D (Drive) position. — in D (Drive) position — the fail-safe system may be activated.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The SPORT mode indicator light illumi- For passing or hill climbing, depress the may come on to indicate the fail-safe
nates in the meter or the drive sport mode accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts mode is activated. For additional infor-
indicator in the vehicle information display the transmission down into a lower gear, mation, see “Malfunction Indicator Light
illuminates next to the Transmission Shift depending on the vehicle speed. (MIL)” (P. 2-19). This will occur even if all
Position indicator. To turn off the drive sport
electrical circuits are functioning prop-
mode, push the drive sport mode switch
erly. In this case, place the ignition switch
again. The SPORT mode indicator light or
in the OFF position and wait for 10 sec-
drive sport mode indicator will turn off.
onds. Then push the switch back to the
When the shift lever is shifted to any posi-
ON position. The vehicle should return to
PARKING BRAKE
its normal operating condition. If it does WARNING

not return to its normal operating condi-
tion, have the transmission checked and • Be sure the parking brake is fully re-
repaired, if necessary. It is recommended leased before driving. Failure to do so
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this can cause brake failure and lead to
service. an accident.
• Do not release the parking brake
WARNING from outside the vehicle.
When the high fluid temperature pro- • Do not use the shift lever in place of
tection mode or fail-safe operation oc- the parking brake. When parking, be
curs, vehicle speed may be gradually sure the parking brake is fully
reduced. The reduced speed may be engaged.
lower than other traffic, which could in- • To help avoid risk of injury or death
crease the chance of a collision. Be es- through unintended operation of the
WSD0169
pecially careful when driving. If neces- vehicle and/or its systems, do not
sary, pull to the side of the road at a safe leave children, people who require HAND TYPE
place and allow the transmission to re- the assistance of others or pets unat- To engage: Pull the lever up O
A .
turn to normal operation, or have it re- tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
paired if necessary. the temperature inside a closed ve- To release:
hicle on a warm day can quickly be- 1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
come high enough to cause a signifi-
cant risk of injury or death to people 2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)
and pets. position.
3. While pulling up on the parking brake
lever slightly, press the button and lower
completely O B .
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warn-

ing light goes out.

– The shift lever is in the P (Park) position. CAUTION
– The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
– The ignition switch is placed in the OFF When parking in an area where the out-
position. side temperature is below 32°F (0°C),
the parking brake, if applied, may
– The parking brake is applied manually.
freeze in place and may be difficult to
– If a malfunction occurs in the automatic release.
brake hold function.
For safe parking, it is recommended
The electronic parking brake is automati- that you place the shift lever in the P
cally released as soon as the vehicle starts (Park) position and securely block the
and the accelerator pedal is depressed wheels.
with the driver’s seat belt fastened.
NOTE:
WARNING • To keep the electronic parking brake
LSD4106 released after the engine is turned off,
• Before leaving the vehicle, move the place the ignition switch in the OFF po-
ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE shift lever to the P (Park) position and sition, depress the brake pedal and
(switch type) check that the electronic parking push down the parking brake switch
The electronic parking brake can be ap- brake warning light is illuminated to before opening the driver’s door.
plied or released automatically or by oper- confirm that the electronic parking
• If a malfunction occurs in the elec-
ating the parking brake switch. brake is applied. The electronic park-
tronic parking brake system (for ex-
ing brake warning light will remain
ample, due to battery discharge), it is
Automatic operation on for a period of time after the driv-
er’s door is locked.
Under the following conditions, the elec- dealer.
tronic parking brake will automatically be
applied and the brake force of the auto-
matic brake hold will be released:
– The braking force is applied by the auto-
matic brake hold function for 3 minutes
or longer.

• Under the following conditions, the Before driving, check that the electronic • If the electronic parking brake must be
parking brake will automatically be ap- parking brake indicator light ( or PARK) applied while driving in an emergency,
plied and the brake force of the auto- goes out. For additional information, see pull up and hold the parking brake
matic brake hold will be released: “Warning lights, indicator lights and audible switch. When you release the parking
– The braking force is applied by the reminders” (P. 2-10). brake switch, the parking brake will be
automatic brake hold function for 3 released.
minutes or longer. NOTE:
• While pulling up the electronic parking
– The shift lever is in the P (Park) • A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is brake switch during driving, the park-
position. driven without releasing the parking ing brake is applied and a chime
– The driver’s seat belt is unfastened. brake. For additional information, see sounds. The electronic parking brake
– The ignition switch is placed in the “Warning lights, indicator lights and indicator light in the meter and in the
OFF position. audible reminders” (P. 2-10). parking brake switch illuminates. This
– The parking brake is applied • While the electronic parking brake is does not indicate a malfunction. The
manually. applied or released, an operating electronic parking brake indicator light
– If a malfunction occurs in the auto- sound is heard from the lower side of in the meter and in the parking brake
matic brake hold function. the rear seat. This is normal and does switch turns off when the parking
not indicate a malfunction. brake is released.
Manual operation • When the electronic parking brake is • When pulling the electronic parking
The electronic parking brake will not be au- frequently applied and released in a brake switch up with the ignition
tomatically applied if the engine is stopped short period of time, the parking brake switch in the OFF or AUTO ACC position,
without using the ignition switch (for ex- may not operate in order to prevent the the parking brake switch indicator
ample, by engine stalling). In such a case, parking brake system from overheat- light will continue to illuminate for a
you have to apply the parking brake ing. If this occurs, operate the elec- short period of time.
manually. tronic parking brake switch again after
waiting approximately 1 minute.
To apply: Pull the switch up O
1 . The indica-
tor light O
A will illuminate.
To release: With the ignition switch in the

ON position, depress the brake pedal and
push the switch down O 2 . The indicator
light O
A will turn off.

AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD
(if so equipped)
The automatic brake hold function main- • Be sure to deactivate the automatic • The automatic brake hold function
tains the braking force without the driver brake hold function when using a car will not be activated if the slip indica-
having to depress the brake pedal when wash or towing your vehicle. tor light, electronic parking brake
the vehicle is stopped at a traffic light or warning light or master warning light
• Make sure to place the shift lever in
intersection. As soon as the driver de- illuminate and the chassis control
the P (Park) position and apply the
presses the accelerator pedal again, the system fault message appears in the
parking brake when parking your ve-
automatic brake hold function is deacti- vehicle information display.
hicle or loading luggage. Failure to do
vated and the braking force is released. The
so could cause the vehicle to move or • To maintain the braking force to keep
operating status of the automatic brake
roll away unexpectedly and result in the vehicle to a standstill, a noise
hold is shown by color on the vehicle infor-
serious personal injury or property may be heard. This is not a
mation display. For additional information,
damage. malfunction.
see “Vehicle information display” (P. 2-23).
• If any of the following conditions oc-
WARNING cur, the automatic brake hold func-
tion may not function. Have the sys-
• The automatic brake hold function is tem checked promptly. It is
not designed to hold the vehicle on a recommended that you visit a
steep hill or slippery road. Never use NISSAN dealer for this service. Failure
the automatic brake hold when the to operate the vehicle in accordance
vehicle is stopped on a steep hill or with these conditions could cause
slippery road. Failure to do so may the vehicle to move or roll away un-
cause the vehicle to move. expectedly and result in serious per-
• When the automatic brake hold func- sonal injury or property damage.
tion is activated but fails to maintain – A warning message appears in the
the vehicle at a standstill, depress the vehicle information display.
brake pedal to stop the vehicle. If the – The indicator light on the auto-
vehicle unexpectedly moves due to matic brake hold switch does not
outside conditions, the chime may illuminate when the switch is
sound and automatic brake hold pushed.
warning may illuminate in the vehicle
information display.

How to activate the automatic How to deactivate the automatic
brake hold function brake hold function
1. With the ignition switch in the ON posi- While the automatic brake hold function is
tion, push the automatic brake hold activated, push the automatic brake hold
switch O1 . The indicator light on the au- switch to turn off the automatic brake hold
tomatic brake hold switch O
2 indicator light and deactivate the auto-
illuminates. matic brake hold function. To deactivate
the automatic brake hold function while
2. When the automatic brake hold function
the brake force has been maintained by
goes into standby, the automatic brake
the automatic brake hold function, depress
hold indicator light (white) illuminates.
the brake pedal and push the automatic
To use the automatic brake hold function, brake hold switch.
the following conditions need to be met:
LSD4137 • The driver’s seat belt is fastened. WARNING
• The electronic parking brake is released. Make sure to firmly depress and hold
HOW TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE
• The shift lever is not in the P (Park) the brake pedal when turning off the
THE AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD position. automatic brake hold function while
FUNCTION • The vehicle is not parked on a steep hill. the brake force is applied. When the au-
For additional information on activating tomatic brake hold function is deacti-
and deactivating the automatic brake hold NOTE: vated, the brake force will be released.
function, refer to the instructions outlined The automatic brake hold function re- This could cause the vehicle to move or
in this section. sets to OFF every time the ignition roll away unexpectedly. Failure to pre-
switch is switched from the OFF position vent the vehicle from rolling may result
to the ON position. in serious personal injury or property
damage.

HOW TO USE THE AUTOMATIC Parking – The parking brake is applied
BRAKE HOLD FUNCTION manually.
When the shift lever is in the P (Park) posi-
– If a malfunction occurs in the auto-
For additional information on using the au- tion with the brake force maintained by the
matic brake hold function.
tomatic brake hold function, refer to the automatic brake hold function, the parking
brake will automatically be applied and the • When the vehicle stops, but the brake
instructions outlined in this section.
brake force of the automatic brake hold will force is not automatically applied, de-
be released. The automatic brake hold in- press the brake pedal firmly until the
To maintain braking force automatic brake hold indicator light
dicator light turns off. When the electronic
automatically parking brake is applied with the brake (green) illuminates.
With the automatic brake hold function ac- force maintained by the automatic brake
tivated and the automatic brake hold indi- hold function, the brake force of the auto-
cator light (white) illuminated on the meter, matic brake hold will be released. The au-
depress the braking pedal to stop the ve- tomatic brake hold indicator light turns off.
hicle. The brake force is automatically
maintained without your foot depressed NOTE:
on the brake pedal. While the brake hold is • Under the following conditions, the
maintained, the automatic brake hold indi- electronic parking brake will automati-
cator light (green) illuminates on the meter. cally be applied and the brake force of
the automatic brake hold will be
To start the vehicle from a released:
standstill – The braking force is applied by the
automatic brake hold function for 3
With the shift lever not in the P (Park) or N minutes or longer.
(Neutral) position, depress the accelerator – The shift lever is in the P (Park)
pedal while the brake force is maintained. position.
The brake force will automatically be re- – The driver's seat belt is unfastened.
leased to restart the vehicle. – The ignition switch is placed in the
The automatic brake hold indicator light OFF position.
(white) on the meter illuminates and the
automatic brake hold returns to standby.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)
(if so equipped)
The LDW system will operate when the ve-

hicle is driven at speeds of approximately
37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only
when the lane markings are clearly visible
on the road.
The LDW system monitors the lane mark-
ers on the traveling lane using the camera
unit O
A located above the inside mirror.
The LDW system warns the driver that the

vehicle is beginning to leave the driving
lane with an indicator and a steering wheel
vibration. For additional information, see
“LDW system operation” (P. 5-29).
LSD3922 LSD3632
Automatic brake hold function WARNING

display
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
The automatic brake hold function status structions for proper use of the LDW
is shown by color in the “Chassis Control” system could result in serious injury or
mode in the vehicle information display. death.
For additional information, see “Vehicle in-
formation display” (P. 2-23). • This system is only a warning device
to inform the driver of a potential un-
Also depending on the driving situations, intended lane departure. It will not
some warnings or indicators may be dis- steer the vehicle or prevent loss of
played in the vehicle information display. control. It is the driver’s responsibility
For additional information, see “Vehicle in- to stay alert, drive safely, keep the
formation display warnings and indicators” vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in
(P. 2-31) control of the vehicle at all times.

䊊
2 Vehicle Information Display or Trip
Computer
䊊
3 LDW Switch (if so equipped)
The LDW system provides a lane departure
warning function when the vehicle is driven
at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60
km/h) and above and the lane markings
are clear. When the vehicle approaches ei-
ther the left or the right side of the traveling
lane, the steering wheel will vibrate and the
LDW indicator (if so equipped) on the in-
strument panel will blink to alert the driver.
The warning function will stop when the
vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.
LSD4121
Vehicle information display
LDW SYSTEM OPERATION 䊊1 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indica-
tor or Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
indicator light

Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the LDW system.
For vehicles with the vehicle information
display (if so equipped):
1. Press the button until “Settings” dis-
plays in the vehicle information display.
Use the button to select “Driver As-
sistance.” Then press the OK button.
2. Select “Lane” and press the OK button.
3. Select “Lane Departure Warning” and
press the OK button to turn the system
on or off.
LSD3989
Trip computer
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
LDW SYSTEM

For vehicles with the LDW switch (if so
equipped):
1. Push the Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
switch to turn the LDW system on.
2. Push the LDW switch again to turn the
LDW system off.
When the LDW system is turned on, the
indicator light on the LDW switch
illuminates.
LSD4122

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the LDW system. Failure to follow
the warnings and instructions for
proper use of the LDW system could re-
sult in serious injury or death.
• The system will not operate at
speeds below approximately 37 mph
(60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane
markers.
• Do not use the LDW system under the
following conditions as it may not
function properly:
– During bad weather (rain, fog,
snow, etc.).
– When driving on slippery roads,
such as on ice or snow.
– When driving on winding or un-
even roads.
– When there is a lane closure due to
road repairs.
– When driving in a makeshift or
temporary lane.
LSD3991 – When driving on roads where the
lane width is too narrow.
LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

– When driving without normal tire – On roads where there are sharply – When a sudden change in bright-
conditions (for example, tire wear, contrasting objects, such as shad- ness occurs. (For example, when
low tire pressure, installation of ows, snow, water, wheel ruts, the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel
spare tire, tire chains, nonstan- seams or lines remaining after or under a bridge.)
dard wheels). road repairs. (The LDW system
could detect these items as lane SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
– When the vehicle is equipped with
non-original brake parts or sus- markers.) UNAVAILABLE
pension parts. – On roads where the traveling lane If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight
– When you are towing a trailer or merges or separates. under high temperature conditions (over
other vehicle. – When the vehicle’s traveling direc- approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then
• The system may not function prop- tion does not align with the lane started, the LDW system may be deacti-
erly under the following conditions: marker. vated automatically and the following
– When traveling close to the ve- message will appear in the vehicle infor-
– On roads where there are multiple mation display (if so equipped): “Unavail-
parallel lane markers; lane mark- hicle in front of you, which ob-
structs the lane camera unit de- able: High Cabin Temperature.”
ers that are faded or not painted
clearly; yellow painted lane mark- tection range. When the interior temperature is reduced,
ers; non-standard lane markers; – When rain, snow, dirt or an object the LDW system will resume operating
or lane markers covered with wa- adheres to the windshield in front automatically.
ter, dirt, snow, etc. of the lane camera unit. The LDW system is not designed to warn
– On roads where the discontinued – When the headlights are not under the following conditions:
lane markers are still detectable. bright due to dirt on the lens or if • When you operate the lane change signal
– On roads where there are sharp the aiming is not adjusted and change traveling lanes in the direc-
curves. properly. tion of the signal. (The LDW system will
– When strong light enters the lane become operable again approximately
camera unit. (For example, the 2 seconds after the lane change signal is
light directly shines on the front of turned off.)
the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.) • When the vehicle speed lowers to less
than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).

After the above conditions have finished • Do not place reflective materials, such as
and the necessary operating conditions white paper or a mirror, on the instru-
are satisfied, the LDW functions will resume. ment panel. The reflection of sunlight
may adversely affect the camera unit’s
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION capability of detecting the lane markers.
If the LDW system malfunctions, it will can- • Do not strike or damage the areas
cel automatically. The LDW indicator (or- around the camera unit. Do not touch the
ange) or LDW indicator light will illuminate camera lens or remove the screw located
in the instrument panel. If the LDW indicator on the camera unit. If the camera unit is
(orange) or LDW indicator light illuminates damaged due to an accident, it is recom-
in the instrument panel, pull off the road to mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
a safe location and stop the vehicle. Turn
the engine/motor off and restart the
engine/motor. If the LDW indicator (orange)
or LDW indicator light continues to illumi- LSD4123
nate, have the LDW system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
dealer for this service. The lane camera unit O A for the LDW sys-
tem is located above the inside mirror. To
keep the proper operation of the LDW sys-
tem and prevent a system malfunction, be
sure to observe the following:
• Always keep the windshield clean.
• Do not attach a sticker (including trans-
parent material) or install an accessory
near the camera unit.

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so
equipped)
WARNING
structions for proper use of the BSW
system could result in serious injury or
death.
• The BSW system is not a replacement
for proper driving procedures and is
not designed to prevent contact with
vehicles or objects. When changing
lanes, always use the side and rear
mirrors and turn and look in the di-
rection your vehicle will move to en-
sure it is safe to change lanes. Never
rely solely on the BSW system. LSD3090 SSD1030
The BSW system uses radar sensors O 1 Detection zone
The BSW system helps alert the driver of
other vehicles in adjacent lanes when installed near the rear bumper to detect The radar sensors can detect vehicles on
changing lanes. other vehicles in an adjacent lane. either side of your vehicle within the detec-
tion zone shown as illustrated. This detec-
tion zone starts from the outside mirror of
your vehicle and extends approximately
10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and
approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION
The BSW system operates above approxi-
mately 20 mph (32 km/h).
If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the
detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indica-
tor light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is
then activated, the system chimes (twice)
and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light
continues to flash until the detected ve-
hicle leaves the detection zone.
The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illumi-
nates for a few seconds when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indi-
cator light is adjusted automatically de-
pending on the brightness of the ambient
light.
If a vehicle comes into the detection zone
after the driver activates the turn signal,
then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes and no chime sounds. For addi-
tional information, see “BSW driving situa-
tions” (P. 5-41).
LSD4013
1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
2. BSW Indicator or BSW Indicator Light

LSD4014
Trip computer

disable the BSW system.
2. Select “Blind Spot” and press the OK
button.
3. Select “Blind Spot Warning” and press
the OK button to turn the system on or
off.
LSD3507

BSW SYSTEM

For vehicles with the BSW switch (if so
equipped):
1. Push the BSW switch to turn the BSW
system on. The BSW indicator light will
illuminate in the meter.
2. Push the BSW switch again to turn the
BSW system off. The BSW indicator light
will turn off.
NOTE:
• When enabling/disabling the system,
the system will retain current settings
even if the engine is restarted.
• When the BSW system is turned on, the
BSW indicator (white) in the vehicle in-
formation display (if so equipped)
illuminates.
LSD4015

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS – A vehicle that passes through the • Do not attach stickers (including
WARNING detection zone quickly. transparent material), install acces-
– When overtaking several vehicles sories or apply additional paint near
Listed below are the system limitations in a row, the vehicles after the first the radar sensors. These conditions
for the BSW system. Failure to operate vehicle may not be detected if may reduce the ability of the radar to
the vehicle in accordance with these they are traveling close together. detect other vehicles.
system limitations could result in seri- • Excessive noise (for example, audio
• The radar sensors’ detection zone is
ous injury or death. system volume, open vehicle win-
designed based on a standard lane
• The BSW system cannot detect all ve- width. When driving in a wider lane, dow) will interfere with the chime
hicles under all conditions. the radar sensors may not detect ve- sound, and it may not be heard.
• The radar sensors may not be able to hicles in an adjacent lane. When driv-
detect and activate BSW when cer- ing in a narrow lane, the radar sen-
tain objects are present such as: sors may detect vehicles driving two
– Pedestrian, bicycles, animals. lanes away.
– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low • The radar sensors are designed to ig-
height vehicles, or high ground nore most stationary objects, how-
clearance vehicles. ever objects such as guardrails, walls,
– Oncoming vehicles. foliage and parked vehicles may oc-
casionally be detected. This is a nor-
– Vehicles remaining in the detec- mal operation condition.
tion zone when you accelerate
from a stop. • The following conditions may reduce
the ability of the radar to detect other
– A vehicle merging into an adjacent vehicles:
lane at a speed approximately the
same as your vehicle. – Severe weather
– A vehicle approaching rapidly – Road spray
from behind. – Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on
– A vehicle which your vehicle over- the vehicle
takes rapidly.

Another vehicle approaching
from behind
Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator
light illuminates if a vehicle enters the de-
tection zone from behind in an adjacent
lane.
NOTE:
• The radar sensors may not detect ve-
hicles which are approaching rapidly
from behind.
LSD2299 LSD2300
Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind Illustration 2 – Approaching from
BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS behind
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the
Indicator on turn signal when another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator
Indicator off light flashes.
NOTE:
• The radar sensors may not detect ve-
Indicator flashing hicles which are approaching rapidly
from behind.

• If the driver activates the turn signal
before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator
light will flash but no chime will sound
when the other vehicle is detected.
LSD2302 LSD2303
Illustration 3 – Overtaking another Illustration 4 – Overtaking another
vehicle vehicle
Overtaking another vehicle Illustration 4: If the driver activates the
turn signal while another vehicle is in the
Illustration 3: The side BSW/RCTA indica-
tor light illuminates if you overtake a ve-
hicle and that vehicle stays in the detection
light flashes.
zone for approximately 2 seconds.
NOTE:
• When overtaking several vehicles in a
row, the vehicles after the first vehicle
may not be detected if they are travel-
ing close together.

• The radar sensors may not detect
slower moving vehicles if they are
passed quickly.
LSD2305 LSD2308
Illustration 5 – Entering from the side Illustration 6 – Entering from the side
Entering from the side Illustration 6: If the driver activates the
turn signal while another vehicle is in the
Illustration 5: The side BSW/RCTA indicator
light illuminates if a vehicle enters the de-
tection zone from either side.
light flashes.
NOTE:

• The radar sensors may not detect a ve-
hicle which is traveling at about the
same speed as your vehicle when it en-
ters the detection zone.
LSD3682
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY When radar blockage is detected, the sys-

UNAVAILABLE tem will be deactivated automatically. The
“Side Radar Obstruction” warning message

will appear in the vehicle information dis- Do not attach stickers (including transpar-
play (if so equipped). ent material), install accessories or apply
The system is not available until the condi- additional paint near the radar sensors.
tions no longer exist. Do not strike or damage the area around
The radar sensors may be blocked by tem- the radar sensors. It is recommended that
porary ambient conditions such as splash- you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around
ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condi- the radar sensors is damaged due to a
tion may also be caused by objects such as collision.
ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar
sensors. Radio frequency statement
Action to take: For USA
When the above conditions no longer exist, FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B
the system will resume automatically. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
LSD3090
Rules.
Malfunction SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Operation is subject to the following two
If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn The two radar sensors O
1 for the BSW and conditions:
off automatically. The system malfunction RCTA systems are located near the rear
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
warning message with the BSW indicator bumper. Always keep the area near the ra-
ference, and
(orange) will appear in the vehicle informa- dar sensors clean.
tion display (if so equipped). The radar sensors may be blocked by tem- 2. This device must accept any interfer-
porary ambient conditions such as splash- ence received, including interference
Action to take:
ing water, mist or fog. that may cause undesired operation.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the
vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en- The blocked condition may also be caused
gine off and restart the engine. If the mes- by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-
sage continues to appear, have the system structing the radar sensors.
checked. It is recommended that you visit a Check for and remove objects obstructing
NISSAN dealer for this service. the area around the radar sensors.

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)
(if so equipped)
FCC Warning 2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
approved by the party responsible for même si le brouillage est susceptible Failure to follow the warnings and in-
compliance could void the user’s authority d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. structions for proper use of the RCTA
to operate the equipment. Bandes de fréquences: 24.05–24.25GHz could result in serious injury or death.
• The RCTA system is not a replace-
For Canada Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts
ment for proper driving procedures
Applicable law: Canada 310 and is not designed to prevent con-
This device complies with industry Canada tact with vehicles or objects. When
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation backing out of a parking space, al-
is subject to the following two conditions: ways use the side and rear mirrors
and turn and look in the direction
1. This device may not cause interference, your vehicle will move. Never rely
and solely on the RCTA system.
2. This device must accept any interfer- The RCTA system will assist you when
ence, including interference that may backing out from a parking space. When
cause undesired operation of the the vehicle is in reverse, the system is de-
device. signed to detect other vehicles approach-
Frequency bands: 24.05–24.25GHz ing from the right or left of the vehicle. If the
system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts
Droit applicable: Canada 310
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar-
eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation
est autorisée aux deux conditions
suivantes:
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et

When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and
the vehicle speed is less than approxi-
mately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is
operational.
If the radar detects an approaching vehicle
from either side, the system chimes (once)
and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes on the side the vehicle is approach-
ing from.
LSD4016
RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION The RCTA system can help alert the driver
1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light of an approaching vehicle when the driver
is backing out of a parking space.

LSD4017
Trip computer

LSD2216 LSD3090
The RCTA system uses radar sensors O 1
installed on both sides near the rear bum-
per to detect an approaching vehicle.
The radar sensors O 1 can detect an ap-
proaching vehicle from up to approxi-
mately 66 ft. (20 m) away.

disable the RCTA system.
2. Select “Parking Aids” and press the OK
button.
3. Select “Cross Traffic” and press the OK
button to turn the system on or off.
LSD3510

RCTA SYSTEM

For vehicles with the BSW switch (if so
equipped):
1. Push the BSW switch to turn the RCTA
system on. The BSW indicator light will
illuminate in the meter.
2. Push the BSW switch again to turn the
RCTA system off. The BSW indicator light
will turn off.
NOTE:
When enabling/disabling the system,
the system setting will be retained even
if the engine is restarted.
LSD4015

• Always check surroundings and turn
to check what is behind you before
backing up. The radar sensors detect
approaching (moving) vehicles. The
radar sensors cannot detect every
object such as:
– Pedestrians, bicycles, motor-
cycles, animals or child-operated
toy vehicles
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
greater than approximately 19
mph (30 km/h)
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
lower than approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h)
• The radar sensors may not detect
approaching vehicles in certain situ-
ations:
– Illustration O A : When a vehicle
parked next to you obstructs the
beam of the radar sensor.
LSD3195
– Illustration OB : When the vehicle is
RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS WARNING parked in an angled parking
space.
Listed below are the system limitations – Illustration OC : When the vehicle is
for the RCTA system. Failure to operate parked on inclined ground.
the vehicle in accordance with these – Illustration O D : When an ap-
system limitations could result in seri- proaching vehicle turns into your
ous injury or death. vehicle's parking lot aisle.

– Illustration O E : When the angle
formed by your vehicle and ap-
proaching vehicle is small.
• The following conditions may reduce
the ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles:
– Severe weather
– Road spray
– Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on
the vehicle
• Do not attach stickers (including
transparent material), install acces-
sories or apply additional paint near
the radar sensors. These conditions LSD2043 LSD2044
may reduce the ability of the radar to Illustration 1 Illustration 2
detect other vehicles. NOTE:
• Excessive noise (e.g., audio system
In the case of several vehicles approach-
volume, open vehicle window) will in-
ing in a row (Illustration 1) or in the oppo-
terfere with the chime sound, and it
site direction (Illustration 2), a chime may
may not be heard.
not be sounded by the RCTA system af-
ter the first vehicle passes the sensors.

will appear in the vehicle information dis-
play (if so equipped).
The systems are not available until the
conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-
porary ambient conditions such as splash-
ing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused
by conditions such as ice, snow, frost or dirt
obstructing the radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system will also stop working.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the system will resume automatically.
Malfunction
When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will
turn off automatically. The system mal-
function warning message will appear in
the vehicle information display (if so
equipped).
LSD3682
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY When radar blockage is detected, the sys- NOTE:

UNAVAILABLE tem will be deactivated automatically. The If the BSW system stops working, the
“Side Radar Obstruction” warning message RCTA system will also stop working.

Action to take Do not attach stickers (including transpar-
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the ent material), install accessories or apply
vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en- additional paint near the radar sensors.
gine off and restart the engine. If the mes- Do not strike or damage the area around
sage continues to appear, have the system the radar sensors. It is recommended that
checked. It is recommended that you visit a you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around
NISSAN dealer for this service. the radar sensors is damaged due to a
collision.
Radio frequency statement

For USA
FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
LSD3090
Rules.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Operation is subject to the following two
The two radar sensors O
1 for the BSW and conditions:
RCTA systems are located near the rear
bumper. Always keep the area near the ra-
ference, and
dar sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by tem- 2. This device must accept any interfer-
porary ambient conditions such as splash- ence received, including interference
ing water, mist or fog. that may cause undesired operation.
The blocked condition may also be caused FCC Warning

by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob- Changes or modifications not expressly
structing the radar sensors. approved by the party responsible for
Check for and remove objects obstructing compliance could void the user’s authority
the area around the radar sensors. to operate the equipment.

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)
For Canada WARNING

Applicable law: Canada 310
Do not use the cruise control when driv-
This device complies with industry Canada ing under the following conditions:
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
• When it is not possible to keep the
is subject to the following two conditions:
vehicle at a set speed.
1. This device may not cause interference, • In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies
and in speed.
2. This device must accept any interference, • On winding or hilly roads.
including interference that may cause un- • On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,
desired operation of the device. etc.).
Frequency bands: 24.05–24.25GHz • In very windy areas.
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
LSD3131 control and result in an accident.
Droit applicable: Canada 310
䊊
1 RES+ switch
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils 䊊
2 CANCEL switch The cruise control allows driving at a speed
radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est 䊊
3 SET- switch between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) with-
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: out keeping your foot on the accelerator
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
䊊
4 CRUISE ON/OFF switch pedal.
lage, et PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE To turn on the cruise control, push the
CONTROL CRUISE ON/OFF switch. The CRUISE indica-
2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
• If the cruise control system malfunctions, tor light or indicator in the instrument
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
it cancels automatically. panel comes on.
même si le brouillage est susceptible
d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. • To properly set the cruise control system,
use the following procedures.
Bandes de fréquences: 24.05–24.25GHz
Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts

To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve- The cruise control is automatically can- To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
hicle to the desired speed, push the SET– celed and the CRUISE indicator light or one of the following three methods:
switch and release it. The SET indicator indicator in the instrument panel goes out • Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-
light or indicator in the instrument if: hicle attains the desired speed, push the
panel comes on. Take your foot off the ac- • You depress the brake pedal while push- SET– switch and release it.
celerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the ing the RES+ or SET– switch. The preset • Push and hold the SET– switch. Release
set speed. speed is deleted from memory. the switch when the vehicle slows to the
• To pass another vehicle, depress the ac- • The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph desired speed.
celerator pedal. When you release the (13 km/h) below the set speed. • Push and release the SET– switch. Each
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previ- • You move the shift lever to N (Neutral). time you do this, the set speed decreases
ously set speed. by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• The vehicle may not maintain the set To reset at a faster cruising speed, use
speed when going up or down steep hills. one of the following three methods: To resume the preset speed, push and
If this happens, drive without the cruise • Depress the accelerator pedal. When the release the RES+ switch. The vehicle re-
control. vehicle attains the desired speed, push turns to the last set cruising speed when
and release the SET– switch. the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods: • Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the
vehicle attains the speed you desire, re-
• Push the CANCEL switch; the CRUISE indi- lease the switch.
cator light or indicator in the instru-
ment panel goes out. • Push and release the RES+ switch. Each
time you do this, the set speed increases
• Tap the brake pedal; the CRUISE indicator by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
light or indicator goes out.
• Push the CRUISE ON/OFF switch. The
CRUISE indicator light or indicator in
the instrument panel goes out.

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)
(if so equipped)
WARNING
structions for proper use of the ICC sys-
tem could result in serious injury or
death.
• The ICC system is only an aid to assist
the driver and is not a collision warn-
ing or avoidance device. It is the driv-
er’s responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely, and be in control of the vehicle
at all times.
• Always observe posted speed limits
and do not set the speed over them.
• Always drive carefully and atten-
tively when using the ICC system.
Read and understand the Owner’s
Manual thoroughly before using the
ICC system. To avoid serious injury or
death, do not rely on the system to
prevent accidents or to control the
vehicle’s speed in emergency situa-
tions. Do not use the ICC system ex-
cept in appropriate road and traffic
conditions.
LSD4124
O
A ICC switch

• In the conventional (fixed speed) Push the ICC switch O A to choose the
cruise control mode, a warning cruise control mode between the vehicle-
chime will not sound to warn you if to-vehicle distance control mode and the
you are too close to the vehicle conventional (fixed speed) cruise control
ahead. Pay special attention to the mode.
distance between your vehicle and Once a control mode is activated, it cannot
the vehicle ahead of you or a collision be changed to the other cruise control
could occur. mode. To change the mode, push the ICC
The ICC system maintains a selected dis- switch OA once to turn the system off. Then
tance from the vehicle in front of you within push the ICC switch O A again to turn the
the speed range of 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144 system back on and select the desired
km/h) up to the set speed. The set speed cruise control mode.
can be selected by the driver between 20 to Always confirm the setting in the ICC sys-
90 mph (32 to 144 km/h). tem display.
The vehicle travels at a set speed when the For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
road ahead is clear. mode, see “Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
The ICC system can be set to one of two control mode” (P. 5-60).
cruise control modes: For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise
• Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control control mode, see “Conventional (fixed
mode: For maintaining a selected dis- speed) cruise control mode” (P. 5-76).
tance between your vehicle and the ve-
hicle in front of you up to the preset speed
• Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-
trol mode: For cruising at a preset speed

LSD4125 LSD2710
HOW TO SELECT THE CRUISE Selecting the conventional (fixed speed) VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE cruise control mode: To choose the con- CONTROL MODE
ventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle dis- O2 , push and hold the ICC switch O A for In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
tance control mode: To choose the longer than approximately 1.5 seconds. For mode, the ICC system automatically main-
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode additional information, see “Conventional tains a selected distance from the vehicle
O1 , quickly push and release the ICC switch
(fixed speed) cruise control mode” (P. 5-76). traveling in front of you according to that
OA . vehicle’s speed (up to the set speed), or at
the set speed when the road ahead is clear.
The ICC system is intended to enhance the
operation of the vehicle when following a
vehicle traveling in the same lane and
direction.

If the radar sensor O A detects a slower
moving vehicle ahead, the system will re-
duce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle
follows the vehicle in front at the selected
distance.
The system automatically controls the
throttle and applies the brakes (up to ap-
proximately 40% of vehicle braking power)
if necessary.
The detection range of the sensor is ap-
proximately 650 ft (200 m) ahead.
LSD4126
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

CONTROL MODE OPERATION mode is designed to maintain a selected
distance from the vehicle in front of you
and can reduce the speed to match a
slower vehicle ahead. The system will de- The following items are controlled in the
celerate the vehicle as necessary and if the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:
vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle • When there are no vehicles traveling
decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
system can only apply up to 40% of the control mode maintains the speed set by
vehicle’s total braking power. the driver. The set speed range is be-
This system should only be used when traf- tween approximately 20 and 90 mph (32
fic conditions allow vehicle speeds to re- and 144 km/h).
main fairly constant or when vehicle • When there is a vehicle traveling ahead,
speeds change gradually. If a vehicle the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a mode adjusts the speed to maintain the
vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, distance, selected by the driver, from the
the distance between vehicles may be- vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes
come closer because the ICC system can- to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a
not decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. standstill within the limitations of the sys- SSD0254
If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a tem. The system will cancel once it judges When driving on the freeway at a set speed
warning chime and blink the system dis- a standstill with a warning chime. and approaching a slower traveling vehicle
play to notify the driver to take necessary • When the vehicle traveling ahead has ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed
action. moved out from its lane of travel, the to maintain the distance, selected by the
The system will cancel and a warning vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle
chime will sound if the speed is below ap- accelerates and maintains vehicle speed ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway,
proximately 15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle up to the set speed. the ICC system will accelerate and main-
is not detected ahead. The system will also tain the speed up to the set speed. Pay
The ICC system does not control vehicle
disengage when the vehicle goes above attention to the driving operation to main-
speed or warn you when you approach
the maximum set speed. tain control of the vehicle as it accelerates
stationary and slow moving vehicles. You
to the set speed.
For additional information, see “Approach must pay attention to vehicle operation to
warning” (P. 5-68). maintain proper distance from vehicles The vehicle may not maintain the set
ahead when approaching toll gates or traf- speed on winding or hilly roads. If this oc-
fic congestion. curs, you will have to manually control the
vehicle speed.

Normally when controlling the distance to 3. DISTANCE switch:
a vehicle ahead, this system automatically Changes the vehicle’s following
accelerates or decelerates your vehicle ac- distance:
cording to the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Depress the accelerator to properly accel- • Long
erate your vehicle when acceleration is re- • Middle
quired for a lane change. Depress the brake • Short
pedal when deceleration is required to
maintain a safe distance to the vehicle 4. ICC Switch:
ahead due to its sudden braking or if a Master switch to activate the system.
vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when us-
5. SET- switch:
ing the ICC system.
Sets desired cruise speed or reduces
speed incrementally.
LSD3515
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE SWITCHES
The system is operated by the ICC switch
and four control switches, all mounted on
the steering wheel.
1. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without erasing
the set speed.
2. RES+ switch:
Resumes set speed or increases speed
incrementally.

• ICC system warning (yellow): Indicates
that there is a malfunction in the ICC
system.
2. Set vehicle speed indicator:
Indicates the set vehicle speed.
For Canadian models, the speed is dis-
played in km/h.
3. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:
Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in
front of you.
4. Set distance indicator:
LSD4127 Displays the selected distance between LSD4128
vehicles set with the distance switch.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance Operating vehicle-to-vehicle
control mode display and distance control mode
indicators To turn on the cruise control, quickly push
The display is located between the speed- and release the ICC switch O
A . The ICC sys-
ometer and tachometer. tem ON indicator (gray), set distance indi-

cator and set vehicle speed indicator O B
1. This indicator indicates the ICC system come on in a standby state for setting.
status depending on a color:
• ICC system ON indicator (gray): Indi-
cates that the ICC is on.
• ICC system SET indicator (green): Indi-
cates that the cruising speed is set.

A warning chime will sound and a message
will pop up:
• When the VDC system is off (To use the
ICC system, turn on the VDC system. Push
the ICC switch to turn off the ICC system
and reset the ICC switch by pushing the
ICC switch again.)
For additional information about the
VDC system, see “Vehicle Dynamic Con-
trol (VDC) system” (P. 5-134).
• When VDC is operating
• When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC
system, make sure the wheels are no lon-
LSD4129 LSD4130 ger slipping.)
To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve- When the SET– switch is pushed under the
hicle to the desired speed, push the SET– following conditions, the system cannot be
switch O C and release it. The ICC system set and the ICC indicators will blink for ap-
set indicator (green), vehicle ahead detec- proximately 2 seconds:
tion indicator, set distance indicator and • When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h)
set vehicle speed indicator OB will come on. and a vehicle ahead is not detected
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. • When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)
Your vehicle will maintain the set speed. or Manual mode
• When the parking brake is applied
• When the brakes are operated by the
driver
When the SET– switch is pushed under the
following conditions, the system cannot be
set.

Vehicle detected ahead When a vehicle is no longer detected, the
When a vehicle is detected in the lane vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.
ahead, the ICC system decelerates the ve- If a vehicle ahead appears during accelera-
hicle by controlling the throttle and apply- tion to the set vehicle speed or any time the
ing the brakes to match the speed of a ICC system is in operation, the system con-
slower vehicle ahead. The system then trols the distance to that vehicle.
controls the vehicle speed based on the When a vehicle is no longer detected under
speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the sys-
driver selected distance. tem will be canceled.
NOTE:
• The stop lights of the vehicle come on
when braking is performed by the ICC
system.
LSD4131 • When the brake operates, a noise may
䊊
1 System set display with vehicle ahead be heard. This is not a malfunction.
䊊
2 System set display without vehicle When a vehicle ahead is detected, the ve-
ahead hicle ahead detection indicator comes on.
The ICC system will also display the set
The driver sets the desired vehicle speed speed and selected distance.
based on the road conditions. The ICC sys-
tem maintains the set vehicle speed, simi- Vehicle ahead not detected
lar to standard cruise control, as long as no When a vehicle is no longer detected
vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. The ahead, the ICC system gradually acceler-
ICC system displays the set speed. ates your vehicle to resume the previously
set vehicle speed. The ICC system then
maintains the set speed.

How to change the set vehicle To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
speed one of the following methods:
• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
hicle attains the desired speed, push the
following methods:
SET– switch and release it.
• Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle
• Push and hold the SET– switch. The set
speed indicator will go out.
vehicle speed will decrease by approxi-
• Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle mately 5 mph (8 km/h for Canada).
speed indicator will go out.
• Push, then quickly release the SET–
• Turn the ICC switch off. The ICC indi- switch. Each time you do this, the set
cators will go out. speed will decrease by approximately
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use 1 mph (1.6 km/h for Canada).
one of the following methods: To resume the preset speed, push and
LSD4132 • Depress the accelerator pedal. When the release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will
vehicle attains the desired speed, push resume the last set cruising speed when
When passing another vehicle, the set and release the SET– switch. the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (32 km/h).
speed indicator will flash when the vehicle
speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle • Push and hold the RES+ switch. The set
detect indicator will turn off when the area vehicle speed will increase by approxi-
ahead of the vehicle is open. When the mately 5 mph (8 km/h for Canada).
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to • Push, then quickly release the RES+
the previously set speed. switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed will increase by approximately
Even though your vehicle speed is set in the 1 mph (1.6 km/h for Canada).
ICC system, you can depress the accelera-
tor pedal when it is necessary to accelerate
your vehicle rapidly.

Approach warning
If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle
ahead due to rapid deceleration of that ve-
hicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the sys-
tem warns the driver with the chime and
ICC system display. Decelerate by depress-
ing the brake pedal to maintain a safe ve-
hicle distance if:
• The chime sounds.
• The vehicle ahead detection indicator
blinks.
The warning chime may not sound in
some cases when there is a short distance
LSD3552 LSD2752 between vehicles. Some examples are:
How to change the set distance Distance Approximate distance at • When the vehicles are traveling at the
to the vehicle ahead 60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)] same speed and the distance between
1. Long 200 (60) vehicles is not changing.
The distance to the vehicle ahead can be 2. Middle 150 (45) • When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster
selected at any time depending on the traf- 3. Short 90 (30) and the distance between vehicles is
fic conditions. • The distance to the vehicle ahead will increasing.
Each time the distance switch OA is change according to the vehicle speed. • When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.
pushed, the set distance will change to The higher the vehicle speed, the longer
long, middle, short and back to long again, the distance. The warning chime will not sound when:
in that sequence. • The distance setting will remain at the • The vehicle approaches other vehicles
current setting even if the engine is that are parked or moving slowly.
restarted. • The accelerator pedal is depressed, over-
riding the system.

NOTE: • When the system judges the vehicle is at • The ICC system will not adapt auto-
a standstill matically to road conditions. This
The approach warning chime may sound
and the system display may blink when • When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) system should be used in evenly
the ICC sensor detects objects on the position, Manual mode, or L (Low) range. flowing traffic. Do not use the system
side of the vehicle or on the side of the • When the parking brake system is applied on roads with sharp curves, or on icy
road. This may cause the ICC system to • When the VDC system is turned off roads, in heavy rain or in fog.
decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The • When VDC operates • As there is a performance limit to the
ICC sensor may detect these objects distance control function, never rely
• When distance measurement becomes
when the vehicle is driven on winding solely on the ICC system. This system
impaired due to adhesion of dirt or ob-
roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or when does not correct careless, inattentive
struction to the sensor
entering or exiting a curve. In these or absentminded driving, or over-
cases you will have to manually control • When a wheel slips come poor visibility in rain, fog, or
the proper distance ahead of your • When the radar signal is temporarily other bad weather. Decelerate the
vehicle. interrupted vehicle speed by depressing the
brake pedal, depending on the dis-
Also, the sensor sensitivity can be af- VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE tance to the vehicle ahead and the
fected by vehicle operation (steering CONTROL MODE LIMITATIONS surrounding circumstances in order
maneuver or driving position in the lane)
to maintain a safe distance between
or traffic or vehicle condition (for ex-
WARNING vehicles.
ample, if a vehicle is being driven with
some damage). • If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop,
the vehicle decelerates to a standstill
for the ICC system. Failure to operate
Automatic cancellation within the limitations of the system.
the vehicle in accordance with these
The system will cancel once it judges
A chime sounds under the following condi- system limitations could result in seri-
that the vehicle has come to a stand-
tions and the control is automatically can- ous injury or death.
still and sound a warning chime. To
celed: • The ICC system is primarily intended prevent the vehicle from moving, the
• When the vehicle ahead is not detected for use on straight, dry, open roads driver must depress the brake pedal.
and your vehicle is traveling below the with light traffic. It is not advisable to
speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) use the ICC system in city traffic or
congested areas.

• Always pay attention to the opera- – When traffic conditions make it The sensor generally detects the signals
tion of the vehicle and be ready to difficult to keep a proper distance returned from the vehicle ahead. Therefore,
manually control the proper follow- between vehicles because of fre- if the sensor cannot detect the reflection
ing distance. The ICC system may not quent acceleration or from the vehicle ahead, the ICC system
be able to maintain the selected dis- deceleration may not maintain the selected distance.
tance between vehicles (following – Interference by other radar The following are some conditions in which
distance) or selected vehicle speed sources the sensor cannot properly detect a ve-
under some circumstances. • Do not use the ICC system if you are hicle ahead and the system may not oper-
• The system may not detect the ve- towing a trailer. The system may not ate properly:
hicle in front of you in certain road or detect a vehicle ahead. • When snow or road spray from traveling
weather conditions. To avoid acci- • In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection.
dents, never use the ICC system un- vehicle or object can unexpectedly • When excessively heavy baggage is
der the following conditions: come into the sensor detection zone loaded in the rear seat or cargo area of
– On roads where the traffic is heavy and cause automatic braking. Al- your vehicle.
or there are sharp curves ways stay alert and avoid using the The ICC system is designed to automati-
– On slippery road surfaces such as ICC system where not recommended cally check the sensor’s operation within
on ice or snow, etc. in this warning section. the limitations of the system.
– During bad weather (rain, fog, The radar sensor will not detect the follow- When the sensor is covered with dirt or is
snow, etc.) ing objects: obstructed, the system will automatically
– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to • Stationary and slow moving vehicles be canceled. If the sensor is covered with
the bumper around the distance ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag,
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
sensor etc., the ICC system may not detect them.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
– On steep downhill roads (the ve- In these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle
hicle may go beyond the set ve- • Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel distance control mode may not cancel and
hicle speed and frequent braking lane may not be able to maintain the selected
may result in overheating the following distance from the vehicle ahead.
brakes) Be sure to check and clean the sensor
– On repeated uphill and downhill regularly.
roads

The detection zone of the radar sensor is
limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the de-
tection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance detection mode to maintain the se-
lected distance from the vehicle ahead.
A vehicle ahead may move outside of the
detection zone due to its position within
the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may
not be detected in the same lane ahead if
they are traveling offset from the centerline
of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the
lane ahead may not be detected until the
vehicle has completely moved into the
lane.
SSD0252
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn
you by blinking the system indicator and
sounding the chime. The driver may
have to manually control the proper dis-
tance away from vehicle traveling ahead.

SSD0253
When driving on some roads, such as wind- If this occurs, the ICC system may warn
ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads you by blinking the system indicator and
which are under construction, the radar sounding the chime unexpectedly. You
sensor may detect vehicles in a different will have to manually control the proper
lane, or may temporarily not detect a ve- distance away from the vehicle traveling
hicle traveling ahead. This may cause the ahead.
radar system to decelerate or accelerate
the vehicle.
The detection of vehicles may also be af-
fected by vehicle operation (steering ma-
neuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.)
or vehicle condition.

maintain the selected following distance
from the vehicle ahead.
Condition A
Under the following conditions, the ICC sys-
tem is automatically canceled. A chime will
sound and the system will not be able to be
set:
• When the VDC system is turned off
• When the VDC operates
• When a vehicle ahead is not detected and
your vehicle is traveling below the speed
of 15 mph (24 km/h)
• When the system judges the vehicle is at
a standstill
• When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive),
Manual mode or L (Low) range.
• When a wheel slips
• When the radar signal is temporarily
interrupted
Action to take
When the conditions listed above are no
longer present, turn the system off using
LSD4133
the ICC switch. Turn the ICC system back on
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY The following are conditions in which the to use the system.
UNAVAILABLE ICC system may be temporarily unavail-
able. In these instances, the ICC system
may not cancel and may not be able to
Condition B The chime will sound and the “Forward Action to take
When there is inclement weather (rain, fog, Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front When the above driving conditions no lon-
snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual” ger exist, turn the system back on.
the ICC system will automatically be can- warning message will appear in the vehicle
information display. Condition E
celed, the chime will sound and the “For-
ward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Action to take When the ICC system is not operating
Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual” properly a chime sounds and the ICC sys-
If the warning message appears, stop the tem warning light (orange) will come on.
warning message will appear in the vehicle vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever
information display. in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine
Action to take off. When the radar signal is temporarily
When the conditions listed above are no interrupted, clean the sensor area of the
longer present, the warning message will front bumper and restart the engine. If the
no longer be available in the vehicle infor- “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled
mation display and the system will operate Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual”
normally. If the “Forward Driving Aids Tem- warning message continues to be dis-
porarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked See played, have the system checked. It is rec-
Owner’s Manual” warning message contin- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
ues to be displayed, have the system for this service.
checked. It is recommended that you visit a Condition D
NISSAN dealer for this service. When driving on roads with limited road
Condition C structures (for example, long bridges, des-
When the radar sensor area of the front erts, snow fields, driving next to long walls),
bumper is covered with dirt or is ob- the system may illuminate the system
structed, the ICC system will automatically warning light and display the “Forward
be canceled. Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front
Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual”
warning message.

NOTE:
If the ICC system is temporarily unavail-
able, the conventional cruise control
mode may still be used. For additional
information, please see “Conventional
(fixed speed) cruise control mode”
(P. 5-76).
LSD3916 LSD2710
Action to take SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
If the warning light comes on, park the ve- The sensor for the ICC system O
A is located
hicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, on the front of the vehicle.
restart the engine, resume driving and set
To keep the ICC system operating properly,
the ICC system again.
be sure to observe the following:
If it is not possible to set the system or • Always keep the sensor area of the front
the indicator stays on, it may indicate bumper/emblem clean.
that the system is malfunctioning. Al-
• Do not strike or damage the areas
though the vehicle is still drivable under
around the sensor.
normal conditions, have the vehicle
checked. It is recommended that you • Do not attach a sticker (including trans-
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. parent material) or install an accessory
near the sensor. This could cause failure
or malfunction.

• Do not attach metallic objects near the For Canada Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Information:
sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could Model: ARS4–B This equipment complies with FCC radia-
cause failure or malfunction. tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon-
• Do not alter, remove, or paint the front IC: 4135A-ARS4B
trolled environment.
bumper. Before customizing or restoring FCC ID: OAYARS4B
the front bumper, it is recommended that This equipment should be installed and
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC operated with minimum distance of 30 cm
you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Rules and with Industry Canada licence- between the radiator and your body.
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
Radio frequency statement ject to the following two conditions: The transmitter must not be co-located or
For USA operating in conjunction with any other an-
1. This device may not cause harmful inter- tenna or transmitter.
FCC ID OAYARS4B ference, and
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC 2. This device must accept any interfer- d'exposition aux rayonnements IC établies
Rules. Operation is subject to the following ence received, including interference pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet
two conditions: that may cause undesired operation. équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec
1. This device may not cause harmful inter- Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la
ference, and d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appar- source de rayonnement et votre corps.
2. This device must accept any interfer- eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation FCC Notice
ence received, including interference est autorisée aux deux conditions suiv-
that may cause undesired operation. antes:
approved by the party responsible for
FCC Warning 1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil- compliance could void the user’s authority
lage, et to operate the equipment.
approved by the party responsible for 2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed)
compliance could void the user’s authority tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible
CRUISE CONTROL MODE
to operate the equipment.
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. This mode allows driving at a speed be-
tween 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) with-
out keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.

WARNING
• In the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, a warning
chime does not sound to warn you if
you are too close to the vehicle
ahead, as neither the presence of the
vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-
vehicle distance is detected.
• Pay special attention to the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead of you or a collision could
occur.
• Always confirm the setting in the ICC
system display. LSD3555 LSD3106
• Do not use the conventional (fixed Conventional (fixed speed) cruise Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
speed) cruise control mode when control mode display and
driving under the following condi- control switches
indicators
tions: 1. CANCEL switch:
– When it is not possible to keep the Deactivates the system without erasing The display is located in the vehicle infor-
vehicle at a set speed the set speed mation display.
– In heavy traffic or in traffic that 2. RES+ switch: 1. Cruise indicator:
varies in speed Resumes set speed or increases speed This indicator indicates the condition of
– On winding or hilly roads incrementally the ICC system depending on a color.
– On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, • Cruise control ON indicator (gray): Indi-
3. ICC switch: cates that the ICC switch is on
etc.) Master switch to activate the system
– In very windy areas • Cruise control SET indicator (green): Indi-
4. SET- switch: cates that the cruising speed is set
• Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle Sets desired cruise speed or reduces
control and result in an accident. speed incrementally
• Cruise control warning (yellow): Indicates the ICC switch again will turn the system
that there is a malfunction in the ICC completely off. When the ignition switch is
system placed in the OFF position, the system is
also automatically turned off.
2. Set vehicle speed indicator:
This indicator indicates the set vehicle To use the ICC system again, quickly push
speed. For Canadian models, the speed and release the ICC switch (vehicle-to ve-
is displayed in km/h. hicle distance control mode) or push and
hold it (conventional cruise control mode)
again to turn it on.
CAUTION
To avoid accidentally engaging cruise
control, make sure to turn the ICC
LSD3556 switch off when not using the ICC
system.
Operating conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode
To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, push and hold the ICC
switch O A for longer than about 1.5
seconds.
When pushing ICC switch on, the conven-
tional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
display and indicators O B are displayed in
the vehicle information display. After you
hold ICC switch on for longer than about 1.5
seconds, the ICC system display turns off.
The cruise indicator appears. You can now
set your desired cruising speed. Pushing

To cancel the preset speed, use any of the To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
following methods: of the following three methods:
1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle 1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
speed indicator will turn off. vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the SET- switch and release it.
2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed
indicator will turn off. 2. Push and hold the SET- switch. Release
the switch when the vehicle slows down
3. Turn the ICC switch off. Both the cruise
to the desired speed.
indicator and vehicle speed indicator will
turn off. 3. Push, then quickly release the SET-
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one switch. Each time you do this, the set
of the following three methods: speed will decrease by about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
LSD3557 vehicle attains the desired speed, push To resume the preset speed, push and
and release the SET- switch. release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will
To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve- resume the last set cruising speed when
hicle to the desired speed, push the SET- OC
2. Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).
switch and release it. (The color of the the vehicle attains the desired speed,
cruise indicator changes to green and set release the switch.
vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take
your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your 3. Push, then quickly release the RES+
vehicle will maintain the set speed. switch. Each time you do this, the set
• To pass another vehicle, depress the ac- speed will increase by about 1 mph
celerator pedal. When you release the (1.6 km/h).
pedal, the vehicle will return to the previ-
ously set speed.
• The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed when going up or down steep hills.
If this happens, manually maintain ve-
hicle speed.

• When the vehicle slows down more than
8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed
• When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)
or manual shift mode
• When the VDC operates (including the
traction control system)
• When a wheel slips
When the system is not operating properly,
the chime sounds and the color of the
cruise indicator will change to orange.
Action to take
If the color of the cruise indicator changes
to orange, stop the vehicle in a safe place
and place the shift lever in the P (Park) po-
sition. Turn the engine off, restart the en-
gine, resume driving, and then perform the
setting again.
If it is not possible to set or the indicator
stays on, it may indicate that the system
is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle
is still drivable under normal conditions,
have the vehicle checked. It is recom-
LSD3558 mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
System temporarily unavailable A chime sounds under the following condi-
tions and the control is automatically can-
celed:

REAR AUTOMATIC BRAKING (RAB) (if
so equipped)
• The RAB system is a supplemental NOTE:

aid to the driver. It is not a replace- You can temporarily cancel the sonar
ment for proper driving procedures. function in the vehicle, but the RAB sys-
Always use the side and rear mirrors tem will continue to operate. For addi-
and turn and look in the direction you tional information, see “Rear Sonar Sys-
will move before and while backing tem (RSS)” (P. 5-140).
up. Never rely solely on the RAB sys-
tem. It is the driver’s responsibility to
stay alert, drive safely, and be in con-
trol of the vehicle at all times.
• There is a limitation to the RAB sys-
tem capability. The RAB system is not
effective in all situations.
• Inclement weather or ultrasonic
LSD3633
sources such as an automatic car
WARNING wash, a truck’s compressed air
brakes or a pneumatic drill may af-
Failure to follow the warnings and in- fect the function of the system; this
structions for proper use of the RAB may include reduced performance or
system could result in serious injury or a false activation.
death.
The RAB system can assist the driver when
the vehicle is backing up and approaching
objects directly behind the vehicle.
The RAB system detects obstacles behind
the vehicle using the parking sensors O
1
located on the rear bumper.

䊊
3 Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left
side)
䊊
4 Drive Systems OFF Switch (if so equipped)
When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
position and the vehicle speed is less than
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), the RAB
system operates.
If a risk of a collision with an obstacle is
detected when your vehicle is backing up,
the RAB system warning indicator will flash
in the vehicle information display (if so
equipped) and the system will chime three
times. The system will then automatically
apply the brakes. After the automatic brake
application, the driver must depress the
brake pedal to maintain brake pressure.
NOTE:
• The brake lights of the vehicle come on
when braking is performed by the RAB
system.
• When the brakes operate, a noise may
be heard. This is not a malfunction.
LSD3992
RAB SYSTEM OPERATION 䊊2 Center display
䊊1 RAB system warning light and RAB sys-

tem warning indicator
LSD4134
Trip computer

Perform the following steps to turn the RAB
system on or off.
2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the
OK button.
3. Select “Rear” and press the OK button to
turn the system on or off.
LSD3994
TURNING THE RAB SYSTEM

ON/OFF

For vehicles with the Drive Systems OFF
switch (if so equipped):
1. The RAB system is automatically
enabled.
2. Push the Drive Systems OFF switch once
to disable the RAB system.
When the RAB system is turned off, the RAB
system warning light illuminates.
NOTE:
The RAB system will be automatically
turned on when the engine is restarted.
RAB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
for the RAB system. Failure to follow the
warnings and instructions for proper
use of the RAB system could result in
serious injury or death.
LSD4135

• When the vehicle approaches an ob- – Thin objects such as rope, wire, – There are bumps, protrusions, or
stacle while the accelerator or brake chain, etc. manhole covers on the road
pedal is depressed, the function may • The RAB system may not operate for surface.
not operate or the start of operation the following obstacles: – The vehicle drives through a
may be delayed. The RAB system may – Obstacles located high off the draped flag or a curtain.
not operate or may not perform suffi- ground – There is an accumulation of snow
ciently due to vehicle conditions, driv- or ice behind the vehicle.
ing conditions, the traffic environment, – Obstacles in a position offset from
the weather, road surface conditions, your vehicle – An ultrasonic wave source, such as
etc. Do not wait for the system to oper- – Obstacles, such as spongy materi- another vehicle’s sonar, is near
ate. Operate the brake pedal by your- als or snow, that have soft outer the vehicle.
self as soon as necessary. surfaces and can easily absorb a • Once the automatic brake control
• If it is necessary to override RAB op- sound wave operates, it does not operate again if
eration, strongly press the accelera- • The RAB system may not operate in the vehicle approaches the same
tor pedal. the following conditions: obstacle.
• Always check your surroundings and – There is rain, snow, ice, dirt, etc., • The automatic brake control can only
turn to check what is behind you be- attached to the sonar sensors. operate for a short period of time.
fore and while backing up. The RAB – A loud sound is heard in the area Therefore, the driver must depress
system detects stationary objects around the vehicle. the brake pedal.
behind the vehicle. The RAB system – The surface of the obstacle is di- • In the following situations, the RAB
does not detect the following ob- agonal to the rear of the vehicle. system may not operate properly or
jects: may not function sufficiently:
• The RAB system may unintentionally
– Moving objects operate in the following conditions: – The vehicle is driven in bad
– Low objects weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
– There is overgrown grass in the
– Narrow objects area around the vehicle. – The vehicle is driven on a steep
hill.
– Wedge-shaped objects – There is a structure (e.g., a wall, toll
gate equipment, a narrow tunnel, – The vehicle’s posture is changed
– Objects close to the bumper (less (e.g., when driving over a bump).
than approximately 1 ft [30 cm]) a parking lot gate) near the side of
the vehicle. – The vehicle is driven on a slippery
– Objects that suddenly appear road.
– The vehicle is turned sharply by – Suspension parts other than
turning the steering wheel fully. those designated as Genuine
– Snow chains are used. NISSAN parts are used. (If the ve-
– Wheels or tires other than NISSAN hicle height or the vehicle body in-
recommended are used. clination is changed, the system
may not detect an obstacle
– The brakes are cold at low ambi- correctly.)
ent temperatures or immediately
after driving has started. • Excessive noise (e.g., audio system
volume, an open vehicle window) will
– The braking force becomes poor interfere with the chime sound, and it
due to wet brakes after driving may not be heard.
through a puddle or washing the
vehicle. SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
• Turn the RAB system off in the follow- If the RAB system malfunctions, it will be
ing conditions to prevent the occur- LSD3633
turned off automatically, and the RAB sys-
rence of an unexpected accident re- tem warning light will illuminate in the ve- SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
sulting from sudden system hicle information display.
operation: Observe the following items to ensure
Action to take proper operation of the system:
– The vehicle is towed.
If the warning light illuminates, park the ve- • Always keep the parking sensors O 1
– The vehicle is carried on a flatbed
hicle in a safe location, turn the engine off, clean.
truck.
and restart the engine. If the warning light • If the parking sensors are dirty, wipe them
– The vehicle is on the chassis continues to illuminate, have the RAB sys- off with a soft cloth while being careful to
dynamometer. tem checked. It is recommended that you not damage them.
– The vehicle drives on an uneven visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
road surface.
– The vehicle is towing an object (if NOTE:
so equipped). If the RAB system cannot be operated
temporarily, the RAB system warning
light blinks.

AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING
(AEB) (if so equipped)
• Do not subject the area around the park- WARNING

ing sensors O 1 to strong impact. Also, do
not remove or disassemble the parking Failure to follow the warnings and in-
sensors. If the parking sensors and pe- structions for proper use of the AEB
ripheral areas are deformed in an acci- system could result in serious injury or
dent, etc., have the sensors checked. It is death.
recommended that you visit a NISSAN • The AEB system is a supplemental
dealer for this service. aid to the driver. It is not a replace-
• Do not install any stickers (including ment for the driver’s attention to
transparent stickers) or accessories on traffic conditions or responsibility to
the parking sensors O 1 and their sur- drive safely. It cannot prevent acci-
rounding areas. This may cause a mal- dents due to carelessness or danger-
function or improper operation. ous driving techniques.
• The AEB system does not function in
LSD2710
all driving, traffic, weather and road
conditions. The AEB system uses a radar sensor O A
located on the front of the vehicle to mea-
The AEB system can assist the driver when
sure the distance to the vehicle ahead in
there is a risk of a forward collision with the
the same lane.
vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.

3. AEB system warning light
The AEB system will function when your
vehicle is driven at speeds above approxi-
mately 3 mph (5 km/h).
If a risk of a forward collision is detected,
the AEB system will provide an initial warn-
ing to the driver by both a visual (if so
equipped) and audible alert.
If the driver applies the brakes quickly and
forcefully after the warning, and the AEB
system detects that there is still the possi-
bility of a forward collision, the system will
automatically increase the braking force. If
the driver does not take action, the AEB
system issues the second visual warning
(red) (if so equipped) and audible warning
and also applies partial braking.
If the risk of a collision becomes imminent,
the AEB system applies harder braking
automatically.
NOTE:
The vehicle's brake lights come on when
braking is performed by the AEB system.
LSD3996
Depending on vehicle speed and distance
Vehicle information display to the vehicle ahead, as well as driving and
AEB SYSTEM OPERATION 2. AEB emergency warning indicator (if so roadway conditions, the system may help
1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator (if so equipped) the driver avoid a forward collision or may
equipped)
The automatic braking will cease under the
following conditions:
• When the steering wheel is turned as far
as necessary to avoid a collision.
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
• When there is no longer a vehicle de-
tected ahead.
If the AEB system has stopped the vehicle,
the vehicle will remain at a standstill for
approximately 2 seconds before the
brakes are released.
LSD3997
Trip computer
help mitigate the consequences of a colli- erating or braking, the AEB system will
sion, should one be unavoidable. If the function later or will not function.
driver is handling the steering wheel, accel-
Perform the following steps to turn the AEB
system on or off.
OK button.
3. Select “Front” and press the OK button.
LSD3994
TURNING THE AEB SYSTEM

ON/OFF

1. The AEB system is automatically
enabled.
to disable the AEB system.
When the AEB system is turned off, the AEB
system warning light illuminates.
NOTE:
The AEB system will be automatically
turned on when the engine is restarted.
LSD4046

AEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS – Snow or road spray from traveling
WARNING vehicles.
– If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g.,
Listed below are the system limitations motorcycle).
for the AEB system. Failure to operate
– When driving on a steep downhill
slope or roads with sharp curves.
system limitations could result in seri-
ous injury or death. • In some road or traffic conditions, the
AEB system may unexpectedly apply
• The AEB system cannot detect all ve-
partial braking. When acceleration is
hicles under all conditions.
necessary, continue to depress the
• The radar sensor does not detect the accelerator pedal to override the
following objects: system.
– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles • Braking distances increase on slip-
in the roadway. pery surfaces.
– Oncoming vehicles. • The system is designed to automati-
– Crossing vehicles. cally check the sensor’s functionality,
• The radar sensor has some perfor- within certain limitations. The sys-
mance limitations. If a stationary ve- tem may not detect some forms of
hicle is in the vehicle’s path, the AEB obstructions of the sensor area such
system will not function when the as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these
vehicle is driven at speeds over ap- cases, the system may not be able to
proximately 50 mph (80 km/h). warn the driver properly. Be sure that
• The radar sensor may not detect a you check, clean and clear the sensor
vehicle ahead in the following area regularly.
conditions: • Excessive noise will interfere with the
– Dirt, ice, snow or other material warning chime sound, and the chime
covering the radar sensor. may not be heard.
– Interference by other radar
sources.
Condition A
When the radar sensor picks up interfer-
ence from another radar source, making it
impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the
AEB system is automatically turned off.
The AEB system warning light (orange) will
illuminate.
Action to take
the AEB system will resume automatically.
Condition B
When there is inclement weather (rain, fog,
snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor,
the AEB system will automatically be can-
celed, the chime will sound and the “For-
ward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled
Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual”
warning message will appear in the vehicle
LSD3998
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE

Action to take
When the above conditions are no longer
present, the warning message will no lon-
ger be available in the vehicle information
display. If the “Forward Driving Aids Tempo-
rarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked See
Owner’s Manual” warning message contin-
ues to be displayed, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
Condition C
When the radar sensor of the front bumper
is covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc., or is
obstructed, the AEB system will automati-
cally be canceled. The chime will sound and
the “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Dis-
abled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s
Manual” warning message will appear in
the vehicle information display.
LSD3999
Trip computer

Action to take Action to take
If the warning message appears, stop the If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever the vehicle in a safe location, turn the en-
in the P (Park) position and turn the engine gine off and restart the engine. If the warn-
off. When the radar signal is temporarily ing light continues to illuminate, have the
interrupted, clean the sensor area of the AEB system checked. It is recommended
front bumper and restart the engine. If the that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
“Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled service.
warning message continues to be dis-
played have the system checked. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
Condition D LSD3916
When driving on roads with limited road
structures or buildings (for example, long
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
bridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next to If the AEB system malfunctions, it will be
long walls), the system may illuminate the turned off automatically, a chime will
system warning light and display the “For- sound, the AEB warning light (orange) will
ward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled illuminate and the warning message [Mal-
Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual” function] will appear in the vehicle informa-
warning message. tion display (if so equipped).
Action to take
When the above driving conditions no lon-
ger exist, turn the system back on.
NOTE:
If the AEB system stops working, the
I-FCW system will also stop working.
• Do not attach metallic objects near the This equipment has been tested and found
sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could to comply with the limits for a Class A digi-
cause failure or malfunction. tal device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
• Do not alter, remove or paint the front Rules. These limits are designed to provide
bumper. Before customizing or restoring reasonable protection against harmful in-
the front bumper, it is recommended that terference when the equipment is oper-
you visit a NISSAN dealer. ated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radi-
Radio frequency statement ate radio frequency energy and, if not in-
stalled and used in accordance with the
FCC Notice instruction manual, may cause harmful in-
For USA terference to radio communications. Op-
eration of this equipment in a residential
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
area is likely to cause harmful interference
Rules.
LSD2710 in which case the user will be required to
Operation is subject to the following two correct the interference at his own
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE conditions: expense.
The sensor O
A is located on the front of the
1. This device may not cause harmful inter- Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure
vehicle. ference, and Information:
To keep the system operating properly, be 2. This device must accept any interfer- This equipment complies with FCC radia-
sure to observe the following: ence received, including interference tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon-
• Always keep the sensor area of the front that may cause undesired operation. trolled environment. This equipment
bumper/emblem clean. should be installed and operated with
FCC Warning
• Do not strike or damage the areas minimum distance of 20 cm between the
around the sensor. Changes or modifications not expressly radiator and your body.
• Do not cover or attach stickers or similar approved by the party responsible for
The transmitter must not be co-located or
objects on the front bumper near the compliance could void the user’s authority
operating in conjunction with any other an-
sensor area. This could cause failure or to operate the equipment.
tenna or transmitter.
malfunction.

AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING
(AEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION
(if so equipped)
For Canada • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection
This device complies with Industry Canada system does not function in all driv-
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation ing, traffic, weather and road
is subject to the following two conditions: conditions.
1. This device must not cause interference, The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
can assist the driver when there is a risk of
2. This device must accept any interfer-
a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in
ence, including interference that may
the traveling lane or with a pedestrian
cause undesired operation of the
ahead in the traveling lane.
device.
The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux condi-
uses a radar sensor located on the front of
tions suivantes:
the vehicle OB to measure the distance to
1. l’appareil ne doit pas produire de the vehicle ahead in the same lane. For
brouillage, LSD3634 pedestrians, the AEB with Pedestrian De-
et tection system uses a camera installed be-
WARNING hind the windshield O A in addition to the
2. l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter radar sensor.
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, Failure to follow the warnings and in-
même si le brouillage est susceptible structions for proper use of the AEB
d’en compromettre le with Pedestrian Detection system
fonctionnnement. could result in serious injury or death.
• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system is a supplemental aid to the
driver. It is not a replacement for the
driver’s attention to traffic condi-
tions or responsibility to drive safely.
It cannot prevent accidents due to
carelessness or dangerous driving
techniques.

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator (if so
equipped)
2. AEB with Pedestrian Detection emer-
gency warning indicator (if so equipped)
3. AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
warning light
The AEB system operates at speeds above
approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). For the pe-
destrian detection function, the system
operates at speeds between 6 – 37 mph
(10 – 60 km/h).
If a risk of a forward collision is detected,
the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
will firstly provide the warning to the driver
by flashing the vehicle ahead detection in-
dicator (yellow) in the vehicle information
display (if so equipped) and providing an
audible alert. If the driver applies the brakes
quickly and forcefully after the warning,
and the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-
tem detects that there is still the possibility
of a forward collision, the system will auto-
matically increase the braking force.
LSD3996
AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN
DETECTION SYSTEM OPERATION

If the driver does not take action, the AEB
with Pedestrian Detection system issues
the second visual (flashing) (red and white)
in the vehicle information display (if so
equipped) and an audible warning. If the
driver releases the accelerator pedal, then
the system applies partial braking. If the
risk of a collision becomes imminent, the
AEB with Pedestrian Detection system ap-
plies harder braking automatically.
While the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system is operating, you may hear the
sound of brake operation. This is normal
and indicates that the AEB with Pedestrian
Detection system is operating properly.
NOTE:
The vehicle’s brake lights come on when
any braking is performed by the AEB
with Pedestrian Detection system.
Depending on vehicle speed and distance
to the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well
as driving and roadway conditions, the sys-
tem may help the driver avoid a forward
collision or may help mitigate the conse-
LSD3997 quences if a collision should be unavoid-
Trip computer able. If the driver is handling the steering
wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system will function
later or will not function.

The automatic braking will cease under the
following conditions:
• When the steering wheel is turned to
avoid a collision.
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
• When there is no longer a vehicle or a
pedestrian detected ahead.
If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-
tem has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle
will remain at a standstill for approximately
2 seconds before the brakes are released.
LSD3994
TURNING THE AEB WITH

PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM
ON/OFF
disable the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system.
OK button.
3. Select “Front” and press the OK button to
1. The AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-
tem is automatically enabled.
to disable the AEB with Pedestrian De-
tection system.
When the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system is turned off, the AEB with Pedes-
LSD4046 trian Detection system warning light
illuminates.

NOTE: • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection – For pedestrian detection, the AEB
• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system does not detect the following with Pedestrian Detection system
system will be automatically turned on objects: will not function when the vehicle
when the engine is restarted. – Small pedestrians (including is driven at speeds over approxi-
• The I-FCW system is integrated into the small children), animals and mately 37 mph (60 km/h) or below
AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. cyclists. approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
There is not a separate selection in the – Pedestrians in wheelchairs or us- • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection
vehicle information display for the ing mobile transport such as system will not function for pedestri-
I-FCW system. When the AEB system is scooters, child-operated toys, or ans in darkness or in tunnels, even if
turned off, the I-FCW system is also skateboards. there is street lighting in the area.
turned off. • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection
– Pedestrians who are seated or
otherwise not in a full upright system may not function if the ve-
AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN hicle ahead is narrow (for example, a
standing or walking position.
DETECTION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS motorcycle).
– Oncoming vehicles
– Crossing vehicles • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection
WARNING
system may not function if the speed
– Obstacles on the roadside difference between the two vehicles
for the AEB with Pedestrian Detection • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection is too small.
system. Failure to operate the vehicle in system has some performance • The radar sensor AEB with Pedes-
accordance with these system limita- limitations. trian Detection system may not
tions could result in serious injury or – If a stationary vehicle is in the ve- function properly or detect a vehicle
death. hicle’s path, the AEB with Pedes- ahead in the following conditions:
• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection trian Detection system will not – Poor visibility (conditions such as
system cannot detect all vehicles or function when the vehicle is rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sand-
pedestrians under all conditions. driven at speeds over approxi- storms, and road spray from other
mately 50 mph (80 km/h). vehicles)
– Driving on a steep downhill slope
or roads with sharp curves.

– Driving on a bumpy road surface, • The system performance may de-
such as an uneven dirt road. grade in the following conditions:
– If dirt, ice, snow or other material – The vehicle is driven on a slippery
is covering the radar sensor area. road.
– Interference by other radar – The vehicle is driven on a slope.
sources. – Excessively heavy baggage is
– The camera area of the windshield loaded in the rear seat or the trunk
is fogged up, or covered with dirt, room of your vehicle.
water drops, ice, snow, etc. • The system is designed to automati-
– Strong light (for example, sunlight cally check the sensor’s (radar and
or high beams from oncoming ve- camera) functionality, within certain
hicles) enters the front camera. limitations. The system may not de-
Strong light causes the area tect blockage of sensor areas cov-
around the pedestrian to be cast ered by ice, snow or stickers, for ex-
in a shadow, making it difficult to ample. In these cases, the system
see. may not be able to warn the driver
– A sudden change in brightness properly. Be sure that you check,
occurs. (For example, when the clean and clear sensor areas
vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or a regularly.
shaded area or lightning flashes.) • In some road and traffic conditions,
– The poor contrast of a person to the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
the background, such as having system may unexpectedly apply par-
clothing color or pattern which is tial braking. When acceleration is
similar to the background. necessary, depress the accelerator
– The pedestrian’s profile is partially pedal to override the system.
obscured or unidentifiable due to • Excessive noise will interfere with the
the pedestrian transporting lug- warning chime sound, and the chime
gage, wearing bulky or very loose- may not be heard.
fitting clothing or accessories.

Condition A:
In the following conditions, the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system warning light
blinks and the system will be turned off
automatically:
• The radar sensor picks up interference
from another radar source.
• The camera area of the windshield is
misted or frozen.
• Strong light is shining from the front.
• The cabin temperature is over approxi-
mately 104°F (40°C) in direct sunlight.
• The camera area of the windshield glass
is continuously covered with dirt, etc.
Action to take
will resume automatically.
NOTE:
When the inside of the windshield on the
camera area is misted or frozen, it will
take a period of time to remove it after
LSD3998 the A/C turns on. If dirt appears on this
area, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE

Condition B:
will be canceled, the chime will sound and
the “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Dis-
abled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s
Manual” warning message will appear in
the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
longer present, the warning message will
no longer be available in the vehicle infor-
mation display. If the “Forward Driving Aids
Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked
See Owner’s Manual” warning message
continues to be displayed, have the system
LSD3999
Trip computer

Condition C: Condition D
When the radar sensor of the front bumper When driving on roads with limited road
is covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc., or is structures or buildings (for example, long
obstructed, the AEB with Pedestrian Detec- bridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next to
tion system will automatically be canceled. long walls), the system may illuminate the
The chime will sound and the “Forward system warning light and display the “For-
Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front ward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled
Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual” Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual”
warning message will appear in the vehicle message.
information display. Action to take:
Action to take: When the above driving conditions no lon-
If the warning message appears, stop the ger exist, turn the system back on.
vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever
in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine NOTE: LSD3916
off. When the radar signal is temporarily If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
interrupted, clean the sensor area of the system stops working, the I-FCW sys- SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
front bumper and restart the engine. If the tem will also stop working. If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-
“Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled tem malfunctions, it will be turned off auto-
Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual” matically, a chime will sound, and the AEB
warning message continues to be dis- with Pedestrian Detection system warning
played, have the system checked. It is rec- light (orange) will illuminate in the vehicle
ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer information display (if so equipped).
for this service. Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
the vehicle in a safe location, turn the en-
gine off and restart the engine. If the warn-
ing light continues to illuminate, have the
AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
• Do not cover or attach stickers, or install FCC Warning
any accessory near the sensors. This Changes or modifications not expressly
could block sensor signals and/or cause approved by the party responsible for
failure or malfunction. compliance could void the user’s authority
• Do not attach metallic objects near the to operate the equipment.
radar sensor (brush guard, etc.). This
could cause failure or malfunction. For Canada
• Do not place reflective materials, such as Model: ARS4–B
white paper or a mirror, on the instru- IC: 4135A-ARS4B
ment panel. The reflection of sunlight
may adversely affect the camera unit's FCC ID: OAYARS4B
detection capability. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
• Do not alter, remove or paint the front Rules and with Industry Canada licence-
bumper. Before customizing or restoring exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
LSD3634 ject to the following two conditions:
the front bumper, it is recommended that
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE you visit a NISSAN dealer. 1. This device may not cause interference,
The radar sensor is located on the front of and
the vehicle OB . The camera is located on
Radio frequency statement
2. This device must accept any interfer-
the upper side of the windshield O
A . For USA ence received, including interference
To keep the AEB with Pedestrian Detection FCC ID OAYARS4B that may cause undesired operation of
system operating properly, be sure to ob- the device.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
serve the following: Rules. Operation is subject to the following Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
• Always keep the sensor areas of the front two conditions: d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appar-
bumper/emblem and windshield clean. eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation
• Do not strike or damage the areas est autorisée aux deux conditions
ference, and
around the sensors (e.g., bumper, suivantes:
windshield). 2. This device must accept any interfer- 1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
ence received, including interference lage, et

INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION
WARNING (I-FCW)
2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter The I-FCW system can help alert the driver
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, when there is a sudden braking of a second
même si le brouillage est susceptible vehicle traveling in front of the vehicle
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. ahead in the same lane.
Radio frequency radiation exposure The I-FCW system uses a radar sensor O A
information: located on the front of the vehicle to mea-
This equipment complies with FCC and IC sure the distance to the vehicle ahead in
radiation exposure limits set forth for an the same lane.
uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and
operated with minimum distance of 30 cm
between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or
LSD2710
tenna or transmitter. WARNING
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
d'exposition aux rayonnements IC établies Failure to follow the warnings and in-
pour un environnement non contrôlé. structions for proper use of the I-FCW
system could result in serious injury or
Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé death.
avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance
• The I-FCW system can help warn the
entre la source de rayonnement et votre
driver before a collision occurs but
corps.
will not avoid a collision. It is the driv-
FCC Notice er’s responsibility to stay alert, drive
Changes or modifications not expressly safely and be in control of the vehicle
approved by the party responsible for at all times.
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.

LSD4000

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator (if so
equipped)
2. AEB system warning light
LSD4136
Trip computer

LSD2263
I-FCW SYSTEM OPERATION

The I-FCW system operates at speeds
above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).
If there is a potential risk of a forward colli-
sion, the I-FCW system will warn the driver
by blinking the vehicle ahead detection in-
dicator in the vehicle information display (if
so equipped), and sounding an audible
alert.

Perform the following steps to turn the
I-FCW system ON or OFF.
For vehicles equipped with the vehicle
information display (if so equipped):
OK button.
3. Select “Front” and press the OK button to
LSD3994
TURNING THE I-FCW SYSTEM

ON/OFF

For vehicles equipped with the Drive Sys-
tems OFF switch (if so equipped):
1. The I-FCW system is automatically
enabled.
to disable the I-FCW system.
When the I-FCW system is turned off, the
AEB system warning light illuminates.
NOTE:
• The I-FCW system will be automatically
turned on when the engine is
restarted.
• The I-FCW system is integrated into the
AEB system (if so equipped). There is
not a separate selection in the vehicle
information display for the I-FCW sys-
tem. When the AEB system is turned
off, the I-FCW system is also turned off.
LSD4046

LSD2312
Illustration A
I-FCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

LSD2265
Illustration B
WARNING • The radar sensor does not detect the • The radar sensor may not detect a
following objects: vehicle ahead in the following
Listed below are the system limitations – Pedestrians, animals or obstacles conditions:
for the I-FCW system. Failure to operate in the roadway – Snow or heavy rain
system limitations could result in seri- – Oncoming vehicles – Dirt, ice, snow or other material
ous injury or death. – Crossing vehicles covering the radar sensor.
• The I-FCW system cannot detect all • (Illustration A) The I-FCW system – Interference by other radar
vehicles under all conditions. does not function when a vehicle sources.
ahead is a narrow vehicle, such as a – Snow or road spray from traveling
motorcycle. vehicles.
– Driving in a tunnel

– (Illustration B) When the vehicle
ahead is being towed.
– (Illustration C) When the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too close,
the beam of the radar sensor is
obstructed.
– (Illustration D) When driving on a
steep downhill slope or roads with
sharp curves.
• The system is designed to automati-
cally check the sensor’s functionality,
within certain limitations. The sys-
tem may not detect some forms of
obstruction of the sensor area such
as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these
cases, the system may not be able to
warn the driver properly. Be sure that
you check, clean and clear the sensor
area regularly.
• Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the chime
may not be heard.

LSD2266
Illustration C

LSD2313
Illustration D

Condition A
When the radar sensor picks up interfer-
ence from another radar source, making it
impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the
I-FCW system is automatically turned off.
The AEB system warning light (orange) will
illuminate.
Action to take
the I-FCW system will resume automatically.
Condition B
the I-FCW system will automatically be
canceled, the chime will sound and the
“Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled
warning message will appear in the vehicle
LSD3998
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE

Action to take:
longer present, the warning message will
no longer be available in the vehicle infor-
mation display. If the “Forward Driving Aids
Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked
See Owner’s Manual” warning message
continues to be displayed, have the system
Condition C
When the radar sensor of the front bumper
is covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc., or is
obstructed, the I-FCW system will auto-
matically be cancelled. The chime will
sound and the “Forward Driving Aids Tem-
porarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked See
Owner’s Manual” warning message will ap-
pear in the vehicle information display.
LSD3999
Trip computer

Action to take: Action to take
If the warning message appears, stop the If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever the vehicle in a safe location, turn the en-
in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine gine off and restart the engine. If the warn-
off. When the radar signal is temporarily ing light continues to illuminate, have the
interrupted, clean the sensor area of the I-FCW system checked. It is recommended
front bumper and restart the engine. If the that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
“Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled service.
warning message continues to be dis-
played, have the system checked. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
Condition D LSD3916
When driving on roads with limited road
structures or buildings (for example, long
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to If the I-FCW system malfunctions, it will be
long walls), the system may illuminate the turned off automatically, a chime will
system warning light (orange) and display sound, the AEB system warning light (or-
the “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Dis- ange) will illuminate and the warning mes-
abled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s sage [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle
Manual” warning message. information display (if so equipped).
Action to take
When the above driving conditions no lon-
ger exist, turn the system back on.
NOTE:
If the AEB system stops working, the
I-FCW system will also stop working.
• Do not attach metallic objects near the This equipment has been tested and found
sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could to comply with the limits for a Class A digi-
cause failure or malfunction. tal device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
• Do not alter, remove or paint the front Rules. These limits are designed to provide
bumper. Before customizing or restoring reasonable protection against harmful in-
the front bumper, it is recommended that terference when the equipment is oper-
you visit a NISSAN dealer. ated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radi-
Radio frequency statement ate radio frequency energy and, if not in-
stalled and used in accordance with the
FCC Notice instruction manual, may cause harmful in-
For USA terference to radio communications. Op-
eration of this equipment in a residential
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
area is likely to cause harmful interference
Rules.
LSD2710 in which case the user will be required to
Operation is subject to the following two correct the interference at his own
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE conditions: expense.
The sensor O A is located behind the lower
1. This device may not cause harmful inter- Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure
grille of the front bumper. ference, and Information:
To keep the system operating properly, be 2. This device must accept any interfer- This equipment complies with FCC radia-
sure to observe the following: ence received, including interference tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon-
• Always keep the sensor area of the front that may cause undesired operation. trolled environment. This equipment
bumper/emblem clean. should be installed and operated with
FCC Warning
• Do not strike or damage the areas minimum distance of 20 cm between the
around the sensor. Changes or modifications not expressly radiator and your body.
• Do not cover or attach stickers or similar approved by the party responsible for
The transmitter must not be co-located or
objects on the front bumper near the compliance could void the user’s authority
sensor area. This could cause failure or to operate the equipment.
tenna or transmitter.
malfunction.

INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS
(I-DA) (if so equipped)
For Canada WARNING The I–DA system helps alert the driver if the
This device complies with Industry Canada system detects a lack of attention or driv-
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation Failure to follow the warnings and in- ing fatigue.
is subject to the following two conditions: structions for proper use of the I-DA The system monitors driving style and
system could result in serious injury or steering behavior over a period of time,
1. This device must not cause interference, death. and it detects changes from the normal
2. This device must accept any interfer- • The I–DA system is only a warning to pattern. If the system detects that driver
ence, including interference that may inform the driver of a potential lack attention is decreasing over a period of
cause undesired operation of the of driver attention or drowsiness. It time, the system uses audible and visual
device. will not steer the vehicle or prevent warnings to suggest that the driver take a
L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux condi- loss of control. break.
tions suivantes: • The I–DA system does not detect and
provide an alert of the driver’s lack of
1. l’appareil ne doit pas produire de attention or fatigue in every
brouillage, situation.
et • It is the driver’s responsibility to:
2. l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter • stay alert,
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, • drive safely,
même si le brouillage est susceptible • keep the vehicle in the traveling
d’en compromettre le lane,
fonctionnnement. • be in control of the vehicle at all
times,
• avoid driving when tired,
• avoid distractions (texting, etc.).

The system continuously monitors driver
attention and can provide multiple warn-
ings per trip.
The system resets and starts reassessing
driving style and steering behavior when
the ignition switch is cycled from ON to OFF
and back on.
LSD3545

SYSTEM OPERATION
If the system detects driver fatigue or that
driver attention is decreasing, the mes-
sage “Take a break?” appears in the vehicle
information display and a chime sounds
when the vehicle is driven at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h).

disable the I–DA system.
plays in the vehicle information display
and press the OK button. Use the
button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then
press the OK button.
2. Select “Driver Attention Alert” and press
the OK button.
NOTE:
The setting will be retained even if
the engine is restarted.
(I-DA) SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
for the I–DA system. Failure to operate
ous injury or death.
• The I-DA system may not operate
LSD3693 properly and may not provide an
alert in the following conditions:
– Poor road conditions such as an
INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS uneven road surface or pot holes.
(I-DA) SYSTEM
– Strong side wind.
– If you have adopted a sporty driv- Action to take
ing style with higher cornering Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the
speeds or higher rates of vehicle in P (Park) position, turn the engine
acceleration. off and restart the engine. If the system
– Frequent lane changes or warning message continues to appear,
changes to vehicle speed. have the system checked. It is recom-
• The I–DA system will not provide an mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
alert in the following conditions: this service.
– Vehicle speeds lower than 37 mph
(60 km/h).
– Short lapses of attention.
– Instantaneous distractions such
as dropping an object.
LSD3563
System malfunction
If the Intelligent Driver Alertness system
malfunctions, the system warning mes-
sage will appear in the vehicle information
display and the function will be stopped
automatically.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
CAUTION Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient • Recirculating the cool air in the cabin
Driving Tips to help you achieve the most when the A/C is on reduces cooling
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), fuel economy from your vehicle. load.
follow these recommendations to ob- 1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake 4. Drive at Economical Speeds and
tain maximum engine performance Pedal Application Distances
and ensure the future reliability and
• Avoid rapid starts and stops. • Observing the speed limit and not ex-
economy of your new vehicle. Failure to
follow these recommendations may • Use smooth, gentle accelerator and ceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where le-
result in shortened engine life and re- brake application whenever possible. gally allowed) can improve fuel effi-
duced engine performance. • Maintain constant speed while com- ciency due to reduced aerodynamic
muting and coast whenever possible. drag.
• Avoid driving for long periods at constant • Maintaining a safe following distance
speed, either fast or slow, and do not run 2. Maintain Constant Speed behind other vehicles reduces unnec-
the engine over 4,000 rpm. • Look ahead to try and anticipate and essary braking.
• Do not accelerate at full throttle in any minimize stops. • Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate
gear. • Synchronizing your speed with traffic changes in speed permits reduced
• Avoid quick starts. lights allows you to reduce your num- braking and smooth acceleration
• Avoid hard braking as much as possible. ber of stops. changes.
• Maintaining a steady speed can mini- • Select a gear range suitable to road
mize red light stops and improve fuel conditions.
efficiency.
5. Use Cruise Control
3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher • Using cruise control during highway
Vehicle Speeds driving helps maintain a steady speed.
• Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more • Cruise control is particularly effective
efficient to open windows to cool the in providing fuel savings when driving
vehicle due to reduced engine load. on flat terrains.
• Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle 6. Plan for the Shortest Route
due to increased aerodynamic drag. • Utilize a map or navigation system to
determine the best route to save time.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
7. Avoid Idling • Keep your engine tuned up.

• Shutting off your engine when safe for • Follow the recommended scheduled
stops exceeding 30–60 seconds saves maintenance.
fuel and reduces emissions. • Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-
8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads sure. Low tire pressure increases tire
wear and lowers fuel economy.
• Automated passes permit drivers to
use special lanes to maintain cruising • Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-
speed through the toll and avoid stop- proper alignment increases tire wear and
ping and starting. lowers fuel economy.
• Use the recommended viscosity engine
9. Winter Warm Up oil. For additional information, see “Engine
• Limit idling time to minimize impact to oil and oil filter recommendations”
fuel economy. (P. 10-7).
• Vehicles typically need no more than
30 seconds of idling at start-up to ef-
fectively circulate the engine oil before
driving.
• Your vehicle will reach its ideal operat-
ing temperature more quickly while
driving versus idling.
10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool
• Park your vehicle in a covered parking
area or in the shade whenever
possible.
• When entering a hot vehicle, opening
the windows will help to reduce the
inside temperature faster, resulting in
reduced demand on your A/C system.

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
• Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-
ingly activate switches or controls or
make the vehicle move. Unattended
children could become involved in
serious accidents.
• To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require
the assistance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
SSD0488 come high enough to cause a signifi-
• Safe parking procedures require that cant risk of injury or death to people
WARNING
both the parking brake be set and the and pets.
• Do not stop or park the vehicle over transmission placed in P (Park). Fail- 1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
flammable materials such as dry ure to do so could cause the vehicle
grass, waste paper or rags. They may to move unexpectedly or roll away 2. Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
ignite and cause a fire. and result in an accident. Make sure position.
the shift lever has been pushed as far 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling
forward as it can go and cannot be into traffic when parked on an incline, it
moved without depressing the foot is a good practice to turn the wheels as
brake pedal. illustrated.
• Never leave the engine running while • HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB O 1 :
the vehicle is unattended. Turn the wheels into the curb and

POWER STEERING
move the vehicle forward until the WARNING erations that could cause the power steer-
curb side wheel gently touches the ing system to overheat.
curb. • If the engine is not running or is You may hear a sound when the steering
• HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB O 2 : turned off while driving, the power wheel is operated quickly. However, this is
Turn the wheels away from the curb assist for the steering will not work. not a malfunction.
and move the vehicle back until the Steering will be harder to operate.
• When the power steering warning If the power steering warning light illumi-
curb side wheel gently touches the nates while the engine is running, it may
curb. light illuminates with the engine run-
ning, there will be no power assist for indicate the power steering system is not
• HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO functioning properly and may need servic-
CURB O 3 : the steering. You will still have control
of the vehicle but the steering will be ing. Have the power steering system
Turn the wheels toward the side of the checked. It is recommended that you visit a
harder to operate. Have the power
road so the vehicle will move away NISSAN dealer for this service.
steering system checked. It is recom-
from the center of the road if it moves. When the power steering warning light illu-
mended that you visit a NISSAN
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK po- dealer for this service. minates with the engine running, there will
sition and remove the key from the be no power assist for the steering but you
The power steering system is designed to
vehicle. will still have control of the vehicle. At this
provide power assist while driving to oper-
time, greater steering effort is required to
ate the steering wheel with light force.
operate the steering wheel, especially in
When the steering wheel is operated re- sharp turns and at low speeds.
peatedly or continuously while parking or
For additional information, see “Power
driving at a very low speed, the power as-
steering warning light” (P. 2-19).
sist for the steering wheel will be reduced.
This is to prevent overheating of the power
steering system and protect it from getting
damaged. While the power assist is re-
duced, steering wheel operation will be-
come heavy. When the temperature of the
power steering system goes down, the
power assist level will return to normal.
Avoid repeating such steering wheel op-
BRAKE SYSTEM
The brake system has two separate hy- WARNING Parking brake break-in
draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever
you will still have braking at two wheels. • While driving on a slippery surface,
the stopping effect of the parking brake is
be careful when braking, accelerat-
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS weakened or whenever the parking brake
ing or downshifting. Abrupt braking
shoes and/or drums/rotors (if so
or accelerating could cause the
Vacuum assisted brakes equipped) are replaced, in order to assure
wheels to skid and result in an
the best braking performance.
The brake booster aids braking by using accident.
engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you • If the engine is not running or is This procedure is described in the vehicle
can stop the vehicle by depressing the turned off while driving, the power service manual. It is recommended that
brake pedal. However, greater foot pres- assist for the brakes will not work. you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
sure on the brake pedal will be required to Braking will be harder.
stop the vehicle and stopping distance will
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
be longer. Wet brakes WARNING
When the vehicle is washed or driven
Using the brakes through water, the brakes may get wet. As • The ABS is a sophisticated device, but
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal a result, your braking distance will be lon- it cannot prevent accidents resulting
while driving. This will overheat the brakes, ger and the vehicle may pull to one side from careless or dangerous driving
wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce during braking. techniques. It can help maintain ve-
gas mileage. hicle control during braking on slip-
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe pery surfaces. Remember that stop-
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent speed while lightly pressing the brake ping distances on slippery surfaces
the brakes from overheating, reduce speed pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until will be longer than on normal sur-
and downshift to a lower gear before going the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving faces even with ABS. Stopping dis-
down a slope or long grade. Overheated the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes tances may also be longer on rough,
brakes may reduce braking performance function correctly. gravel or snow covered roads, or if
and could result in loss of vehicle control. you are using tire chains. Always
maintain a safe distance from the ve-
hicle in front of you. Ultimately, the
driver is responsible for safety.

• Tire type and condition may also af- Using the system instrument panel. The brake system then
fect braking effectiveness. operates normally but without anti-lock
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
assistance.
– When replacing tires, install the Depress the brake pedal with firm steady
specified size of tires on all four pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The If the ABS warning light illuminates during
wheels. Anti-lock Braking System will operate to the self-test or while driving, have the ve-
– When installing a spare tire, make prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer hicle checked. It is recommended that you
sure that it is the proper size and the vehicle to avoid obstacles. visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
type as specified on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For ad- WARNING Normal operation
ditional information, see “Tire and The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper-
Loading Information label” Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping ates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5 - 10
(P. 8-29). km/h). The speed varies according to road
distances.
– For additional information, see conditions.
“Wheels and tires” (P. 8-27).
Self-test feature When the ABS senses that one or more
The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels wheels are close to locking up, the actuator
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) in-
do not lock during hard braking or when rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres-
cludes electronic sensors, electric pumps,
braking on slippery surfaces. The system sure. This action is similar to pumping the
hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
detects the rotation speed at each wheel brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa-
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature
and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre- tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise
that tests the system each time you start
vent each wheel from locking and sliding. from under the hood or feel a vibration
the engine and move the vehicle at a low
By preventing each wheel from locking, the from the actuator when it is operating. This
speed in forward or reverse. When the self-
system helps the driver maintain steering is normal and indicates that the ABS is op-
test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise
control and helps to minimize swerving erating properly. However, the pulsation
and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.
and spinning on slippery surfaces. may indicate that road conditions are haz-
This is normal and does not indicate a mal-
ardous and extra care is required while
function. If the computer senses a mal-
driving.
function, it switches the ABS off and illumi-
nates the ABS warning light on the

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
BRAKE ASSIST The VDC system uses various sensors to When the VDC system operates, the
monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. indicator light in the instrument panel
When the force applied to the brake pedal
Under certain driving conditions, the VDC flashes so note the following:
exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is
system helps to perform the following • The road may be slippery or the system
activated generating greater braking force
functions: may determine some action is required
than a conventional brake booster even
with light pedal force. • Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel to help keep the vehicle on the steered
slip on one slipping drive wheel so power path.
WARNING is transferred to a non-slipping drive • You may feel a pulsation in the brake
wheel on the same axle. pedal and hear a noise or vibration from
The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist • Controls brake pressure and engine out- under the hood. This is normal and indi-
braking operation and is not a collision put to reduce drive wheel slip based on cates that the VDC system is working
warning or avoidance device. It is the vehicle speed (traction control function). properly.
driver’s responsibility to stay alert, • Controls brake pressure at individual • Adjust your speed and driving to the road
drive safely and be in control of the ve- wheels and engine output to help the conditions.
hicle at all times. driver maintain control of the vehicle in For additional information, see “Slip indica-
the following conditions: tor light” (P. 2-20) and ”Vehicle Dynamic
– Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow Control (VDC) OFF indicator light” (P. 2-20).
the steered path despite increased
steering input) If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to indicator light comes on in the instru-
certain road or driving conditions) ment panel. The VDC system automatically
turns off when these indicator lights are on.
The VDC system can help the driver to
maintain control of the vehicle, but it can- The VDC OFF switch, or the vehicle infor-
not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driv- mation display, is used to turn off the VDC
ing situations. system. The indicator light and the
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) sys-
tem warning light illuminate to indicate the
VDC system is off.

When the VDC OFF switch, or the vehicle WARNING • If engine control related parts are not
information display, is used to turn off the NISSAN recommended or are ex-
system, the VDC system still operates to • The VDC system is designed to help tremely deteriorated, the indi-
prevent one drive wheel from slipping by the driver maintain stability but does cator light may illuminate.
transferring power to a non-slipping drive not prevent accidents due to abrupt • When driving on extremely inclined
wheel. The indicator light flashes if this steering operation at high speeds or surfaces such as higher banked cor-
occurs. All other VDC functions are off and by careless or dangerous driving ners, the VDC system may not oper-
the indicator light will not flash. techniques. Reduce vehicle speed ate properly and the indicator
The VDC system is automatically reset to and be especially careful when driv- light may flash or illuminate. Do not
on when the ignition switch is placed in the ing and cornering on slippery sur- drive on these types of roads.
OFF position then back to the ON position. faces and always drive carefully.
• When driving on an unstable surface
• Do not modify the vehicle's suspen- such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea-
sion. If suspension parts such as ramp, the indicator light may
ture that tests the system each time you
shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta- flash or illuminate. This is not a mal-
start the engine and move the vehicle for-
bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are function. Restart the engine after
ward or in reverse at a slow speed. When
not NISSAN recommended for your driving onto a stable surface.
the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk
vehicle or are extremely deterio-
noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake • If wheels or tires other than the
rated, the VDC system may not oper-
pedal. This is normal and is not an indica- NISSAN recommended ones are
ate properly. This could adversely af-
tion of a malfunction. used, the VDC system may not oper-
fect vehicle handling performance,
and the indicator light may flash ate properly and the indicator
or illuminate. light may flash or illuminate.
• If brake related parts such as brake • The VDC system is not a substitute
pads, rotors and calipers are not for winter tires or tire chains on a
NISSAN recommended or are ex- snow covered road.
tremely deteriorated, the VDC sys- BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
tem may not operate properly and
the indicator light may During braking while driving through turns,
illuminate. the system optimizes the distribution of
force to each of the front and rear wheels
depending on the radius of the turn.

WARNING • If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are ex-
• The VDC system is designed to help tremely deteriorated, the indi-
the driver maintain stability but does cator light may illuminate.
not prevent accidents due to abrupt • When driving on extremely inclined
steering operation at high speeds or surfaces such as higher banked cor-
by careless or dangerous driving ners, the VDC system may not oper-
techniques. Reduce vehicle speed ate properly and the indicator
and be especially careful when driv- light may flash or illuminate. Do not
ing and cornering on slippery sur- drive on these types of roads.
faces and always drive carefully.
• When driving on an unstable surface
• Do not modify the vehicle's suspen- such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
sion. If suspension parts such as ramp, the indicator light may
shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta- flash or illuminate. This is not a mal-
bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are function. Restart the engine after
not NISSAN recommended for your driving onto a stable surface.
vehicle or are extremely deterio-
rated, the VDC system may not oper- • If wheels or tires other than the
ate properly. This could adversely af- NISSAN recommended ones are
fect vehicle handling performance, used, the VDC system may not oper-
and the indicator light may flash ate properly and the indicator
or illuminate. light may flash or illuminate.
• If brake related parts such as brake • The VDC system is not a substitute
pads, rotors and calipers are not for winter tires or tire chains on a
NISSAN recommended or are ex- snow covered road.
tremely deteriorated, the VDC sys-
tem may not operate properly and
the indicator light may
illuminate.

CHASSIS CONTROL (if so equipped)
When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

system is turned off, the I–TC is also turned
off.
If the chassis control warning message ap-
pears in the vehicle information display, it
may indicate that the I-TC is not function-
ing properly. Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. For ad-
ditional information, see “Vehicle informa-
tion display” (P. 2-23).
When the I–TC is operated and the Chassis
Control mode is selected in the vehicle in-
formation display, the I–TC graphics are
LSD4090 shown in the vehicle information display.
For additional information, see “Vehicle in-
The chassis control is an electric control INTELLIGENT TRACE CONTROL formation display” (P. 2-23).
module that includes the following (I-TC)
functions: WARNING
This system senses driving based on the
• Intelligent Trace Control
driver’s steering and acceleration/braking The I–TC may not be effective depend-
• Intelligent Engine Brake patterns, and controls brake pressure at ing on the driving condition. Always
• Active Ride Control individual wheels to aid tracing at corners drive carefully and attentively.
• Automatic brake hold function and help smooth vehicle response.
When the I–TC is operating, you may feel a
For additional information see, Intelligent The I–TC can be set to ON (enabled) or OFF pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a
Trace Control (I-TC) (P. 5-137), Intelligent En- (disabled) through the vehicle information noise. This is normal and indicates that the
gine Brake (I-EB) (P. 5-138), Active Ride Con- display “Chassis Control” page. For addi- I–TC is operating properly.
trol (ARC) (P. 5-138) and Automatic brake tional information, see “Vehicle information
hold function (P. 5-25). display” (P. 2-23). You may also feel deceleration when the
I-TC is operating. However, this is not a
malfunction.

Even if the I–TC is turned OFF, some func- When the I-EB is operated at corners and When the ARC is operated and the Chassis
tions will remain on to assist the driver (for the Chassis Control mode is selected in the Control mode is selected in the vehicle in-
example, avoidance scenes). vehicle information display, the I-EB graph- formation display, the ARC graphics are
ics are shown in the vehicle information shown in the vehicle information display.
INTELLIGENT ENGINE BRAKE (I-EB) display. For additional information, see “Ve- For additional information, see “Vehicle in-
The I-EB function adds subtle deceleration hicle information display” (P. 2-23). formation display” (P. 2-23).
by controlling the Continuously Variable When the ARC is operating, you may hear
Transmission gear ratio, depending on the WARNING noise and sense slight deceleration. This is
cornering condition calculated from driv- normal and indicates that the ARC is oper-
er's steering input and plural sensors. This The I-EB may not be effective depend-
ing on driving conditions. Always drive ating properly.
benefit is for easier traceability and less
workload of adjusting speed with braking carefully and attentively. If the chassis control warning message ap-
at corners. pears in the vehicle information display, it
When the I-EB is operating, the needle of
may indicate that the ARC is not function-
If the chassis control warning message ap- the tachometer will rise up and you may
ing properly. Have the system checked by a
pears in the vehicle information display, it hear an engine noise. This is normal and
may indicate that the I-EB is not function- indicates that the I-EB is operating
ing properly. Have the system checked by a properly.
tion display” (P. 2-23).
ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL (ARC)
tion display” (P. 2-23). This system senses upper body motion
(based on wheel speed information) and
The I-EB also adds subtle deceleration with
controls engine torque and four wheel
gear ratio control according to driver’s
brake pressure. This will enhance ride com-
brake pedal operation.
fort in effort to restrain uncomfortable up-
The I-EB can be set to ON (enabled) or OFF per body movement when passing over
(disabled) through the vehicle information undulated road surfaces. When the Vehicle
display “Chassis Control” page. For addi- Dynamic Control (VDC) system is turned off,
tional information, see “Vehicle information the ARC is also turned off.
display” (P. 2-23).

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM
WARNING The hill start assist system automatically

keeps the brakes applied to help prevent
• Never rely solely on the hill start as- the vehicle from rolling backwards in the
sist system to prevent the vehicle time it takes the driver to release the brake
from moving backward on a hill. Al- pedal and apply the accelerator when the
ways drive carefully and attentively. vehicle is stopped on a hill.
Depress the brake pedal when the The hill start assist system will operate au-
vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be tomatically under the following conditions:
especially careful when stopped on a
hill on frozen or muddy roads. Failure • The transmission is shifted to a forward
to prevent the vehicle from rolling or reverse gear.
backwards may result in a loss of • The vehicle is stopped completely on a
control of the vehicle and possible hill by applying the brake.
serious injury or death. The maximum holding time is 2 seconds.
• The hill start assist system is not de- After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll LSD3923
signed to hold the vehicle at a stand- back and the hill start assist system will The Hill Start Assist function status can be
still on a hill. Depress the brake pedal stop operating completely. checked in the Chassis Control mode in the
when the vehicle is stopped on a The hill start assist system will not operate vehicle information display (if so equipped).
steep hill. Failure to do so may cause when the transmission is shifted to the N For additional information, see “Vehicle in-
the vehicle to roll backwards and (Neutral) or P (Park) position or on a flat and formation display” (P. 2-23).
may result in a collision or serious level road.
personal injury.
• The hill start assist may not prevent When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
the vehicle from rolling backwards indicator light illuminates in the meter, the
on a hill under all load or road condi- hill start assist system will not operate. For
tions. Always be prepared to depress additional information, see “Vehicle Dy-
the brake pedal to prevent the ve- namic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light”
hicle from rolling backwards. Failure (P. 2-20).
to do so may result in a collision or
serious personal injury.

REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS)
(if so equipped)
WARNING • The system is not designed to pre-

vent contact with small or moving
• The RSS is a convenience but it is not objects. Always move slowly. The
a substitute for proper parking. system will not detect small objects
• The driver is always responsible for below the bumper, and may not de-
safety during parking and other ma- tect objects close to the bumper or
neuvers. Always look around and on the ground.
check that it is safe to do so before • The system may not detect the fol-
parking. lowing objects: fluffy objects such as
• Read and understand the limitations snow, cloth, cotton, glass, wool, etc.;
of the RSS as contained in this sec- thin objects such as rope, wire and
tion. The colors of the corner sonar chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects.
indicator and the distance guide
lines in the rear view indicate differ- If your vehicle sustains damage to the
LSD3247 ent distances to the object. bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or
bent, the sensing zone may be altered
The RSS sounds a tone to inform the driver • Inclement weather or ultrasonic causing inaccurate measurement of ob-
of obstacles near the bumper. sources such as an automatic car stacles or false alarms.
When the “DISPLAY” key is on, the sonar wash, a truck's compressed-air
view will automatically appear in the brakes or a pneumatic drill may af- CAUTION
touch-screen display. An additional view of fect the function of the system; this
the sonar status will appear in the vehicle may include reduced performance or • Excessive noise (such as audio sys-
information display (if so equipped) for a false activation. tem volume or an open vehicle win-
reference. • This function is designed as an aid to dow) will interfere with the tone and
the driver in detecting large station- it may not be heard.
ary objects to help avoid damaging
the vehicle.

• Keep the sonar sensors (located on
the bumper fascia) free from snow,
ice and large accumulations of dirt.
Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects. If the sensors are covered,
the accuracy of the sonar function
will be diminished.
SYSTEM OPERATION
The system informs with a visual and au-
dible alert of rear obstacles when the shift
lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
The system is deactivated at speeds above
6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower LSD3246 LSD2137
speeds.
When the corner of the vehicle moves The system indicators O
A will appear when
The intermittent tone will stop after 3 sec- closer to an object, the corner sonar indi- the vehicle moves closer to an object.
onds when an obstacle is detected by only cator OA appears. When the center of the
the corner sensor and the distance does vehicle moves close to an object, the cen-
not change. The tone will stop when the ter sonar indicator OB appears.
obstacle gets away from the vehicle.
When the object is detected, the indicator
(green) appears and blinks and the tone
sounds intermittently. When the vehicle
moves closer to the object, the color of the
indicator turns yellow and the rate of the
blinking increases. When the vehicle is very
close to the object, the indicator stops
blinking and turns red, and the tone
sounds continuously.

disable the sonar system:
2. Select “Parking Aids” and press the OK
button.
3. Select “Sonar” and press the OK button.
• Select “Rear Sensor” and press the OK
button to turn the sonar system on or
off.
• Select “Display” to display the parking
sensor in the vehicle information dis-
play when the sonar system activates.
• Select “Range” to change the sonar
system distance to “Far,” “Mid” or “Near.”
LSD4001
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE The system is automatically activated

SONAR SYSTEM when the ignition is in the ON position and
the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

For vehicles with the RSS OFF switch (if
so equipped):
1. The RSS is automatically enabled when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position and the shift lever is in R
(Reverse).
2. Push the RSS OFF switch once to disable
the RSS. The indicator light on the RSS
switch will not illuminate.
The RSS will automatically be turned on
when the engine is restarted.
SONAR LIMITATIONS
WARNING
for the sonar system. Failure to operate
ous injury or death.
• The system is deactivated at speeds
above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reacti-
vated at lower speeds.
LSD4002

• Inclement weather or ultrasonic SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
sources such as an automatic car UNAVAILABLE
wash, a truck’s compressed-air When sonar blockage is detected, the sys-
brakes or a pneumatic drill may af- tem will be deactivated automatically.
fect the function of the system; this
may include reduced performance or The system is not available until the condi-
a false activation. tions no longer exist.
• The system is not designed to pre- The sonar sensors may be blocked by tem-
vent contact with small or moving porary ambient conditions such as splash-
objects. Always move slowly. The ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condi-
system will not detect small objects tion may also be caused by objects such as
below the bumper or on the ground. ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar
• The system may not detect the fol- sensors.
lowing objects: fluffy objects such as Action to take: LSD3633
snow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.;
thin objects such as rope, wire and When the above conditions no longer exist, SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects. the system will resume automatically.
The sonar sensors O 1 are located on the
• The system may not detect objects rear bumper. Always keep the area near
at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and the sonar sensors clean.
may not detect certain angular or
moving objects. The sonar sensors may be blocked by tem-
porary ambient conditions such as splash-
ing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-
structing the sonar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the sonar sensors.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING
Do not attach stickers (including transpar- FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
ent material), install accessories or apply
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply If the vehicle is to be left outside without
additional paint near the sonar sensors.
de-icer through the key hole. If the lock antifreeze, drain the cooling system, includ-
Do not strike or damage the area around becomes frozen, heat the key before in- ing the engine block. Refill before operating
the sonar sensors. It is recommended that serting it into the key hole or use the re- the vehicle. For additional information, see
you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around mote keyless entry function on the Intelli- “Changing engine coolant” (P. 8-5).
the sonar sensors is damaged due to a gent Key.
collision. TIRE EQUIPMENT
ANTIFREEZE 1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
In the winter when it is anticipated that the provide superior performance on dry
temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), pavement. However, the performance of
check the antifreeze to assure proper win- these tires will be substantially reduced
ter protection. For additional information, in snowy and icy conditions. If you oper-
see “Engine cooling system” (P. 8-4). ate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads,
NISSAN recommends the use of MUD &
BATTERY SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four
If the battery is not fully charged during wheels. It is recommended that you visit
extremely cold weather conditions, the a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size,
battery fluid may freeze and damage the speed rating and availability information.
battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, 2. For additional traction on icy roads,
the battery should be checked regularly. studded tires may be used. However,
This vehicle is equipped with a sealed some states, provinces and territories
maintenance free battery. It is recom- prohibit their use. Check local laws be-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for fore installing studded tires.
service.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow
tires.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT • Allow more stopping distance under ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
It is recommended that the following items these conditions. Braking should be equipped)
be carried in the vehicle during winter: started sooner than on dry Engine block heaters are used to assist
• A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re- pavement. with cold temperature starting.
move ice and snow from the windows • Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads. The engine block heater should be used
and wiper blades. when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C)
• A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the • Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). or lower.
jack to give it firm support. These may appear on an otherwise
• A shovel to dig the vehicle out of clear road in shaded areas. If a patch
WARNING
snowdrifts. of ice is seen ahead, brake before
reaching it. Try not to brake while on • Do not use your engine block heater
• Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield- the ice, and avoid any sudden steer- with an ungrounded electrical sys-
washer fluid reservoir. ing maneuvers. tem or a 2-pronged adapter. You can
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE • Do not use the cruise control on slip- be seriously injured by an electrical
pery roads. shock if you use an ungrounded
WARNING • Snow can trap dangerous exhaust connection.
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow • Disconnect and properly store the
• Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), clear of the exhaust pipe and from engine block heater cord before
very cold snow or ice can be slick and around your vehicle. starting the engine. Damage to the
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will cord could result in an electrical
have much less traction or “grip” un- PARKING BRAKE shock and can cause serious injury.
der these conditions. Try to avoid When parking in an area where the outside • Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged
driving on wet ice until the road is temperature is below 32°F (0°C), do not ap- extension cord rated for at least 10 A.
salted or sanded. ply the parking brake to prevent it from Plug the extension cord into a
• Whatever the condition, drive with freezing. For safe parking: Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) pro-
caution. Accelerate and slow down • Place the shift lever in the P (Park) tected, grounded 110-VAC outlet.
with care. If accelerating or down- position. Failure to use the proper extension
shifting too fast, the drive wheels will cord or a grounded outlet can result
lose even more traction. • Securely block the wheels.
in a fire or electrical shock and cause
serious personal injury.
To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine
block heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension
cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground
Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded
110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be
plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours, de-
pending on outside temperatures, to
properly warm the engine coolant. Use
an appropriate timer to turn the engine
block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and
properly store the cord to keep it away
from moving parts.

MEMO

6 In case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Vehicle recovery
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
• Turn signals do not work when the To shut off the engine in an emergency
hazard warning flasher lights are on. situation while driving, perform the follow-
ing procedure:
The flashers will operate with the ignition – Rapidly push the push-button ignition
switch placed in any position. switch three consecutive times in less
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use than 1.5 seconds, or
of the hazard warning flasher switch – Push and hold the push-button ignition
while driving. switch for more than 2 seconds.
LIC0394
Push the switch on to warn other drivers
when you must stop or park under emer-
gency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.
WARNING
• If stopping for an emergency, be sure
to move the vehicle well off the road.
• Do not use the hazard warning flash-
ers while moving on the highway un-
less unusual circumstances force
you to drive so slowly that your ve-
hicle might become a hazard to other
traffic.
6-2 In case of emergency

FLAT TIRE
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING • If the low tire pressure warning light • When using a wheel without the
SYSTEM (TPMS) illuminates while driving, avoid sud- TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
This vehicle is equipped with the TPMS. It den steering maneuvers or abrupt will not function and the low tire
monitors tire pressure of all tires except the braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull pressure warning light will flash for
spare. When the low tire pressure warning off the road to a safe location and approximately 1 minute. The light will
light is lit and the “Tire Pressure Low — Add stop the vehicle as soon as possible. remain on after 1 minute. Have your
Air” warning appears in the vehicle infor- Driving with underinflated tires may tires replaced and/or TPMS system
mation display (if so equipped), one or permanently damage the tires and reset as soon as possible. It is recom-
more of your tires is significantly under- increase the likelihood of tire failure. mended that you visit a NISSAN
inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with Serious vehicle damage could occur dealer for these services.
low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and and may lead to an accident and • Replacing tires with those not origi-
warn you of it by the low tire pressure warn- could result in serious personal in- nally specified by NISSAN could af-
ing light. This system will activate only jury. Check the tire pressure for all fect the proper operation of the
when the vehicle is driven at speeds above four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to TPMS.
16 mph (25 km/h). For additional informa- the recommended COLD tire pres- • Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tion, see “Warning lights, indicator lights sure shown on the Tire and Loading tire sealant into the tires, as this may
and audible reminders” (P. 2-10), and “Tire Information label to turn the low tire cause a malfunction of the tire pres-
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P. 5-5). pressure warning light OFF. If the sure sensors.
light still illuminates while driving af-
ter adjusting the tire pressure, a tire • If the light still comes on while driving
WARNING after adjusting the tire pressure, a
may be flat or the TPMS may be mal-
functioning. If you have a flat tire, re- tire may be flat or the TPMS may be
• Radio waves could adversely affect
place it with a spare tire as soon as malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire,
electric medical equipment. Those
possible. If no tire is flat and all tires replace it with a spare tire as soon as
who use a pacemaker should contact
are properly inflated, have the ve- possible. If no tire is flat and all tires
the electric medical equipment
hicle checked. It is recommended are properly inflated, it is recom-
manufacturer for the possible influ-
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this mended that you visit a NISSAN
ences before use.
service. dealer for this service.
In case of emergency 6-3

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE WARNING
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions
• Make sure the parking brake is se-
below:
curely applied and the Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT) is
Stopping the vehicle shifted into P (Park).
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and • Never change tires when the vehicle
away from traffic. is on a slope, ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. This is hazardous.
• Never change tires if oncoming traf-
3. Park on a level surface and apply the
fic is close to your vehicle. Wait for
parking brake. Move the shift lever to P
professional road assistance.
(Park).
4. Turn off the engine.
LCE2142
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and
A. Blocks
to signal professional road assistance
personnel that you need assistance. B. Flat tire
6. Have all passengers get out of the ve- Blocking wheels
hicle and stand in a safe place, away Place suitable blocks at both the front and
from traffic and clear of the vehicle. back of the wheel diagonally opposite the
flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving
when it is jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the ve-
hicle may move and result in personal
injury.

LCE2428 LCE2429 LDI3564
Getting the spare tire and tools 3. Carefully remove the wheel cover to 4. Remove the jacking rod OA , the jack O
B ,
avoid potential damage to the side trim. and wheel nut wrench OC from the stor-
1. Open the liftgate.
age cover O
D .
2. Lift the flaps on the wheel cover to ac-
5. Remove the storage cover O
D to access
cess the spare tire.
the spare tire.

To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod
O1 as illustrated.
Apply cloth O 2 between the wheel and jack

rod to prevent damaging the wheel and
wheel cover.
Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover
or wheel surface.
SCE0913 SCE0630
6. To loosen the bolt, turn Removing wheel cover (if so
counterclockwise. equipped)
7. Once loosened remove the bolt, and re-
move the spare tire. CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel
CAUTION
caps or wheel covers. Doing so could
Do not touch floor metal directly. Doing result in personal injury.
so could result in any burns.

• Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for
jack support.
• Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
• Never use blocks on or under the
jack.
• Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause
the vehicle to move. This is especially
true for vehicles with limited slip
differentials.
• Do not allow passengers to stay in
LPD2451 the vehicle while it is on the jack.
Jacking up vehicle and removing • Never run the engine with a wheel(s)
off the ground. It may cause the ve-
the damaged tire hicle to move.
WARNING
• Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is nec-
essary to work under the vehicle,
support it with safety stands.
• Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use
the jack provided with your vehicle
on other vehicles. The jack is de-
signed for lifting only your vehicle
during a tire change.

LCE2059 WCE0048
Always refer to the proper illustrations for 2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up Type A (if so equipped)
the correct placement and jack-up points point as illustrated so the top of the jack Installing the spare tire
for your specific vehicle model and jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
type. Align the jack head between the 2 between the wheel and hub.
Carefully read the caution label attached notches in the front or the rear as
shown. Also fit the groove of the jack 2. Carefully put the spare tire on and
to the jack body and the following in-
head between the notches as shown. tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.
structions.
1. Loosen each wheel nut 1 or 2 turns by The jack should be used on firm and 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten
turning counterclockwise with the wheel level ground. wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the
nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel sequence illustrated (O
A ,O
B ,OC ,O
D ) until
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack
nuts until the tire is off the ground. they are tight.
lever and rod with both hands. Carefully
raise the vehicle until the tire clears the
ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and
then remove the tire.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the touches the ground. Then, with the
wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel
nuts securely in the sequence illustrated nuts securely in the sequence illustrated
(O
A , OB , O
C , O D ). Lower the vehicle (O
A , OB , O
C , O
D , OE ). Lower the vehicle
completely. completely.
WARNING
• Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
• Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
WCE0056 studs or nuts. This could cause the
nuts to become loose.
Type B (if so equipped)
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface • Retighten the wheel nuts when the
between the wheel and hub. vehicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and etc.).
tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten nuts to the specified torque with a
wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the torque wrench.
sequence illustrated (OA , O
B , O
C , O
D , O
E )
Wheel nut tightening torque:
until they are tight.
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened
to specification at all times. It is recom-
mended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specification at each lubrication interval.

JUMP STARTING
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD To start your engine with a booster battery, • Whenever working on or near a bat-
pressure. the instructions and precautions below tery, always wear suitable eye pro-
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been must be followed. tectors (for example, goggles or in-
parked for 3 hours or more or driven less dustrial safety spectacles) and
than 1 mile (1.6 km). WARNING remove rings, metal bands, or any
• If done incorrectly, jump starting can other jewelry. Do not lean over the
COLD tire pressures are shown on the
lead to a battery explosion, resulting battery when jump starting.
Tire and Loading Information label.
in severe injury or death. It could also • Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
5. Securely store the jack and the tool kit in battery. It could explode and cause
damage your vehicle.
its storage area. serious injury.
• Explosive hydrogen gas is always
6. Place the spare tire cover and liftgate present in the vicinity of the battery. • The automatic engine cooling fan (if
floor carpeting over the jack and tool kit. Keep all sparks and flames away so equipped) may come on at any
from the battery. time without warning, even if the ig-
7. Securely store the damaged tire in the nition switch is in the OFF position
vehicle. • Do not allow battery fluid to come
into contact with eyes, skin, clothing and the engine is not running. To
8. Close the liftgate. or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a avoid injury, keep hands and other
corrosive sulfuric acid solution which objects away from it.
WARNING can cause severe burns. If the fluid
• Always make sure that the spare tire should come into contact with any-
and jacking equipment are properly thing, immediately flush the con-
secured after use. Such items can be- tacted area with water.
come dangerous projectiles in an ac- • Keep battery out of the reach of
cident or sudden stop. children.
• The spare tire is designed for emer- • The booster battery must be rated at
gency use. For additional informa- 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
tion, see “Wheels and tires” (P. 8-27). battery can damage your vehicle.

4. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and let it run for a few minutes.
5. Keep the engine speed of the booster
vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the
engine of the vehicle being jump
started.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged
for more than 10 seconds. If the engine
does not start right away, place the ig-
nition switch in the OFF position and
wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
LCE2223
6. After starting the engine, carefully dis-
WARNING 3. Connect the jumper cables in the se- connect the negative cable and then the
quence illustrated (O
A ,O
B ,O
C ,O
D ).
positive cable.
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage CAUTION
to the charging system and cause per-
• Always connect positive (+) to posi-
sonal injury.
tive (+) and negative (−) to body
1. If the booster battery is in another ve- ground (for example, strut mounting
hicle, position the 2 vehicles to bring their bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to
batteries near each other. the battery.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. • Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift compartment and that the cable
lever to P (Park). Switch off all unneces- clamps do not contact any other
sary electrical systems (lights, heater, air metal.
conditioner, etc.).
PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
CAUTION If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by a 3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
(red) high temperature warning light (if steam or coolant escaping from the ra-
• Do not push start this vehicle. The so equipped)), or if you feel a lack of engine diator before opening the hood. (If
three-way catalyst may be power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the steam or coolant is escaping, turn off
damaged. following steps. the engine.) Do not open the hood fur-
• Continuously Variable Transmission ther until no steam or coolant can be
(CVT) models cannot be push- WARNING seen.
started or tow-started. Attempting • Do not continue to drive if your ve- 4. Open the engine hood.
to do so may cause transmission hicle overheats. Doing so could cause
damage. engine damage or a vehicle fire. WARNING
• To avoid the danger of being scalded, If steam or water is coming from the
never remove the coolant reservoir engine, stand clear to prevent getting
cap while the engine is still hot. When burned.
the coolant reservoir cap is removed,
pressurized hot water will spurt out, 5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
possibly causing serious injury. looseness. Also check if the cooling fan
• Do not open the hood if steam is is running. The radiator hoses and radia-
coming out. tor should not leak water. If coolant is
leaking, the water pump belt is missing
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap- or loose, or the cooling fan does not run,
ply the parking brake and move the shift stop the engine.
lever to P (Park).
Do not stop the engine. WARNING
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
windows, move the heater or air condi- jewelry or clothing to come into con-
tioner temperature control to maximum tact with, or get caught in, engine belts
hot and fan control to high speed. or the engine cooling fan. The engine
cooling fan can start at any time.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
6. After the engine cools down, check the When towing your vehicle, all State (Provin- CAUTION
coolant level in the engine coolant res- cial in Canada) and local regulations for
ervoir with the engine running. Add cool- towing must be followed. Incorrect towing • When towing, make sure that the
ant to the engine coolant reservoir, if equipment could damage your vehicle. transmission, axles, steering system
necessary. Have your vehicle repaired. It Towing instructions are available from a and powertrain are in working condi-
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are tion. If any of these conditions apply,
dealer for this service. generally familiar with the applicable laws dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be
and procedures for towing. To assure used.
proper towing and to prevent accidental • Always attach safety chains before
damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recom- towing.
mends having a service operator tow your
vehicle. It is advisable to have the service For additional information about towing
operator carefully read the following your vehicle behind a Recreational Vehicle
precautions: (RV), see “Flat towing” (P. 10-19).
WARNING
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
• Never ride in a vehicle that is being NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle
towed. based upon the type of drivetrain. For addi-
• Never get under your vehicle after it tional information, refer to the diagrams in
has been lifted by a tow truck. this section to ensure that your vehicle is
properly towed.

– Place the ignition switch in the
OFF position, and secure the
steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a rope or similar de-
vice. Never secure the steering
wheel by placing the ignition
switch in the LOCK position. This
may damage the steering lock
mechanism (for models with a
steering lock mechanism).
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a
stuck vehicle)
LCE2343 WARNING
Two-Wheel Drive models with CAUTION To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-
Continuously Variable sonal injury or death when recovering a
• Never tow CVT models with the front
Transmission (CVT) wheels on the ground or four wheels
stuck vehicle:
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be on the ground (forward or back- • Contact a professional towing ser-
towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ward), as this may cause serious and vice to recover the vehicle if you have
ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed expensive damage to the transmis- any questions regarding the recov-
truck as illustrated. sion. If it is necessary to tow the ve- ery procedure.
hicle with the rear wheels raised al- • Tow chains or cables must be at-
ways use towing dollies under the tached only to main structural mem-
front wheels. bers of the vehicle.
• When towing CVT models with the • Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to
rear wheels on the ground or on tow- tow or free a stuck vehicle.
ing dollies:

• Only use devices specifically de- If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
signed for vehicle recovery and fol- etc., use the following procedure:
low the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control
• Always pull the recovery device (VDC) system.
straight out from the front of the ve- 2. Make sure the area in front and behind
hicle. Never pull at an angle. the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
• Route recovery devices so they do
not touch any part of the vehicle ex- 3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
cept the attachment point. clear an area around the front tires.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, 4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and
etc., use a tow strap or other device de- backward.
signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al- • Shift back and forth between R (Re-
ways follow the manufacturer's instruc- verse) and D (Drive).
tions for the recovery device. • Apply the accelerator as little as pos-
sible to maintain the rocking motion.
Rocking a stuck vehicle • Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
WARNING (Drive).
• Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. • Do not spin the tires above 34 mph
• Do not spin your tires at high speed. (55 km/h).
This could cause them to explode 5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few
and result in serious injury. Parts of tries, contact a professional towing ser-
your vehicle could also overheat and vice to remove the vehicle.
be damaged.

7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Most common factors contributing to
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 7-3 Environmental factors influence the
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 rate of corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Cleaning interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of CAUTION • Do not wash the vehicle with strong
your vehicle, it is important to take proper household soap, strong chemical de-
care of it. • Do not concentrate water spray di- tergents, gasoline or solvents.
To protect the paint surfaces, wash your rectly on the sonar sensors (if so
• Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-
vehicle as soon as you can: equipped) on the bumper as this will
light or while the vehicle body is hot,
result in damage to the sensors. Do
• After a rainfall to prevent possible dam- as the surface may become
not use pressure washers capable of
age from acid rain. water-spotted.
spraying water over 1,200 psi (8,274
• After driving on coastal roads. kPa) to wash your vehicle. Use of • Avoid using tight-napped or rough
• When contaminants such as soot, bird high-pressure washers over 1,200 psi cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or (8,274 kPa) can result in damage to or must be taken when removing
bugs get on the paint surface. removal of paint or graphics. Avoid caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-
using a high-pressure washer closer stances so the paint surface is not
• When dust or mud builds up on the
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the vehicle. scratched or damaged.
surface.
Always use a wide-angle nozzle only, Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of
Whenever possible, store or park your ve- keep the nozzle moving and do not
hicle inside a garage or in a covered area. clean water.
concentrate the water spray on any
When it is necessary to park outside, park in one area. Inside edges, seams and folds on the
a shady area or protect the vehicle with a doors, hatches and hood are particularly
• Do not use car washes that use acid vulnerable to the effects of road salt. There-
body cover. in the detergent. Some car washes, fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.
Be careful not to scratch the paint sur- especially brushless ones, use some Take care that the drain holes in the lower
face when putting on or removing the acid for cleaning. The acid may react edge of the door are open. Spray water
body cover. with some plastic vehicle compo- under the body and in the wheel wells to
nents, causing them to crack. This loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.
WASHING could affect their appearance, and
also could cause them not to func- A damp chamois can be used to dry the
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty vehicle to avoid water spots.
of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us- tion properly. Always check with your
ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or car wash to confirm that acid is not
general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed used.
with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.
7-2 Appearance and care

WAXING UNDERBODY ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so
Regular waxing protects the paint surface In areas where road salt is used in winter, it equipped)
and helps retain new vehicle appearance. is necessary to clean the underbody regu- Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge
Polishing is recommended to remove larly in order to prevent dirt and salt from dampened in a mild soap solution, espe-
built-up wax residue and to avoid a weath- building up and causing the acceleration of cially during winter months in areas where
ered appearance before re-applying wax. corrosion on the underbody and suspen- road salt is used. If not removed, road salt
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing sion. Before the winter period and again in can discolor the wheels.
the proper product. the spring, the underseal must be checked
and, if necessary, re-treated. CAUTION
• Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
washing. Follow the instructions supplied GLASS Follow the directions below to avoid
with the wax. staining or discoloring the wheels:
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and
• Do not use a wax containing any abra- dust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor- • Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
sives, cutting compounds or cleaners mal for glass to become coated with a film acid or alkali contents to clean the
that may damage the vehicle finish. after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. wheels.
Machine compounding or aggressive pol- Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily • Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin- remove this film. wheels when they are hot. The wheel
ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. temperature should be the same as
CAUTION ambient temperature.
REMOVING SPOTS
When cleaning the inside of the win- • Rinse the wheel to completely re-
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, move the cleaner within 15 minutes
dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible after the cleaner is applied.
abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based
from the surface of the paint to avoid last-
disinfectant cleaners. They could dam- CHROME PARTS
ing damage or staining. Special cleaning
age the electrical conductors, radio an-
products are available at a NISSAN dealer Clean all chrome parts regularly with a
tenna elements or rear window de-
or any automotive accessory store. It is non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain
froster elements.
recommended that you visit a NISSAN the finish.
dealer for these products.
Appearance and care 7-3

CLEANING INTERIOR
TIRE DRESSINGS Occasionally remove loose dust from the CAUTION

interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe • Never use benzine, thinner or any
tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a
the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) sur- similar material.
coating to the tires to help reduce discolor-
faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in • Small dirt particles can be abrasive
ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap-
mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a and damaging to leather (if so
plied to the tires, it may react with the coat-
dry, soft cloth. equipped) surfaces and should be re-
ing and form a compound. This compound
may come off the tire while driving and Regular care and cleaning is required in moved promptly. Do not use saddle
stain the vehicle paint. order to maintain the appearance of the soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, clean-
leather (if so equipped). ing fluids, solvents, detergents or
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the ammonia-based cleaners as they
following precautions: Before using any fabric protector, read the may damage the leather’s natural
• Use a water-based tire dressing. The manufacturer's recommendations. Some finish.
coating on the tire dissolves more easily fabric protectors contain chemicals that
may stain or bleach the seat material. • Never use fabric protectors unless
than with an oil-based tire dressing. recommended by the manufacturer.
• Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help Use a cloth dampened only with water to • Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
prevent it from entering the tire tread/ clean the meter and gauge lens. meter or gauge lens covers. It may
grooves (where it would be difficult to damage the lens cover.
remove). WARNING
• Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
pletely removed from the tire
damage the seat or occupant classifi-
tread/grooves.
cation sensor. This can also affect the
• Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom- operation of the air bag system and re-
mended by the tire dressing sult in serious personal injury.
manufacturer.

AIR FRESHENERS • Properly position the mats in the
Most air fresheners use a solvent that floorwell using the floor mat posi-
could affect the vehicle interior. If you use tioning hook. For additional informa-
an air freshener, take the following tion, see "Floor mat installation"
precautions: (P. 7-6).
• Hanging-type air fresheners can cause • Make sure the floor mat does not in-
permanent discoloration when they con- terfere with pedal operation.
tact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air • Periodically check the floor mats to
freshener in a location that allows it to make sure they are properly
hang free and not contact an interior installed.
surface. • After cleaning the vehicle interior,
• Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on check the floor mats to make sure
the vents. These products can cause im- they are properly installed.
mediate damage and discoloration LAI2105 The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can
when spilled on interior surfaces.
FLOOR MATS (if so equipped) extend the life of your vehicle carpet and
Carefully read and follow the manufactur- make it easier to clean the interior. Mats
er's instructions before using the air WARNING should be maintained with regular clean-
fresheners. ing and replaced if they become exces-
To avoid potential pedal interference
that may result in a collision, injury or sively worn.
death:
• NEVER place a floor mat on top of
another floor mat in the driver front
position or install them upside down
or backwards.
• Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,
or equivalent floor mats, that are
specifically designed for use in your
vehicle model and model year.

Floor mat installation WARNING
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat posi-
tioning hook(s). The number and shape of the Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in
floor mat positioning hooks for each seating the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
position varies depending on the vehicle. chemical solvents to clean the seat
belts, since these materials may se-
When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats, verely weaken the seat belt webbing.
follow the installation instructions provided
with the mat and the following:
1. With the ignition switch in the OFF posi-
tion, the shift lever in P (Park) position
and with the parking brake fully applied,
position the floor mat in the floorwell so
that the floor mat grommet holes are
aligned with the hook(s). LAI2106
2. Secure the grommet holes into the Positioning hooks
hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is The illustration shows the location of the
properly positioned. floor mat positioning hooks.
3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter- SEAT BELTS
fere with pedal operation. With the igni-
tion switch still in the OFF position, the The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping
shift lever in the P (Park) position and them with a sponge dampened in a mild
with the parking brake applied, fully ap- soap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-
ply and release all pedals. The floor mat pletely in the shade before using them. For
must not interfere with pedal operation additional information, see “Seat belt main-
or prevent the pedal from returning to tenance” (P. 1-17).
its normal position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for details about installing the floor
mats in your vehicle.
CORROSION PROTECTION
MOST COMMON FACTORS Temperature CAUTION

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE High temperatures accelerate the rate of
• NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-
CORROSION corrosion to those parts which are not well
bris from the passenger compart-
Most vehicle corrosion is caused by: ventilated.
ment by washing it out with a hose.
• The accumulation of moisture-retaining Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner
Air pollution or broom.
dirt and debris in body panel sections,
cavities, and other areas. Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in • Never allow water or other liquids to
• Damage to paint and other protective the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt come in contact with electronic com-
coatings caused by gravel and stone use accelerates the corrosion process. ponents inside the vehicle as this
chips or minor traffic collisions. Road salt also accelerates the disintegra- may damage them.
tion of paint surfaces.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS Chemicals used for road surface de-icing
PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM are extremely corrosive. They accelerate
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF corrosion and deterioration of underbody
CORROSION
CORROSION components such as the exhaust system,
• Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep
the vehicle clean. fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan
Moisture and fenders.
• Always check for minor damage to the
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on paint and repair it as soon as possible. In winter, the underbody must be
the vehicle body underside can accelerate cleaned periodically.
corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry • Keep drain holes at the bottom of the
completely inside the vehicle and should doors open to avoid water accumulation. For additional protection against rust and
be removed for drying to avoid floor panel • Check the underbody for accumulation corrosion, which may be required in some
corrosion. of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with areas, it is recommended that you visit a
water as soon as possible. NISSAN dealer.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of
high relative humidity, especially those ar-
eas where the temperatures stay above
freezing and where atmospheric pollution
exists and road salt is used.
MEMO

8 Do-it-yourself
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Changing engine oil and oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Passenger compartment
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) (with electronic parking brake) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or main- • Your vehicle is equipped with an au- • Avoid contact with used engine oil
tenance work on your vehicle, always take tomatic engine cooling fan. It may and coolant. Improperly disposed
care to prevent serious accidental injury to come on at any time without warn- engine oil, engine coolant and/or
yourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol- ing, even if the ignition switch is in other vehicle fluids can damage the
lowing are general precautions which the OFF position and the engine is environment. Always conform to lo-
should be closely observed. not running. To avoid injury, always cal regulations for disposal of vehicle
disconnect the negative battery fluid.
WARNING cable before working near the fan.
• Never leave the engine or Continu-
• If you must run the engine in an en- ously Variable Transmission (CVT) re-
• Park the vehicle on a level surface, closed space such as a garage, be
apply the parking brake securely and lated component harnesses discon-
sure there is proper ventilation for nected while the ignition switch is in
block the wheels to prevent the ve- exhaust gases to escape.
hicle from moving. Move the shift le- the ON position.
• Never get under the vehicle while it is
ver to P (Park). • Never connect or disconnect the bat-
supported only by a jack. If it is nec-
• Be sure the ignition switch is in the essary to work under the vehicle, tery or any transistorized compo-
OFF or LOCK position when perform- support it with safety stands. nent while the ignition switch is in
ing any parts replacement or repairs. the ON position.
• Keep smoking materials, flame and
• If you must work with the engine run- sparks away from the fuel tank and This “Do-it-yourself ” section gives instruc-
ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair battery. tions regarding only those items which are
and tools away from moving fans, • Because the fuel lines on gasoline relatively easy for an owner to perform.
belts and any other moving parts. engine models are under high pres- A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also
• It is advisable to secure or remove sure even when the engine is off, it is available. For additional information, see
any loose clothing and remove any recommended that you visit a “Owner's Manual/Service Manual order in-
jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. NISSAN dealer for service of the fuel
formation” (P. 10-23).
before working on your vehicle. filter or fuel lines.
• Always wear eye protection when- You should be aware that incomplete or
ever you work on your vehicle. improper servicing may result in operating
CAUTION difficulties or excessive emissions, and
• Do not work under the hood while could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt
the engine is hot. Turn the engine off about any servicing, it is recommended
and wait until it cools down. that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.
8-2 Do-it-yourself
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
8. Fuse box
9. Air cleaner
10. Engine drive belt location
LDI3471
1.6L 4 cylinder (HR16DE engine model) 4. Engine oil dipstick
1. Engine coolant reservoir 5. Brake fluid reservoir
2. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir 6. Fuse box
3. Engine oil filler cap 7. Battery
Do-it-yourself 8-3
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the CAUTION • The life expectancy of the factory-fill
factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ • Never use any cooling system addi- or 7 years. Mixing any other type of
Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide tives such as radiator sealer. Addi- coolant other than Genuine NISSAN
year-round antifreeze and coolant protec- tives may clog the cooling system Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
tion. The antifreeze solution contains rust and cause damage to the engine, (or equivalent coolant), including
and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine transmission and/or cooling system. Genuine NISSAN Long Life
cooling system additives are not • When adding or replacing coolant, be Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the
necessary. sure to use only Genuine NISSAN use of non-distilled water may re-
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) duce the life expectancy of the
WARNING or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long factory-fill coolant. For additional in-
• Never remove the coolant reservoir Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre- formation, refer to the “Maintenance
cap when the engine is hot. Wait until diluted to provide antifreeze protec- and schedules” section of this
the engine and radiator cool down. tion to -34° F (-37° C). If additional manual.
Serious burns could be caused by freeze protection is needed due to
high pressure fluid escaping from the weather where you operate your ve-
radiator. For additional information hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life
on precautions, see “If your vehicle Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen-
overheats” (P. 6-12). trate following the directions on the
container. If an equivalent coolant
• The coolant reservoir is equipped other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
with a pressure type coolant reser- Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-
voir cap. To prevent engine damage, low the coolant manufacturer’s in-
use only a Genuine NISSAN coolant structions to maintain minimum an-
reservoir cap. tifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C).
The use of other types of coolant so-
lutions other than Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
or equivalent may damage the en-
gine cooling system.
8-4 Do-it-yourself
ENGINE OIL
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine
coolant. The service procedure can be
found in the NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine
overheating.
WARNING
• To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the
engine is hot.
LDI3221 • Never remove the coolant reservoir LDI3468
cap when the engine is hot. Serious
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT burns could be caused by high pres- CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
LEVEL sure fluid escaping from the coolant 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
reservoir. apply the parking brake.
Check the coolant level in the reservoir
when the engine is cold. If the coolant • Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash 2. Start the engine and warm it up until the
level is below the MIN level O
B , add coolant
engine temperature reaches the nor-
up to the MAX level OA . thoroughly with soap or hand
cleaner as soon as possible. mal operating temperature (approxi-
If the cooling system frequently requires mately 5 minutes).
• Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-
coolant, have it checked. It is recom- 3. Stop the engine.
dren and pets.
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service. Engine coolant must be disposed of prop- 4. Wait at least 10 minutes for the engine oil
erly. Check your local regulations. to drain back to the oil pan.
For additional information on the location
of the engine coolant reservoir, see “Engine 5. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
compartment check locations” (P. 8-3).
6. Reinsert the dipstick all the way.
Do-it-yourself 8-5
More engine oil is consumed by frequent 3. Turn the engine off and wait for 15
acceleration/deceleration especially minutes.
when engine rpm is high. Consumption
4. Raise and support the vehicle using a
is likely to be higher when the engine is
suitable floor jack and safety jack
new. if the rate of oil consumption, after
stands.
driving for 3,000 miles (5,000 km), is
more than 0.5 liter per 600 miles (1,000 • Place the safety jack stands under the
km), consult a NISSAN dealer. vehicle jack-up points.
• A suitable adapter should be attached to
CAUTION the jack stand saddle.
Oil level should be checked regularly. CAUTION

Operating the engine with an insuffi-
cient amount of oil can damage the en- Make sure the correct lifting and sup-
LDI0371
gine, and such damage is not covered port points are used to avoid vehicle
by warranty. damage.
7. Remove the dipstick and check the oil
level. It should be within the range O
B . CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND OIL
8. If the oil level is below O
A , remove the oil
FILTER
filler cap and pour recommended oil For additional information on engine oil
into the opening. Do not overfill OC . and oil filter change, refer to the instruc-
tions outlined in this section.
When filling the engine oil, do not re-
move the dipstick.
Vehicle set-up
9. Recheck the oil level with the dipstick.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
It is normal to add some oil between oil apply the parking brake.
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the sever- 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating
ity of operating conditions or depending temperature.
on the property of the engine oil used.
8-6 Do-it-yourself
LDI3434 LDI3457 LDI3458
O
1 Oil filler cap O
2 Oil drain plug O3 Oil filter
Engine oil and filter
1. Place a large drain pan under the drain
plug and oil filter.
2. Remove the oil filler cap.
3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench by
turning it counterclockwise and com-
pletely drain the oil.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the
engine oil is hot.
Do-it-yourself 8-7
WARNING 6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with 10. Start the engine and check for leakage
clean engine oil. around the drain plug and the oil filter.
• Prolonged and repeated contact Correct as required. Turn the engine off
7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a
with used engine oil may cause skin and wait more than 15 minutes. Check
slight resistance is felt, then tighten addi-
cancer. the oil level with the dipstick. Add en-
tionally more than 2/3 turn.
• Try to avoid direct skin contact with gine oil if necessary.
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash Oil filter tightening torque:
thoroughly with soap or hand 11 to 15 ft-lb (14.7 to 20.6 N·m) After the operation
cleaner as soon as possible. 8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a 1. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.
• Keep used engine oil out of reach of new washer. Securely tighten the drain
2. Reset oil and oil filter maintenance re-
children. plug with a wrench. Do not use exces-
minder (if so equipped). For additional
sive force.
4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter information, see “Vehicle information
wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Drain plug tightening torque: display” (P. 2-23).
Remove the oil filter by turning it by 22 to 29 ft-lb (29.4 to 39.2 N·m) • Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.
hand. 9. Refill the engine with the recommended • Check your local regulations.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting sur- oil through the oil filler opening, and in-
face with a clean rag. stall the oil filler cap securely.
For additional information about drain and
CAUTION refill capacity, see “Recommended fluids/
lubricants and capacities” (P. 10-2). The
Be sure to remove any old gasket ma-
drain and refill capacity depends on the oil
terial remaining on the sealing surface
temperature and drain time. Use these
of the engine. Failure to do so could
specifications for reference only. Always
lead to an oil leak and engine damage.
use the dipstick to determine the proper
• The dipstick must be inserted in amount of oil in the engine.
place to prevent oil spillage from the
dipstick hole when filling the engine
with oil.
8-8 Do-it-yourself
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE BRAKE FLUID
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID
CAUTION • Brake fluid is poisonous and should

be stored carefully in marked con-
• NISSAN recommends using Genuine tainers out of reach of children.
NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equiva-
lent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix
with other fluids. CAUTION
• Do not use Automatic Transmission
Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-
Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission
faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid
fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may dam-
is spilled, immediately wash the sur-
age the CVT. Damage caused by the
face with water.
use of fluids other than as recom-
mended is not covered under Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the
NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited War- brake fluid is below the MIN line O B , the
ranty outlined in your Warranty Infor- brake warning light will illuminate. Add
mation Booklet. LDI3459 brake fluid up to the MAX line O A . For addi-
• Using fluids that are not equivalent For additional information on brake fluid tional information on recommended type
to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 specification, see “Recommended fluids/ of brake fluid, see “Recommended fluids/
may also damage the CVT. Damage lubricants and capacities” (P. 10-2). lubricants and capacities” (P. 10-2).
caused by the use of fluids other than If the brake fluid must be added frequently,
as recommended is not covered un- WARNING the brake system should be thoroughly
der NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited checked. It is recommended that you visit a
Warranty outlined in your Warranty • Use only new fluid from a sealed con- NISSAN dealer for this service.
Information Booklet. tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake system.
When checking or replacement of CVT fluid The use of improper fluids can dam-
is required, it is recommended that you visit age the brake system and affect the
a NISSAN dealer for this service. vehicle's stopping ability.
• Clean the filler cap before removing.
Do-it-yourself 8-9
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, • Do not fill the windshield-washer

lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the reservoir with washer fluid concen-
windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir trates at full strength. Some methyl
opening. alcohol based washer fluid concen-
Add a washer solvent to the washer for trates may permanently stain the
better cleaning. In the winter season, add a grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer antifreeze. Follow the windshield-washer reservoir.
manufacturer's instructions for the mix- • Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
ture ratio. with water to the manufacturer's
Refill the reservoir more frequently when recommended levels before pouring
driving conditions require an increased the fluid into the windshield-washer
amount of windshield-washer fluid. reservoir. Do not use the windshield-
washer reservoir to mix the washer
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN fluid concentrate and water.
LDI3223 Windshield-Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Antifreeze or equivalent.
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR CAUTION
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir
periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid • Do not substitute engine antifreeze
when the low windshield-washer fluid coolant for windshield-washer solu-
warning light (if so equipped) comes on. tion. This may result in damage to the
paint.
8-10 Do-it-yourself
BATTERY
Caution symbols for battery WARNING
No smoking, No exposed flames, No Do not expose the battery to electrical sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen gas generated by the
O
1
Sparks battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.
Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion or
O
2 Shield eyes
battery acid.
O
3 Keep away from children Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can
cause blindness or severe burns. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your
O
4 Battery acid eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the bat-
tery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.
O
5 Note operating instructions Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.
O
6 Explosive gas Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.
Do-it-yourself 8-11
• If the battery is labeled “do not open” it is WARNING
maintenance free and battery fluid
should not be checked. It is recom- • Do not expose the battery to flames,
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy-
a qualified specialist workshop to con- drogen gas generated by the battery
firm the battery’s performance. is explosive. Explosive gases can
• Keep the battery surface clean and dry. cause blindness or injury. Do not al-
Clean the battery with a solution of bak- low battery fluid to contact your skin,
ing soda and water. eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul-
• Make certain the terminal connections furic acid can cause blindness or in-
are clean and securely tightened. jury. After touching a battery or bat-
tery cap, do not touch or rub your
• If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days
eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If
or longer, disconnect the negative (-) bat-
the acid contacts your eyes, skin or
tery terminal cable to prevent discharge.
clothing, immediately flush with wa- LDI3302
NOTE: ter for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations Do not try to open the top of the battery.
• When working on or near a battery,
that can lead to potential battery dis-
always wear suitable eye protection This battery is not equipped with remov-
charge and potential no-start conditions
and remove all jewelry. able vent caps.
such as:
• Battery posts, terminals and related
1. Installation or extended use of elec- accessories contain lead and lead JUMP STARTING
tronic accessories that consume bat- compounds. Wash hands after If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump
tery power when the engine is not handling. starting” (P. 6-10). If the engine does not
running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
• Keep battery out of the reach of start by jump starting, the battery may
players, etc.)
children. have to be replaced. It is recommended
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or • Do not tip the battery. that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
only driven short distances. service.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.
8-12 Do-it-yourself
VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL DRIVE BELT
SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable

voltage control system. This system mea-
sures the amount of electrical discharge
from the battery and controls voltage gen-
erated by the generator.
The current sensor O A is located near the
battery along the negative battery cable. If
you add electrical accessories to your ve-
hicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable
body ground such as the frame or engine
block area.
LDI3246 LDI3028
1. Automatic tensioner pulley
CAUTION 2. Generator pulley
3. Water pump pulley
• Do not ground accessories directly to 4. Air conditioner compressor pulley
the battery terminal. Doing so will 5. Crankshaft pulley
bypass the variable voltage control
system and the vehicle battery may WARNING
not charge completely.
Be sure the ignition switch is placed in
• Use electrical accessories with the the OFF or LOCK position before servic-
engine running to avoid discharging ing drive belt. The engine could rotate
the vehicle battery. unexpectedly.
Do-it-yourself 8-13
SPARK PLUGS
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un- WARNING

usual wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is in
poor condition, have it replaced or ad- Be sure the engine and ignition switch
justed. It is recommended that you visit a are off and that the parking brake is
NISSAN dealer for this service. engaged securely.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for
condition. CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to re-
move the spark plugs. An incorrect
socket can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, it is recom-
SDI1895 this service.
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace iridium-
tipped OA spark plugs as frequently as con-
ventional type spark plugs because they
last much longer. Follow the maintenance
log shown in the "Maintenance and sched-
ules" section of this manual. Do not service
iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or
regapping.
• Always replace spark plugs with rec-
ommended or equivalent ones.
8-14 Do-it-yourself
AIR CLEANER
• Never pour fuel into the throttle body IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

or attempt to start the engine with The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry
the air cleaner removed. Doing so of airborne dust and pollen particles and
could result in serious injury. reduces some objectionable outside
To remove the filter from the air cleaner, odors. The filter is located behind the glove
release the retaining clips O
A , then release box. For additional information, refer to the
the holders at the back of the unit. Pull the “Maintenance and schedules” section of
unit upward O B . this manual for change intervals.
The viscous paper type filter element If replacement is required, it is recom-
should not be cleaned and reused. Replace mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
the air filter according to the maintenance this service.
log shown in the “Maintenance and sched-
ules” section of this manual.
LDI2991
When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside
WARNING of the air cleaner housing and the cover
with a damp cloth.
• Operating the engine with the air
cleaner filter off can cause you or NOTE:
others to be burned. The air cleaner After installing a new air cleaner filter,
filter not only cleans the intake air, it make sure the air cleaner cover is
also stops the flame if the engine seated in the housing and latch the
backfires. If the air cleaner is not in- clips OA .
stalled and the engine backfires, you
could be burned. Never drive with the
air cleaner filter off. Be cautious
working on the engine when the air
cleaner is off.
Do-it-yourself 8-15
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
CLEANING 6. Push wiper on to windshield.

If your windshield is not clear after using
CAUTION
the windshield–washer or if a wiper blade
chatters when running, wax or other mate- • After wiper blade replacement, re-
rial may be on the blade or windshield. turn the wiper arm to its original po-
Clean the outside of the windshield with a sition; otherwise it may be damaged
washer fluid or a mild detergent. Your wind- when the hood is opened.
shield is clean if beads do not form when • Make sure the wiper blades contact
rinsing with clear water. the glass; otherwise the arms may be
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth damaged from wind pressure.
soaked in a washer fluid or a mild deter-
gent. Then rinse the blades with clear wa-
ter. If your windshield is still not clear after
cleaning the blades and using the wiper, LDI2584
install new windshield wiper blades. REPLACING
CAUTION Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
To replace the windshield wiper blades, fol-
Worn windshield wiper blades can low the procedure below:
damage the windshield and impair
driver vision. 1. Lift the wiper arm away from the
windshield.
2. Lift the release tab O
A .
3. Move the wiper blade O

B down and
remove.
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the
wiper arm.
5. Push the release tab down until it clicks.
8-16 Do-it-yourself
BRAKES
Rear window wiper blade If the brakes do not operate properly, have
the brakes checked. It is recommended
If checking or replacement is required, it is
service.
Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The front and rear (if so equipped) disc-
type brakes self-adjust every time the
brake pedal is applied. The rear drum-type
brakes (if so equipped) self-adjust every
time the parking brake is applied.
WARNING
Have your brake system checked if the
brake pedal height does not return to
normal. It is recommended that you
LDI2710
If you wax the surface of the hood, be care-
ful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle
O D . This may cause clogging or improper
windshield-washer operation. If wax gets
into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or
small pin O C .
Do-it-yourself 8-17
FUSES
Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have
audible wear indicators. When a brake pad
requires replacement, a high pitched
scraping or screeching sound will be heard
when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will
be heard whether or not the brake pedal is
depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.
Under some driving or climate conditions,
occasional brake squeak, squeal or other
noise may be heard. Occasional brake
noise during light to moderate stops is nor- LDI2997 LDI3440
mal and does not affect the function or
performance of the brake system. If any electrical equipment does not oper- ENGINE COMPARTMENT
ate, check for an open fuse.
Proper brake inspection intervals should WARNING
be followed. For additional information re- Fuses are used in the passenger compart-
ment and engine compartment. Spare Never use a fuse of higher or lower am-
garding brake inspections, refer to the ap-
fuses are provided and can be found in the perage rating than that specified on
propriate maintenance schedule informa-
passenger compartment fuse box. the fuse box cover. This could damage
tion in the "Maintenance and schedules"
the electrical system or electronic con-
section of this manual. When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is trol units or cause a fire.
installed in the fuse box securely.
If any electrical equipment does not come
NOTE: on, check for an open fuse.
Your vehicle may not be equipped with 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the head-
all fuses listed on the fuse label. light switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.
8-18 Do-it-yourself
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing For checking and replacing the fusible links,
the tab and lifting the cover up. it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.
The fuse puller is located in the center of
the fuse block in the passenger
compartment.
LDI3232
5. If the fuse is open O
A , replace it with a
new fuse O B .
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec-

trical system checked and repaired. It is
Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not oper-
ate and the fuses are in good condition,
check the fusible links in the holder. If any of
the fusible links are melted, replace only
with Genuine NISSAN parts.
Do-it-yourself 8-19
LDI3087 LDI2998
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT NOTE: 5. If the fuse is open O

C , replace it with an
equivalent good fuse O D .
WARNING The fuse box is located on the left wall of
the driver's side foot well, below the fuel 6. Push the fuse box cover to install.
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower door and hood release levers.
amperage rating than that specified on If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
the fuse box cover. This could damage 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the head- system checked and repaired. It is recom-
the electrical system or electronic con- light switch are OFF. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
trol units or cause a fire. this service.
2. Remove the fuse box cover O A with a
If any electrical equipment does not oper- suitable tool. Use a cloth to avoid dam- NOTE:
ate, check for an open fuse. aging the trim.
Your vehicle may not be equipped with
3. Locate the fuse that needs to be all fuses listed on the fuse label.
replaced.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller O
B .
8-20 Do-it-yourself
NOTE:
The fuse box is located on the passen-
ger’s side of the instrument panel.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the head-
light switch are OFF.
2. Remove the fuse box cover O A with a
suitable tool. Use a cloth to avoid dam-
aging the trim.
3. Locate the fuse that needs to be
replaced.
LDI3571 LDI3572
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT (with 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller O
B .
electronic parking brake) 5. If the fuse is open O

C , replace it with an
equivalent good fuse O D .
WARNING
6. Push the fuse box cover to install.
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
amperage rating than that specified on system checked and repaired. It is recom-
the fuse box cover. This could damage mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
the electrical system or electronic con- this service.
trol units or cause a fire.
NOTE:
ate, check for an open fuse. Your vehicle may not be equipped with
all fuses listed on the fuse label.
Do-it-yourself 8-21
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swal-
low the battery or removed parts.
• An improperly disposed battery can
harm the environment. Always con-
firm local regulations for battery
disposal.
• When changing batteries, do not let
dust or oil get on the components.
• There is danger of explosion if the
lithium battery is incorrectly re-
placed. Replace only with the same
LDI2998
or equivalent type.
Fusible links
ate and the fuses are in good condition,
check the fusible links in the holder. If any of
the fusible links are melted, replace only
with Genuine NISSAN parts.
For checking and replacing the fusible links,
it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
LDI2001
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
8-22 Do-it-yourself
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as 3. Replace the battery with a new one.
follows: Recommended battery: CR2032 or
1. Remove the mechanical key from the equivalent.
Intelligent Key. • Do not touch the internal circuit and
2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver O A electric terminals as doing so could
into the slit O
B of the corner and twist it cause a malfunction.
to separate the upper part from the • Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
lower part. Place a cloth over the screw- the battery across the contact points
driver to protect the casing. will seriously deplete the storage
capacity.
CAUTION • Make sure that the + side faces the
bottom of the lower part.
To prevent damage of the Intelligent
Key, do not compress the screwdriver 4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with
too hard when you insert the screw- OC and OD .
driver into the slit. 5. Operate the buttons to check the

operation.
If you need assistance for replacement, it is
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device
LDI2637 may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
Do-it-yourself 8-23
LIGHTS
NOTE: HEADLIGHTS • Do not leave the headlight assembly

Changes or modifications not expressly open without a bulb installed for a
For additional information on headlight
approved by the party responsible for long period of time. Dust, moisture,
bulb replacement, refer to the instructions
compliance could void the user’s author- smoke, etc. entering the headlight
outlined in this section.
ity to operate the equipment. body may affect bulb performance.
For Canada: Replacing the halogen headlight Remove the bulb from the headlight
This device contains licence-exempt assembly just before a replacement
bulb (if so equipped) bulb is installed.
transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply
with Innovation, Science and Economic The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type • Only touch the base when handling
Development Canada’s licence-exempt which uses a replaceable headlight (halo- the bulb. Never touch the glass enve-
RSS(s). Operation is subject to the fol- gen) bulb. They can be replaced from inside lope. Touching the glass could sig-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device the engine compartment without remov- nificantly affect bulb life and/or
may not cause interference. (2) This de- ing the headlight assembly. headlight performance.
vice must accept any interference, in- If headlight bulb replacement is required, It • High pressure halogen gas is sealed
cluding interference that may cause un- is recommended that you visit a NISSAN inside the halogen bulb. The bulb
desired operation of the device. dealer for this service. may break if the glass envelope is
scratched or the bulb is dropped.
CAUTION • Use the same number and wattage
• Aiming is not necessary after replac- as shown in the chart.
ing the bulb. When aiming adjust- Fog may temporarily form inside the lens
ment is necessary, it is recom- of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car
mended that you visit a NISSAN wash. A temperature difference between
dealer for this service. the inside and the outside of the lens
causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If
large drops of water collect inside the lens,
it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
8-24 Do-it-yourself
Replacing the LED headlight bulb EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
(if so equipped)
Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*¹
If LED headlight bulb replacement is re-
Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)*
quired, it is recommended that you visit a High 65 H9
NISSAN dealer for this service. Low 55 H11
Turn/Park 27/7 3457NAK
FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped) Side marker — —
Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)*
For additional information on fog light bulb High — —
replacement, refer to the instructions out- Low — —
lined in this section. Daytime Running Light (DRL)/Park — —
Turn — —
Side marker — —
Replacing the LED fog light bulb Fog light (if so equipped)* — —
Daytime Running Light (DRL) (if so equipped)* — —
If LED fog light bulb replacement is re- Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* — —
quired, it is recommended that you visit a Map light* 10 —
NISSAN dealer for this service. Room light* 8 —
Glove box light* 1.4 —
Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)* 5 —
Cargo light* 5 W5W
High-mounted stop light* — —
Rear combination light*
Stop/Tail — —
Turn 21 WY21W
Backup (reversing) 16 W16W
Side marker — —
Tail light* — —
License plate light* 5 W5W
* If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts
information.
Do-it-yourself 8-25
7. License plate light
8. High-mounted stop light
9. Tail light
10. Rear combination light
LDI3587 SDI1805
1. Map light Replacement procedures
2. Room light
3. Door mirror turn signal light (if so All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.
equipped) When replacing a bulb, first remove the
4. Headlight assembly lens, lamp and/or cover.
5. Fog light (if so equipped) Indicates bulb removal
6. Daytime Running Light (DRL) (if so
Indicates bulb installation
equipped)
8-26 Do-it-yourself
WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” under-inflated. If equipped, the sys- Loading Information label under the
(P. 6-3). tem also displays pressure of all tires “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire
TIRE PRESSURE (except the spare tire) on the display and Loading Information label is af-
screen by sending a signal from a fixed to the driver side center pillar.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor that is installed in each Tire pressures should be checked
(TPMS) wheel. regularly because:
WARNING The TPMS will activate only when the • Most tires naturally lose air over
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 time.
Radio waves could adversely af-
mph (25 km/h). Also, this system • Tires can lose air suddenly when
fect electric medical equipment.
may not detect a sudden drop in tire driven over potholes or other ob-
Those who use a pacemaker
pressure (for example a flat tire while jects or if the vehicle strikes a curb
should contact the electric medi-
driving). while parking.
cal equipment manufacturer for
the possible influences before For additional information, see “Low The tire pressures should be
use. tire pressure warning light” (P. 2-17), checked when the tires are cold. The
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System tires are considered COLD after the
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
(TPMS)” (P. 5-5) and “Flat tire” (P. 6-3). vehicle has been parked for 3 or
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
more hours, or driven less than 1 mile
It monitors tire pressure of all tires Tire inflation pressure (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
except the spare. When the low tire
Check the tire pressures (including The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert
pressure warning light is lit and the
the spare) often and always prior to provides visual and audible signals
“Tire Pressure Low – Add Air” warning
long distance trips. The recom- outside the vehicle for inflating tires
(if so equipped) appears in the ve-
mended tire pressure specifications to the recommended COLD tire
hicle information display, one or
are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
more of your tires is significantly
certification label or the Tire and
Do-it-yourself 8-27
pressure. For additional information, • The Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- • For additional information re-
see “TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert” ing (GVWR) is located on the garding tires, refer to “Impor-
(P. 5-8). F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica- tant Tire Safety Information”
Incorrect tire pressure, including tion label. The vehicle weight (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
under inflation, may adversely af- capacity is indicated on the Tire tion” (Canada) in the Warranty
fect tire life and vehicle handling. and Loading Information label. Information Booklet.
Do not load your vehicle be-
WARNING yond this capacity. Overload-
ing your vehicle may result in
• Improperly inflated tires can reduced tire life, unsafe operat-
fail suddenly and cause an ing conditions due to prema-
accident. ture tire failure, or unfavorable
handling characteristics and
could also lead to a serious ac-
cident. Loading beyond the
specified capacity may also re-
sult in failure of other vehicle
components.
• Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load
your vehicle, use a tire pressure
gauge to ensure that the tire
pressures are at the specified
level.
8-28 Do-it-yourself
hicle handling, driveability, tire
noise, etc., up to the vehicle's
GVWR.
䊊
5 Tire size - For additional informa-
tion, see “Tire labeling” (P. 8-30).
䊊
6 Spare tire size.
LDI2007
Tire and Loading Information 䊊

4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires
label to this pressure when the tires
䊊1 Seating capacity: The maximum are cold. Tires are considered
number of occupants that can COLD after the vehicle has been
be seated in the vehicle. parked for 3 or more hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at
䊊
2 Vehicle load limit: For additional
moderate speeds. The recom-
information, see “Vehicle loading
mended cold tire inflation is set
information” (P. 10-15).
by the manufacturer to provide
䊊
3 Original tire size: The size of the the best balance of tire wear, ve-
tires originally installed on the ve-
hicle at the factory.
Do-it-yourself 8-29
4. Read the tire pressure on the
gauge stem and compare to the
specification shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core
of the valve stem briefly with the
tip of the gauge stem to release
pressure. Recheck the pressure
and add or release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
LDI0393 WDI0394
7. Check the pressure of all other Example
Checking tire pressure tires, including the spare.
1. Remove the valve stem cap from TIRE LABELING
the tire. Size Cold Tire Infla- Federal law requires tire manufac-
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely tion Pressure turers to place standardized infor-
onto the valve stem. Do not press Front and Rear mation on the sidewall of all tires.
too hard or force the valve stem Original Tire: This information identifies and de-
32 psi, 220 kPa scribes the fundamental character-
sideways, or air will escape. If the P205/55R17 91V
hissing sound of air escaping from P205/60R16 92H istics of the tire and also provides the
the tire is heard while checking the Spare Tire: Tire Identification Number (TIN) for
pressure, reposition the gauge to (Temporary) safety standard certification. The TIN
60 psi, 420 kPa can be used to identify the tire in
eliminate this leakage. T125/90D15
T125/80D16 case of a recall.
3. Remove the gauge.
8-30 Do-it-yourself
6. Two- or three-digit number (95):
This number is the tire's load in-
dex. It is a measurement of how
much weight each tire can sup-
port. You may not find this infor-
mation on all tires because it is
not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should
not drive the vehicle faster than
the tire speed rating.
WDI0395
Example
O
1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 3. Two-digit number (65): This num-
95H) ber, known as the aspect ratio,
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de- gives the tire's ratio of height to
signed for passenger vehicles (not width.
all tires have this information). 4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
2. Three-digit number (215): This 5. Two-digit number (15): This num-
number gives the width in milli- ber is the wheel or rim diameter in
meters of the tire from sidewall inches.
edge to sidewall edge.
Do-it-yourself 8-31
O
3 Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of

rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the materials in the tire, which in-
clude steel, nylon, polyester and
others.
O
4 Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
LDI2786 of air pressure that should be put in
Example the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
O TIN (Tire Identification Number)
2 3. Two-digit code: Tire size. permissible inflation pressure.
for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX O
5 Maximum load rating
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
XXX XXXX) (Optional). This number indicates the maxi-
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart- mum load in kilograms and pounds
5. Four numbers represent the
ment Of Transportation”. The that can be carried by the tire. When
week and year the tire was built.
symbol can be placed above, be- replacing the tires on the vehicle, al-
For example, the numbers 3103
low or to the left or right of the Tire ways use a tire that has the same
means the 31st week of 2003. If
Identification Number. load rating as the factory installed
these numbers are missing then
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer's look on the other sidewall of the tire.
identification mark. tire.
8-32 Do-it-yourself
O
6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type” lar side that must always face out- • Always use tires of the same type,
Indicates whether the tire requires ward when mounted on a vehicle. size, brand, construction and tread
pattern on all four wheels. Failure to
an inner tube (“tube type”) or not TYPES OF TIRES do so may result in a circumference
(“tubeless”). difference between tires on the front
WARNING and rear axles which can cause the
O
7 The word “radial”
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys-
• When changing or replacing tires, be tem to malfunction resulting in per-
The word “radial” is shown if the tire sure all four tires are of the same type sonal injury or death, excessive tire
has radial structure. (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) wear and may damage the transmis-
and construction. A NISSAN dealer
O
8 Manufacturer or brand name
may be able to help you with infor-
sion and differential gears.
• For additional information regarding
Manufacturer or brand name is mation about tire type, size, speed
rating and availability. tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
shown. Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-
• Replacement tires may have a lower formation” (Canada) in the Warranty
speed rating than the factory Information Booklet.
Other Tire-related Terminology equipped tires, and may not match
In addition to the many terms that the potential maximum vehicle All season tires
are defined throughout this section, speed. Never exceed the maximum
speed rating of the tire. NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some
Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the models to provide good performance all
• Replacing tires with those not origi-
sidewall that contains a whitewall, nally specified by NISSAN could af- year, including snowy and icy road condi-
bears white lettering or bears fect the proper operation of the low tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL
tire pressure warning system. SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.
manufacturer, brand, and/or model
Snow tires have better snow traction than
name molding that is higher or All Season tires and may be more appropri-
deeper than the same molding on ate in some areas.
the other sidewall of the tire, or (2)
the outward facing sidewall of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particu-
Do-it-yourself 8-33
Summer tires states, provinces and territories prohibit to the fenders or underbody. If possible,
their use. Check local laws before installing avoid fully loading your vehicle when using
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some
studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced
models to provide superior performance
of studded snow tires on wet or dry sur- speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be
on dry roads. Summer tire performance is
faces may be poorer than that of non- damaged and/or vehicle handling and
substantially reduced in snow and ice.
studded snow tires. performance may be adversely affected.
Summer tires do not have the tire traction
rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall. TIRE CHAINS Tire chains must be installed only on the
front wheels and not on the rear wheels.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac-
or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the cording to location. Check the local laws Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY
use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all before installing tire chains. When installing USE ONLY spare tire.
four wheels. tire chains, make sure they are the proper Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving
size for the tires on your vehicle and are with chains in such conditions can cause
Snow tires installed according to the chain manufac- damage to the various mechanisms of the
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to turer's suggestions. Use only SAE class “S” vehicle due to some overstress.
select tires equivalent in size and load rat- chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-
ing to the original equipment tires. If you do hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-
not, it can adversely affect the safety and ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains
handling of your vehicle. are designed to meet the minimum clear-
ances between the tire and the closest ve-
Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat- hicle suspension or body component re-
ings than factory equipped tires and may quired to accommodate the use of a
not match the potential maximum vehicle winter traction device (tire chains or
speed. Never exceed the maximum speed cables). The minimum clearances are de-
rating of the tire. termined using the factory equipped tires.
If you install snow tires, they must be the Other types may damage your vehicle. Use
same size, brand, construction and tread chain tensioners when recommended by
pattern on all four wheels. the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a
tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain
For additional traction on icy roads, stud-
must be secured or removed to prevent
ded tires may be used. However, some
the possibility of whipping action damage
8-34 Do-it-yourself
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tight-
ened to specifications at all times.
It is recommended that wheel nuts
be tightened to specification at
each tire rotation interval.
WARNING
• After rotating the tires, check

WDI0258 and adjust the tire pressure. WDI0259
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES • Retighten the wheel nuts when Tire wear and damage
Tire rotation the vehicle has been driven for 1. Wear indicator
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
NISSAN recommends rotating the 2. Location mark
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
• Do not include the spare tire in
For additional information on the tire the tire rotation.
replacing procedures, see “Flat tire”
• For additional information re-
(P. 6-3).
garding tires, refer to “Impor-
As soon as possible, tighten the tant Tire Safety Information”
wheel nuts to the specified torque (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
with a torque wrench. tion” (Canada) in the Warranty
Information Booklet.
Do-it-yourself 8-35
WARNING • Improper service of the spare WARNING
tire may result in serious per- • The use of tires other than those rec-
• Tires should be periodically in- sonal injury. If it is necessary to ommended or the mixed use of tires
spected for wear, cracking, repair the spare tire, it is rec- of different brands, construction
bulging or objects caught in ommended that you visit a (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread
patterns can adversely affect the
the tread. If excessive wear, NISSAN dealer for this service. ride, braking, handling, Vehicle Dy-
cracks, bulging or deep cuts • For additional information re- namic Control (VDC) system, ground
are found, the tire(s) should be garding tires, refer to “Impor- clearance, body-to-tire clearance,
replaced. tire chain clearance, speedometer
tant Tire Safety Information” calibration, headlight aim and bum-
• The original tires have built-in (US) or “Tire Safety Informa- per height. Some of these effects
tread wear indicators. When tion” (Canada) in the Warranty may lead to accidents and could re-
the wear indicators are visible, Information Booklet. sult in serious personal injury.
• If your vehicle was originally
the tire(s) should be replaced.
equipped with four tires that were
• Tires degrade with age and Replacing wheels and tires the same size and you are only re-
use. Have tires, including the When replacing a tire, use the same size, placing two of the four tires, install
tread design, speed rating and load carry- the new tires on the rear axle. Placing
spare, over 6 years old checked ing capacity as originally equipped. For ad- new tires on the front axle may cause
by a qualified technician be- ditional information, see “Wheels and tires” loss of vehicle control in some driving
cause some tire damage may (P. 10-10). conditions and cause an accident
not be obvious. Replace the and personal injury.
tires as necessary to prevent
tire failure and possible per-
sonal injury.
8-36 Do-it-yourself
• If the wheels are changed for any • When replacing the TPMS sensor, the Wheel balance
reason, always replace with wheels ID registration may be required. It is Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle
which have the same off-set dimen- recommended that you visit a handling and tire life. Even with regular use,
sion. Wheels of a different off-set NISSAN dealer for ID registration. wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,
could cause premature tire wear, de- • Do not use a valve stem cap that is they should be balanced as required.
grade vehicle handling characteris- not specified by NISSAN. The valve
tics, affect the VDC system and/or in- Wheel balance service should be per-
stem cap may become stuck. formed with the wheels off the vehicle.
terference with the brake discs/ • Be sure that the valve stem caps are
drums. Such interference can lead to Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve could lead to mechanical damage.
decreased braking efficiency and/or may be clogged up with dirt and
early brake pad wear. For additional cause a malfunction or loss of
information, see “Wheels and tires” Care of wheels
pressure.
(P. 10-10). • Wash the wheels when washing the ve-
• Do not install a damaged or de- hicle to maintain their appearance.
• When using a wheel without the formed wheel or tire even if it has
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS • Clean the inner side of the wheels when
been repaired. Such wheels or tires
will not function and the low tire the wheel is changed or the underside of
could have structural damage and
pressure warning light will flash for the vehicle is washed.
could fail without warning.
approximately 1 minute. The light will • Do not use abrasive cleaners when
remain on after 1 minute. Have your • The use of retread tires is not
washing the wheels.
tires replaced and/or TPMS system recommended.
• Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
reset as soon as possible. It is recom- • For additional information regarding
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss
mended that you visit a NISSAN tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
dealer for this service. Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-
formation” (Canada) in the Warranty • NISSAN recommends waxing the road
• Replacing tires with those not origi- wheels to protect against road salt in ar-
nally specified by NISSAN could af- Information Booklet.
eas where it is used during winter.
fect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
• The TPMS sensor may be damaged if
it is not handled correctly. Be careful
when handling the TPMS sensor.
Do-it-yourself 8-37
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY • When driving on roads covered with CAUTION
spare tire) snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on the • Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-
When using a wheel without the TPMS such RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains
as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function. rear wheels and the original tire used
on the front wheels (drive wheels). will not fit properly and may cause
Observe the following precautions if the damage to the vehicle.
• Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster • Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be rate than the standard tire. Replace spare tire is smaller than the original
damaged or involved in an accident: the spare tire as soon as the tread tire, ground clearance is reduced. To
wear indicators appear. avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
WARNING drive over obstacles. Also, do not
• Do not use the spare tire on other
drive the vehicle through an auto-
• The spare tire should be used for vehicles.
matic car wash since it may get
emergency use only. It should be re- • Do not use more than one spare tire caught.
placed with the standard tire at the at the same time.
first opportunity to avoid possible • Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-
tire or differential damage. RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.
• Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid
sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving.
• Periodically check spare tire inflation
pressure. Always keep the pressure
of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).
• With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire installed do not drive the vehicle
at speeds faster than 50 mph (80
km/h).
8-38 Do-it-yourself
9 Maintenance and schedules
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Emission control system maintenance: . . . . . . 9-6
Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Chassis and body maintenance: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Additional Maintenance Items for
Explanation of general maintenance severe operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 1.6L 4 cylinder (HR16DE engine model) . . . . . . . . 9-7
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Some day-to-day and regular mainte- SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE During the normal day-to-day operation of
nance is essential to maintain your vehicle the vehicle, general maintenance should
The maintenance items listed in this sec-
good mechanical condition, as well as its be performed regularly as prescribed in
tion are required to be serviced at regular
emissions and engine performance. this section. If you detect any unusual
intervals. However under severe driving
It is the owner's responsibility to make sure sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to
conditions, additional or more frequent
that the scheduled maintenance, as well as check for the cause or have it checked
maintenance will be required.
general maintenance, is performed. promptly. In addition, it is recommended
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one that repairs are required.
who can ensure that your vehicle receives If maintenance service is required or your
proper maintenance. You are a vital link in vehicle appears to malfunction, have the When performing any checks or mainte-
the maintenance chain. systems checked and serviced. It is recom- nance work, closely observe the “Mainte-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for nance precautions” (P. 8-2).
GENERAL MAINTENANCE this service.
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
General maintenance includes those items NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe- MAINTENANCE ITEMS
which should be checked during normal cialists and are kept up-to-date with the
day-to-day operation. They are essential latest service information through techni- WARNING
for proper vehicle operation. It is your re- cal bulletins, service tips and training pro-
sponsibility to perform these procedures grams. They are fully qualified to work on Failure to follow the procedures listed
regularly as prescribed. NISSAN vehicles before work begins. within this section may result in per-
Performing general maintenance checks If your vehicle is involved in a collision, it is sonal injury.
requires minimal mechanical skill and only recommended that you ask your NISSAN Additional information on the following
a few general automotive tools. dealer where the nearest NISSAN Certified items with “ * ” is found in the “Do-it-
These checks or inspections can be done Collision Center is located, or go to yourself ” section of this manual.
by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you http://collision.nissanusa.com.
prefer, a NISSAN dealer. You can be confident that a NISSAN deal- Outside the vehicle
er's service department can perform the The maintenance items listed here should
service needed to meet the maintenance be performed from time to time, unless
requirements on your vehicle. otherwise specified.
9-2 Maintenance and schedules

Doors and engine hood: Check that the Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge shield repaired by a NISSAN dealer, or a
doors and engine hood operate properly. often and always prior to long distance NISSAN Certified Collision Center. To locate
Also ensure that all latches lock securely. trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all a collision center in your area, refer to
Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers tires, including the spare, to the pressure http://collision.nissanusa.com.
and links if necessary. Make sure that the specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts Windshield wiper blades*: Check for
secondary latch keeps the hood from or excessive wear. cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.
opening when the primary latch is Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
released. tire pressure sensor: It is recommended Inside the vehicle
When driving in areas using road salt or that you replace the tire pressure sensor
The maintenance items listed here should
other corrosive materials, check lubrica- assembly when the tires are replaced due
be checked on a regular basis, such as
tion frequently. to wear or age.
when performing scheduled maintenance,
Check that the gas stays or struts properly Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve- cleaning the vehicle, etc.
and securely hold the hood, trunk, or rear hicle should pull to either side while driving
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for
hatch fully open. If the hood, trunk, or rear on a straight and level road, or if you detect
smooth operation and make sure the
hatch is not held open, have the gas stays uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may
pedal does not catch or require uneven
or struts replaced. be a need for wheel alignment. If the steer-
effort. Keep the floor mat away from the
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high-
pedal.
basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop way speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed. Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth
lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other
operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes
lights are all operating properly and in- For additional information regarding tires,
down further than normal, the pedal feels
stalled securely. Also check headlight aim. refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check- (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in
to stop, have your vehicle checked imme-
ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are the Warranty Information Booklet.
diately. It is recommended that you visit a
missing, and check for any loose wheel Windshield: Clean the windshield on a NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the
nuts. Tighten if necessary. regular basis. Check the windshield at least floor mat away from the pedal.
Tire rotation*: Rotate tires at the specified every six months for cracks or other dam-
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull
interval shown in the maintenance age. Have a damaged windshield repaired
the vehicle to one side when applied.
schedule. by a qualified repair facility. It is recom-
mended that you have a damaged wind-
Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Continuously Variable Transmission Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all NOTE:
(CVT) P (Park) position mechanism: On a warning lights and chimes are operating Care should be taken to avoid situa-
fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held properly. tions that can lead to potential bat-
securely with the shift lever in the P (Park) Windshield defroster: Check that the air tery discharge and potential no-start
position without applying any brakes. comes out of the defroster outlets properly conditions such as:
Parking brake: Check the parking brake and in sufficient quantity when operating 1. Installation or extended use of elec-
operation regularly. The vehicle should be the heater or air conditioner. tronic accessories that consume bat-
securely held on a fairly steep hill with only Windshield wiper and washer*: Check tery power when the engine is not
the parking brake applied. If the parking that the wipers and washer operate prop- running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
brake needs adjustment, it is recom- erly and that the wipers do not streak. players, etc.).
this service. 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
Under the hood and vehicle only driven short distances.
Seats: Check seat position controls such
The maintenance items listed here should In these cases, the battery may need to
as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to
be checked periodically (for example, each be charged to maintain battery health.
ensure they operate smoothly and all
time you check the engine oil or refuel).
latches lock securely in every position. Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake
Check that the head restraints/headrests Battery*:This vehicle is equipped with a fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines
move up and down smoothly and the locks sealed maintenance free battery. It is rec- on the reservoir.
(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
positions. for service. Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant
level when the engine is cold.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat
belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, Engine drive belt*: Make sure the drive belt
adjusters and retractors) operate properly is not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
and smoothly, and are installed securely. Engine oil level*: Check the level after
Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, parking the vehicle on a level surface with
wear or damage. the engine off. Wait more than 15 minutes
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.
steering system, such as excessive free Engine valve clearance*: Inspect only if
play, hard steering or strange noises. valve noise increases.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no Underbody: The underbody is frequently The following descriptions are provided to
loose supports, cracks or holes. If the exposed to corrosive substances such as give you a better understanding of the
sound of the exhaust seems unusual or those used on icy roads or to control dust. It scheduled maintenance items that should
there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immedi- is very important to remove these sub- be regularly checked or replaced. The
ately have the exhaust system inspected. It stances from the underbody, otherwise maintenance schedule indicates at which
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel mileage/time intervals each item requires
dealer for this service. For additional infor- lines and exhaust system. At the end of service.
mation, see “Exhaust gas (carbon monox- winter, the underbody should be thor- In addition to scheduled maintenance,
ide)” (P. 5-4). oughly flushed with plain water, in those your vehicle requires that some items be
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for areas where mud and dirt may have accu- checked during normal day-to-day opera-
fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the mulated. For additional information, see tion. For additional information, see “Gen-
vehicle has been parked for a while. Water “Cleaning exterior” (P. 7-2). eral maintenance” (P. 9-2).
dripping from the air conditioner after use Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that Items marked with “*” are recommended
is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if there is adequate fluid in the reservoir. by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.
fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause You are not required to perform mainte-
and have it corrected immediately. nance on these items in order to maintain
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the the warranties which come with your
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, NISSAN. Other maintenance items and in-
leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. tervals are required.
Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor- When applicable, additional information
mation, rot or loose connections. can be found in the “Do-it-yourself ” section
of this manual.

NOTE: additional information on the proper mix- Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings:
ture for your area, see “Engine cooling sys- Check for wear, deterioration and fluid
NISSAN does not advocate the use of tem” (P. 8-4). leaks. Replace any deteriorated or dam-
non-OEM approved aftermarket flush- aged parts immediately.
ing systems and strongly advises NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant
against performing these services on a or the use of non-distilled water may re- Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex-
NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar- duce the recommended service interval haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,
ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap- of the coolant. cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten
proved chemicals or solvents, the use of Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil connections or replace parts as necessary.
which has not been validated by NISSAN. and oil filter at the specified intervals. For Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids, recommended oil grade and viscosity see pension parts, drive shaft boots: Check
grease, and refrigerant, see “Recom- “Recommended fluids/lubricants and ca- for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil
mended fluids/lubricants and capaci- pacities” (P. 10-2). or grease. Under severe driving conditions,
ties” (P. 10-2). Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping inspect more frequently.
and connections for leaks, looseness, or Tire rotation: Rotate tires at the specified
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM deterioration. Tighten connections or re- interval shown in the maintenance sched-
MAINTENANCE: place parts as necessary. ule. When rotating tires, check for damage
Drive belt*: Check engine drive belt for Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals. and uneven wear. Replace if necessary.
wear, fraying or cracking and for proper Install new plugs of the type as originally Transmission fluid/oil: Visually inspect for
tension. Replace any damaged drive belt. equipped. signs of leakage at specified intervals.
Engine air filter: Replace at specified inter- If using a car-top carrier, or driving on
vals. When driving for prolonged periods in CHASSIS AND BODY
rough or muddy roads, replace the CVT
dusty conditions, check/replace the filter MAINTENANCE: fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or re-
more frequently. Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for quest the dealer to inspect the fluid dete-
Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the proper installation. Check for chafing, rioration data using a CONSULT. If the dete-
specified interval. When adding or replac- cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking. rioration data is more than 210000, replace
ing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine Replace any deteriorated or damaged the CVT fluid.
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) parts immediately.
or equivalent with the proper mixture. For

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
To help ensure smooth, safe and economi- • Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles
cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte- (16 km) with outside temperatures re-
nance schedules that may be used, de- maining below freezing.
pending upon the conditions in which you • Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go
usually drive. These schedules contain “rush hour” traffic.
both distance and time intervals, up to • Extensive idling and/or low speed driving
120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months. For for long distances, such as police, taxi or
most people, the odometer reading will indoor-to-door delivery use.
dicate when service is needed. However, if
you drive very little, your vehicle should be • Driving in dusty conditions.
serviced at the regular time intervals • Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
shown in the schedule. roads.
After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 • Using a car-top carrier.
months, continue maintenance at the If your vehicle is mostly operated under the
same mileage/time intervals. severe conditions, follow the severe main-
tenance intervals shown in the mainte-
ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS nance schedule.
FOR SEVERE OPERATING
CONDITIONS
Additional maintenance items for severe
operating conditions should be per-
formed on vehicles that are driven under
especially demanding conditions. Addi-
tional maintenance items should be per-
formed if you primarily operate your vehicle
under the following conditions:
• Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).

1.6L 4 CYLINDER (HR16DE engine 5,000 miles/(8,000 km)/6 months 7,500 miles/(12,000 km)/6 months
model) Perform at number of miles, kilometers or Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
The following shows the maintenance months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first.
schedule. Standard maintenance: Standard maintenance:
Choose the maintenance schedule Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Inspections:
needed based on your vehicle driving • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
conditions. Severe maintenance:
hood lift supports
After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 Inspections:
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
months, continue maintenance at the • Brake pads & rotors power steering, coolant)
same mileage/time interval. • Drums & linings • Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Steering gear & linkage • Engine air filter
• Axle & suspension parts • Suspension components (shocks, sub-
• Exhaust system frame, tie rods)
• Drive shaft boots • Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
hood lift supports
Essentials:
• Replace engine oil & filter
power steering, coolant)
• Tire rotation
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter Severe maintenance:
• Suspension components (shocks, sub- Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
frame, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:

10,000 miles/(16,000 km)/ Essentials: 15,000 miles/(24,000 km)/
12 months • Replace engine oil & filter 12 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Replace brake fluid Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance: Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Inspections:
Severe maintenance: • Brake lines & cables
• Brake pads & rotors
Inspections:
• Drums & linings
• Drive shaft boots
• Drums & linings
• CVT fluid
• Steering gear & linkage
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
• Axle & suspension parts
hood lift supports
• Exhaust system
• Drive shaft boots power steering, coolant)
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Engine drive belt and hose inspections
hood lift supports
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
frame, tie rods) Essentials:
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Replace engine oil & filter
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth • Replace in-cabin microfilter
• Tire rotation

Severe maintenance: 15,000 miles/(24,000 km)/ Essentials:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval 18 months • Replace engine oil & filter
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Drums & linings
• Exhaust system
hood lift supports
frame, tie rods)

Severe maintenance: • Intelligent key battery
Inspections:
hood lift supports
• Drums & linings power steering, coolant)
• Steering gear & linkage • Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Axle & suspension parts • Engine air filter
• Exhaust system • Suspension components (shocks, sub-
• Drive shaft boots frame, tie rods)
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Battery terminals and cables, battery test
hood lift supports • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Tire rotation
• Suspension components (shocks, sub- Severe maintenance:
frame, tie rods) Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
Inspections:
• Drums & linings
• Fuel tank vapor vent system*
• Drums & linings
• Fuel lines/connections*
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear and linkage
• Exhaust system
• Axle and suspension parts
hood lift supports • CVT fluid
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
power steering, coolant) hood lift supports
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
frame, tie rods) • Engine air filter
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
Essentials: 30,000 miles/(48,000 km)/ Essentials:
• Replace engine oil & filter 36 months • Replace engine oil & filter
• Replace engine air filter (1) Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Replace brake fluid
• Replace brake fluid months, whichever comes first.
• Replace in-cabin microfilter Standard maintenance:
• Tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, • Brake pads & rotors
more frequent maintenance may be
• Drums & linings
required.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*”
are recommended by NISSAN for reliable
vehicle operation. The owner need not per- • Exhaust system
form such maintenance in order to main- • Drive shaft boots
tain the emission warranty or manufac- • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
turer recall liability. Other maintenance hood lift supports
items and intervals are required. • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
frame, tie rods)

Severe maintenance: • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors power steering, coolant)
• Drums & linings • Engine drive belt and hose inspections
hood lift supports
Essentials:
• Tire rotation
frame, tie rods)

Inspections:
• Drums & linings
• Drums & linings
• CVT fluid
hood lift supports
• Exhaust system
• Drive shaft boots power steering, coolant)
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Engine drive belt and hose inspections
hood lift supports
frame, tie rods)
frame, tie rods) Essentials:
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Replace engine oil & filter
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth • Replace in-cabin microfilter
• Replace intelligent key battery
• Tire rotation
Severe maintenance: 45,000 miles/(72,000 km)/ Essentials:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval 54 months • Replace engine oil & filter
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Drums & linings
• Exhaust system
hood lift supports
frame, tie rods)

hood lift supports
Inspections:
hood lift supports
Essentials:
• Tire rotation
frame, tie rods)

Inspections:
• Drums & linings
• Engine drive belt*
• Drums & linings
• Fuel tank vapor vent system hoses*
• Exhaust system
• Exhaust system
hood lift supports • Drive shaft boots
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • CVT fluid
power steering, coolant) • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections hood lift supports
• Engine air filter • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
frame, tie rods) • Hose inspections
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Engine air filter
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth • Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)

• Battery terminals and cables, battery test 60,000 miles/(96,000 km)/ Essential:
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth 72 months • Replace engine oil & filter
Essentials: Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Replace brake fluid
• Replace engine air filter (1) months, whichever comes first. • Replace CVT fluid
• Replace brake fluid Standard maintenance:
• Replace engine oil & filter Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
• Replace in-cabin microfilter
Severe maintenance:
• Tire rotation
Inspections:
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval • Drums & linings
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, • Steering gear & linkage
more frequent maintenance may be • Axle & suspension parts
required.
• Exhaust system
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” • Drive shaft boots
vehicle operation. The owner need not per-
hood lift supports
form such maintenance in order to main-
tain the emission warranty or manufac- • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
turer recall liability. Other maintenance power steering, coolant)
items and intervals are required. • Engine drive belt and hose inspections
frame, tie rods)

hood lift supports
Inspections:
hood lift supports
Essentials:
• Tire rotation

Inspections:
• Drums & linings
• Drums & linings
• CVT fluid
• Exhaust system
hood lift supports
hood lift supports
• Hose inspections
frame, tie rods)
frame, tie rods)

• Replace in-cabin microfilter Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
• Tire rotation months, whichever comes first.
Severe maintenance: Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
form such maintenance in order to main- • Brake pads & rotors
tain the emission warranty or manufac- • Drums & linings
turer recall liability. Other maintenance • Steering gear & linkage
items and intervals are required. • Axle & suspension parts
• Exhaust system
hood lift supports
frame, tie rods)

hood lift supports
Inspections:
hood lift supports
Essentials:
• Tire rotation
frame, tie rods)

Inspections:
• Drums & linings
• Drums & linings
• Exhaust system
• Exhaust system
frame, tie rods)

• Battery terminals and cables, battery test 90,000 miles/(144,000 km)/ Essentials:
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth 108 months • Replace engine oil & filter
Essentials: Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Replace brake fluid
• Replace engine air filter (1) months, whichever comes first.
• Replace brake fluid Standard maintenance:
• Replace engine oil & filter Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
• Tire rotation Inspections:
Severe maintenance:
• Drums & linings
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval • Steering gear & linkage
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, • Axle & suspension parts
more frequent maintenance may be • Exhaust system
required.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
are recommended by NISSAN for reliable hood lift supports
tain the emission warranty or manufac-
turer recall liability. Other maintenance • Engine drive belt and hose inspections
items and intervals are required. • Engine air filter
frame, tie rods)

hood lift supports
Inspections:
hood lift supports
Essentials:
• Tire rotation
frame, tie rods)

Inspections:
• Drums & linings
• Drums & linings
• CVT fluid
• Exhaust system
hood lift supports
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ power steering, coolant)
hood lift supports
• Hose inspections
frame, tie rods)
frame, tie rods)

• Replace in-cabin microfilter Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
• Replace spark plugs (1) (2) months, whichever comes first.
• Replace engine coolant * (3) Standard maintenance:
• Tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
(1) Replace spark plug when the plug gap • Brake pads & rotors
exceeds 0.053 in (1.35 mm) even if within
• Drums & linings
specified replacement mileage.
(2) Performed based on mileage only.
(3) First replacement interval is 105,000 • Exhaust system
miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first
replacement, replace every 75,000 miles
(120,000 km) or 60 months. • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
form such maintenance in order to main- • Engine drive belt and hose inspections
tain the emission warranty or manufac- • Engine air filter
turer recall liability. Other maintenance • Suspension components (shocks, sub-
items and intervals are required. frame, tie rods)

hood lift supports
Inspections:
hood lift supports
Essentials:
• Tire rotation

Inspections:
• Drums & linings
• Drums & linings
• Exhaust system
• Exhaust system
frame, tie rods)

Essentials:
• Replace engine air filter (1)
• Replace brake fluid
• Tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions,
more frequent maintenance may be
required.
tain the emission warranty or manufac-
turer recall liability. Other maintenance
items and intervals are required.

MEMO

10 Technical and consumer information
Recommended fluids/lubricants and Tire and Loading Information label . . . . . . . . . 10-13

capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Air conditioner specification label . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Engine oil and oil filter Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Air conditioner system refrigerant and Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Securing the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
When traveling or registering in another Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Vehicle identification number
Event Data Recorders (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Owner's Manual/Service Manual order
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . 10-12 information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . 10-12
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (approximate)
Fluid type Metric US Imperial Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Measure Measure Measure
Fuel 41 L 10-7/8 gal 9 gal • For additional information, see “Fuel recommendation” (P. 10-4).
• Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” (or equivalent) is recom-
With oil filter mended.
4.1 L 4-3/8 qt 3-5/8 qt
Engine oil*1 change • If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a synthetic
Drain and refill 0W-20 GF-5 SN motor oil (or engine oil) may be used. Damage
1*: For additional information, caused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other than as rec-
see “Engine oil” (P. 8-5). Without oil filter ommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited
3.8 L 4 qt 3-3/8 qt Warranty. For additional information, see “Engine oil and oil filter
change
recommendations” (P. 10-7).
Engine coolant • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
6.95 L 1-7/8 gal 1-1/2 gal
with reservoir or equivalent
• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3
• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or
equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids.
For additional information, see “Continu-
Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid ously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid”
NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids
(P. 8-9).
other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty outlined in your Warranty Information
Booklet.
Refill to the proper level according to the • Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid, available in
Brake fluid
instructions, see "Brake fluid” (P. 8-9). mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer, or equivalent DOT 3.
10-2 Technical and consumer information

Capacity (approximate)
Fluid type Metric US Imperial Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Measure Measure Measure
Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
• HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)
Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — • For additional information, see “Air conditioner system refriger-
ant and oil recommendations” (P. 10-8).
• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type PAG or equivalent
Air conditioning system oil — — — • For additional information, see “Air conditioner system refriger-
ant and oil recommendations” (P. 10-8).
• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & An-
Windshield-washer fluid 4.2 L 1 1/8 gal 7/8 gal
tifreeze or equivalent
Technical and consumer information 10-3

FUEL RECOMMENDATION • Do not use a fuel containing more • U.S. government regulations require
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your ethanol dispensing pumps to be
tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock vehicle is not designed to run on a identified by a small, square, orange
Index) number (Research octane number fuel containing more than 15% etha- and black label with the common ab-
91). nol. Using a fuel containing more breviation or the appropriate per-
than 15% ethanol in a vehicle not spe- centage for that region.
CAUTION cifically designed for a fuel contain-
ing more than 15% ethanol can ad- Gasoline specifications
• Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door versely affect the emission control
label can operate on E-85. Fuel sys- devices and systems of the vehicle. NISSAN recommends using gasoline that
tem or other damage can occur if Damage caused by such fuel is not meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)
E-85 is used in vehicles that are not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle specifications where it is available. Many of
designed to run on E-85. Limited Warranty. the automobile manufacturers developed
this specification to improve emission con-
• Using a fuel other than that specified • Do not use fuel that contains the oc- trol system and vehicle performance. Ask
could adversely affect the emission tane booster methylcyclopentadi- your service station manager if the gaso-
control system, and may also affect enyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). line meets the WWFC specifications.
the warranty coverage. Using fuel containing MMT may ad-
• Under no circumstances should a versely affect vehicle performance Reformulated gasoline
leaded gasoline be used, because and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel
this will damage the three-way dispensers are labeled to indicate Some fuel suppliers are now producing re-
catalyst. MMT content, so you may have to formulated gasolines. These gasolines are
consult your gasoline retailer for specially designed to reduce vehicle emis-
more details. Note that Federal and sions. NISSAN supports efforts towards
California laws prohibit the use of cleaner air and suggests that you use re-
MMT in reformulated gasoline. formulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates • If a methanol blend is used, it should E–15 fuel
contain no more than 5% methanol
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain- E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
ing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.
should also contain a suitable amount
Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed
of appropriate cosolvents and corro-
or without advertising their presence. to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regula-
sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tions require fuel ethanol dispensing
lated with appropriate cosolvents and
fuels of which the oxygenate content and pumps to be identified with small, square,
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can- orange and black label with the common
blends may cause fuel system damage
not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask abbreviation or the appropriate percent-
and/or vehicle performance problems.
your service station manager. age for that region.
At this time, sufficient data is not avail-
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, able to ensure that all methanol blends
please take the following precautions as are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles. E–85 fuel
the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%
If any driveability problems such as engine
performance problems and/or fuel system fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.
stalling and difficult hot-starting are expe-
damage. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel
rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,
• The fuel should be unleaded and have immediately change to a non-oxygenate Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve-
an octane rating no lower than that fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. hicle. U.S. government regulations require
recommended for unleaded gasoline. fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-
Take care not to spill gasoline during re- tified by a small, square, orange and black
• If an oxygenate-blend other than
fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates label with the common abbreviation or the
methanol blend is used, it should con-
can cause paint damage. appropriate percentage for that region.
tain no more than 15% oxygenate.

Fuel containing MMT Octane rating tips Incorrect ignition timing may result in
spark knock, after-run and/or overheating,
MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga- Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
which may cause excessive fuel consump-
nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad- rating lower than recommended can
tion or engine damage. If any of the above
ditive. NISSAN does not recommend the cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”
symptoms are encountered, have your ve-
use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may (“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping
hicle checked. It is recommended that you
adversely affect vehicle performance, in- noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine
visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
cluding the emissions control system. Note damage. If you detect a persistent heavy
that while some fuel pumps label MMT spark knock even when using gasoline However, now and then you may notice
content, not all do, so you may have to of the stated octane rating, or if you hear light spark knock for a short time while
consult your gasoline retailer for more steady spark knock while holding a accelerating or driving up hills. This is not
details. steady speed on level roads, it is recom- a cause for concern, because you get the
mended that you have a NISSAN dealer greatest fuel benefit when there is light
Aftermarket fuel additives correct the condition. Failure to correct spark knock for a short time under heavy
the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for engine load.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
which NISSAN is not responsible.
any aftermarket fuel additives (for ex-
ample, fuel injector cleaner, octane
booster, intake valve deposit removers,
etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of
these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active sol-
vents or similar ingredients that can be
harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not
necessary when the proper oil type is used
and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or
has been previously used should not be
used.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness
changes with temperature. Because of
this, it is important to select the engine oil
LTI2051 viscosity based on the temperatures at
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER Select only engine oils that meet the which the vehicle will be operated before
American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi- the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos-
RECOMMENDATIONS ity other than that recommended could
cation or International Lubricant Standard-
ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil
certification and SAE viscosity standard.
It is essential to choose the correct grade, These oils have the API certification mark Selecting the correct oil filter
quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure on the front of the container. Oils which do Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
satisfactory engine life and performance. not have the specified quality label should high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When
For additional information, see “Recom- not be used as they could cause engine replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or
mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” damage. its equivalent for the reason described in
(P. 10-2). NISSAN recommends the use of an
“Change intervals.”
energy conserving oil in order to improve
fuel economy.

Change intervals AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
REFRIGERANT AND OIL dealer when servicing your air conditioner
The oil and oil filter change intervals for
system.
your engine are based on the use of the RECOMMENDATIONS
specified quality oils and filters. Using en- The air conditioner system in your
gine oil and filters that are not of the speci- NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the
fied quality, or exceeding recommended oil refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) and
and filter change intervals could reduce NISSAN A/C system oil Type PAG or the
engine life. Damage to the engine caused exact equivalents.
by improper maintenance or use of incor-
rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is
CAUTION
not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. The use of any other refrigerant or oil
Your engine was filled with a high-quality will cause severe damage to the air
engine oil when it was built. You do not have conditioning system and will require
to change the oil before the first recom- the replacement of all air conditioner
mended change interval. Oil and filter system components.
change intervals depend upon how you The refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) in
use your vehicle. your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the
Operation under the following conditions earth's ozone layer. Although this refriger-
may require more frequent oil and filter ant does not affect the earth's atmo-
changes: sphere, certain government regulations re-
• repeated short distance driving at cold quire the recovery and recycling of any
outside temperatures refrigerant during automotive air condi-
tioner system service. A NISSAN dealer has
• driving in dusty conditions
the trained technicians and equipment
• extensive idling needed to recover and recycle your air con-
• stop and go commuting ditioner system refrigerant.
For additional information, see “Mainte-
nance and schedules” (P. 9-2).

SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model 1.6L 4 cylinder (HR16DE engine model)
Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, inline
Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.071 x 3.291 (78.0 x 83.6)
Displacement cu in (cm 3) 97.51 (1,598)
Firing order 1–3–4–2
Idle speed
CVT in N (Neutral) position
No adjustment is necessary.
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)
CO % at idle
Spark plug DILKAR6K-11
Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)
Camshaft operation Timing chain
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

WHEELS AND TIRES DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Wheel type Size Offset in (mm) Units: in (mm)
Aluminum 17 x 6.5J 1.77 (45) Overall length 169.6 (4,309)
Steel 16 x 6J 1.77 (45) Overall width 69.3 (1,760)
T-type (Steel spare) 15 x 4T 1.18 (30) Overall height 63.4 (1,610)
16 x 4T 1.18 (30) Track
Tire size Front 59.8 (1,520)
P205/60R16 Rear 60.4 (1,535)
P205/55R17 Wheelbase 103.1 (2,620)
Spare tire Gross vehicle weight rating lbs. (kg) For additional infor-
T125/90D15 mation, refer to the
Temporary Gross axle weight rating “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
T125/80D16
certification label”
Front lbs. (kg) on the center pillar
between the driv-
lbs. (kg) er's side front and
Rear
rear doors.

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
IN ANOTHER COUNTRY
When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-

hicle in another country, you should first
find out if the fuel available is suitable for
your vehicle's engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too
low may cause engine damage. All gaso-
line vehicles must be operated with un-
leaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking
your vehicle to areas where appropriate
fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of
your vehicle to another country, state,
province or district, it may be necessary
to modify the vehicle to meet local laws LTI2050 LTI2258
and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
emission control and safety standards (VIN) PLATE (chassis number)
vary according to the country, state, prov- The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) The vehicle identification number is lo-
ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica- plate is attached as shown. This number is cated as shown.
tions may differ. the identification for your vehicle and is
When any vehicle is to be taken into an- used in the vehicle registration.
other country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, trans-
portation and registration are the re-
sponsibility of the user. NISSAN is not re-
sponsible for any inconvenience that
may result.

LTI2469 WTI0172 LTI2268
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION EMISSION CONTROL

The number is stamped on the engine as LABEL INFORMATION LABEL
shown. The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle The emission control information label is
Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifi- attached to the underside of the hood as
cation label is affixed as shown. This label shown.
contains valuable vehicle information, such
as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR),
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month
and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identifi-
cation Number (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

LTI2251 LTI2233
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire The air conditioner specification label is af-
and Loading Information label. The label is fixed to the underside of the hood as
located as shown. shown.

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
Symbol Name Reference Graphic
Caution ISO 7000 0434
Air Conditioning System

ISO 2575 D01
(MAC)
MAC System Lubricant Type

(PAG–POE)
Requires Registered Technician to

Service MAC System
LTI2540
For alignment purposes, there are two
Flammable Refrigerant marks on the radiator grille to indicate the
correct position for each screw.
Air Conditioner Specification Label Symbols To install the front license plate:
Use two 6 mm self-tapping screws to at-
tach front license plate to radiator grille.
NOTE:
Self-tapping screws are not supplied
with vehicle.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
WARNING • Curb Weight (actual weight of your • GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
vehicle) - vehicle weight including: Rating) - The maximum total
• It is extremely dangerous to standard and optional equipment, weight rating of the vehicle, pas-
ride in a cargo area inside a ve- fluids, emergency tools, and spare sengers, cargo, and trailer.
hicle. In a collision, people rid- tire assembly. This weight does • Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,
ing in these areas are more not include passengers and cargo. Total load capacity - maximum to-
likely to be seriously injured or • GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb tal weight limit specified of the load
killed. weight plus the combined weight (passengers and cargo) for the ve-
• Do not allow people to ride in of passengers and cargo. hicle. This is the maximum com-
any area of your vehicle that is • GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- bined weight of occupants and
not equipped with seats and ing) - maximum total combined cargo that can be loaded into the
seat belts. weight of the unloaded vehicle, vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow
• Be sure everyone in your ve- passengers, cargo, hitch, trailer a trailer, the trailer tongue weight
hicle is in a seat and using a tongue load and any other op- must be included as part of the
seat belt properly. tional equipment. This information cargo load. This information is lo-
is located on the F.M.V.S.S. certifica- cated on the Tire and Loading In-
TERMS tion label. formation label.
It is important to familiarize yourself • GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - • Cargo capacity - permissible
with the following terms before maximum weight (load) limit weight of cargo, the subtracted
loading your vehicle: specified for the front or rear axle. weight of occupants from the load
This information is located on the limit.
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-
firm that you do not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for your vehicle. Both the
GVWR and GAWR are located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
For additional information, see “Mea-
surement of weights” (P. 10-19).
Do not exceed the load limit of your
vehicle shown as “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo” on
the Tire and Loading Information la-
bel. Do not exceed the number of
occupants shown as “Seating Ca-
pacity” on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation label.
To get “the combined weight of oc- LTI2335
cupants and cargo”, add the weight Example
of all occupants, then add the total Steps For Determining Correct 1. Locate the statement “The com-
cargo weight. Examples are shown Load Limit bined weight of occupants and
in the following illustration. cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
of the driver and passengers that trailer, load from your trailer will be
will be riding in your vehicle. transferred to your vehicle. Con-
sult this manual to determine
3. Subtract the combined weight of
how this reduces the available
the driver and passengers from
cargo and luggage load capacity
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
of your vehicle.
4. The resulting figure equals the
Towing a trailer with a vehicle that is
available amount of cargo and
not intended for towing may result in
luggage load capacity. For ex-
an accident involving injury or death.
ample, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 WARNING LIC4300
lb. passengers in your vehicle, the Cargo area luggage hooks
Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.
amount of available cargo and SECURING THE LOAD
Towing a trailer may result in an acci-
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. dent involving injury or death. There are luggage hooks located in the
(1400-750 (5 X 150) = 650 lbs.) cargo area as shown. The hooks can be
Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-
used to secure cargo with ropes or other
5. Determine the combined weight firm that you do not exceed the types of straps.
of luggage and cargo being (GVWR) or the (GAWR) for your ve- When securing items using luggage
loaded on the vehicle. That weight hicle. For additional information, see hooks, do not apply a load over more
may not safely exceed the avail- “Measurement of weights” (P. 10-19). than 110 lbs. (490 N) to a single hook.
able cargo and luggage load ca-
Also check tires for proper inflation
pacity calculated in step 4.
pressures. For additional informa-
tion, see “Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label” (P. 8-29).
WARNING LOADING TIPS • Do not load your vehicle any
• The GVW must not exceed GVWR or heavier than the GVWR or the
• Properly secure all cargo with ropes
or straps to help prevent it from slid- GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./ maximum front and rear
ing or shifting. Do not place cargo C.M.V.S.S. certification label. GAWRs. If you do, parts of your
higher than the seatbacks. In a sud- • Do not load the front and rear axle vehicle can break, tire damage
cargo could cause personal injury. to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed could occur, or it can change
• The child restraint top tether strap the GVWR. the way your vehicle handles.
may be damaged by contact with This could result in loss of con-
items in the cargo area. Secure any WARNING trol and cause personal injury.
items in the cargo area. Your child
could be seriously injured or killed in • Overloading and improper
• Properly secure all cargo with
a collision if the top tether strap is loading not only can shorten
damaged. ropes or straps to help prevent
the life of your vehicle and the
• Do not load your vehicle any heavier it from sliding or shifting. Do
tire, but can also cause unsafe
than the GVWR or the maximum front not place cargo higher than the
and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of
vehicle handling and longer
seatbacks. In a sudden stop or
your vehicle can break, tire damage braking distances. This may
collision, unsecured cargo
could occur, or it can change the way cause a premature tire failure
your vehicle handles. This could re- could cause personal injury.
which could result in a serious
sult in loss of control and cause per-
sonal injury. accident and personal injury.
Failures caused by overloading
are not covered by the vehicle’s
warranty.

TOWING A TRAILER
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.

Continuously Variable
Secure loose items to prevent FLAT TOWING Transmission
weight shifts that could affect the Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on To tow a vehicle equipped with a continu-
balance of your vehicle. When the ve- the ground is sometimes called flat towing. ously variable transmission, an appropriate
hicle is loaded, drive to a scale and This method is sometimes used when vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the
towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve- towed vehicle's drive wheels. Always follow
weigh the front and the rear wheels hicle, such as a motor home. the dolly manufacturer's recommenda-
separately to determine axle loads. tions when using their product.
Individual axle loads should not ex- CAUTION
ceed either of the Gross Axle Weight • Failure to follow these guidelines can
Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle result in severe transmission
loads should not exceed the Gross damage.
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These • Whenever flat towing your vehicle,
ratings are given on the vehicle cer- always tow forward, never backward.
• Never tow your front wheel drive ve-
tification label. If weight ratings are hicle with the front tires on the
exceeded, move or remove items to ground. Doing so may cause serious
bring all weights below the ratings. and expensive damage to the
powertrain.
• DO NOT tow any continuously vari-
able transmission vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground (flat tow-
ing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal
transmission parts due to lack of
transmission lubrication.
• For emergency towing procedures
see “Towing recommended by
NISSAN” (P. 6-13).

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual- conditions on specified government test WARNING

ity Grades: All passenger car tires must surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
conform to federal safety requirements in marked C may have poor traction The temperature grade for this tire is
addition to these grades. performance. established for a tire that is properly
Quality grades can be found where appli- inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
cable on the tire sidewall between tread WARNING speed, under-inflation, or excessive
shoulder and maximum section width. For loading, either separately or in combi-
The traction grade assigned to this tire nation, can cause heat build-up and
example: is based on straight-ahead braking possible tire failure.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A traction tests, and does not include ac-
Treadwear celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-
ing based on the wear rate of the tire when Temperature A, B and C
tested under controlled conditions on a The temperature grades are A (the high-
specified government test course. For ex- est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one tance to the generation of heat, and its
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the ability to dissipate heat when tested under
government course as a tire graded 100. controlled conditions on a specified indoor
The relative performance of tires depends laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-
upon the actual conditions of their use, perature can cause the material of the tire
however, and may depart significantly from to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-
the norm due to variations in driving habits, cessive temperature can lead to sudden
service practices and differences in road tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
characteristics and climate. level of performance which all passenger
Traction AA, A, B and C car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-
tor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
The traction grades, from highest to low- represent higher levels of performance on
est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre- the laboratory test wheel than the mini-
sent the tire's ability to stop on wet pave- mum required by law.
ment as measured under controlled

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
WARRANTY
Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol- For USA formation about motor vehicle safety
lowing emission warranties: from http://www.safercar.gov.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
For USA
defect which could cause a crash or You may notify NISSAN by contact-
1. Emission Defects Warranty
could cause injury or death, you ing our Consumer Affairs Depart-
2. Emissions Performance Warranty should immediately inform the Na- ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.
Details of this warranty may be found with tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin- For Canada
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-
Information Booklet which comes with If you believe that your vehicle has a
your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a fying NISSAN.
defect which could cause a crash or
Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
you may obtain a replacement by writing could cause injury or death, you
to:
it may open an investigation, and if it should immediately inform Trans-
• Nissan North America, Inc. finds that a safety defect exists in a port Canada in addition to notifying
Consumer Affairs Department group of vehicles, it may order a re- NISSAN.
P.O. Box 685003 call and remedy campaign. However,
Franklin, TN 37068-5003 NHTSA cannot become involved in If Transport Canada receives com-
For Canada individual problems between you, plaints, it may open an investigation,
Emission Control System Warranty your dealer, or NISSAN. and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
Details of this warranty may be found with To contact NHTSA, you may call the
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty request that NISSAN conduct a recall
Information Booklet which comes with Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at campaign. However, Transport
your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); Canada cannot become involved in
Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, go to http://www.safercar.gov; or individual problems between you,
you may obtain a replacement by writing write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
to: your dealer, or NISSAN.
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
• Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive 20590. You can also obtain other in-
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
You may contact Transport Cana- To notify NISSAN of any safety con- Due to legal requirements in some states
da's Defect Investigations and Re- cerns please contact our Consumer and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may
be required to be in what is called the
calls Division toll free at 1-800-333- Information Centre toll free at “ready condition” for an Inspection/
0510. You may also report safety 1-800-387-0122. Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission
defects online at: http:// control system.
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/ The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”
motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm when it is driven through certain driving
patterns. Usually, the ready condition can
(English speakers) or http:// be obtained by ordinary usage of the
www.tc.gc.ca/fra/ vehicle.
securiteautomobile/menu.htm If a powertrain system component is re-
(French speakers) paired or the battery is disconnected, the
vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi-
Or contact Transport Canada by tion. Before taking the I/M test, check the
mail at: vehicle's inspection/maintenance test
Transport Canada Motor Vehicle readiness condition. Place the ignition
Safety Investigations Laboratory switch in the ON position without starting
the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator
80 Noel Street Gatineau, QC J8Z0A1 Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds
Additional information concerning and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test
condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not
motor vehicle safety may be ob- blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi-
tained from Transport Canada's tion is “ready”. It is recommended that you
Road Safety Information Centre at visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready con-
1-800-333-0371 or online at dition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English
speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/
securiteroutiere (French speakers).
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) OWNER'S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data law enforcement, could combine the EDR Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an data with the type of personally identifying model year and prior can be purchased. A
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near data routinely acquired during a crash Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
crash-like situations, such as an air bag investigation. source of service and repair information for
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data To read data recorded by an EDR, special your vehicle. This manual is the same one
that will assist in understanding how a ve- equipment is required, and access to the used by the factory-trained technicians
hicle's systems performed. The EDR is de- vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine
signed to record data related to vehicle dy- the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be
namics and safety systems for a short dealer, other parties, such as law enforce- purchased.
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. ment, that have the special equipment, can For USA
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re- read the information if they have access to
cord such data as: For current pricing and availability of Genu-
the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
• How various systems in your vehicle were accessed with the consent of the vehicle
operating; owner or lessee or as otherwise required or www.nissan-techinfo.com
• Whether or not the driver and passenger permitted by law. For current pricing and availability of Genu-
safety belts were buckled/fastened; ine NISSAN Owner's Manuals, contact:
• How far (if at all) the driver was depress-
1-800-247-5321
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
and, For Canada
• How fast the vehicle was traveling. To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN
• Sounds are not recorded. Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this
model year and prior, please contact your
These data can help provide a better un-
nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-
derstanding of the circumstances in which
ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
area, call the NISSAN Information Center at
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-
1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep-
trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
resentative will assist you.
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as
MEMO

11 Index
AM radio operation. . . . . . . . . . . .4-50 NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . .8-22
A
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44 Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-15
Active Ride Control (ARC) . . . . . . . . .5-138 AM/FM radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48, 4-50 Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Air bag (See supplemental restraint Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation . . .4-52 Blind Spot Warning (BSW). . . . . . . . . .5-35
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42 Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-59 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) switch . . . . .2-52
Air bag system FM radio operation . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51 Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-59
Front (See supplemental front impact FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44 Bluetooth® hands-free phone system. .4-67
air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50 iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56 Bluetooth® connections . . . . . . . . .4-81
Air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . .1-63 iPod® player operation . . . . . . . . .4-56 Connecting procedure. . . . . . . . . .4-72
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-64, 2-15 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43 Phone indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71
Air bag warning light, Steering wheel audio control Text messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77
supplemental. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-64, 2-15 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62 Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-73
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . .8-15 USB Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38
Air conditioner USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53 Brake
Air conditioner operation. . . . .4-35, 4-41 Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . .5-132
Air conditioner specification label . .10-13 Automatic Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Air conditioner system refrigerant Automatic power window switch . . .2-72 Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-25
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . .3-29 Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-132
Air conditioner system refrigerant Automatic brake hold . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
and oil recommendations . . . . . . .10-8 Automatic door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Brake wear indicators. . . . . . .2-22, 8-18
Heater and air conditioner . . . . . . .4-40 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) . .5-88 Parking brake operation. . . . . . . . .5-22
Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-41 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . .4-43 with Pedestrian Detection . . . . . . . . .5-98 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-134
Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36 Brake fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Alarm system (See vehicle security Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-132
B Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . .1-25 Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-128
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-145, 8-11 Brightness control
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-63 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . .5-132 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22 Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . .4-7
Antifreeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-145 Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43 Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . .2-12
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25 Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . .4-7 Drive Systems OFF switch. . . . . . . . . .2-53
Controls Driving
C Audio controls (steering wheel). . . . .4-62 Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . .5-145
Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-41 Driving with Continuously Variable
Capacities and recommended Heater and air conditioner controls Transmission (CVT). . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40 Precautions when starting and
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67 Heater and air conditioner controls driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Cargo (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32 Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
(See vehicle loading information) . . . . .10-15 Coolant
Cargo cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66 Capacities and recommended
Chassis control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-137 fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 E
Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-5
Child restraint with top tether strap . . . .1-25 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-5 E-call (SOS) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
Child restraints. . . . . . . .1-18, 1-19, 1-21, 1-23 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7 Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-129
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-56 Emergency engine shutoff . . . . . . .5-13, 6-2
CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63 Emission control information label . . . .10-12
Precautions on child Emission control system warranty . . . .10-21
restraints . . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38 Engine
Top tether strap anchor point D Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-15
locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25 Capacities and recommended
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Daytime Running Light System . . . . . .2-48 fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4 Defroster switch Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-5
Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 Rear window and outside mirror Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-145 defroster switch . . . . . . .2-42, 4-34, 4-42 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-6
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62 Rear window defroster switch . . . . .2-42 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-5
Continuously Variable Transmission Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-5
(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-49 Engine compartment check
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Display locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Information display . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23 Engine cooling system. . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Driving with Continuously Variable Display controls (see control panel Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Transmission (CVT). . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 Engine oil and oil filter
Transmission shift selector lock Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4, 3-5 recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-14
11-2
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Front air bag system Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-12 (See supplemental restraint system) . . .1-50 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . .2-43
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Front-door pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Engine Block Heater. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-146 Fuel Heated seat switches . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Event Data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . .10-23 Capacities and recommended Heated steering wheel switch . . . . . . .2-52
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . .5-4 fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Heater
Explanation of maintenance items . . . . .9-2 Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-129 Heater and air conditioner. . . . . . . .4-40
Explanation of scheduled maintenance Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-41
items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5 Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . .4-34, 4-41
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . .2-59 Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . .10-4 Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . .5-139
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-25 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . .5-128 Hook
F Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-12 Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Flashers (See hazard warning flasher Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19, 8-22
switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2 I
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-4
Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-6 G Ignition switch
Fluid Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . .5-11
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Gauge Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . .2-39, 5-14
Capacities and recommended Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Important vehicle information label . . .10-12
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 2-6 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . .5-129
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 2-6 Indicator
Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62 discharge indicator . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . .8-10 Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65 Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . .3-29
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-49
Forward Driving Aids Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2
System Temporarily H Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . .2-49
Unavailable . .2-36, 5-73, 5-94, 5-105, 5-120 Intelligent Around View Monitor . . . . . .4-16
Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth® . .4-67 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) . . . . . . .5-58
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . .6-2
11-3
Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) . . . . .5-124 Low windshield-washer fluid
L
Intelligent Engine Brake (I-EB) . . . . . . .5-138 warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Intelligent Forward Collision Warning Labels Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-75
(I-FCW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-109 Air conditioner specification label . . .10-13 Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Intelligent Key system Emission control information label . .10-12 Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-75
Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8 Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-12 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9 F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . .10-12 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-74
Mechanical key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13 Lock
Remote keyless entry operation . . . .3-13 Vehicle identification number (VIN) Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . .3-6
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . .3-16 plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4, 3-5
Warning signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16 Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-63 Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-25
Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) . . . . . . .5-137 Lane Departure Warning (LDW). . . . . . .5-28 Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch . .2-53 Low fuel warning light . .2-14, 2-17, 2-19, 2-32
iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-17
ISOFIX child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23 CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23 Low windshield-washer fluid
Launch bar menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7 warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
License plate Luggage (See vehicle loading
J information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15
Installing the license plate. . . . . . . .10-14
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22 Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 8-12 Luggage rack (see roof rack) . . . .2-67, 2-68
Light
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-64, 2-15
K Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-25 M
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . .2-12
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25 Maintenance
Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . . .8-22 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Keyless entry Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . .8-25 Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
With Intelligent Key system Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50 Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . .8-2
(See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . .3-13 Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25 Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Keys Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-43 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-17
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-43 Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . .9-4
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . .9-2
keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73 Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 Malfunction indicator light. . . . . . . . . .2-19
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-17
11-4
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-3 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-5 Precautions on booster
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-74 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 seats . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38
Map pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60 Engine oil and oil filter Precautions on child
Menu button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 restraints . . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-10
Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-49 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 Precautions on supplemental restraint
Mirror Overheat system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . .3-29 If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . .6-12 Precautions when starting and
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 Owner's manual order form . . . . . . . .10-23 driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Owner's manual/service manual order Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-23
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Moving Object Detection (MOD) . . . . . .4-27 R
P
Radio
N Parking Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-67
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-22 FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
NISSAN Anti-Theft System . . . . . .2-38, 5-14 Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . .5-130 Steering wheel audio control
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . .2-13, 2-16, 2-21 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-75 Readiness for inspection maintenance
discharge indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free system . .4-67 (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-22
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Power Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) . . . . . . .5-81
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . .5-46
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39, 5-14 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58 Rear Door Alert. . . . . . . . . .2-31, 2-32, 2-56
NissanConnect® Owner's Manual . . . . . .4-2 Power rear windows. . . . . . . . . . . .2-72 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-131 Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-70 Rear Sonar System (RSS) . . . . . . . . . .5-140
O Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-72 Rear sonar system OFF switch. . . . . . .2-54
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58 Rear window and outside mirror defroster
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . .10-6 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-131 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42, 4-34, 4-42
Oil Precautions Rear window defroster switch . . . . . . .2-42
Capacities and recommended Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . .8-2 Rear window wiper and washer
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 On-pavement and off-road driving switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9 Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-6
11-5
RearView Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 8-12
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . .4-24 Seat belt warning light . . . . . .1-13, 2-14, 2-15 Precautions when starting and
Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Seatback pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60 driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Recorders Seats Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-23 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . .10-8 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Registering a vehicle in another Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3 Steering
country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-131
Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . .3-18, 5-16 Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-21 Security system (NISSAN Anti-Theft System), Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-62
Roof rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67, 2-68 engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38, 5-14 Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
System), engine start . . . . . . . . .2-39, 5-14 Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61
S Security systems Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . .2-37 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-63
Safety Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Supplemental air bag warning
Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . .3-6 Service manual order form . . . . . . . .10-23 light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-64, 2-15
Child seat belts . . . . .1-21, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38 Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . .4-43 Supplemental front impact air bag
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . .10-21 Shifting system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50
Seat adjustment Continuously Variable Transmission Supplemental restraint system
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3 (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Information and warning labels. . . . .1-63
Rear seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-16 Precautions on supplemental restraint
Seat belt Siri® Eyes-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18 Sonar Supplemental restraint system
Infants and small children . . . . . . . .1-19 Rear system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-140 (Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . .1-42
Injured person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14 Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-14 Switch
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14 Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-10 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Automatic power window switch. . . .2-72
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 2-6 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Seat belt extenders. . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17 SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-63 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . .6-2
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-17 Stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-134 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-43
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10, 7-6 Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-43
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-16 Starting Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-49
Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-14 Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-15 Power door lock switch. . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6
11-6
Rear sonar system OFF switch . . . . .2-54 Towing Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Rear window and outside mirror 4-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-14 Vehicle identification number (VIN)
defroster switch . . . . . . .2-42, 4-34, 4-42 Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-19 (Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Rear window defroster switch . . . . .2-42 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-19 Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Rear window wiper and washer Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-19 plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41 Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13 Vehicle immobilizer system . . . . .2-39, 5-14
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49 Transmission Vehicle information display . . . . . . . . .2-23
Continuously Variable Transmission Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . .10-15
(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
T Driving with Continuously Variable Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Transmission (CVT). . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Vehicle security system (NISSAN Anti-Theft
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Travel (See registering a vehicle in another System), engine start . . . . . . . . .2-38, 5-14
Theft (NISSAN Anti-Theft System), country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Vehicle security system
engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38, 5-14 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 2-6 (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),
Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), Trunk light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-75 engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39, 5-14
engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39, 5-14 Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49 Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Tire Voice Prompt Interrupt. . . . . . . . . . . .4-70
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-4 U
Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 8-38
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13 Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . .10-20 W
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34 USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27 (models without Navigation System) . . .4-53 Warning
Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35 USB/iPod® Charging Ports . . . . . . . . .4-63 Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-64, 2-15
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33 Battery charge warning light . . . . . .2-13
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . .10-20 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 V Door open warning light . . . . . . . . .2-13
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . .8-27, 10-10 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-14
Tire pressure Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . .6-2
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-17 Variable voltage control system . . . . . .8-13 Low fuel warning
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . .10-10 light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14, 2-17, 2-19, 2-32
(TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-17
Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . .1-25 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55 Low windshield-washer fluid
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-134
11-7
Seat belt warning light . . . .1-13, 2-14, 2-15
Supplemental air bag warning
light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-64, 2-15
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . .2-37
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-63
Warning lights, indicator lights and
audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . .0-9, 2-10
Washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Weights
(See dimensions and weights) . . . . . .10-10
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27, 10-10
When traveling or registering in
another country. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-70
Locking passengers' windows . . . . .2-72
Power rear windows. . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-70
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Wiper
Rear window wiper and washer
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .2-40
11-8
GAS STATION INFORMATION
FUEL RECOMMENDATION: • Do not use a fuel containing more • U.S. government regulations require
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your ethanol dispensing pumps to be
tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock vehicle is not designed to run on a identified by a small, square, orange
Index) number (Research octane number fuel containing more than 15% etha- and black label with the common ab-
91). nol. Using a fuel containing more breviation or the appropriate per-
than 15% ethanol in a vehicle not spe- centage for that region.
CAUTION cifically designed for a fuel contain-
For additional information, see “Recom-
ing more than 15% ethanol can ad-
• Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
versely affect the emission control
label can operate on E-85. Fuel sys- (P. 10-2).
devices and systems of the vehicle.
tem or other damage can occur if Damage caused by such fuel is not ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
E-85 is used in vehicles that are not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle
designed to run on E-85. Limited Warranty. For additional information, see “Recom-
mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
• Using a fuel other than that specified • Do not use fuel that contains the oc-
(P. 10-2).
could adversely affect the emission tane booster methylcyclopentadi-
control system, and may also affect enyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
the warranty coverage. Using fuel containing MMT may ad-
versely affect vehicle performance Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
• Under no circumstances should a
and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel label.
leaded gasoline be used, because
this will damage the three-way dispensers are labeled to indicate The label is typically located on the driver
catalyst. MMT content, so you may have to side center pillar or on the driver's door. For
consult your gasoline retailer for additional information, see “Wheels and
more details. Note that Federal and tires” (P. 8-27).
California laws prohibit the use of
MMT in reformulated gasoline.
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure
recommendations for the future reliability
and economy of your new vehicle. For ad-
ditional information, see “Break-in sched-
ule” (P. 5-128). Failure to follow these recom-
mendations may result in vehicle damage
or shortened engine life.
Printing : November 2020
Publication No.: OM21EM 0P15U0
Printed in the U.S.A. ‘21 P15-D

2021 Kicks

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2021 Kicks

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2021 Kicks

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2021 KICKS

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

Read carefully and keep in the vehicle.

Printing: November 2020

If you see a symbol similar to these in an

contents Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1

Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4

Starting and driving 5

Appearance and care 7

Maintenance and schedules 9

Technical and consumer information 10

5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

6. Front view camera (if so equipped)

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

7. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-24)

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

Refer to the page number indicated in

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

5. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-9)

Warning/ Name Page Warning/ Name Page Warning/ Name Page

High temperature 2-14 Security indicator 2-15

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

Side light and 2-22

SPORT mode indi- 2-22

Turn signal/ 2-22

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

• Do not leave children unattended in-

1-2 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Forward and backward Reclining

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Seat lifter (driver's seat) FOLDING REAR SEAT

1-4 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

3. Lock knob 2. Single notch

4. Stalks 3. Lock knob

1-6 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

REMOVE REMOVABLE (without Bose head

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

INSTALL ADJUST For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

1-8 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces

1-10 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

1-12 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

1-14 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

Unfastening the seat belts Shoulder belt height adjustment

1-16 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19